iiillliii 
 
 
DISSERTATION 
 
 ON THE 
 
 DRAGON, BEAST, 
 
 AND 
 
 FALSE-PROPHET, 
 
 OF THE 
 
 IN WHICH 
 THE NUMBER 666 IS SATISFACTORILY EXPLAINED. 
 
 AND ALSO 
 
 A FULL ILLUSTRATION OF DANIEL'S VISION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 RAM AND HE-GOAT^jj^-gj^^-g: 
 
 -i^^- 0^ THR 
 BVJ. K.CLARKE.ItUiriV^T^.SITY; 
 
 %.iFk:0 
 
 BEHOLD, 1 COME QCICKLY : BLESSED IS HE THAT KEEPETH THI 
 
 THE PROPHECY OF THIS BOOK. REV. XxVl. 7. 
 
 AND HE SAITH UNTO ME, SEAL NOT THE SAYINGS OF THE PROPHECY OF THIS 
 book: FOR THE TIME IS AT HAND. REV. XXii. 10. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR; 
 AND SOLD BY OGLES, DUNCAN AND COCHRAN, 37, PATERNOSTER 
 ROW, AND 295, HOLBORN; J. HATCHARD, PICCADILLY; T. 
 BLANSHARD, 14, CITY ROAD; NUTTALL, FISHER, AND CO. LI- 
 VERPOOL ; J. OGLE, EDINBURGH ; AND M. OGLE, GLASGOW. 
 
 1814. 
 
^Z^^S' 
 
 
 PRWTED BT J. AND T. CtJiRKE, 38, ST. JOHnVsQUARE. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE principal design of the following 
 pages is to shew, by means of the number 
 666, what is intended in the Book of the Re- 
 velation by the Beast and Fahe-prophet, 
 This is a subject which has long exercised 
 the learning and ingenuity of commentators 
 in general ; and hitherto with comparatively 
 little success, as not one of the vast variety 
 of opinions upon the number of the Beast, 
 already before the public, is allowed to be 
 sufficient to elucidate the whole that is men- 
 tioned in the Apocalypse, with which this 
 number has, directly or indirectly, any con- 
 nection. Therefore none of these imperfect 
 solutions could have been designed by the 
 Holy Spirit ; for the number of the Beast, 
 which refers, according to the plain tenor of 
 the text, to his name, must symbolize a 
 name, with which the whole description of 
 the Beast agrees in every particular. As, 
 therefore, so much depends upon having a 
 
 correct view of the number 666, that, inde- 
 
 1 
 
IV 
 
 pendently of it, the whole of the prophecy 
 relating to the Beast and False-prophet can 
 never be satisfactorily explained, I have 
 treated this part of my subject with very 
 considerable detail ; what mode of number- 
 ing is intended in the prophecy is stated, 
 and numerous examples given in support of 
 it. A great variety of opinions respecting 
 the Apocalyptic number, are also produced 
 that the reader may have in one view the 
 principal part of what has been written upon 
 it from the time of Irenceus to the present 
 period. A calculation of the number of the 
 Beast is also given, which I believe to be 
 the only true meaning of the passage. Upon 
 this I have spent several pages ; and have 
 succeeded, as far as I am able to judge, in 
 shewing that the calculation upon which al- 
 most the whole of what is contained in the 
 following pages rests as a foundation, is that 
 which is alone designed in the prophecy. 
 That the prophetic description of the Beast 
 may be shewn to agree exactly with the 
 name derived from his number, the thirteenth 
 and seventeenth chapters of the Apocalypse 
 have been examined with considerable de- 
 tail ; and that nothing may be wanting to 
 make this work as perfect as possible, some 
 
observations are added upon the twelfth 
 chapter of the Revelation respecting the 
 Woman and the Dragon; with which the con- 
 tents of the thirteenth and seventeenth cliap- 
 ters have a very intimate connection. Un- 
 willing to lose this opportunity of elucidat- 
 ing, as far as it is in my power, those pro- 
 phecies which I believe have been hitherto 
 generally misunderstood, I have entered in- 
 to a minute examination of Daniel's vision 
 of the Ram and He-goat contained in the 
 eighth chapter of his Prophecy. This por- 
 tion of the Sacred Writings I am satisfied 
 has been almost wholly misunderstood, as 
 those verses relating to the little horn, 
 liave been by ancient commentators sup- 
 posed to refer to Antiochus Epiphanes; and 
 by moderns either to the Roman empire, or 
 Mohammedanistn . 
 
 In collecting materials for this work, I 
 have availed myself of every information that 
 I could find in authors upon the same sub- 
 ject, in almost all of whom I have met with 
 something that appeared to me excellent ; so 
 that in gathering a little from one, and a lit- 
 tle from another, and in numerous instances 
 differing from all, I believe I have, through 
 
VI 
 
 the blessing of God, succeeded in removing 
 many of the difficulties that have hitherto 
 lain in the way of commentators, in their 
 various attempts to illustrate the prophecies 
 relating to the Dragon, the Beast, the False- 
 prophet, and Daniel's vision of the Ram and 
 He-goat. 
 
 One principal reason why commentators 
 have so generally failed in their attempts to 
 explain the prophecies contained in Daniel 
 and the Revelation, arises from their misap- 
 prehension of many of the symbols with which 
 their subject has been connected ; and also 
 in often attaching to the same symbol differ- 
 ent ideas; by which very injudicious pro- 
 cedure they have rendered their observations 
 extremely dubious ; and darkened rather 
 than elucidated their subject. In the fol- 
 lowing work I have endeavoured to correct 
 this general error by assigning to each sym- 
 bol one determinate idea, which I have fixed 
 upon by a comparison of the different pas- 
 sages in the Sacred Oracles where it is used 
 with any explanation ; and this idea, with- 
 out the least variation, I have carried through 
 the whole of this work, for Scripture, all 
 must acknowledge, is the best interpreter of 
 Scripture. 
 
Vll 
 
 The subject of the following pages occu- 
 pies but a very small part indeed of Daniel 
 and the Apocalypse ; the entire explanation 
 of these books is reserved, according to the 
 express declaration of God, to the time of the 
 end. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. 1. lutroducHon of the subject — What is to be un- 
 derstood by counting the Number of the Beast^-The 
 phrase " For it is the number of a juan''' examined. 
 Page 1 — 5. 
 
 CHAP. II. Inquiry info the different hinds of number- 
 ing in use among the ancients — Determination of that 
 species of computation (alluded to by the Holy Spirit) 
 ishich is to be used in numbering the Beast. 6 — 36. 
 
 CHAP. III. Examination of the various interpretations 
 of the number of the Beast — Insufficiency of any inter- 
 pretation yet given in solving the mystery — That the 
 number of the Beast is not 616, as in some Greek copies , 
 hut GQQ^ deynonstrated. 37 — 80. 
 
 CHAP. IV. The meaning of the prophetic sytnbol Beast 
 ascertained — The number 666 must be contained in the 
 Greek name of some power expressed in the most simple 
 form of which the language is capable — The species of 
 power represented by the Apocalyptic Beast demonstrated^ 
 to he the regal or imperial — The number in the various 
 kingdoms or einpires that have appeared in the world^for 
 zohich there are Greek appellations^ computed — Only one 
 kingdom or empire contains the number of the Beast, 
 which must be that of Antichrist. 81 — 128. 
 
 CHAP. V. Exposition of the twelfth chapter of the Reve- 
 lation respecting the Woman and the Dragon. 129 — 168. 
 
 CHAP. VI. Exposition of the seventeenth chapter of the 
 Apocalypse, respecting the Whore and the Beast. 169-247. 
 
 CHAP. VII. Exposition of the thirteenth chapter of the 
 Revelation, respecting the seven-headed and ten-horned 
 Beast which rises out of the sea ; and of the two-horned 
 Beast which rises out of the earth. 248 — 345. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. Explanation of DaniePs vision of the 
 Ram and He-goat. 344—393. 
 
 CONCLUSION. 394—400. 
 
DISSERTATION. & 
 
 Rev. XIII. II 
 
 auTou ^^g . 
 
 HERE IS WISDOM I LET HIM THAT HATH UNDERSTANDING 
 COUNT THE NUMBER OF THE BEAST^ FOR IT IS THE 
 NUMBER OF A MAN ; AND HIS NUMBER IS SIX HUN- 
 DRED THREESCORE AND SIX. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Introduction of the Subject — What is to be under- 
 stood by '' counting the number of the Beast" — 
 The phrase, ^' For it is the number of a man," 
 examined. 
 
 jL here is no prophecy in the whole Book of God 
 which is more strongly marked than this which re- 
 spects the number of the Beast ; for it is introduced 
 with these solemn and impressive words '' Here 
 is wisdom." The right understanding of all that 
 is spoken relative to the Beast hangs, therefore, 
 upon tliis passage; it is evidently the key by 
 
 B 
 
2 
 
 wliicli the sacred mystery is unlocked : conse- 
 quently, every attempt to explain the prophecies re- 
 lative to the Beast, which has not the correct com- 
 putation of the number 666 for its basis, must be 
 necessarily loaded with many insurmountable diffi- 
 culties. In order, therefore, to come at the truth, 
 a careful inquiry must be made respecting that spe- 
 cies of computation here alluded to ; for the number 
 contained in the Beast, or in his name, is directed 
 to be counted, as it is expressed in the preceding- 
 verse, '" And that no man might buy or sell, save 
 he that had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or 
 the number of his name." It is hence evident, 
 that the Beast, or the name of the Beast, contains 
 the number 666 ; which must be reckoned accord- 
 ing to some mode of numbering that is or has been 
 in use among men; for, otherwise, the number 
 would be totally inexplicable. 
 
 That the number of the Beast is to be counted 
 after some human mode of computation has been 
 very generally admitted by commentators; and 
 within these three last centuries the phrase '' For 
 it is the number of a man" has been conceived to 
 be equivalent to " It is a mode of numbering prac- 
 tised among men." Upon this side of the question 
 Cotterius, in his Commentaries on the thirteenth 
 chapter of the Apocalypse, appears to have spoken 
 the best. His words, together with Potter's para- 
 phrase upon them, are as follows : '' Numerus enim 
 hominis est: av'^^/oTrs, non rou av^^wTrs, quasi hic 
 appellatio hominis Antichristo tribuei^etur ; de bes- 
 
tia agltur, cui appellationem hominis competere re- 
 piignat; vult igitur Scriptura numerum bestiseejus- 
 dem esse speciei cum nostrate ; numeri enim ratio 
 una lion est : nos res nostras ad decadum, et centu- 
 riariim, et chiliadum, et myriadum rationes exig'i- 
 mus^ quid ni vero angeli alias numerorum contabu- 
 lationes sequantur? That is, for it is the number 
 of a man, or of man ; not of this man, or that man, 
 or any particular man, as if the name of a man were 
 here attributed to Antichrist ; the prophet speak- 
 eth of the Beast, to whom the name and appellation 
 of a man cannot agree. The meaning, therefore, 
 is, that this number of the Beast is of the same kind 
 as other numbers are, which are used by us, who 
 are men and inhabitants of this world. For all 
 numbering is not after the same manner ; we that 
 are men number our things by tens, and by hun- 
 dreds, and by thousands, and by tens of thousands ; 
 but why may not angels rank and dispose units ac- 
 cording to other progressions and proportions ? 
 Forasmuch then as this number is the number of a 
 man, that is, a number of the same kind that other 
 numbers are, that are used by men; therefore we 
 cannot doubt that the computation and counting of 
 this number is such a kind of computation as is 
 usual among* men."* 
 
 In confirmation of this mode of interpretation, 
 that remarkable passage in the 17th verse of the 
 21st chapter of the Revelation has been produced 
 by Dr. Henry More and others, where mention is 
 
 * See Potter's Interpretation of the Number 666, chap. 10. 
 
 B2 
 
made of " the measure of a man/' [xir^ov av'^^wTre, 
 the form of the expression in this case being" the 
 same witli the a^i'^fjiog uv'^^wtts in the other, both 
 bcino- found without the definite articles o and roD. 
 In this last passag-e ixir^ov olv^^cotts must mean a 
 mode of measuring in use among men : for the ori- 
 ginal words, where this forms a part, are the follow- 
 ing : Kai 6ixsTqr^(re to rei-^og auT% kxccTov TS(r(ra&axov- 
 roi-Tso'crdocov tttj^cov, ^aroov av^Qioirs, b lg\v ayfiXs. Th& 
 most literal English version of which is, '" And he 
 measured its wall a hundred and forty-four cubits, 
 a measure of a man, which is that of the angel.'* 
 The evident sense of these words, which every per- 
 son who considers the subject must allow, is, un- 
 doubtedly, that St. John in his vision observed that 
 the angel measured the wall of the New Jerusalem 
 precisely with the same kind of cubit as is in use 
 among men. This is certainly a very powerful ar- 
 gument in favour of Cotterius's interpretation ; for 
 aqi^pLog av'^^u)7rs appears as likely to signify a maris 
 way of numbering as i^ir^ov av^qaiirs to import a 
 human mode of measuring. 
 
 Notwithstanding the great plausibility of Cotte- 
 rius's interpretation, it is certain that the argu- 
 ments are much more formidable which can be 
 brought against it, than those which can be pro- 
 duced in its favour. The first objection is, that the 
 phrase " For it is the number of a man" is wholly 
 unnecessary, if taken in his sense; for it must be 
 evident to every one, that if the number be counted 
 at all by man, it must be according to some system 
 
of numbering" in use among* men. The second ob- 
 jection is^ that though a.oi^u.1^ uv^^^iutts may pos- 
 sibly be used in Cotterius's sense, yet it is not its 
 most obvious meaning; and the majority of com- 
 mentators, especially the Greek and Latin fathers, 
 have understood it literally of sojne man. Irenseus, 
 the most ancient commentator extant upon the 
 number of the Beast, certainly understood the 
 phrase in this sense, as he produces three instances 
 of proper names of men containing 666; and fur- 
 ther observes that several other names contain it.* 
 As, therefore, the phrase " For it is the number of 
 a man," stands in such connection with the number 
 of the Beast as to affect its meaning, according to 
 the way in which it is understood; I am fully satis- 
 fied that its most natural meaning must be that 
 which is here intended, viz. that it is a man zoho is 
 Slumbered, and not a man's way of numbering. 
 
 * See Irenaeus adversus IIa?reses, Lib. v. c. SO. 
 
CHAP II. 
 
 Inquiry into the different kinds of nmnbering in use 
 among the ancients — Determination of that spe- 
 cies of computation (alluded to hy the Holy Spi- 
 rit) lohichis to he used in numbering the Beast. 
 
 Having shewn in the preceding* chapter that the 
 number of the Beast is to be calculated according to 
 some mode of numbering with which men are ac- 
 quainted, we come now to consider the different 
 modes of computation in use among the ancients, 
 in order to discover^ if possible, in what way the 
 Beast's number should be reckoned. It is a well 
 known fact among the learned, that long before the 
 commencement of the Christian aera, the Greeks 
 held numbers in very high veneration. Pythago- 
 ras, who lived upwards of five hundred years before 
 the Incarnation, was the first that we read of, who 
 reduced the mystery of numbers into some sort of 
 system ; and Plato, who flourished about a century 
 later, put himself to incredible pains in explaining 
 the Pythagorean mysteries with respect to num- 
 bers; but in many places Plato himself is very ob- 
 scure, and in some parts of his works upon this sub- 
 ject his meaning is totally unintelligible, notwith- 
 standing the great endeavours both of ancients and 
 moderns to apprehend it. The Pythagorean and 
 Platonic philosophers held that God, our souls, and 
 
all thing's in the world, proceeded from numbers; 
 and that from their harmonies, all things were pro- 
 duced.* Cicero says, that the Pythagoreans con- 
 ceived that all things are the product of numbers 
 and the mathematics, f And in his epistle to At- 
 licus he observes, that the numerical system of 
 Plato is an obscure thing. ;|: W. Morell, in his 
 Treatise upon the Origin of the Ancient Philoso- 
 phers, says that '' Pythagoras, the prince of the Ita- 
 lian philosophers, and pupil of Pherecydes, taught, 
 about the 60th Olympiad, that all things consist of 
 numbers, that the monad is the beginning of things ; 
 Ihat the dyad is the basis of every thing;, from 
 whence spring- numbers, points, lines, planes, bo- 
 dies, &c. &c." § Aristotle || speaks of the opinion 
 of the Pythagoreans in words to the following ef- 
 fect: '' These philosophers," says he, " seem to 
 imagine that number is the beginning- of every 
 
 * Augustine's City of God, with notes, by L. Vives, Book vi. 
 c. 5, note d. 
 
 T Pythagorei ex numeris, et Mathematicorum initiis, proficisci 
 volunt omnia. Cic. Acad. Quaest. Lib. iv. c. 37. 
 
 J Augustine's City of God, by L. Vives, B. \i. c. 3, note d. 
 
 § Pythagoras, Italicorum philosophorum princeps, auditor 
 Pherecydis, Olymp. LX. docuit: Ex nuraeris omnia constare ; 
 Monadem initium rerum esse; Dyadem rerum esse materiam. 
 Inde numeros nasci, puncta, lineas, plana, corpora, &c. Antiq. 
 Graecar. Tom. X. Col. 337, 338. 
 
 11 ioilvovrai ^e xal ovroi rov dpi^t^ov vouAi^ovrs; ctp^r^v Sivoci rou 
 Ss, dpi^ij^ou s'oiy/icc to a.cri(jy >ca< to TTe^irrov ro'Jroiv l\ to ii.lv Tre- 
 Ttapca-ijJvov, to 6l d!tzipov. Lib. i. c. 5. See also, Iren. Lib. ii. 
 c. 19, p. 142. Edit. 1702, a Grabe. 
 
thin^; and that the elements of number are even 
 and uneven, the former of which is infinite, the lat- 
 ter finite." Eustratius, in his first book of Ethics, 
 speaks of the opinion of the Pythagoreans with re-r 
 spect to numbers in very nearly the same words 
 with Aristotle, when he tells us, that '' Pythagoras 
 divided numbers into two orders, one of which is 
 finite, or uneven, the other infinite, or even."* 
 Thus we find, from the testimony of several ancient 
 writers, independently of the great work of Plato 
 still extant, that the Greeks imagined numbers to 
 be of the utmost consequence, and to contain the 
 most sublime mysteries, as, in their estimation, 
 there existed not one thing in the whole com- 
 pass of nature, which had not a reference, directly 
 or indirectly, to some particular number or num- 
 bers. 
 
 Of all numbers, under which a mystery or mys- 
 teries were supposed to be couched, the Pythago- 
 reans appear to have had the greatest predilection 
 for those of three, four, seven, nine, and ten. Of 
 each of these the most extravagant things have been 
 asserted; and though, in favour of these numbers, 
 many curious and, it must be allowed, singularly 
 coincident circumstances have been brought for- 
 ward; yet it must be granted that the great majo- 
 rity of the observations of the ancients upon not 
 only these, but almost all other numbers which they 
 have deemed mysterious, are ridiculous and absurd. 
 
 'TTfciTTov itioa.y 0£ Ta'ji-t;v arefcovj aprioy. Iren. Lib. ii. c. 19. 
 
Aristotle tells us, that '' it was a saying* of the Py- 
 thagoreans that the whole and all things are termi- 
 nated by threes, for/' say they, " this number has 
 the beginning, middle, and end of every thing." * 
 With respect to this number there are numerous 
 passages f in ancient authors. There were three 
 Graces, three Fates, three Furies, the Muses were 
 three times three, the bolt of Jove was trifid, the 
 sceptre of Neptune was a trident, and the dog of 
 Pluto had three heads. In this number the Pytha- 
 goreans also placed perfection, and made great use 
 of it in their religious ceremonies. Virgil seems to 
 have copied this sentiment, when he says in his 
 eighth Eclogue : 1. 73, &c. 
 
 Terna tibi haec primum triplici diversa colore 
 
 Licia circumdo : terque^ hsec altaria circum 
 
 Effigiera duco : numero deus impure gaudet. 
 
 Necte tribiis nodis ternas Amarylli colores : 
 
 Necte Amarylli, mcdo : et Veneris die vincula necto. 
 
 Around this waxen image first I wind 
 
 Three woollen fillets of three colours joined; 
 
 Thrice bind about his thrice devoted head, 
 
 Which round the sacred altar thrice is led. 
 
 Unequal numbers please the gods. — 
 
 Knit with three knots, the fillets knit them straight; 
 
 And say, These knots to Love 1 consecrate. 
 
 Drydev. 
 
 The tetrad or quaternion number was emphati- 
 cally called the mysterious number of Pythagoras, 
 
 "* Ka^oLTiep ya.p (pa<r] xa) oi liv^xyopeioiy ro Tray, y.x\ rot irdvrx 
 toli rflo'iy oas-a)' rsXsvrrj yap y.ai ^Jcrov kou oip^rj rhv a.pi^ix,ov 
 a^si rlv rou Trcivro^. — Aristot, Stagirltae, De Coelo, Lib. i. c. 1. 
 
 + Aulus GeUius's Attic Nights, by the Rev. W. Beloe, B. iii. 
 c. 10. 
 
10 
 
 comprehending', according- to him, all perfection, 
 referred by some to the four elements, by others to 
 the cardinal virtues. * " The Pythagoreans, and 
 with them Plato, attached to the number seven the 
 mystery of a great revolution ; and that when it 
 had run through all its periods, nothing farther 
 could be added, but the pristine state of things be- 
 ing then changed, a new one would commence." f 
 Plato and others made a subtle distinction betwixt 
 the numbers seven and nine, supposing the former 
 to influence the body, the latter the mind. J Par- 
 ticular numbers were also supposed applicable to 
 virtues, as four was called the number of justice, 
 &c. &c. the world was also said by the Pythago- 
 reans to have ten for its number. § " The heathen 
 deities had also peculiar numbers assigned them ; 
 as one was called the number of the chief god, two 
 that of Pallas, three that of Minerva, four that of 
 Apollo, five that of Isis, six that of Osiris, seven 
 that of Mercury, eight that of Ammon, &c. Hence 
 a grass or flower that has a particular number of 
 leaves clustered together was consecrated to that 
 god to whom the respective number was appropri- 
 
 * Attic Nights of Aulus Gellius, by Beloe, B. iii. c. 10. 
 
 + Pythagorei, et cum illis Plato, in septenario numero myste- 
 rium [j.sraf3oXrj; iJ.Byd\r/S ponunt, ut illo per spatia sua confecto, 
 amplius nihil addi possit, sed mutato pristine rerum statu, novus 
 incipiat. — Georgius Schubartus de Diluvio Deucalionis, c. 2. 
 Antiq. Graec. Gronov. Tom. X. col. 709. 
 
 :[ Attic Nights of Aulus Gellius, by Beloe, B. iii. c. 10. 
 
 § Beverley's Great Line of Prophetical Time, p. 134. 
 
11 
 
 ated." * It was not among' tlie heathen nations of 
 the Greeks and Romans exclusively that the science 
 of particular numbers was studied; for even the 
 primitive Christians themselves carried it to as 
 greats if not greater^ extent than any other people, 
 the Jews and Arabs alone excepted. There is 
 scarcely a number in the scriptures of the Old and 
 New Testaments which they did not imagine to 
 have some great mystery concealed under it ; and 
 in the several passages where similar numbers are 
 used, they have endeavoured to prove that there 
 exists a strange coincidence of circumstances. To 
 detail all that the Latin and Greek Fathers have 
 written upon this subject would require a volume of 
 no mean magnitude ; and would add but little to the 
 quantum of evidence already produced upon this 
 point. Those who desire to have fuller informa- 
 tion may consult Canisius's Lectiones Antiquae, 
 where they will find dissertations upon the numbers 
 2, S, 4, and 11. Very numerous examples of the 
 meaning of particular numbers will also be found 
 in the voluminous writings of Jerome. The 
 mystery of number is also very largely considered 
 in the Miisurgia Universalis of Athanaslus Kir- 
 cher. We shall here give only one example from 
 
 * Neque omittendum quod Kircherus, Tom. III. CEdipi, p. 65. 
 observat numeros Diis sacratos unarium summo Deo, binarium 
 Palladi, ternarium Minervae, quaternarium Apollini, quinarium 
 Isidi, senarium Osiridi, septenarium Mercurio, octonariura Am- 
 moni, &c. Hinc quot foliis herba vel flos gauderet, ei Deo fuisse 
 consecratum. — Selden. 
 
12 
 
 the ^vriling's of the primitive Christians, which is 
 that of Aiig'ustine concernino- the number six. 
 He says, that '' God created all things in six days to 
 denote that every thing was done in the most per- 
 fect manner; for six/' he observes, '' is the least 
 perfect number known ; the sum of its aliquot 
 parts being equal to itself." * 
 
 Another mode of mystical numbering, of great 
 antiquit}^, was by counting the number of letters 
 in a person's name, or the number of letters in a 
 particular phrase or set of words. Thus Capelia, 
 who lived in the age of Julius Caesar, calls Pallas 
 eTrTOLg in numeris, f " seven in number," because 
 Minerva, the name by which this heathen goddess 
 was commonly known, consists of seven letters. It 
 was also a custom among the young Romans to 
 toast their mistresses at their meetings as often as 
 there were letters in their names. Thus Martial, 
 who flourished in the reign of Domitian, says, 
 
 NaeTia sex cyathis, septom Justina bibatur. t 
 " Let six cups be drunk to Naivia, seven to Justina." 
 
 Here it is evident that the former name contains 
 six letters, and the latter seven, whence the mean- 
 ing of Martial is clearly ascertained. In the first 
 centuries of the Christian ara this species of num- 
 bering was in very great estimation, especially 
 among the heretics. The Marcosians placed a 
 
 * Book xi. c. 30. 
 
 + Martiani Minei Felicis Capqlla; Carthaginiensis, Lib. vi. Ds 
 Geometria. 
 
 X Chambers' Dictionary on the word Onomantia. 
 
13 
 
 great mystery in the numljer 21, on account of its 
 being' the number of letters in the Greek alphabet; 
 and therefore they thought it remarkable that some 
 quaternions of their teons should have each 24 let- 
 ters : thus the quaternion "Ao^YjTos, Xiyr), IlaTjjo, 
 and 'ATirj^sia, consists of 24 letters^ if "Xiyrj be writ- 
 ten Xsiyrj. And the quaternion Aoyog, Z^utj, "Aj/S^^oj- 
 TTog, and 'ExxTvYicria, has also the same number. * 
 The number of letters in the Greek alphabet added 
 to the number of letters in the Greek name of Je- 
 sus ('Ii]<roD^) has been ridiculously imagined by the 
 Marcosians to represent the ag'e of Christ when 
 he should first enter upon his public ministry, f 
 The Valentinians invented thirty aeons, wliich num- 
 ber they fancied oUr Saviour alluded to by not en- 
 tering upon his public ministry till he v.as thirty 
 years of age. They also imagined that he spoke in 
 reference to their a^ons, when he delivered his pa- 
 rable of the labourers ; for, as some were sent out 
 about the first hour, some at the tliird, and others 
 at the sixth, ninth, and eleventh, hours, it is evi- 
 dent that if these hours be added together they 
 make precisely thirty, thus 1,3, 6, 9, 11=30. ;j; 
 
 We shall add to the evidences for this species of 
 numbering one example more, which is from the 
 Jjcxicon of Hesychius, who is supposed to have nou- 
 rished about the close of the fourth century. Thi? 
 
 * Irenaeus advorsus Haerc-cs, Lib. i. cap. 12^ pafc 71. Edit. 
 Oxon. 1700, a Giabe- 
 t Ibid, page 73. 
 t Ibid. Lib. i. c. 1, § h pajc 9. 
 
14 
 
 lexicog'rapher on the word e7rray^a.[xy.aTov (seven - 
 lettered) enumerates, among' other \vords_, the Eg-yp- 
 tian god Serapis, as known by this appellative on 
 account of the number of letters contained in his 
 name. * And Albertus^ in his note on this passag'c 
 of Hesychius, produces the following ancient Greek 
 epigram in illustration of it : f 
 
 Toa[Ji[x,aTa, rcDv ttocvtwv a.Ka[xarov Trarsoa., &C. 
 
 Which may be translated as follows : '' He cele- 
 brates the great immortal god_, calling' me sTrra 
 7§a^ju.aTa (seven letters) the indefatigable father 
 of all." 
 
 A third mode of mystic numbering which was 
 very common, not only among the Greeks, but al- 
 so the Jews and Arabs, consisted in collecting the 
 numerical values of the letters of a particular word 
 or phrase into one siaii, and substituting it in the 
 place of the name : or two words or phrases were 
 found which contain the same number ; and, arguing- 
 from their numerical equalit}^, a mystic reference 
 to each other was most commonly imagined. This 
 last kind of computation was called by tlie Greeks 
 lo-o\f/ry <pj'a, ^ from 'itrog, equal, and '>l/ri<pi^co^ to com- 
 pute, on account of the identity of number just 
 spoken of. It is difficult to determine when the 
 
 * By the Greeks Serapis is written 'Lxpcnri;. 
 
 + Jos. Seal, ad Euseb. p. 122. [132] Sopingius, Vid. Henr. 
 Vales, ad Socrat. Hist. Kccles. Lib. v. c. 17. 
 
 :{: Athanasii Kircheri, (Edipus iEgj'^ptiacus, Tom. I. p. 218. 
 Cabala Ilebraeorum, Edit. Romae, 1652. 
 
11^ 
 
 art of computing' the number in words began to be 
 used among the Greeks; yet, notwithstanding our 
 hick of information on this point, it is certain that 
 it was known among' them before the commence- 
 ment of the Christian sera ; for Martianus Capella, 
 who flourished about 50 years before Christ, repre- 
 sents Philology prayin^g to the Sun in the follow- 
 ing' words: 
 
 Salve vera deum facies, vultusque paterne, 
 Octo et sexcentis numeris, cui litera trina 
 Conformat sacrum nomen, cognomen, et omen. * 
 
 Hail, true face and paternal look of the gods, whose sacred 
 name, surname, and omen, are comprised in three letters, con- 
 taining the number 608. 
 
 Here it is evident, that the Greek epithet of the 
 sun, rfis, (good,) or urj^, (the author of rain,) is in- 
 tended ; f as either of these words contains the 
 given number 608. J Basnage tells us, § in his 
 History of the Jews, '' that a poet satirizing- 
 Demagoras, found that the numeral letters of 
 his name made a number equal to that of the 
 plague. This number amounts to 420; from whence 
 he inferred that his enemy was the plague." |j It 
 
 * Martiani Minei Felicis Capella; AfricarthagJnensis, De Nup- 
 liis Philologiae et Mercurii, Lib. ii. 
 
 + Selden's Works, Vol. III. Part ii, col. 1402. Bishop New- 
 ton in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 t Thus r,,S,i. 400, and g, 200,=608: and :, 400, t;, 8, and 
 <•, 200, =608. 
 
 § Book iii. c. 23, sect. 2. 
 
 II Thus, :^, 4, a, 1, |W,, 40, a, 1, y, 3, o, 70. p, 100, a, 1, and 
 g, 200,=420 : and Aoi,ao; (the plague) has the same number, for 
 Aj 30, 0, 70, 1, 10, a, 40, 0. 70, and ;, 200,=420. 
 
16 
 
 was a rule among' the ancients^ that those per- 
 sons were the most happy, in whose names the nu- 
 meral letters, added together, make the greatest 
 sum, for which reason, say they, it was that Achilles 
 vanquished Hector, * for the former name contains 
 1276, and the latter only 1225. f Artemidorus, J 
 in his Oneirocritica, tells us, that there were seven 
 names of numbers used in a mystical sense among 
 the Greeks. These were su, pa, s^, Sexa, evSsxa, and 
 Zsxaxig Uxa. They also imagined that the nume- 
 rical value of any of these seven words was equal 
 to the number of years the person or persons 
 would live who came under the rules prescribed in 
 this case. " Thus sv (one) contains fifty-five; for 
 it is written with an epsilon and a nu ; y,lcL (one) 
 contains fifty-one; for it is written with a mu, an 
 iota, and an alpha ; %^ (six) contains sixty-five ; for 
 it is written with an epsilon and a xi. If, after the 
 same manner, we compute the number in the re- 
 maining words osKOL, (ten,) ei'Ssxa, (eleven,) and 8e* 
 itaxi Uxa, (ten times ten,) we shall find in Sexa 
 thirty, in sv^exa, eighty-five, and in hxoixi Ssxa 
 ninety." § They also found in Syo (two) the num- 
 
 * See Chambers on the word Onomantia. 
 + A, 1, ;>/, GOO, », 10, A, 30, A, 30, s, 5, v, 400, and s, 200, 
 -=1276. And E, 5, x, 20, f, 300, w, 800, and p, 100,= 1225* 
 t Artemidorus lived in the reign of the emperor Antoninus. 
 
 ^ EicTi oa oCtoi [j,6vor gV, [ua, g^, oixa, Iv^sym^ hy.ani; Ssy.cc. 
 ::a< sr) ro[J.h fv, Tt'svrYjKOvrairsvrE ^ ypdfzrtx.i yoip Sia, rov s, xcci 
 roxi V. To^£ /xf'a, ifrsyrrp'jjvrcf. 5v, ypd^psrai yap Sid rou /x, xai 
 TOj i. Ha* -to-J X. to OS 1^, s^rr-ovrxTr^vre , ypc'.(pera.i yac $kx, r&u e, 
 
n 
 
 ber four hundred and seventy-four after the same 
 mode of computation. * The Greeks also had a 
 great predilection for the number 100; and fan- 
 cied that every word containing- this number has 
 a reference to something' good. Thus the words 
 ayysy^.'^v, f a messag-e, tts^ji, + pedestrian travelling", 
 fjLsvs, § abide, Trioai, \\ fellow-travellers, and vifxe, ^ 
 feed, contain each 100. 
 
 The reason assigned for this idea of the cente- 
 nary number is, because the Greek words stt kya.- 
 9-a** (for good things) contain it ; f f but these 
 Words appear rather to be made for the number, 
 than the idea of the number to be drawn from the 
 
 xa* rou ^* o/xotcyj l\ Y.Oi\ to. ^eza., kcci rx svSskcc, hx) rd JsxaV.f Sbkx, 
 rfi dvr^ litlvOKx. ypxt^siv xa» ^^/Tji^iJ^gjv xH* £^p£'9">/0'£7'*' ydp rd jt/Jy 
 hi-AOL ovta.) rpiaxovra' rd SI f v Jskk, 6ySoy/.ovrx7rivrs. rd Sa Sey.dKi 
 ^ixa, JvvEvijVoyra. — Oneirocritica, it. 76, Usp) ^povcSv K^yjS' — 
 The numbers in these words ate thus counted : e, 5, v, 50,=55.; 
 /x, 40, », 10, a, 1,=51 ; £, 5, 0, 60,=65; S, 4, s, 5, k, 20, a, 1, 
 =30 ; £, 5, V, 50, (J, 4, £, 5, k, 20, a, 1,=83 ; J, 4, g, 5, y., 20, 
 a, 1, X, 20, *, 10, S, 4, £, 5, X, 20, a, 1,=90. 
 
 *Ibid. The number is thus computed: Sp 4, v, 400, and 
 0, 70,=474. 
 
 t a, 1, 7, 3, y, 3, c, 5, A, 30, tj, 8, v, 50,= 100. Wetstein, 
 in his comment upon Apoc. xiii. 18, says that dvysXla is here 
 written for ccyfexlcc; if so, the centenary number is found as 
 follows: a, 1, v, 50, y, 3, e, 5, X, 30, », 10, a, l.=*100. 
 
 + TT, 80, e, 5, ?, 7, Tj, 8,=100. 
 
 § y., 40, £, 5, V, 50, £j 5,= 100. 
 
 11 TT, 80, e, 5, S, 4, a, 1, j, 10,=100. 
 
 II V, 50, £, 5, u., 40, £, 5,== 100. 
 
 ** £, 5, 'T, 80, a, 1, 7, 3, a, 1, •^, 9, a, 1,=100. 
 
 ■ ++ 'loia ^£ ro P. dvo rou dpi^fj^oiJ iiplvsrau sf) ydp dyfs-' 
 
 Xlx [lege c'vyeX/aJ ra r/.^rov — < — xa} TTfS^ii, 1<rr^ yds kx) nura r^ 
 
18 / 
 
 viords. Artemidorus further inferms us, that it 
 was a custom among* the Greeks to interpret 
 dreams or visions by means of the io-o\j/r;<p/a ; * thus, 
 if an old woman was seen by sick people, it was> 
 deemed a symbol of death ; because y^cSg, an old 
 woman, and rjlxipaoa, the funeral, contain each the 
 number 704^. f But Artemidorus very satirically 
 observes, '' that, without this equality of number, 
 an old woman is a symbol of a funeral, for her 
 death cannot be at any great distance.";}; 
 
 The art of counting the number in words, was 
 very prevalent among* the primitive Christians, and 
 heretics, especially the latter, who carried it to a 
 most extravagant length ; and iu some instances 
 outstripped even the heathen themselves in the ma- 
 nifest absurdity of their remarks upon this subject. 
 The most ancient example of the l<ro-^rj<pioL upon 
 record produced by any of the Christians, is that 
 found in the general epistle of Barnabas, the 
 companion of St. Paul, respecting the number 
 
 4'''j'pos y.x) to (j^EVB kxxrov xaj tteocci iKarov 
 
 70 'A^j^s tfi ^ri(^M £7.xrh. — Artemid. Oneiro.crit. i^i. 34. Wet- 
 stein in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 *- Artemid. Oneirocrit. iv. 26. 
 
 + 7, 3, p, 100, a, 1, y, 400, f, 200,=704; and ^, 8, £, 5, 
 X, 20, (p, 500, 0, 70, ^, 100, a, 1,=704. 
 
 \ ^lo'O'^rjfois Sa ^pricrSaci, orxv xa) %w^ic ruJv icrovj'^j^cvv rd /3As- 
 TTOfj^svx ro'Jto, oifsp av rd ico'^'^f «• '^^p^^X^'i O'riixxiyei^ olov ypxv; 
 rol; voa-ovQ-iv opcvuJyrj, ^xvxts ylvstXA (Tuij^^oXov. ir* ydp ypxv; 
 yo'. y.cCi Ti £x.ipopd vo'. dxkx xx] X'^P^'- ^^^ io'0'^v;>;Jfc', "-5 ypxv$ sr^tv 
 £X<poia; (rriy.xvrixrj, d'j7ri jjJXKscrx [Mr^ i'l; y.XKpdv aTrsvV/jrjcEiv. iv. 
 26, — Wetstein in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
M^!'''Thk Wtitei' gays, tMt Abraham circutiicised 
 art. ffi6 servants of his holisehold, 318 in number, 
 as a type of Christ crucified. In explication of 
 this assertion, he addresses hv^ Christian readers iri 
 words to the following effect : '' Whef'efore fearyi] 
 my children, (chiefly aboV^' all things, tWa.t Afci'i^- 
 
 ham at first circumcised in spirit; f6V,'*'Hatfh^ a 
 reference to the Son, he circumcised; teceiving' at 
 the same time the doctrine of the Three Letters. 
 For it is said, that Abraham circumcised of his 
 household males to the number of 10, and 8, and 
 300. What information, tlien, is designed to be 
 conveyed by this? Leain, therefore, that the eigh- 
 teen are mentioned first, and afterwards the three 
 hundred. Now in the letters which stand for 
 eighteen, that is to say, in iota and eta,, yon have 
 Jesus, and in the tliree hjandred, that is.to^ay, i]i^ 
 the T, (tau,) the figure of the cross. Thus Abrar 
 ham typifies Jesus by two letters, and the cross by 
 one."* Clemens Alexandrinus remarks, in addi- 
 tion to Baniabas, that Abraham routed his ene- 
 
 * M-aS'ST's ovvy rixya, itsp) Tta.vri>jv itXaG-ioj^^ on 'A^^actjU,, o itpui- 
 tos Tt-spito^riv Sous ^v 7fvzu[j.ari, Tt.po'SXt'l/ocg z\i roy Jwv, Ttspisrsij^s 
 ^a^ivv TpiMv YfOL^l^oirwv ^oyixarcc' Xty^i yoio' -kOa itap^sTSijcsv 'A?/;a- 
 Sift, hx rou oiKu dvrov avopoc; oaxa, Koi oxrui koc) TpiccKOcrlsi. t/j ouv 
 •jj JoS-sTcra clvruj yvooa-i^; [loi^srs rov; SsKccoy.ru} TtpMrov^y dlra. rov; 
 tpiccx.0(rl8;' ro SI Sek(x.xcc) OKtui, \ujta SaKOCjrjroc otitdi^ ^%^'^ 'lijcro-yy. 
 
 prj Si ^avpog Iv tiZ T, ijfjisXKsv e%£<v rijv ya.pv^. — — Sr^Xo^ 
 
 6uv Toy iLBv 'lojtrou/ Jv to'i^ Svcr\ y^ciiji,[j.(X&ij xaV ev' kv) .rov. s"a.upQV. — • 
 Epist. Cathoi. c. &, pp. 28, 29, 30, Edit. I. B. Coteleriu*, p. 
 229, Edit. Lond. 1680, ab Isaaco yossio. See also Caiiisii J.<ec- 
 f tones Antiqua?, Tom. T. p. 357, Antwerpia;, 1725. 
 
 C 2 
 
20 
 
 mies by virtue of the number 318; and he farthci' 
 observes, " that ten is allowed on all hands to 
 be perfect, and that eight is the first cube, and is 
 equal in all its dimensions of length, breadth, and 
 depth."* Prudentius, in his preface to his Psy- 
 chomachia, speaks of the efficacy of the number 
 318 as follows: 
 
 Nos esse large Vernularum diritcs, 
 
 Siquid trecenti bis novenis additis 
 
 f ossint, figur^ noverimus mystica. + 
 We shall have acknowledged him to be abundantly rich in 
 servants by a mystic figure, if three hundred with twice nine 
 added can avail any thing. 
 
 The opinion of Barnabas that the Greek letter T 
 stands for the cross, as in the example just given, 
 has also been applied by TertulHan to Gideon's 
 three hundred men by whom the enemies of Israel 
 were discomfited. His words on this subject are 
 the following : 
 
 Hoc etenim signo praedonum stravit acervos 
 Congressus populo Christi, sine milite multtf 
 Tercenteno equite numerus Tau, litera Grasca, 
 Armatis facibusque et cornibus ore canentum. % 
 
 For by this sign having assembled with the people of Christ, 
 he dispersed the troops of the robbers w ith a very small force, 
 only three hundred, (the number of Tau, the Greek letter,) 
 armed with torches and trumpets. 
 
 * 'H (Js/ca^ (?£ o^aoAoysTrat TfavfaXnos ^Ivscf o Sa okt'u} kJ^o; o 
 Ifpwros, t; lo-Latr^s av S.Tioura.ls rati '6ixra<Tt(Tt^ /^yyKOu;, Ttkxrov;^ /3a* 
 bovs. — ^Strom. Lib. vi. c. 11, in initio. 
 
 + See also Dasnage's Hist, of the JeiVs, Book iii. chap. 26, § 4r 
 
 :j:Carm. ad Marc. Lib. iii. c. 4. 
 
21 
 
 In the following' PseudosibylUne verses, God is 
 •represented as addressing Noah under one of his 
 names senigmatically expressed by the number 
 1697: 
 
 'Evvea y^afx^aT s^co, Tsr^aeruXXaS'oj el^i^ vosi ^s. 
 
 'H "Konrt] Ss ra "Konra, xcCi siclv a.<^cuva. ret rrivTS. 
 ToO TravTos 8' a^i^ixotj sxarovraQs^ sW) o)§ oxrco^ 
 
 Oux a.y.u7iTog s(rri^sir]g we^ 1^.01 ys crai^lr^g. 
 
 Sibyllin. Oracul. Lib. i. T. 146—151. 
 
 I have nine letters ; I am composed of four syllables ; weigh 
 it well in your mind. The three first syllables have each iiKO 
 letters; the remaining letters are in the last syllable; and 
 there are five consonants. The Avhole number consists of 
 twice eight hundreds, and three times three tens, with the 
 addition of seven. If thou knowest who I am, thou shalt 
 tiot be by me destitute of wisdom. * 
 
 The name of Jesus was considered by the pri- 
 mitive heretics to be highly mysterious^ because it 
 contains the very remarkable number 888. From 
 this circumstance the ogdoad, or eighth number, 
 evidently came into great repute; and the heretics 
 appear to have assigned to it great mysteries from 
 the parallel example of the Beast's number f being 
 QtQQ', for there is not the least evidence that the 
 
 * I have not been able to determine what name of God is here 
 alluded to: ©eof, Y-'xT-fip,, God, a Saviour, appears to answer the 
 enigma in every thing but the number, which is five deficient, 
 1692 instead of 1697. 
 
 ■1 See Irenaeus adversus Haereses, Lib. i. c. 12, sect. 2. 
 
S3 
 
 number 888* was fouad in Uie name of Jcsus^ or 
 at least was considered remarkable, till after the 
 publication of the Revelation of St.- John. The 
 name of Jesus is tenigmatically expressed in the 
 following' Pseudosibylline verses: 
 
 Tlcorsga (^covT^syra ^i^st'' Va 3'a<Jia>m ou ayrtql t. 
 
 'HS* exarovrdoag oktcOj cari^oxs^oig av^^wTToig 
 
 He will come upon the earth, clothed wjth flesh, like 
 mortal men ; his name contains fo.ur vowels, and two conso- 
 nants ; two of the former are sounded together. I will declare 
 the entire number; for he will manifest to incredulous men 
 his name containing eight units, eight tens, and as many hun- 
 dreds. 
 
 The Venerable Bede speaks of the name of Je- 
 sus, with respect to his number, in words to the 
 following effect : '' Not only the etymology of this 
 very sacred name of Jesus, but also the very num- 
 ber which is contained in the letters, comprehend 
 the mysteries of our salvation ; for it is written, ac- 
 cording" to the Greeks, with six letters, the num- 
 bers of which are 10, 8, 200, 70, 400, and 200. 
 These together make 888; and is an illustrious type 
 of the resurrection. For the eighth number in the 
 Sacred Scriptures is adapted to the glory of the re- 
 
 * The number In the name of Jesus is thus computed : (, 10, 
 
 rj, 8, (T, 200, 0, 70, v, 400, r, 200,=S88. 
 
 f Sibyll, Oracul. Lib. i. prope finfim. 
 
m 
 
 fiurrection ; because the Lord rose froiti the dead 
 on the eighth day^ that is to say, oi"i the day after 
 the Sabbath. And we^ after the lapse of six ages, 
 «lnd also of the seventh, which is the sabbath of the 
 soulis in a separate state of existence, shall be 
 raised, as it were, in the eighth time." * Irenasus 
 finds fault with those who attach so great a mys- 
 tery to the name of Jesus from its containing the 
 remarkable number 888 ; for, says he, the word is 
 of Hebrew origin, and therefore ought not in this 
 case to be numbered, but its corresponding Greek 
 word "ZcoTTi^. f But this, he adds, will not suit 
 their purpose, as it consists of only five letters, 
 and contains the greater, but less re^markable num- 
 ber 1408. J He also tells us, in vindication of the 
 word ^Jcorrj^, that the number five may be more fairly 
 proved to be mystical than that of six adduced by 
 the heretics, on account of the numerous passages 
 
 * Hujus sacrosanct! nominis Jesu non tantum etymologia, sed 
 et ipse, qui Uteris comprehenditur, numerus perpetual salutis nos- 
 tra; mysteria redolet. Sex quippe Uteris apud Gra^cos scribitur 
 'l7](rov;, qiiarum ntimeri sunt X, et VIII, et CC, et LXX, et 
 CCCC, et CC, qui fiunt simul DCCCLXXXVIII; qui profecto 
 numerus figuram resurrectionis adauget. Octavus enim numerus 
 in sacris literis Resurrectionis gloria; convenit : quia Dominus 
 octava die, hoc est, post septimam sabbati, resurrexit. Et ipsi 
 post sex saiculi jetates, et septimam sabbati animarum, qua; nunc 
 interim in alia vita geritur, quasi octaro tempore surgrmus. See 
 Iren. adversus IIa;reses, Lib. ii. c. 40, p. 16^, note 3, Fdit. 
 Oxon. 1702, a Grabe. 
 
 -i S, '200, c/;, 800, r, .SOO, :;, 8, py lOOj^l-lOS. 
 
 t Trcfl. Ibid. p. 103, 
 
24 
 
 in Holy Writ with which it is connected ; for in- 
 stance^ our Saviour fed the multitude with five 
 loaves ; the number of wise virgins^ mentioned in 
 one of Christ's parables, was five, that of the fool^ 
 ish was also five ; the books of the Law are five ; 
 the altar of burnt-offeriuij; was of the height of five 
 cubits, &c. &c. * It was a saying of the ancient 
 heretics, that all numbers under a hundred are of 
 the left hand; and, consequently, that all things 
 containing any of these numbers are material, and 
 subject to corruption. But Irenaeus disproves 
 this opinion, and produces two examples against it, 
 viz. a-yaTTT}, love, and aX7]B^=i(x, truth, the former 
 containing the number 93, f and the latter 64. + 
 The Marcosians fancied that the word 'Aa^v, 
 Amen, containing the number 99, § has a refer- 
 ence to the 99 sheep which went not astray, but 
 were under the special care of the Saviour. They 
 also deemed it remarkable, that the sum of the nu- 
 merical values of the letters of the Greek alphabet, 
 from alpha to lambda, should be equal to the said 
 number 99, || and that the last of the letters thus 
 cast up should be lambda, the initial of Aoyog, The 
 Word. 1 The Basilidians, a sect of heretics of the 
 
 * See Iren, adv. Ilaereses, Lib. ii. c. 42, pp. 166 — 168, where 
 the reader will find many more examples of this kind, if he think 
 the above extract insufficient. 
 . + a, 1, y, 3, a, 1, tT, 80, tj, 8,=93. 
 
 I a, 1, A, 30, 15, 8, ^, 9, g, 5, i, 10, a, J,=64. See Iren. ibid, 
 p. 168. 
 
 § A, I, 1^, 40, r,, 8, y, 50,=-09. 
 
 j] a, 1 , /3, 2, y, 3, S, 4, £, 5, ^, 7, vj, 8, ^, 9, t, 10, x, 20, A, 30,=99, ■ 
 
 f Iren. adv. Ilsreses, Lib. i. c. 13, p. 78, 
 
25 
 
 second centui'y, gave the name of Abrasax^ or 
 
 Abraxas^ to the Supreme Being" ; and attached to 
 
 this name a great mystery, because it contains a 
 
 number equal to the days in a common solar year. * 
 
 Some writers allege, that the Basilidians concealed 
 
 the doctrine of the Trinity under this word; and 
 
 that the initials ol, ^, ^, stand for the Hebrew words 
 
 Ab, Ben, Ruach, that is, Father, Son, and Spirit. 
 
 Wendelin of Tournay, improving upon this, ex- 
 
 plains the whole word thus : f 
 
 A K Ab (dk) Pater 1 
 
 B 3 Ben (p) Filius 2 
 
 P n Ruach (mn) Spiritus Sanctus 100 
 
 A \\y^oxvsc homines , 1 
 
 2 2:Ji;a;v salvanS 200 
 
 A 'Ayl'j.' por sacrum I 
 
 S H Jxai lignum 60 
 
 Total 365 
 
 Tertullian, after giving an account of the he- 
 resies which sprung up among the Christians pre- 
 viously to those denominated the Marcosian and 
 Colobarsian, proceeds to inform us, " that there 
 "were not wanting after these, certain men, named 
 
 * A, 1, |S, 2, ^, 100, a, 1, cr, 200, a, 1, ^, G0,=365 ; and A, 
 1, |3, 2, p, 100, a, 1, ^, 60, a, 1, f, 200,=365. See further 
 upon this subject, Iren, adv. Hter. Lib. i. c. 23. The ancients 
 have also found this number in NsTAo^-, the Nile, or river of 
 Egypt, and in Mii^cai, Mithras, a Persian name for the sun. 
 Thus N, 50, e, 5, i, 10, A, 30, o, 70, jr, 200,=365 ; and M, 40, 
 f, 5, i, 10, ^, 9, p, 100, a, 1, ;, 200,=363. See upon thesfl 
 words, Basnage'g History, pf the Jews, Lib. iii. c. 26, § 10. 
 
 + Encyc. Perthensis on the -word Abrasax. 
 
36 
 
 Marcus and Colobarsus, who framed a new heresy 
 out of the Greek alphabet ; for/' says he, '' they 
 deny the possibility of discovering' the truth with- 
 out having' recourse to these letters ; and they even 
 imagine that the whole plenitude and perfection of 
 truth are displayed by means of them. For this 
 very reason/' he adds, " they consider Christ to 
 have saidj, ' I am alpha and omega;' and also, that 
 Jesus Christ descended, that is to say, a dove came 
 upon Jesus ; now tliese two, that is to say, the 
 letters a and (o, and tts^i^sooL, the Greek word for 
 dove, contain each the number 801."* To the 
 great body of evidence already produced in favour 
 6f the practice among the Greeks of counting the 
 number in words, we shall only add three examples 
 more ; the first of which is ©cou^, Thouth, the 
 name of the Egyptian Mercury, represented by 
 the number 1218. f The second is 'H 'Ao^r^, The 
 Beginning, a name of Jupiter, represented by the 
 number 717. ;|; The last is an ssnigma upon the 
 
 * Non defueruut post hos Marcus quidam et Colobarsus, no« 
 tam haeresim ex Grascernm alphabeto componentes. Negant 
 enim veritatem sine istis posse Uteris iiiveniri, imo totam pleni- 
 tadinem et perfectionem veritatis, in istis literis esse dispositam. 
 Propter hanc enim causam Christum dixisse: Ego sum A et £i. 
 Denique Jesum Christum descendisse, id est, columbam in Je-p 
 sum vejiisse, quffi Grajco nomine cum ■uscifspoL pronuncietur, lia% 
 bere secundum numerum DCCCI. — Q. Sept. Flor. T^rtuUiani de 
 Prsescriptionibus Hasret. Tom. II. p. 487, Wirceburgi, 1781. 
 
 + 0, 9, w, 800, V, 400, .% 9,=1218. 
 
 % n, 8, a, 1, c, 100, x> 600, t;, 8,=717. See Bishop New- 
 ton on Apoc. xiii. 1,8. 
 
27 
 
 Greek word ixbg, a mouse^ and is contained in the 
 following hexameter lines : * 
 
 Non metuo fures, aliis sed furta timori 
 Sunt mea, tota mihi nam furto degitur aetas. 
 Nomen scire cupis, numeii tres dant mihi nomen; 
 Quadraginta horuni est, centum bis, summa, quaterque. 
 
 I am not afraid of tliieves ; but my thefts are a terror to 
 others, for my whole life is spent in theft. If you desire to 
 know rtiy name, three numbers will give it yon, which are 40, 
 400,' and 200. 
 
 The Rabbins have a species of mystic number- 
 ing*, which forms that part of their Cabala, deno- 
 minated Gematria ; and is precisely the same with 
 what the Greeks call ]<rQ-<^^ri<pia. As we shall have 
 occasion to refer to this Rabbinical custom in the 
 course of this work, it will be necessary to pro- 
 duce, by way of example, several instances of it. 
 This practice among the Rabbins cannot well be 
 traced to any very ancient source ; yet it is certain 
 that tliey dealt very much in Cabalistic mysteries 
 so far back as the time of Clemens Alexandrinus ; 
 for this writer tells us that '' the mysteries of the 
 Hebrews are very like those of the Egyptians. "f 
 And it is well known that the io-o\}/73<p/a of the 
 Greeks was in great estimation among the Egyp- 
 tians long before the time of Clemens Alexandrir 
 nus, a most notable example of which is already 
 
 * See Kircher, (Edip. /Egypt. Gymnas. Hierogl. Class I. Sym- 
 bol, c. 4, p. 31. Ed. Rom. 1652. 
 
 + Eicrj yap ra, rJy 'Ejopccliov avrrisix ofj^oixrara toI: iJ,i5-r,ploi; 
 T-wv 'AiyvTrrlccv. Clem. Alex. Strom. Lib. vi. Kircher. (Edip. 
 Tom. I. p. 210. Cab. Ileb, 
 
28 
 
 jr'iycn m the Basilidian g-od Abraxas. * The Rab- 
 bins conceived that in the words, ' I will bring 
 forth my servant The Branch/ (nDV)t the 
 Messiah is to be understood, because he is also 
 called The Comforter (Dlli/D) in another scrip- 
 ture, where it is said, ' And the Comforter was far 
 from me,' J as this passag-e is explained in the Tal- 
 mud under the Title Sanhedrim. Now the letters 
 of the word n^^ amount to the number 138, 
 ^hich is exactly the same that is found in DHJO- § 
 When therefore the prophet says, " I will bring 
 forth my servant The Branch," (n^V) it is as 
 much as if he had said, my serv^^nt The Comforter, 
 (DnjD). who will be the Messiah. {| In the 
 Scripture where it is said, '' And Rebekah his 
 wife conceived," f (mti^^ ilp21 inm) the Rab- 
 bins assert that it is implied, that she brought 
 forth fire and stubble, because ^n{i'^^ (his wife) 
 contains the number 707, as well as the words Ji'j^ 
 2/p^ ** (fire and stubble) found in the 18th verso 
 of Obadiah, where it is said, " The house of Jacob 
 shall be a fire — and the house of Esau for stubble." 
 From the 11th chapter of Genesis, and 1st verse, 
 
 ■* Sec before, page 25, + Zcch. iii. 8. t Lam. i. 16. 
 
 ^ n, 8, », 40, s, 90,= 138; and », 40, n, 8, J, 50, «, 40j= 
 138. — See Aben Ezra and Kimchi on Zechariah. 
 
 [| See Buxtorfii Lexicon Talmudicura in verbum tarcj, where se- 
 reral of the following examples of the Gematria will be found. 
 
 f Gen. XXV. 21. 
 
 »* j<, 1, ^r, 300, n, 400, 1, 6,==707 J aud \^, 1, tt', 300, i, 6, 
 p, lOOj V, 30O,=707. 
 
29 
 
 >vhfer& it is said, " And the whole earth was ^f 
 one speech/' (riHi^ n^l^ yii^n ^3 \Tl) the Rab- 
 bins imagine that it was the Hebrew language 
 which was then spoken, on account of the words 
 nnj^ nsti' (of one speech) being said to contajii 
 the same number with the words \i:;lpn y\U/h (in 
 the holy tongue). * In Gen. xlix. 10, where it is 
 said, n^^ti^ J^l''. (Shiloh shall come,) the Rabbins 
 contend that it is the same as if it had been said^ 
 The Messiah (n^JI^D) shall come, because the 
 same number is found in nh^u; {^Qi and n^'ii^Q. t. 
 It has been asked what is that ^\2U:/^^ C'lv) '«en» 
 tioned in the book of Esther ? The Cabalists in* 
 form us that it is the same with iriD^ (Esther,) 
 because both words contain the same number 661. J 
 The name of Abraham's chief servant, Eliezef, 
 {IW^h^) which signifies " My God a help," 
 contains a number equal to that of Abraham's ser- 
 vants sent out against his enemies, whence the 
 Cabalists conclude, that this patriarch was assisted 
 by God to perform great things. § DIpZD, (Via- 
 com,) a Rabbinical name for Gt)d, is said to be the 
 
 * ]:;, 300, 3, 80, n, 5, k, 1, n, 8, n, 400, =794; and % 30, 
 V, 300, 1, 6, J, 60, n, 5, p, 100, -1, 4, c, 300,=795. I cannot 
 discover why this should be called an example of the Gematria, 
 as the latter phrase evidently contains one more than the former. 
 
 + ♦, 10, 3, 2, K, 1, ty, 300, ^ 10, '•:, 30, n, 5,=358; and. 
 », 40, ttr, 300, 1, 10, n, 8,=3.58. 
 
 t -cr, 300, 1, 6, u, 300, :, 50, n, 5,=-66i ; and-K, 1 o, 60^ 
 r^ 400, t, 200,=C61. 
 
 § K, 1, b, 30, ', 10, J,', 70, ), 7, -\, 200.=3i8 ; and AbraharR-s 
 .servants tlmt went out to battle were 318. See Geii. xlv. 14, 
 
30 
 
 same with the sacred name mn\ (Jehovah,) be-^ 
 catise the former name contains a number equal tor 
 the square of tliat ^^hich is contained in the latter. * 
 ^^D)J2 1P.2 '7S")£t'% (he hath chosen Israel for 
 a people,) is asserted to allude to the words i)^^ 
 -l^"in^ t (he hath formed G\3,) not only because 
 each of these two phrases contains the numbei' 
 913, but also on account of the Hebrew letters con- 
 tained in tlie Ten Commandments amounting ex^ 
 actly to 613, the number in the word J^"m.^ 
 n"^t^\sm (i» the beginning,) has the same number 
 with ")^;i niinn, (he formed according to law^) 
 whence it is gathered that God in the beginning 
 created all things with a reference to the Law. § 
 N12 ^\^I^•i^"^3J (in the beginning he created,) 
 has the same number with ^^^^i HJI^H ti^i^l3> 
 (it was created in the beginning of the year,) 
 
 * », 40, p, 100, 1, 6, n, 40,=186 ; and ^, 10, n, 5, l, 6, n, 5, 
 =26, the square of which is 186. 
 
 + ^, 10, ur, 300, -I, 200, K, 1, b, 30, 3, 2, n, 8, -), 200, n, 2^ 
 J7, 70, », 40, >, 10, n, 40,=913; and ', 10, 'J, 90, 1, 200 n, 400, 
 -I, 200, ', 10^ J, 3,^913. 
 
 1^ The Rabbins divide the 013 letters in the Ten Command- 
 ments into two grand branches, viz. 248 and 365; the former 
 they denominate positive, because what a man is commanded to 
 observe is contained in them; the latter they call negative, be- 
 cause what is forbidden to be done is comprised in the remaining 
 365 letters. The Cabalists think it remarkable that DH-ax, 
 Abraham, should contain the number 248, and esteem it a mark 
 of his perfection. — Kirch, ffidip. Tom. I. Cabala Hebr. pp. 324, 
 325. 
 
 § n, 2, n, 200, N, l,.a', 300, V 10, n, 400,=913; and S, 2, 
 r\, 400, 1, 6, -ij 200, n, 5, ', 10, ^f, 90, n, 200,=913. 
 
31 
 
 whence the Rabbins conclude that God commenced 
 his creative acts at the beg'inning of their year. ^ 
 The Cabahsts obtain the name of God i^ (Co,^ 
 26,) by summing up the letters in the Hebrew 
 name of God nin\ (Jehovah,) both containing 
 26; t and by writing ID according to tlie sound of 
 the letters, i. e. n, ^2, they obtain the number 
 112, which is the same that is found in DM'PiS mD'' 
 (The Lord God.) J They also find the number 
 45, contained in the particle HD, (what,) in the 
 name ^'^.r]"^, (Jehovah,) written according to the 
 sound of the letters, thus : ^5^' 1^%1' t^H' IV ; and 
 this they derive from the circumstance of Moses's 
 enquiry of God by what (HD) § name he should 
 call him ; and they deem this circumstance the 
 piore remarkable from the peculiarity of Moses's 
 expression, which contains the letters of the He- 
 brew name of God niH"* (Jehovah,) in the last 
 letters of the four follovving consecutive words, 
 r\D '[Di:/ tlD "'b (If they should ask '^me what 
 is his name, what" shall I say unto them ? || ) Th« 
 
 * 3, 2, 1, 200, K, 1, u, 300, ^, 10, Ti, 400, 3, % 1, ^00, ?f, l» 
 a=lU6; and 3, 2, n, 200, K, 1, U, 300, n, 5. i^r, SCO, :, .50, 
 n, 5, J, 60, 3, 2, -1, 200, Kj 1,=U16. 
 
 + ', 10, n, 5, 1, 6, n, 5,=2G ; and 3, 20, 1, 6,=-25. 
 
 t 3, 20, 2, 80, 1, 6, 1, G,=112; J^nd i, 10, n, 5, l, 6, n. b, x, 1. 
 'j, 30, n, 5, ', 10, ffi, 40,=112. 
 
 § a, 40, n, 5,=^45; and \ 10, 1, G, n, 4, n, £,.8l,5i,'1, &jH, J; 
 1, 6, n, 5, N, 1,=45. • ■ 
 
 II The words of this sentence included within quotation marki 
 are the translation of tlie preceding Hebrew phrase. -^ ^^ tciitf 
 
32 
 
 Cabalists have also a mode of obtaining 42 oiit of 
 the name nn% (Jehovah,) written according to 
 the sound of the letters, thus : n, ^\ ,1, IV ; and 
 to this they attach a great mystery, because God, 
 in communicating his name to Moses, said^ n\1i^ 
 n\1hs llVi^^ (I ^vil^ be what I will be.) Now the 
 word ^^"^i^^ d will be,) occurring twice, contains 
 the said number 42. * The last example of the 
 Gematria we shall give, is that of '^\^J2ll/ (to observe,) 
 and ifliyD (»^iy precepts,) where each word con- 
 tains the number 546. f 
 
 * *, 10, 1, 6, n, 4, n, 5, 1, 6, 1, 6, n, 5,=42j and jt, 1, n, 5j 
 ^f 10, n, 5=21. This doubled makes 42. 
 
 + W, 300, », 40, 1, 6, n, 200,=546 ; and », 40, V, 90, •), 6, n, 
 400, ', 10,=546. The preceding examples of the Gematria which 
 follow that one respecting Shi! oh and Messiah will be found in 
 Athanasii Kircheri, CEdipus iEgyptiacos, Tom. I. p. 218, et seq. 
 Cabala Hebraeorum, Edit. Rom. 1652. — It may not here be im- 
 proper to notice another species of Gematria in use among the 
 Rabbins. It is thus described by Selden : " Out of every cen- 
 tenary and decad of the letters of a word they take an unity, 
 and add these to the rest, that is, the less numbers ; by which 
 operation, if two words agree in sum, they think forsooth some 
 great mystery, of mutual relation, betwixt the things signified is 
 discovered. Those two of the first-fruits and tythes by this way 
 are equal. For example, dispose the letters and their numbers 
 thus: 
 
 400 6 200 29 2 200 300 70 40 
 
 In the first, out of 400, 200, and 20, take 4, 2, and 2, that is, 
 an unity out of every centenary and decad ; and the' sum is 8, 
 which added to the less numbers, make 16. Likewise in th6 
 second, out of 200, 300, 70, and 40, take 2, 3, 7, and 4, there 
 being no less numbers, and you have the same sum as in the 
 
33 
 
 Having thus produced in the preceding pages^ aa 
 inexpugnable body of evidence in favour of the 
 great veneration the ancient Greeks and Jews had 
 for numbers ; and having also given a great va- 
 riety of examples in support of the three spe- 
 cies of mystic numbering in use among the an- 
 cients ; our next business is to inquire which of 
 these three is adopted by the Spirit of prophecy, 
 in numbering the Beast. That it cannot be the 
 first which is here intended is abundantly evident 
 from the context^, where mention is made of '' the 
 number of his name ;" which number immediately 
 afterwards is expressed to be 666 ; consequently 
 " the number of the Beast/' and " the number of 
 his name/' are only two different expressions to 
 convey the same meaning. But^ upon the suppo- 
 sition that the first species of numbering mentioned 
 in this chapter is here intended, the latter phrase 
 '' the number of his name" is totally unintelligible ; 
 for these words can mean nothing else than, that 
 the name of the Beast contains the number 666. 
 That the number of the Beast is not the same with 
 the number of letters in his name, according to the 
 second species of mystic computation treated of in 
 this chapter, is sufficiently manifest from the great 
 amount of the number, which would suppose hi.s 
 name to contain not fewer than 666 letters. But it is 
 impossible to find the name of any nation, country, 
 
 other, that is 16." Seidell's Works, Vol. III. Tom. II. col; 
 1080. 
 
J* 
 
 people, or individual, from the creation to the pre- 
 sent period, which contains so many letters ; much 
 less any Hehrcw or Greek name ; therefore the 
 name of tlio Beast is not to be counted in this way. 
 Consecpiently there can only remain the literal valua- 
 tion of the Greeks, or the Gematria of the Rabbins, 
 by the rules of which this number alone can be ex- 
 plained. But the computation must be made in the 
 Greek tong-ue, from reasons already advanced. 
 This point is further elucidated by the peculiar 
 modes of expression made use of by the Holy Spi- 
 rit in speaking" of this number, which are precisely 
 the same kind which were adopted by the Greeks 
 in computing" by their Wo-^rjcpia. For, in the first 
 place, 666 is called, '' The number of the Beast," 
 by which is meant the number of the name of the 
 Beast ; as 801, the number in the Greek word for 
 dove, is called by Irenaeus " the number of the 
 bird,"* meaning- evidently the number found in the 
 word TTs^i^s^a.j- In the second place, 666 is called 
 '' the number of his name," as 888 is called, '' the 
 number of the name of Jesus." l In the last place, 
 
 * Ka) Six tovto (prjo-iv avrov a kou «;, tvocrrj-,' XBpis'Bpoi.v [j^rivua-r^^ 
 rovfov e^ovroc rov olpi^ix,ov rovrs rov ocvas. " Wherefore he says 
 that he is a and a-, that lie might manifest the dove, this bird 
 having this number." Iren. Lib. i. cap. 12. p. 71. 
 
 + -r, 80, £, 5, p, 100, i, 10, 0-, 200, r, 300, s, 5, ^c, 100, a, 1, 
 =801 ; and a, 1, w, 800,=801. 
 
 + To yap lr^<ro\J o^oiJ^cx. ■/ixi'ai ro'/ h roTc ypcrjio-Sc^nv a^i^aov, w 
 sf^v oycoyKOv^ x'jyiTu; . " For the name of Jesus, according to 
 the number in the letters, is S8S." Iren. Lib. i. cap. 12, sect. 
 2, p. 72. 
 
35 
 
 Ihe number of the Beast is directed to be computed; 
 the Greek word here used being the verb ^/rjcp/^w, 
 which is the very same which was used upon all 
 occasions of this kind. * 
 
 In confirmation of what has ah-eady been said 
 respecting" the computation of the number 666 be- 
 ing made in the Greek tongue^ we may add the 
 following words of Iren^us, who flourished in the 
 second century^ 6 a^&ixos too ovop-tro^ tou B^t^o/^, xa- 
 
 rwv, — f the number of ihe name of the Beast^ ac- 
 cording to the calculation of the Greeks, by means 
 of the letters of which it is composed, is ^^^. 
 
 To complete the evidence that the number and 
 name of the Beast are to be found in the Greek 
 tongue, we need only examine the three pass- 
 ages in the first and last chapters of the Revelation, 
 in which The Son of God adopts the first and last let- 
 ters of the Greek alpliabet as a symbol of his own 
 eternity, saying, " I am The Alpha and The Omega, 
 The Beginning and The Ending, The First and 
 The Last." Here it is evident that Jesus styles 
 himself The Alpha and The Omega, because He 
 is the beginning and ending of all things, as alpha 
 
 * '^Yj.pli/jvrs^ rov dpi^iMv dvr-Siv rujy roiyjljov. " Computing 
 the number of their letters." Ireii. Lib. i. cap. 13, sect. 1, p. 
 78. See also Artemidori Oneirocritica, and Kircheii (Edipus 
 j?']gyptiacus upon the Cabala of the IIel)re\vs. 
 
 + The Greek words of this sentence which follow ycau.iMcitujy 
 are lost ; but the whole passage is preservi'd in the Latin trans-» 
 lation. See Grabe's Edit. Lib. v. c. 30, prope initium. 
 
 \)2 
 
36 
 
 is the first letter of the Greek A^phabet^ and omega 
 the last. Thus are we instructed, by three pass-' 
 ages, olTered as it were on purpose, in the very 
 book in which tlie number of the Beast is revealed; 
 that the number is to be counted by means of the 
 Greek alphabet : for it is totally incredible that the 
 Spirit of prophecy would, in one part of the Apo- 
 calypse, use the first and last letters of the 
 Greek alphabet in a symbolical sense ; and in 
 another part of the same book, design that the 
 mystery of the Beast should be computed ac- 
 cording to the numerical values of the letters of 
 some other language. It is, therefore, evident 
 that iJic number 6Q& is a symbol of the Greek name 
 of the Beast 
 
87 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Examination of the various intei^retations of the 
 number of the Beast — Insiifficiency of any in- 
 terpretation yet given in solving the mystery — 
 Ihat the niunher of the Beast is not 616, as in 
 some Greek copies; but 666 ^ demonstrated. 
 
 AS we have amply proved from incontrovertible 
 evidence^ that the number of the Beast must be 
 computed by summing up the values of the letters 
 in his Greek name, we shall now first examine the 
 diiferent expositions of this mystery in this lan- 
 guag-e ; as, for reasons already advanced, such in- 
 terpretations have in this respect an advantage 
 over all others. 
 
 Of all Greek names which contain the number 
 666, none can lay claim to greater antiquity than 
 that famous one of Irenaeus, which has been ap" 
 proved of by almost all commentators who have 
 given any sort of tolerable exposition of the Reve- 
 lation. The word alluded to is Aaruvog, * which 
 was supposed by Irenaeus to refer to the then ex- 
 isting Roman empire,, " for/' says he, " they are- 
 
 * The number in Aa,r£~vo$ is thus computed : A, 30, sc, Ij r, 
 300, s, 5, /j 10, V, 50, 0, 70, c, 200,=66S. 
 
38 
 
 Latins who now reif:;n." * But the great majority 
 of Protestant commentators, not without great rea- 
 son, have appHed this word to the dominion of the 
 Roman Cathohcs, on account of this name being 
 that by which this power was known in all parts of 
 the Greek empire. As, therefore, this word has 
 been supported by so many great writers, and is al- 
 lowed to be the best explication of the number yet 
 given, it will be indispensably necessary to examine 
 it the more attentively, in order to point out in 
 what it is to be approved, and in what disapproved. 
 There appear only two circumstances which can be 
 legitimately produced in favour of the word AarsT- 
 1/0^, viz. That it is computed according to the nu- 
 merical value of the Greek letters, and is also, (ad- 
 mitting the Protestant interpretation of the Beast 
 to be correct,) the name by >\hich the Papists were 
 known in the Eastern countries. The objections 
 are insurmountable. In the first place, the ortho- 
 graphy is incorrect ; for it should be written Aart'- 
 yos, and not Aarsms. '[ Bengel, in his Commen- 
 tary on Apoc. xiii. 18, is very diffuse upon this 
 point, and informs us, " That Aarsivog ought not 
 to be spelled with the epsiton. For," says he, '^the 
 Greek si, when a consonant follows, the Latins in- 
 
 * Sed et Axt-eIvos noinen habet sexcentorum sexaginta sex nu- 
 picrum : et vglde verisimile est, quoniam novissimura regnum hoc 
 habet vocabulum; Latini enim sunt qui nunc regnant. Iren< 
 Lib. V. c. 30, p. 449. 
 
 + See Critici Sacri, Tom. VIII. p. 539, 
 
deed write with an I, as hxcuv, icon ; but the Latiivi^^^--'^ 
 is never written by the Greeks with an si; and 
 therefore Aarsivog has no analog'y. For axoT^lvos is 
 not written axuT^sivog, The same may be said of 
 'A7\.^hog, ^Ax^rxyavrlvog, W.'ks^avo^hog, 'AvrwvTvo^, 'A^x- 
 rtvog, ^A^yjvog, l^oovrivog, KaXsTvot,*, K^at^vog, Ko?^Xa- 
 T7vog, Kqarlvog, &c. &c. &c. Even Irena?us him- 
 self constantly writes the Latin names, Justinns, 
 Valentinus, llyg-inus, and Florinus^ in the follow- 
 ing Greek form 'Is^7vog, 'OjaKavrivog, 'TyTvog, •$>?;?«- 
 ^7vog. And so Latinus is written Aarhog in the Si- 
 bylline verses, with the second syllaljlc in some in- 
 stances long% in one case short. Also, in one ma- 
 nuscript of Andreas it is found without the diph- 
 thong', even contrary to the design of Andreas, the 
 editor of this copy considering the diphthong- im- 
 proper. In another, Latinus is written Aars7vog, 
 hy an open confession of licence, which sort of li- 
 berty, as it is common with the Germans in their 
 German etcosiichi, so is it frequent in the eteostichi 
 of the Greeks." * In addition to what Bencrel 
 
 ■&' 
 
 * Aoiteivog cum s sumi non dcbuit. Nam ti Graicum subse- 
 quente consona, Latini quidem per I exprimunt, ut hy.uiv, icon : 
 sed I Latiuum Gra^ce non transit in si ; neque Aatslvos analogiam 
 liabet. Non enim scribitur 'ayjjkslvo;, ji.r.A, sed 'axuXTvosy 'A\S1!~ 
 >os, &c. &c. * Apud ipsum Irenaium, 'larr-'Of, &c. constanter 
 per < simplex : et sic A^rlyo^, quod ipsum in Sibyllinis etiam i 
 niodo productum, modo correptum, habet. Itaque in uno An- 
 
 * A great variety of example;- of lhi> kiiul are given by Ben^el in his Com- 
 fcientary on Ape* . Jtiii. IS. 
 
40 
 
 says, we may add, tliat the Greek word for Latl- 
 nus is not written with the si in any one of its va- 
 rious inflections, whether we consider it as an ad- 
 jective or a substantive. For a proof of this asser- 
 tion we may refer the reader to every Greek au- 
 thor who has used this word ; among whom are 
 Hesiod, Polybius, Dionysius Hahcarnassensis, Stra- 
 bo, Plutarch, Athenseus, Dio Cassius, Photius, 
 The Byzantine historians, &c. &c. &c. * Eich- 
 
 drex codice MS. AarTyo;, a librario emendante, contra Andreae 
 institutum, est repositum : in altero ad AarsTvoj additur, Six Ji^- 
 ^oyfsy aperta licentiae confessione, qua; ut apud Gerraanos in 
 Germa«icis, sic apud Graecos in Graicis eteostichis frequens est. 
 * In illustration of what is said abore the following examples 
 may be of use : 
 
 The substantive AarTvoj in its different cases. 
 Nominative Case, Singular. 
 hao-iXsvs ju-lv 'A^opiylvujv r^v Aarivos 6 iavvn. Latinus, the 
 son of Faunus, was king of the Aborigines. Dion. Hal. Antiq. 
 Roman. Lib. i. p. 35. 
 
 Genitive Case, Singular. 
 Tcltuj Se IrfT, roU ^ocvvs reXsutrjirccvros, aKSsyjtai rr}v a.pyr^v h 
 \\iyslag KOLta. to xyjSof" xa) rov^'A^ociylvccg dith to\J Ya,hfov Aa- 
 tIvh ^aJyy Aarlvsg eTfuvoyMcrs. But in the third year after the 
 death of Faunus, i^neas succeeded to the government according 
 to his affinity ; and named the Aborigines Latins, from his rela- 
 tion Latinus, the son of Faunus. Photii Bibliotheca, p. 51. 
 Rothomagi, 1653. Appiani Alexandrini Historian Romans. 
 Dative Case, Singular. 
 Ka) k^(x.<rlX£V<rs ix^eroi ^xvvov eri] Xs 6 'HcockXtJ^. sireira. Axrlvog 
 tTf} Ar. tovrs Kocrd to Tplrov 'Afve/aj i^ 'I'aIh T'a.pa.ylvo[J^£voi crvix,-^ 
 lj.a,yrfl7ag re dvtM Aarlvuj Kccrd FstovXuv, xai Tovpvov oiveKwvy 
 AaXmo(, ^Euyvvrcn Accrlva Bvyarp) rou ^ao-txiu-'s, v.cCi (Sa-ciXcvet 
 ryji %w'/>«? ft^TK Aarlvov trr, y. And Hercules reigned after Fau- 
 
41 
 
 hornius endeavours to overthrow the argument of 
 Bengel with respect to the orthography of AareTvoj, 
 
 nus thirty-five years ; then Latinus thirty-six. ^neas, the third 
 ©f this line, having come from Ilium, and fighting with Latinus 
 against the Rutuli, and slaying Turnus, marries Lavinia, the 
 daughter of Latinus, and reigns after Latinus three years. 
 Georgii Syncelli Chronographia, p. 137. Edit. Venet. p. 172. 
 £dit. Par. 
 
 Accusative Case, Singular. 
 Klpy.r) 5' 'HXi'd ^vydtrjO 'titspiovl^cco^ 
 TslvoLt^ 'OSucrtrrjog rccXoca-'Kppovo; hv (^(AorTjn 
 "Aypiov^ Tj(j£ Aarlvov a,iMV[j.ovx re Kpocrspov rs. 
 
 'HtriooK Qsoyovloc, verses 1011, 1012, 1013. 
 Circe, the daughter of Sol, the son of Hyperion, brought 
 forth to the patient Ulysses Agrius, the celebrated Latinus, 
 and Craterus. 
 
 Vocative Case, Singular. 
 "l^i Aar7v£, KcCi Ktys ro7; TtoXlraiSf jt.r.A. Go, Latin, and tell 
 thy citizens, &c. Dionys. Halic. Antiq. Roman, p. 472. 
 Nominative Case, Plural. 
 Oi ^' Qvv AarTvs; xar' dp^xg jvJv ^trav 6?Jiyoi, koc'i U irAsia; ou 
 TtfiQvzlyjiv Viait.ot.ioig. The Latins therefore were originally few 
 in number, and had little concern with the Romans. Strabonis 
 Geographi, Lib. v. 
 
 Genitive Case, Plural. 
 T&7f fi' tVi, ju.f;,a£ioy eS'voj ayocvuJv £>"* AxrUjjv. 
 Next to these is the prudent nation of the illustrious La- 
 tins. Dionysii Orbis Descriptio, verse 350. 
 
 TpwMV dyXoioi TtKvx iJ.siJAytj.sy a. rca(r] Axro:.;y. 
 The illustrious offspring of the Trojans mixed with the 
 children of the Latins. Plutarch's Moralia, Vol. IL p. liy. 
 
 Dative Case, Plural. 
 'PfCjaaTo; c-'jv rolg Aocrlvois An Sf'jutnv. The Romans sacrifice 
 to Jupiter with the Latin«. Strabonis Geog. Lib. v. 
 
42 
 
 by assertinjj; tliat the Greeks did sometimes change 
 the I of the Latins into the diphthong si^ as a proof 
 
 Accusative Case, Plural. 
 Ka< Tov Ttpog Axrivsi aTTiJAXajtro iroXi'My. He was exempted 
 from a Mar with the Latins. Joannis Cantacuzeni Ilistoriaj 
 Lib. iv. p. 670. Edit, Venet. p. 841. Edit, Paris. Byzantina.- 
 Histor. 
 
 Vocative Case, Plural. 
 'n Aocrlvoi. Latins ! Dionys. Hal. Antiq. ilom. p. 3^0. 
 
 The adjective AarTvo; in its different cases. 
 Nominative Case, Singular. 
 
 'O Aarlvo; Uarpidpyrri;. The Latin Patriarch. Dositheus's 
 Patriarch. Hierosol. Lib. viii. cap. 11, § 3. 
 
 TvoopiiMcvraroi Ss rujv oowv^ -fj re 'AirTtla, xa.) ^ Aarlvi^, kcc) t^ OJ- 
 aXsplcc. The most noted of the ways are the Appian, the Latin, 
 and the Valerian. Strab. Geogr. Lib. v. p. 338. Edit. Oxon. 1807. 
 
 Ilatra %-&wv 'IraAi) Ka.\ hS.tx Aarivvj. The whole of the Italian 
 and Latin country. See Fragmenta Sibyllin. Oracul. in Biblio- 
 theca Patrum, Tom. V. p. 73. 
 
 Genitive Case, Singular. 
 
 'E^' kyJ.tspa 51 rr^g Aarlyr^;. On the other side of the L^tiu 
 way. Strab. Geogr. p. 339. 
 
 'Evs-acr>jf ^l Tivoi foprr^g Aaxlvr^z y^a.^'iizi Ittj tl /3-^aa KaT- 
 
 ca.p av ^£(T-fi dyopa. At the time of a certain Latin feast, 
 
 Caesar sits down on the curile chair in the midst of the forum. 
 See Excerpta Polybii, &c. ab Henrico Valesio, Edit. Paris, 1634, 
 p. 477. 
 
 Msra^'u Aar/yTjc rs xai 'Aitirlx; lor/iJ. Betwixt the Latin and 
 Appian way. Procop. Caesar. Hist. Lib, ii. cap. 3. Aariv^f 
 ISo'j, occurs again in chap. v. of the same book. 
 
 'E^'AxS'aj — Aarivijf iroKexg. Out of Alba — a Latin city. 
 Strabo's Geograph. p. 335. 
 
 *H Pa'a-i; rr^g AxrivTjc yji!pa.g Ifu Rome is in the Latin coun- 
 
43 
 
 of which he produces for examples the words Sa» 
 binuSj FaustinuSj Pauliiius^ &c. which are some- 
 try, Dionysii Orbis, Descriptio ab Eustathio et Hen. Stephauo, 
 p. 65. Edit. Lond. 1688. 
 
 Dative Case, Singular, 
 
 Ka) ^opv^og av rui Axri/cv vtto yr^g s^Yiy-ova-^Yi. And a tumult 
 was heard under ground in the Latin (mount). Dio Cassius, 
 Vol. r. Lib. xxxix. p. 199. Hamburg, 1650. 
 
 'Pvj/xarf ny) /x^ Adrivcu ^p-/j(rdi^svoi. Having made use of some 
 Latin word. Dio Cassius, p. 713. Hamburg, 1630. 
 
 Qdrspov 7U3V dipiopv^druvj I Ka.r£(nisvcc(ra.v di yvvouKSi^ lipiiy^- 
 aro^ TtoKKuJv itapstrMv^ yXwrrfi Accrlvr, fui'/-^v Bva-vvstov re v^oCt ys^ 
 yuivov. That statue which the women adorned spoke, in the 
 presence of many, in the Latin tongue, Mith a clear and loud 
 voice. Dionys. Hal. Antiq. Roman. Lib. viii. p. 526. 
 Accusative Case, Singular. 
 
 Aurai J' siciv a\ tto'abis al Trspia^acrai irapd ^dXatrav rrfV Aa- 
 ti'/r^v ^(jjpccvj VTtkp r)f TroisiTyrai rd; c'lvbriV.as. These are the ci- 
 ties which surround by sea the Latin country, with which they 
 form leagues. Polybii Histor. Lib. iii. 
 
 'ETTi AarivT^v ciiv. Towards the Latin way. Dionys. Hal. 
 Antic^. Rom. p. 12. 
 
 Nominative Case, Plural. 
 
 EicTi o'Jv dvryi AarTvai lioXsig OvocaecIx rs, xx) Ka.po'aoKoi, xa) 
 "AA?a' TtXTicrlov Ss Kx) ttoa/j KouxsKov. In |t there are the Latin 
 cities Valeria, and Carseolum, and Alba ; near to which is also 
 the city Cuculum. Strabo, Geogr. pp. 340, 341, Edit. Oxon. 
 IS07, 
 
 Dative Case, Plural. 
 
 'Ev ro7s Actrlvoig opoi;. In the Latin borders. Dionys. Hal, 
 Antiq. Rom. p. 617. Edit. Lips. 1691. 
 
 Upoir^slcra p.iav r^yJcxv rxl; xa'A^jx^avai; Aarlvat; koprx";. 
 Having added one day to the feasts denominated Latin. Ibid. 
 Si.. 415, 
 
44 
 
 times written by the Greeks^ Xot,€£7vogj ^aug&tvog, 
 HauXslvog, &c. * But these examples can have no 
 weight in the present case as they are very rarely 
 met with. To complete the evidence against Aa- 
 rsTvog, with respect to its orthography, we can add 
 that this word is not thus Avritten in any lexicon ex- 
 tant, f 
 
 A second objection against the word AarsTvog, is 
 the impossibility of determining whether it be a 
 substantive or an adjective. 
 
 A third objection against the word Aocrslvog is its 
 indefinite form : for supposing it to be a substantive, 
 we are not informed from it^ what Latin is intend- 
 ed ; and admitting it to be an adjective we cannot 
 determine with what substantive it is designed to be 
 connected. For it is well known it cannot agree 
 with ^lig/oy^ the Greek word for Beast ; as this 
 
 Accusative Case, Plural. 
 
 TauVa^ ro-s ho era,; rs y.a] roig ^vo-lx; l^^XP^ tuvKa^ -fiii-oig %po'- 
 vwv rsK'jvtri 'Pcy/xaTo(, Aar/va; xa.K'j-jvrsg. The Romans observe 
 the Latin feasts so called, even in our time. Dionys. Hal. Antiq. 
 Roman, p. 250. 
 
 Ta; dvoxois rag Aarlva?. The Latin truce. Dio Cassius, 
 pp. 205, 383. Hamburg, 1650. 
 
 * D. Jo. Georgii Rosenmiillert Scholia in Novum Testamen- 
 tum, in Apoc. xiii. 18. Scaliger also allows the e in the words 
 'AvrwveTvo;, Ycl^hvo^, AarsTys; ; but he says it is improper in 
 Tsjj«,T)r^f, Ne/y.^, an orthography he very frequently met with on 
 coins and stones. See his Animad. on Euseb. Pamphil. p. 111. 
 
 + The lexicons consulted upon this occasion, which contain 
 the word, are those of Hesychius, Suidas, Stophanus, Hederic, 
 and Schrevelius ; besides Littleton's latin Dictionary, Gesner*s 
 Thesaurus, and the Heptaglott of Calepinus. 
 
45 
 
 word is neuter^ and the adjective masculine. * 
 
 But Irenaeus gives us another word, namely Ts/rai/, 
 
 which contains the number 666 ; and this he con- 
 
 * Lord Napier speaks upon the ivord AareTvc^ as follows : 
 *' Here then say we, that name is AaTfiVofj for these reasons. 
 First, becaus the name of the beast is — the name of the ten- 
 horned Roman beast or Latine ampyre in gencrall, and not of the 
 j^jitichrist onelie, and so it must either be Romamis or JLatinus^ 
 but of these two, Latlnus is the eldest style : for King Latiniis 
 (from whom that people were called t'Oiini, and their cijntrie 
 called Latium) was long before King Romulus, of whome the 
 Citie was called Rome, and the people thereof Romanes. Se- 
 condlie, it must bee the number of a man's name (saieth the 
 text) so is Latinus the name of a man, euen the name of one of 
 their first Kinges. Thirdlie, forasmuch as the Grcccians had a 
 custome in their mystejries and Oracles, to obserue the number of 
 names, as ye shall finde in divers partes of Sybilla. And as in 
 that countrey, the name of the flood NsjAoj is celebrated as ho- 
 lie, because it containeth the number of the dales of the year 
 365, as Carton testifieth, Chro. lib. 4. wlier he describeth the 
 Co/tes and Ihsses. Therfore, Sanct lohn (obseruing the cus- 
 tome of them to whome hee writelh) saith that the number of 
 the Beast, or rather (as he termed it in the former 17 vers) the 
 number of the Beast's name, is 666. — Therefore, Aarsjvcf is the 
 verie name of the Beaste, meaned by the saide number." See 
 his 29th Proposition in his treatise on the Revelation. 
 
 But of all writers that I have consulted upon the word AareT- 
 vof as applicable to the Beast, Mr. Faber has certainly spoken 
 the most ably. His words are the following : " The ten-horned 
 beast, whose name is declared to contain the number 666, is cer- 
 tainly the temporal Roman empire. Of this empire the second 
 founder indeed was Romulus; but the first real or fictitious 
 founder was Latinus, the ancient king of Latium. Lntinus there- 
 fore is the name of a man. It is likewise the peculiar name of 
 %^c. Western or divided Roman empire, and the distinguishing 
 
46 
 
 aiders more prolvablc (Imn AaTsTvoc; ; first, on account 
 of its being' a word of six letters, and consequently 
 has in this respect some analog to the number ; 
 and, secondly, because it is a very ancient and re- 
 markable name, and answers in some sort W the 
 aeni^matical expression in the 17th chapter of the 
 
 appellation of every inclivklual in that empire. Here it is ob- 
 servable, that the Gentile name of Latinus, or a Latin, Avas, in 
 the victorious days of the republic and empire, almost lost in the 
 more favourite Gentile name of Romamis, or a Koman. Pre- 
 served however it carefully Avas, though not so frequently used 
 Jis the other; insomuch that, although the people were styled 
 Ronunts. their language was denominated Lnfin. But when, by 
 the arms of the northern nations, the Roman empire was divided 
 into ten kingdoms ; when, by setting up a spiritual tyrant in the 
 church, and by lapsing into Papal idolatry, it again became a 
 beast ; when Rome was governed by her bishops under the wing 
 of a new line of emperors ; and when Greece, formerly her in- 
 structor in the arts and sciences, was now become her rival both 
 in imperial and ecclesiastical domination: the old gentile namei 
 of Latin was revived, and has ever since been the peculiarly dis- 
 tinguishing title of the Papal Roman empire both temporal and 
 spiritual. Such, accordingly, is the general appellation which 
 the inhabitants of the West bear in the eastern parts of the 
 world: the particular names of Spaniards, French, and Italians, 
 are swallowed up in the common title of Latins. Hence Mr. 
 Gibbon, in his account of the Crusades, terms, with strict pro- 
 priety, the people of the western empire Latins : and gives us, 
 under this name, the history of the live Latin emperors of Con- 
 stantinople. Hence also, though the Papists are wont absurdly 
 to style themselves Roman Catholics, the real name of tiieir com- 
 munity, as contradistinguished from the Greek church, the Ar- 
 menian church, or the Abyssinian church, is certainly the Latin 
 church. Thus Thevenot, in his account of Mount Sinai, speaks* 
 
47 
 
 Revelation, " The beast which thou sawest was, 
 and is not, and shall ascend out of the bottomless 
 pit, and go into perdition." That is to say, Teitan 
 is an ancient celebrated name, which he supposes, 
 will also be the name of Antichrist. * Knittel de- 
 
 of two churches, one for the Greeks, and the other for the La- 
 tins r and thus Ricaut, throughout his State of tlie Greek and 
 Armenian churches, discriminates the Romanists from all other 
 professors of Christianity by the appellation of Latins. ' The 
 Papists,' as Dr. Henry More aptly expresses it, ' latinize in every 
 thing. Mass, prayers, hymns, litanies, canons, decretals, bulls, 
 are conceived in Latin. The Papal councils speak in Latin. 
 Women themselves pray in Latin. J\or is the Scripture read in 
 any other language, under Popery, than Latin. Wherefore the 
 council of Trent commanded the vulgar Latin to be the only au- 
 thentic version : nor do their doctors doubt to prefer it to the 
 Hebrew and Greek text itself, which was written by the pro- 
 phets and apostles. In short, all things are Latin ; the Pope 
 having communicated his language to the people under his domi- 
 nion as the mark and character of his empire.' Here then we 
 have a name which completely answers in every respect to the 
 Apocalyptic name of the beast. Lateinos is at once tJie name of 
 a many the title of an empire, and the distinguishing appellation 
 of every individual in that empire ; and, when the sum of its nu- 
 merical letters is taken in the Greek language, the language in 
 which the Apocalypse is written, and in which therefore the cal- 
 culation ought apparently to be made, it will amount precisely 
 to 666. On these grounds then we have abundant reason to 
 conclude that Latinus, and nothing but Latinus, is the name of 
 the beast; for, in no other M'ord, descriptive of the revived 
 temporal beast, or the Papal Roman empire, can such a fatal 
 concurrence of circumstances be discovered." See his Dis- 
 sertation on the Prophecies, Vol. II. pp. 345 — 349, Edit. LoiuL 
 1810. 
 
 * Iren. adv. ILvreses, Lib. v. c. 30. pp. 4 J 9. 4.)0, 
 
48 
 
 fends this name^ and '' considers it as an allusion to 
 the praenomen of Domitian^ which was Titus^ and 
 says, that the name of Titan was justly applicable 
 to Domitian, because toward the close of his reign 
 he insisted on Divine honours being- paid him, and 
 was therefore a ^eoiKa-^og, as the Titans w^ere," * 
 Wetstein also approves of this word, f But, not- 
 withstanding' all that these great men have said in 
 vindication of it, it certainly is entitled to no credit, 
 as the orthography is erroneous, the word being 
 properly spelled Tirav, and not Tsirav. ^ Grabe 
 remarks that the word IlaTrta-xos is found in the 
 Codex Claromontanus of Irenaeus instead of Te/- 
 rav : § but this is evidently a corruption. The 
 word TiaTTiorxog is the diminutive of Jldxas, Pope ; 
 and only contains the number 666 by writing it 
 with the diphthong si. |j 
 
 Irenaeus gives us another word containing 666, 
 namely, Euav^as. 5 But this he produces to shew 
 
 * Michaelis on the New Testament, Vol. VI. p. 526. Edit, 
 Lond. 1802. 
 
 + In Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 J See Diodorus Siculus, and the Greek Lexicons. Telrxv is 
 thus numbered: T, 300, £, 5, i, 10, r, 300, a, 1, v, 505=666. 
 
 § Iren. adv. Hsres. a Grabe, Prolegom. p. xv. 
 
 II Ibid, n, 80, a, 1, tt, 80, £, 5, <, 10, o-, 200, k, 20, &, 70, 
 iT, 20O,=666. 
 
 f E, 5, V, 400, a, 1, y, 50, ^, 9, a, 1, j, 200,=666. It is not 
 altogether certain that this is the word intended by Irenaeus ; for 
 in the different copies of Irenaeus consulted by Grabe it is writ- 
 ten Evavy which is 210 short of the number said to be contained 
 
49 
 
 that several names might be found containing the 
 number of Antichrist^ which cannot well be ap- 
 plied to him. * It is very difficult to determine 
 what Irenaeus intended by this word^ whether the 
 proper name of a person, or the adjective iximJ^isg, 
 or svoLv^Big, flourishing; if the former, nothing can 
 be concluded from it ; and if the latter, the writing 
 it sxjav^as for ebctv^isg or zuav^sig is sufficient to 
 overthrow it. Hippolytus, who lived at the end of 
 the second century, finds the number ^6^ in aovou- 
 jas, f I deny ; for, says he. Antichrist, when he 
 comes, will openly deny the articles of the Chris- 
 tian faith. J But the orthography of this word, like 
 the others already mentioned, is also improper; 
 for it should be written a§vouju,a<. § Aretha s of 
 Cappadocia gives us several words or phrases con- 
 taining the number 666. The first is Aaiinring, \\ 
 (I suppose a proper name,) but it can be appHed 
 to nothing respecting Antichrist. The second is *0 
 N/x7}T^f, f The Conqueror ; a character which, 
 according to the Sacred Oracles, in a most eminent 
 sense belongs to Antichrist, '' for power is given 
 
 in it. It is for this reason that Feuardentius added the third 
 syllable ^aj. 
 
 * Iren. adv. Haeres. Lib. v. c. 30, p. 448. 
 
 + A, 1, p, lOOj V, 50, 0, 70, y, 400, jw,, 40, £, 5,==666. 
 
 X De Consummatione Mundi. 
 
 § See the different Greek Lexicons. 
 
 II A, 30, a, 1, joo, 40, TT, 80, £, 5, r, 300, *, 10, ?, «00,=666. 
 
 f O, 70, N, 50, «, 10, X, 20, ij, 8, r, 300, ?;, 8, f, 20©, 
 =666. 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 him over the saints to overcome them/' * But 
 this word is insufficient in two respects : first, it is 
 totally indefinite, as several persons have appeared 
 in the world at different times who have been 
 great conquerors. Secondly, it is the name of no 
 particular person exclusively. The third given by 
 Arethas containing 666 is xaxo^ oSvjyo^, f ^' a bad 
 guide :" this is also a striking character of Anti- 
 christ ; yet the words can be applied to any person 
 who publishes erroneous doctrines, or otherwise 
 leads the people astray. The fourth given by 
 Arethas is aXrj^rjs ^y^a€efog, X '' ^ truly injurious 
 person ;" but it ought to be written aT^ri^aJs ^Aa- 
 ^e^og. The fifth is ;raXa< (dda-xavos, § " envious of 
 old time." The sixth and last is afivog ahxog, || 
 '' an unjust Iamb." Primasius gives us the name 
 of a month which has this number, viz. "AvrefjLog ; 1 
 and Rupert informs us that ysva-rj^ixog, (earth-born,) 
 also contains 666. ** St. Jerome finds the num- 
 
 * Rev. xiii. 7. 
 
 + X, 20, a, 1, X, 20, 0, 70, f, 200, o, 70, S, 4,1}, 8,y, 3, o, 70, 
 ?, 200,=666. 
 
 t a, 1, A, 30, r), 8, ^, 9, 73, 8, s, 200, /3, 2, A, 30, a, 1, f, 2, 
 i, 5, p, 100, 0, 70, ;, 200,=666. 
 
 § If, 80, a, 1, A, 30, a, 1, <, 10, /3, 2, a, 1, <r, 200, x, 20, «, I, 
 V, 50, 0, 70, Si 200,=666. 
 
 II a, 1, jit, 40, y, 50, 0, 70, j, 200, a, 1, J, 4, <, 10, x, 20, 0, 70, 
 S, 200,=666, 
 
 « a, 1, V, 50, r, 300, e, 5, p., 40, 0, 70, j, 200,=666. 
 
 ** y? 3, «, 5, V, 50, (T, 200, ij, 8, p, 100, <, 10, x, 20, 0, 70, 
 ,f, 200,=666. 
 
51 
 
 ber 666 in the Hebrew name Euivag, * which he 
 interprets '' one that points out serpents." f Be- 
 nedict, a name assumed by several of the popes, 
 also contains this number, if we write it BsvlSix- 
 rog, X an orthography allowed by the Greeks. § But 
 it is evident, if the popes be intended by the Beast, 
 that the name of any one bishop, or set of bishops, 
 should not be selected for the purpose of determin- 
 ing what is meant by the number; but a name 
 which comprises the whole of them. Valent. Er- 
 nest. Laescher, finds the number 666 in Pope Boni- 
 face III. by writing it in the following manner : 
 Bov/^a^xoj r, UoLTOL Sri, s. s. a. || which, without 
 contractions, is Bov/^^a^ioj F, UuTra ar\, sTrirrxoTrog 
 sTTiG-xoTriou, Trqarrog, that is to say, '' Boniface the 
 third, the sixty-eighth Pope, and first bishop of bi- 
 shops." f Grotius fancied that he found this num- 
 
 - * E, 5, w, 400, t, 10, V, 50, a, 1, j, 200,=666. 
 
 + Ey'/vaf Epjj.svevsYaiy 6 Ssi^ag 6(pslis^ 6u 6 dpi^a,os %^r'' In Li- 
 bro de Nominibus Hebraicis, Tom. II. page 158. Edit. Paris. 
 1699. 
 
 t B, 2,£, 5, V, 50, 6, 5, 5, 4, i, 10, >c, 20, r, 300, o, 70, s, 200, 
 =666. 
 
 § See Bengelii Gnomon, in Apoc. xiii. 18. and Dosith. Patres 
 Hierosol. Lib. viii. c. 10. 
 
 II B, 2, 0, 70, V, 50, J, 10, ?, 2, a, 1, ?, 7, i, 10, o, 70, {, 200, 
 r, 3, n, 80, a, 1, TT, 80, a, 1, S, 60, ij, 8, £, 5, f, 5, a, 1,=* 
 666. See Wolfii, Tom. Cur. p. 548. 
 
 H I am not aware that Bov/fa^iof, with respect to its ortho- 
 graphy, is supported by a single authority from any Greek wri- 
 ter. I have only met with the Greek name for Boniface in two^ 
 forms, Tiz. Bovvjpeirios and BovKpdittogf the former in the Biblio- 
 
 E 2 
 
5S 
 
 ber in OuT^Tiog, a name of Trajan, the Roman em- 
 peror. * But in this he is certainly mistaken, as 
 the final sig'nia which he makes to stand for only 
 six in the arithmetical computation of this word^ 
 was never so valued by the Greeks ; as proofs of 
 which we need only refer to the ancient examples 
 y^oAjg, 'iTytrou^, and AaTg?vo^, which contain the re- 
 spective numbers 704, 888, and 6QQt^ the sigma be- 
 ing taken in each of the words for 200. f Martin 
 Luther being thought by several to be the Beast, 
 his name has been twisted different ways td make 
 the number, the only instance of which that 1 have 
 met with in the Greek computation is As%sqava,, J 
 a word made evidently for the purpose. The num- 
 ber 666 is also found in Sa^ovsiog, § Saxon, Martin 
 Luther being a Saxon by birth. Le Clerc, in his 
 Additions to Hammond, finds the number in Aioj 
 e\iSATi''YL^oig,\\ ^^ I belong to Jupiter or Juno " It 
 
 theca of Photius, col. 196. Edit. Rothog. 1653, fol. and the lat- 
 ter in Proeop. Caesar, de Belle Vandalicoj and also in Const. 
 Porphyrog. de Them. Imp. Orient, seu Antiq. C. P. Part. ii. c. 
 24. p. 63. 
 
 * O, 70, u, 400, A, 30, TT, 80, j, 10, o, 70, 5, 6,=666. 
 
 + See Poli Synopsis Criticorum, in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 % A, 30, 0, 70, a, 400, ^^ 9, f, 5, p, 100, a, 1, v, 60, a, l,s== 
 666. See Selden's Works, Vol. II. Part. 11. col. 1402. Lu- 
 ther's name in Greek is Asre.po^, and not As^spccvx. See Dosith. 
 Patres Hierosol. Lib. xi. c. 2, § 2, 3, 4. 
 
 § 2, 200, a, 1, ^, 60, 0, 70, v, 50, s, 5^ i, 10, 0, 70, f,. 200,= 
 666. 
 
 II A, 4, {,, 10, 0, 70, $, 200, e, 6, i, 10, jw,, 40, <, 10, ij, 8, H, S, 
 f, lOQy Of^ 1, f , 200,=666. 
 
53 
 
 is also discovered in the Latin words Ecclesia Ita- 
 lica written in Greek characters. * It is also said 
 to be contained in ^ aT^a^ovsia ^lou, " the evil vaunt- 
 ing- of life;"f but I can only find in it 665. J 
 Mohammed's name has also been made to contain 
 the number 666, by writing- it Maoixsng, or Moa/As- 
 Tig. § Dr. Walmsley, the late titular bishop of 
 Bath and Wells, copying from Massuet, approves 
 of this word, and says that its orthography is ac- 
 knowledged by Euthymius, and the Greek historians 
 Cedrenus and Zonaras. || But there is nothing 
 more false than this assertion ; for, of the seven dif- 
 ferent ways in which Mohammed's name is written 
 in Euthymius and the Byzantine historians, not 
 one is the orthography in question. The seven 
 different modes of writing this name are, Mwa/xsr, 
 M.(oay.s^, Mfpctjae^, Mwa/tsS, Mwajae^, M«p^ou^er, 
 and Ma;^oy/Asr. These words, with the number 
 
 * Ecclesia Italica, " The Italian church," written in Greek 
 characters is ExnATjo-ja IraAfxa, which is numbered as follows : 
 £, 5, X, 20, K, 20, A, 30, ij, 8, er, 200, i, 10, a, 1, i, 10, r, 300, 
 a, 1, A, 30, t, 10, K, 20, a, 1,=666. See Fulke's Rhemish 
 Testament, in loc. and Piscator's notes, ib. 
 
 + See Selden's Works, Tom. II. Part. ii. col. 1402. 
 
 % 7], 8, a, 1, A, 30, a, 1, ?, 7, o, 70, v, 50, e, 5, <, 10, a, 1, 
 /5, 2, I, 10, 0, 70, V, 400,=665. 
 
 § M, 40, a, 1, 0, 70, fj., 40, s, 5, t, 300, i, 10, f, 200,=666; 
 and M, 40, o, 70, a, 1, /x,, 40, f, 5, r, 300, i, 10, f, 200, 
 =666. 
 
 II Gen. Hist, of the Church, p. 366. Edit. 1771 ; and Iren. 
 adv. Haereses, a, Domno Renato Massuet, Edit. Paris. 1710. p. 
 200. Varior. Annot. 
 
54 
 
 contained in each_, and the authorities by which 
 they are sanctioned, are as below : 
 MwaixsT = 1186 Euthymius. * 
 Ma)a/Jt,e3= 890 Nicetas^ Cedrenus, Euthy- 
 mius. f 
 Mcootju,?^ = 895 Cananus, Zonaras, and Eu- 
 thymius. I 
 MeajusS = 560 Theophanes. § 
 Msocjots^ = 565 Cons. Porphyrogenitus. {| 
 
 * Miiy^8[XB':' slrsv Mwa'aer, Muchumet, or Moamet. Biblio- 
 theca Patrum, Tom. IX. p. 308. Edit. Paris. 1624. 
 
 + 'Avoc^sy^a-flluj t-f^v rou Mmocim£§ (Ska.<r<prjiJi.l!x,v, I anathema- 
 tize the blasphemy of Mohammed. Ibid. p. 286. Nicetae Sara- 
 cenica. 
 
 Mwa^EiJ, rwv ^a.pa.xfjVMv dpx'^iyhi i/svSoirpop-^r-)^;, Moham- 
 med, the prince and false-prophet of the Saracens. Georgii Ce- 
 dreni Historiarum Compendium. 
 
 Ouro; Mu!X[j.£S, o ku) M8;)|^oJju-£r, this Mohammed, also nam- 
 ed Muchumet. Ibid. 
 
 X Ta; |SibA8^ rou Mwa/x-eS-, the books of Mohamet. Joannis 
 Canani De Bello Constantinopolitano. 
 
 McwajXE^- rwv J.apaKyjvcJov (pvXap'x^og, Mohamet, the ruler of 
 the Saracens. Joannis Zonarae Annales, Lib. xiv. c. 7. 
 
 § Msajj^sS, rujv "Eapawivuiv dpxw°h Muamed, the prince of 
 the Saracens. Theophanis Chronographia, p. 220. Edit. Ven. 
 1720, Edit. Par. p. 276. Byzant. Histor. — Bibliotheca Patrum, 
 Tom. IX. p. 289, Edit. Paris. 1624. 
 
 II Elc rou; avrovg XP'^^^S itpwtdi dp'^'^yog tujv 'Apa'Swv Msa- 
 |u,£3-, ov 6i 'ApdjSss xaKova-i M8;(^oJju,er, 6 Koi ■n'po(pi^7rji dvTwv %pij- 
 (^a.Tl(ra.s, aKpdfrjas trig dpyr^g tuiv 'Apd^wv strj svvsa., About these 
 times the first prince of the Arabs was Muameth, whom the 
 Arabs call Muchumet, Avho being also divinely appointed their 
 prophet, held the empire of the Arabs nine years. Constantini 
 Porphyrogeniti De Administrai. Imperii Orientalis, Pars ii. 
 cap. 16. 
 
55 
 
 M8;^oy/>t£T = 1925 Cons. Porphyrog-enitus, Eu- 
 thymius, Cananus, Cedrenus, Ni- 
 cetas. * 
 
 MoL-xouixsT = 1456 Cantaciizenus. f 
 Hioara finds the number 666 in the surname of 
 the present French emperor, by absurdly writ- 
 ing- it Boi/vsTraoTvj ; \ and Wrangham has fan- 
 cied it to be contained in the Greek word 'Attoct- 
 rarr^g, § '' an apostate." But in this he is certainly 
 mistaken ; for the Greeks, in their Icoxf/vjcp/a, never 
 counted the g- six, but 500, as is evident in the 
 word Treqig-s^a, " a dove," which Irenaeus informs 
 us contains the number 801 ; {| but if the g- had 
 been taken for six, this word could only be said to 
 contain the number 397. 5 The editor of a late 
 
 * Use) r-^i ysvsaXoylas rou Map^oJasr, of the genealogy of 
 Muchumet. Const. Porphyrog. De Adminis. Imp. Orient. Parr 
 II. cap. 14. 
 
 + TuJ ETfraKoa-ioruJ ifsv-fYixori^ ^tsi roy Ma^oJasr, In the seven 
 hundred and fiftieth year of Machumet. Joannis Cantacuzeni 
 Historic, Lib. iv. cap. 14. 
 
 X B, 2, 0, 70, V, 50, V, 50, £, 5, tt, 80, ex., I, p, 100, r, 300, 
 r], 8,=666. 
 
 § He numbers this Avord as follows : A, 1, tt, 80, o, 70, r? 6, 
 a, 1, r, 300, tj, 8, f, 200,=666. 
 
 II See before, page 50. 
 
 f If r be reckoned only six, this word will be thus numbered : 
 TT, 80, f, 5, p, 100, I, 10, r, 6, f, 5, o, 100, a, 1,=397. 
 Another example In which the r is counted 500, and not 6, is 
 found in Jerome's commentary on the eighth chapter of Zecha- 
 riah, where sitra.y.iu-yjKlsg and XpiriO(.vovg are said to contain 
 each the number 1946. This is not an example of the Ico^rjipiaf 
 
56 
 
 reprint of Potter's interpretation of the number 
 666 makes the following- remark :* " Abram^ which 
 signifies in Hebrew A mighty Father, when written 
 in Greek characters, contains according to the 
 amount of its. numerical letters the number 144 
 (A^gajot). f See Gal. v. 1^ &c. and Isaiah xii. 2. In 
 contradistinction the papal territory was colonized 
 by Japhet, whose name signifies seduction and la- 
 titude, and contains, in Greek numerical letters, the 
 number 666 {la-rcsrog). J" 
 
 Several interpretations of the number of the 
 Beast have from time to time been given in the 
 Hebrew tongue. § Vitringa affords us two guesses^ 
 0*^1 jn n3"1> II " a multitude of the Gentiles," and 
 nD")2"n T\2Y\, ^ '' High and magnificent." Mat- 
 thew Hiller finds the number in i^Hi^ D*?^^;. ** 
 
 unless we admit, with Scaliger, * that hTcra.ynffy^i'^ieg must be 
 written f7rraH(cr;;^£(A(aj ; and then both words only contain each 
 1941, as follows : g, 5, tt, 80, r, 300, a, 1, k, 20, <, 10, <r, 200, 
 %, 600, £, 5, i, 10, A, 30, i, 10, 0, 70, u, 400, j, 200,=1941 ; 
 and X, 600, o, 100, t, 10, c, 200, r, 300, j, 10, a, 1, v, 50, o, 70, 
 y, 400, f, 200,=1941. 
 
 * See the Worcester edition, 1808, p. xv. 
 + A, 1, ?, 2, 0, 100, a, 1, |.;t, 40,=144. 
 
 % I, 10, a, 1, TT, 80, £, 5, r, 300, o, 70, ,f, 200,=666. 
 
 § See Wolfii Tom. Curar. in Apoc. xiii. 18, Vitringa ibid, 
 and Calmet's Diet, of the Bible on the word Antichrist. 
 
 ijl n, 200, D, 2, n, 400, n, 5, j, 3, 1, 6, ', 10, d, 40,=666. 
 
 1 n, 200, 1, 6, 3, 2, n, 3, i, 6, n, 200, 3, 2, n, 200, », 40, 
 n, 5,=^666. 
 
 *'■* s, 1, -!, 4, D, 600, K, 1, n, 4, 1, 6, r:, 40, >, 10,=666. 
 
 * .See his Animadversions on Euseb. Paiiipliil. p. 111. 
 
57 
 
 " an Edomite ;" HasaBUS in nmDO^ * '' things on 
 sale;" Portzigius in miD, + "apostasy;" and 
 Jo. Gothofredus Lakemacherus in \\^U\L* "1^ J '' Rab- 
 bi Simon." nriD. § '' mystery/' is mentioned by 
 Dr. H. More, and has been much esteemed by se- 
 veral writers. || The number has also been found 
 in '«£i^£ii^i< W^^'pn ^^::^5, ^ ^^ our holy father the 
 
 * n, 40, 3, 20, n, 200, i, 6, n, 400,=666. Jac. Hasaeus in 
 Biblioth. Bremense, Classis ii. p. 1010. See also Wolfii ibid. p. 
 546. nilDQ is the plural of r\~ion, and is supposed to be a very 
 proper character of the Beast; because it is written of him, 
 " That no man might buy or sell save he that had the mark, or 
 the name of the Beast, or the number of his name." 
 
 + D, 60, -I, 200, 1, 6, n, 400,=666. See Zachar. Portzigius 
 in Collectione Novantiquorum Theologicorum, an. 1733, p. 662^ 
 and Wolfii, ibid. 
 
 X -I, 200, ur, 300, c, 40, J7, 70, 1, 6, J, 50,=666. 
 
 § D, 60, n, 400, 1, 6, -I, 200,=666. 
 
 II See Dr. Henry More's Epilogue to his Apocalypsis Apoca- 
 lypseos, and Dr. Dodd's Commentary on the Revelation. See 
 also CI. Petrus a, Sarn, in Miscellaneis Duisburgensibus, Tom. I. 
 p. 487; and Wolfii, ibid. Sethur, one of the spies mentioned in 
 Numb. xiii. 13, has been considered a representative of the Papal 
 Antichrist ; and it is very remarkable, that there is some sort of 
 resemblance between these two characters. Sethur's name con- 
 tains the number 666 ; and this is the number of Antichrist ; Se- 
 thur is of the tribe of Asher, that is to say, The Blessed ; so are 
 the Papists of the family of the Primitive Christians ; Sethur was 
 one of those who brought an evil report of the good land ; so 
 have the Papists by their impieties brought an evil report upon 
 Christianity ; Sethur's name signifies mystery ; and this is th© 
 name inscribed upon the forehead of the Mother of Harlots. 
 
 ^ it, 1, D, 2, ', 10, J, 50, 1, 6, n, 5, p, 90, n, 4, 1, 6, ur, 300, 
 K, 1, N, 1, fl, 80, ', 10, 3, 80, ^, 10,=666. 
 
58 
 
 Pope," but the last word ought to be written 
 IVS'^a^^n. * It has also been found in Luther's 
 name by ridiculously writing it lph^h, " Lul- 
 ther." t To these we may add U'DV^ IW^'ll^n, J 
 " the kingdom of the people/' considered in oppo- 
 sition to the kingdom of Christ ; and the Latin 
 word Romanus, " Roman/' written by Fox and 
 Fleming § in the following Hebrew characters, 
 tt'lOi/DT. II Vitring-a also produces Dp"'3Tli^. Adoni- 
 kam, of whom mention is made in Ezra^ ii. 13. not 
 because his name contains 666, but from the cir- 
 cumstance of his family and posterity which re- 
 turned from the Babylonish captivity consisting of 
 precisely 666 persons. 5 But the most approved 
 of all Hebrew interpretations is rT'^DIIj ** a 
 word mentioned by Piscator, f f and asserted by 
 many to be the feminine of ^D1"l^ XX ^^^^ ^^ mean 
 " Roman/ and therefore supposed to agree either 
 
 * D"ijn nbo nvs^sjtn, " The Pope, king of the Gentiles." 
 Hyde's Syntagma Dissertat. Vol. I. pp. 115, 116, 117, Edit. 
 Oxon. 1767. 
 
 + % 30, 1, 6, S 30, n, 400, -1, 200,=666. 
 
 % n, 5, », 40, b, 30, D, 20, 1, 6, n, 400, n, 5, y, 70, », 40, ', 10, 
 », 40,=666. 
 
 § See Vitringa's Apocalypsis Exposita, and Fleming's Apoca- 
 lyptical Key, in loc. 
 
 II 1, 200, n, 40, ;r, 70, J, 50, 1, 6, jy, 300,=666. 
 
 f See Wolfii ibid. p. 545. 
 
 ** 1, 200, 1, 6, », 40, ', 10, ••, 10, n, 400,=666. 
 
 ++ See Wolfii, Tom. Curar. in Apoc. xUi 18. and Fulke'? 
 Rhemish Testament, ibid. 
 
 t+ See Bishop Newton's Dissert, on Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 2 
 
59 
 
 with T\^2bD, " kingdom/' n^n, '' beast/' or nbnp, 
 church. * But that all this is false^ I think is suffi- 
 ciently evident from Buxtorf s Talmudical Lexicon, 
 where there is given a great variety of examples of 
 the Hebrew word ^f2M, in all which this word signi- 
 fies liojne and not Roman, f The words used by the 
 Rabbins for Roman are ^i^72M, and H^^Dl"), the 
 first of which is masculine, the other feminine. ;j; 
 Many interpretations of this number have also 
 been given in the Latin language; but all such 
 can be of but very little authority, as no evidence 
 can be produced that the Romans numbered in this 
 way so early as the days of the apostles. Yet that 
 it was sometimes used in after-ages would appear 
 from the following example given by Kircher : 
 
 Qui de quingentis, de quinque, decemque sit unus, 
 Ille meis precibus dignum poterit dare munus. 
 
 He who is one of five hundred and fifteen will be able to 
 give a gift worthy of my prayers. § 
 
 By five hundred and fifteen is meant, the Latin 
 word DVX, a leader, the Roman numerals added 
 together making this number. || In the same 
 
 * See Bishop Newton and Daubuz, ibid, and Wolfius, Tom. 
 Curar. V. p. 546. Edit. Basil. 1741. 
 
 + nj7C;nn 'Cn moVo it, " this is the wicked kingdom of 
 Rome." Talmud on Lev. vi. 2, et 9. See Buxtorf's Talmud. 
 Lex. on the word 'on : the word xnn is also frequently used for 
 Rome. See Hyde's Syntag. Dissertat. passim. 
 
 X See Buxtorf's Talmud. Lex. col. 2229, 2230. 
 
 § CEdipi ^gyptiaci Gymnas. Hierogl. Class I. Symbolices, cap. 
 iv, p. 31. Edit. Roma?, 1652. 
 
 II D, 500, V, 5, X, 10,=515. 
 
60 
 
 manner has Irenochoraeus found 666 in the words 
 Vicarius Pilii Dei, * " The Vicar of the Son of 
 God," one of the titles of the Pope in effect, thoiij^h 
 the form in which it is used is Vicarius Christi, 
 " Christ's Vicar," or Vicarius Jesus Christi, '' Vi- 
 car of Jesus Christ." W^ilHam Bedel finds the 
 number in one of tlie Pope's titles : Paulo V. Vice- 
 Deo, f ''Paul V, (he Vice-God;" and Anton. 
 Driessenius discovers it in the following Papal in- 
 scription, Una Vera Catholica infallibilis Ecclesia, J 
 " One true Catholic infallible Church." It is also 
 found in Ludovicus, § the name of several French 
 kings, and also in Vicarius Dei Generalis in Ter- 
 ris, II '' Vicar-general of God in the earth." Cas- 
 par Heunischius also discovers it in Silvester Se- 
 cundus, 5 " Silvester the Second," one of the 
 Popes ; and it has been supposed that as Linus 
 was the first Pope, so Linus will be the last, as Li- 
 
 * V, 5, I, 1, C, 100, I, 1, V, 5, 1, 1, L, 50, 1, 1, 1, 1, 
 P, 500, 1, 1,=666. See Wolfius in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 + V, 5, L, 50, V, 5, V, 5, I, 1, C, 100, D, 500,=666. See 
 Wolfius, ibid. 
 
 t V, 5, V, 5, C, 100, L, 50, I, 1, C, 100, 1, 1, L, 50, L, 50, 
 I, 1, I, 1, L, 50, I, 1, C, 100, C, 100, L, 50, I, 1,=666. See 
 Wolfius, ibid. 
 
 § L, 50, V, 5, P, 500, V, 5, I, 1, C, 100, V, 55=666. See 
 Wolfius and Bengel, ibid, and the Tractatus de Patientia et Fide 
 Sanctorum. 
 
 II V, 5, 1, 1, C, 100, I, 1, V, 5, P, 500, I, 1, JL, 50, J, 1, 1 1, 
 I, 1,=666. 
 
 f I, 1, L, 50, V, 5, C, 100, V, 5, D, 500, V, 5,=666. Sec 
 Bengelii Gnomon in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
61 
 
 niis Secundus, * " Linus the Second/* contains 
 the precise number of Qt&Qt. M. Bossuet^ Bishop 
 of Meaux, finds the number in Diodes Augus- 
 tuSj t the Roman emperor, the first word being 
 his private name, the latter the title of his imperial 
 dignity. But it is evident, if this persecutor of the 
 Christian church vs^ere intended, that the w^hole of 
 his imperial name would have been computed, 
 thus Diocletianus Augustus, and not Diodes Au- 
 gustus. M. de la Chatardie finds the number in 
 D. F. Julianus Caesar, Athens, % '' D. F. Julian, 
 the Atheist," another of the Roman emperors. 
 But Calmet has made a very great improvement in 
 M. de la Chatardie's example by writing it, accord- 
 ing as he says it is found on the Roman coins, 
 thus, D. F. Julianus Csesar, Aug. § Luther's 
 name has also been made to contain QQG by whim- 
 sically affixing to it Ductor Gregis, i. e. '' Lu- 
 ther, leader of the flock ;" || and Calvin's name has 
 been similarly handled in the words, Calvinus, tris- 
 tis fidei interpres. It '^Calvin, the baleful interpreter 
 
 * L, 50, I, 1, V, 5, C, 100, V, 5, D, 500, V, 5,=666. See 
 Bengelii Ghattmon in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
 + D, 500, I, 1, C, 100, L, 50, V^ 5, V, 5, V, 5,=666. See 
 Calmet's Diet, of the Bible on the word Antichrist. 
 
 X D, 500, V, 6, L, 50, I, 1, V, 5, C, 100, V, 5,=^666. See 
 Calmet, ibid. 
 
 § The same letters as in the preceding note. See CalmetV 
 Commentary on Rev. xiii. 18. 
 
 II L, 50, V, 5, V, 5, D, 500, V, 5, C, 100, 1, 1,=666. 
 
 f C, 100, L, 50. V, 6, I, 1^ V, 6, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, D, 500,1, I, 
 I, 1,=666. 
 
62 
 
 of the faith." The number 666 has also been 
 found in Doctor et Rex Latinus, "' the Latin king 
 and teacher ;" * and also in Die Lux; f but what 
 was meant by this phrase I cannot discover. Upon 
 the supposition that the Pope is the head of Anti- 
 christ, the two following- examples are given in 
 addition to what has hitherto been laid before the 
 public. The first is, Auctoritas politica ecclesias- 
 ticaque Papalis, "i " The Papal civil and ecclesias- 
 tic authority ;" and the second, Auctoritas politica 
 ecclesiasticaque Latina_, § " The Latin civil and 
 ecclesiastic authority." 
 
 Some attempts have also been made to discover 
 the number of the Beast by either summing* up the 
 Roman numerals in English words, or by making 
 a numerical table for the purpose ; I shall g-ive 
 only two instances, the first of which is that of T. 
 Elmham, prior of Lenton. He finds the number in 
 John Oldcastle, thus : " John Oldcastle in nume- 
 rals makes 701 ; || from which sum he subtracts the 
 year of his age, wherein he so charitably took part 
 with the Lollards^ viz. 3b, and the remainder is 
 
 * D, 500, C, 100, X, 10, L, 50, 1, 1, V, 5,=666. See Vi- 
 tringa on the Apocalypse, in loc. 
 
 + See Lord Napier on the Revelation. The number in this 
 phrase is thus computed, D, 500, I, 1, C, 100, L, 50, V, 5, 
 X, 10,=666. 
 
 t V, 5, C, 100, I, 1, L, 50, I, 1, I, 1, C, 100, CC, 200, 
 L, 6U, I, 1, I, 1, C, 100, V, 5, L, 50, I, 1,=666. 
 
 ^ The same as the preceding. 
 
 II I, 1, L, 50, D, 600, Cj 100, L, 50,=701. 
 
63 
 
 666." * Martin Luther's name in German^ viz. 
 Martin Lauter, has been shewn to contain 666, by 
 means of a numerical alphabet invented for the 
 purpose ; thus, M, 30, A, 1, R, 80, T, 100, I, 9, 
 N, 40, L, 20, A, 1, U, 200, T, 100, E, 5, R, 80, 
 =666 ! ! t 
 
 But there are some commentators who entirely 
 disapprove of the general idea that the number 666 
 is the sum of the numerical values of the letters in 
 Antichrist's name, and think it refers either to the 
 number of years from the date of the vision till 
 Antichrist's appearance, or else to the duration of 
 the Antichristian tyranny. The first of these opi- 
 nions Balaeus partly adopted ; but he supposed that 
 the 666 years should be computed from 60 years 
 before Christ, when Pompey reduced Judea into a 
 Roman province, which will lead down to 606, the 
 year in which the Roman bishop was declared in- 
 fallible by Phocas. J Beverley, by means of a com- 
 putation unnecessary to be detailed here, supposes 
 the 666 years to have ended in A. D. 725, or 726. § 
 Lowman and Dr. Johnston think these years ter- 
 minated about A. D. 756. Among the commenta- 
 tors that entertained the opinion, that the number 
 666 is the number of years assigned for the ty- 
 ranny of Antichrist, is Erasmus, who supposed 
 
 * See Selden's Works, Vol. III. Tom. n. col. 1080, and 
 1081 ; and Chronic. Hen. V. in Bibliothec^ Bodleian^. 
 + See Massuet's Notes on Lib. v. c. 30, of Irenaeus. 
 I See Poole's Synopsis Criticorum in Apoc. xiii; 18. 
 ^ See his Scripture Line of Tirae; 
 
64 
 
 them to have ended in A. D. 15^0, the year of the 
 Reformation, * and consequently, they must have 
 commenced in A. D. 854. In a Httle anonymous 
 tract by a prelate of the Lutheran church, trans- 
 lated from the German, and printed at London in 
 1797, the 666 years are dated from A. D. 1073, 
 and are said to have ended in A. D. 1740. But 
 Mr. Bellamy's opinion on this subject is the most 
 feeble which can possibly be conceived; for he 
 says, '' that the number has no reference to kings, 
 kingdoms, nor popes, but that it refers to the time 
 when the Divine theocracy ceased in the true visi- 
 ble church of God among" the Jews to the estab- 
 lishment of the true visible church of God by our 
 Lord Jesus Christ among the Gentiles. This," he 
 says, " was precisely 666 years ; f viz. from the 
 destruction of Solomon's temple by Nebuchadnez- 
 zar, to the destruction of the second Jewish temple 
 by Titus!" J 
 
 Some commentators have supposed the number 
 666 to refer to the year of our Lord 666. Luther 
 says, that the Pope was first considered as uncon- 
 trollable about the year 666 ; § and Fleming thinks 
 it remarkable that Pope Vitalian in this year should 
 
 * See his Commentary on the New Testament, in loc. 
 
 + By what system of chronology is this sanctioned ? Accord- 
 ing to the Ussherian account this period consists of only 658 
 years. 
 
 t See his History of all Religions, pp. 207 — 213, London, 
 1812. 
 
 § See Trapp in Apoc. xiii. 18. 
 
65 
 
 first ordain that all public worship should be in La- 
 tin. * 
 
 *' Others have been of opinion that 666 refers 
 to the expiration of the Beast, which they thought 
 would have been in the year 1666, the number of 
 the thousand being dropped, as it is in our com- 
 mon way of speaking" ; as when we say, the Spa- 
 nish invasion was in 88, meaning 158S and the 
 civil wars began in 41, that is, 1641/' f Others 
 again have computed the 666 years, with the mille- 
 nary added, from the time of Christ's resurrection ; 
 and have, therefore, supposed that the Beast would 
 expire in 1699. J; But time has demonstrated the 
 fallacy of both these opinions. 
 
 The Rev. Robert Fleming says that the number 
 of the Beast is not to be solved by an arithmetical 
 computation of the numerical letters in his name ; 
 and considers that the Romish hierarchy is alone 
 designed, and not the whole body of Roman Ca- 
 tholics. § 
 
 .Fr. Junius understands the number &&& in a 
 way totally diiferent from other commentators ; 
 for he says it consists of sixes throughout; and as 
 six is a perfect number, it shews that all parts of 
 the Romish hierarchy agree with one another in 
 the most perfect manner, in order to deceive the 
 
 * See his Apocalyptical Key on this text; 
 i Gill on Rev. xiii. 18. 
 
 X See Beyerley's Great Line of Prophet" '^al Time. 
 % See his Fulfilling of the Scripture, pp. 155, 156. Edit. Lond. 
 1726. 
 
 F 
 
66 
 
 world. Fpr an attestation of this opinion he 
 brings forward a case in which Pope Boniface 
 VIII. commended by the number six those decre- 
 tals which he perfected in the proem of the sixth 
 bookj " Which booke (sayeth hee) being- to be 
 added vnto fine other bookes of the same volume 
 of Decretals, wee thought good to name Sextum 
 the sixt : that the same volume by addition thereof 
 conteining a senarie, or the number of sixe bookes 
 (which is a number perfect) may yeeld a perfect 
 forme of managing all things, and perfect disci- 
 pline of behauiour." * 
 
 Huthmannus and Zacharias Portzigius have 
 imagined that the letters Xjr^ which stand for the 
 number 666^ may be also designed to point out the 
 initials of Antichrist's name or actions. The ex- 
 ample given by the former is Xojg-ov ^bvI^ovto. 
 ^au^cov, f " crucifying the hospitable Christ;" and 
 
 * See L. Tomson's English Bible in loc. Amstel. 1633. 
 + This mode of solving a mystery, by means of the initial let- 
 ters contained in ft, is called by the Rabbins Notaricon, and was 
 sometimes used among the Greeks, as is evident in the Pseudo- 
 sibylline oracles, where the following lines are made upou the 
 n^me of our first father : 
 
 Autos Srj ©eof fV9' TTAatraj rsrpocypoiiJi,[ji,atoy 'AiJa^aj 
 Tov tp'Mtov irXxtr^svta, y.a) ovvo^a, itXripuKTOLvra. 
 'KvtQXlfjv rsy Su(nv re, jU,£cr7)ja?cjav rf, kcc) apy.tov. 
 
 Nimirum Deus is finxit tetragrammaton Adam ; 
 Qui primfim fictus fuit, et qui nomine complet 
 Ortus, Occasus, Austrum, Boreamque rigentem. 
 
 " For that God formed the four-lettered Adam, who was first 
 formed, and comprehends in his name, the East, the West, the. 
 
67 
 
 that of the latter is 'S.oi^oy.a)(^^g ^u^s»? g's<pavoi^o^og, 
 *' the shaved opposer of Christy wearing' the crown." 
 The opinion of C. A. Heumannus upon the 
 number 666 is truly sing-ular. He says, '' the 
 mark and character of the Beast is XJr . This" 
 he adds '' is not to be taken in the literal sense, as 
 if the number 6^Q were intended ; but the solution 
 of the aenigma is as follo\^s : the false prophet has 
 on his front and back the appearance of a Christian^ 
 (for X is the first letter of the name of Christ, and 
 $■ is the last, or rather the first letter of the second 
 syllable,) and he will be accounted a guide of the 
 Christian church, and boasts himself to be the Vi- 
 car of Christ. But the snake lies concealed in the 
 grass, i. e. he has the § (which is the figure of the 
 serpent or devil, Apoc. xii. 9. and xx. 2.) in the 
 middle, as if in his belly, or within his skin. The 
 serpent, therefore, or the devil, animates him, go- 
 verns him, speaks through him, and kills the 
 saints." * 
 
 South, and freezing North." See Oracul. Sibyl. Lib. ii. or iii. 
 and Biblioiheca Patrum, Tom. VIII. The above is more clearly 
 explained by Cyprian in his treatise upon the mountains of Sion 
 and Sinai ; and by Augustine in his ninth and tenth Dissertations 
 upon John. The East is called by the Greeks 'AvaroA^, thq 
 West Ao'cnj, the North 'Aojcrjf, and the South Msrrj^^plx. The 
 initials of these words evidently make the word 'A^oiu.^ the name 
 of the first man. Sae Iren- adv. Ilaereses, p. 164,. note 1. 
 
 * Signum bestise et character est X^r'. Hoc non est rapien-. 
 dum sensu literali, quasi numerus 666 denotetur. Sed hsec est 
 hujus ajnigmatis mens; pseudopropheta ille a fronte et a tergo 
 speciem praebet Christianismi (X enim est prima litera nominis 
 
 F2 
 
68 
 
 Irenaeus gives it as his opinion that the number 
 of Antichrist was prefigured by the age of Noah 
 at the deluge, connected with the height and width 
 of Nebuchadnezzar's image. " For/' says he, ''that 
 image which was erected by Nabuchodonosor had 
 indeed the height of sixty, and the width of six cu- 
 bits, which image Ananias, Azarias, and Misael, 
 refused to worship, and were consequently cast in- 
 to a furnace of fire, prophesying, by what hap- 
 pened to them, the burning of the saints which is 
 to take place towards the end of the world. For 
 the whole of this image was a prototype of the 
 coming of him who should command himself to be 
 worshipped by all. The six hundred years, there- 
 fore, of Noah, in whose time the deluge happened 
 because of apostasy, and the number of the cubits 
 of that image through which the just were thrown 
 into a furnace of fire, point out the number of the 
 name of that man in whose person will be concen- 
 trated all the apostasy, injustice^, wickedness, false- 
 prophecy, and deceit, of six thousand years ; and 
 
 Christi, et r est ultima ejus litera, yel, si mavis, r et prima ii- 
 tera secundse syllabae nominis Christi,) et Tult haberi pro Duce 
 Ecclesise Christianae, seque jactat esse Vicarium Christi ; rerum 
 iatet anguis in herb^, h. e. in medio ; et quasi in ventre suo, sive 
 intus et in cute habet ro ^, quae est figura Serpentis, i. e. Dia- 
 boli, Apocalyps. xii. 9. et xx. 2. Serpens igifur, sive Diabolus, 
 animat eum, et gubernat, per eumque loquitur et Sanctos occidit. 
 See Wolfius in Apoc. xiii. 18. and Biblioth. Biemense, Class I. 
 pp. 864, 869. 
 
69 
 
 on account of which impieties the fire shall succeed 
 the deluge." * 
 
 M. Testard^ of Blois in France, entertained the 
 following" opinion of the number 666 ; viz. " That 
 the number of 666 ariseth from the multiplication 
 of 3 unites joyned together^ making up the number 
 of III. That these three unites set forth the 
 three offices of Christy which pertain to him incom- 
 municably, and distributively, and conjoyntly con- 
 sidered : in which consists particularly his Anti- 
 christianism. And this multiphcation produceth 
 the number of 666; as also the multiplication of 
 
 ^ Ilia enim quae fuit a Nabuchodonosor instituta imago, alti- 
 tudinem quidem habuit cubitorum scxaginta, latitudinem autem 
 cubitorum sex : propter quam et Ananias, et Azarias, et Misael, 
 non adorantes earn, in caminum inissi sunt ignis, per id quod eis 
 evenit, prophetantes earn, quae in finem futura est justorum suc- 
 censio. Universa enim imago ilia praefiguratio fuit hujus adven- 
 tus, ab omnibus omnino hominibus ipsum solum decernens ado- 
 rari. Sexcenti itaque anni Noe, sub quo fuit diluvium propter 
 apostasiam, et numerus cubitorum imaginis, propter quam justi 
 in caminum ignis missi sunt, numerum nominis significat illius, in 
 quern recapitulatur sex millium annorum omnis apostasia, et in- 
 justitia, et nequitia, et pseudoprophetia, et dolus : propter quae 
 et diluvium superveniet ignis. 
 
 The Greek of the preceding translation, which is extant, is as 
 follows : Ms^pis ou rj ro-j Na^ny^oSovda-wp dvas-a^slo-x smuivj 
 
 yap Tj Eijcwy iKslvri ifporvirwa-ig -^v rrjs rov oivrt^plra itapatrias' 
 to. oyv y^ lfr\ rou Nw£, £(p' ov KaraxXva-jMOi sysvsro Stai ry\v 
 
 drfos'occlxvy xai o '7fi^^i(r[j,os rrj; shovog, rov dpi^^lv^ wg 
 
 iip-t)ra.t^ ffyjiiaivsa-if rov ovoft^aros, elj ov crvyx£(pa\ix.iovroi.i twv r' 
 Bttay TTacra difos-oca-ia, — xai dSixlx, kcc) itovrjplay • 
 
 Iren. adv. Haereses, Lib. v. cap. 29, pp. 446, 447. 
 
70 
 
 12 by 12, which is the apostolical number, produc- 
 eth the 144000."* 
 
 Some authors, among whom Francis Potter, B. D, 
 is chiefly conspicuous, have offered a very inge- 
 nious interpretation of the number 666. The 
 foundation upon which it is laid is, that the num- 
 ber of the Beast is an kvTigaiyja. to the number of 
 the virgin company and New Jerusalem, which re- 
 present the true and apostolic church, whose num- 
 ber is always derived from twelve. As this inter- 
 pretation has been so highly esteemed by the 
 greatest divines of the seventeenth century, I 
 shall, therefore, examine Dr. Potter's dissertation 
 upon it in very minute detail, as it is the most 
 elaborate yet given upon the number of the Beast. 
 This author maintains, that as the number 144 
 mystically designates the church and kingdom of 
 Jesus Christ, and is sacred and mysterious only in 
 its reference to the number twelve, which is the 
 square root of it, and upon which it is founded; 
 so, likewise, the number 666 is only mysterious 
 (reasoning ex adverso respondentia) in its refer- 
 ence to 25, the greatest whole number contained in 
 its root. This being allowed, he goes on to inform 
 us, that as 144, the square of 12, represents the 
 whole church founded upon the holy hierarchy of 
 the Twelve Apostles ; so also, 666 represents the 
 whole Antichristian empire of the Papacy founded 
 upon the Antichristian hierarchy. To make good 
 
 * Mede's Works, pp. 792, 793, Edit. Lond. 1662. 
 
71 
 
 this assertion, he shews us, that as the number 12 
 is found in the entire structure of Jerusalem which 
 is the church and holy city, viz. twelve gates, 
 twelve ang-els at the gates, twelve tribes written on 
 the gates, twelve foundations with names written 
 on them, twelve thousand furlongs, the measure of 
 the city, and twelve manner of fruits of the tree 
 of life ; * so also the number 25 prevails in the 
 Papistical hierarchy. As, first, in the number of 
 Cardinals, which, at their first institution, were 25, 
 considered in opposition to the Apostles, which 
 were but 12. f Secondly, in respect to the num- 
 ber of churches into Avhich Christian Rome was 
 originally divided, which were 25, in opposition to 
 the Heavenly Jerusalem, which has but twelve 
 gates, the churches in which baptism was per- 
 formed corresponding to the gates of the city. J 
 
 * See Potter's interpretation of the number 666, pp. 98, 99, 
 Oxford, 1642 ; and L'Accomplissement des Propheties par le S. 
 P. J. P. E. P. E. Th. A. R. Tom. I. pp. 93, et seq. Rotter- 
 dam, 1686. 
 
 + See Potter, c. 19. The foundation of the Roman PontifTs 
 subsequent greatness is dated by this author from the time of the 
 removal of the imperial seat from Rome to Constantinople. 
 
 X The gates of the ancient Jerusalem are thus reckoned by 
 Villalpand, in his " Apparatus Urbis et Templi," Tom. III. viz. 
 Portae Fontis, Stercoris, Vallis, Anguli, Ephraim, Vetus, Pis- 
 cium, Benjamin, Gregis, Equarum, Aquarum, et Fiscalis. See 
 Potter, p. 141. The names of the Roman gates are thus given 
 by Onuphrius : viz. Portae Flumentana, Collatina, Quirinalis, 
 Viminalis, Gabinia, Esquilina, Coeliraontana, Latina, Capena, 
 Ostiensis, Portuensis, Janiculensis, Sextimiana, Aurelia, Quer- 
 
 9 
 
n 
 
 Tbirdly, in the number of the parishes or tribes, 
 which were 25 in Rome, in opposition to the 
 Heavenly Jerusalem, which has but 12 tribes, as 
 appears by the 21st chapter of the Apocalypse. * 
 Fourthly, in the number of the foundations of 
 Rome, which are 25 cardinals, originally consti- 
 tuting- the Sacred College, which is called the foun- 
 dation of the church : in opposition to the Holy 
 City, which has but 12 foundations, which are the 
 12 apostles, f Fifthly, in the number of the an- 
 gels, that is to say, of the head-pastors, which were 
 the 25 cardinals which constituted the Sacred Col- 
 lege; in opposition to the twelve angels, or twelve 
 head-pastors of the primitive Christian church, 
 which were the twelve apostles. J Sixthly, in the 
 number of the gates of Rome, which were 25 ; in 
 opposition to Jerusalem which has but 12 gates. § 
 Seventhly, in the extent of the City of Rome, 
 which was 25 thousand furlongs ; in opposition to 
 the extent of the Heavenly Jerusalem, which is but 
 12,000 furlongs. || Eighthly, in the number of 
 the fruits of the tree of life, which are the articles 
 
 quetularia, Piacularis, Catulavia, Minutia, Mugionia, Sanqualis, 
 Naevia, Randuscula, Lavercalis, Libitinensis, et Triumphalis. 
 See Potter, p. 145. These gates Onuphrius says existed between 
 the times of Pliny and Justinian. 
 
 * Ibid. c. 19. + Ibid. t Ibid. § Ibid, c; 20. 
 
 ]1 Ibid. c. 21. This point is not well maintained, as the au- 
 thor has assumed the circuit of Rome to be 14 and a half miles, 
 which is only the mean of different authorities upon this subject, 
 no one historian having asserted it to be of this dimension.- 
 
73 
 
 of faith, because the righteous live by faith. The 
 articles of the Christian faith are 12 ; but those of 
 the Papistical creed amount to 25. * Besides the 
 eight principal divisions of similitude between the 
 Christian and Papistical hierarchies. Dr. Potter 
 observes that the number 25 prevails in all the de- 
 pendencies of the Papacy : f as, for instance, there 
 were 25 abbots in England, as Camden testifies, 
 which had a vote in the Parliament ; the number 
 of the monks, friers, and sing^ing- mass-priests in 
 several of their abbies, priories, monasteries, and 
 other Papistical assemblies, were 25 ; the knights of 
 the order of the Virgin Mary resident at Rome, in 
 the court of the Pope, were 25, and the same num- 
 ber at Loretto ; the penitentiary court at Rome 
 consisted of 25 officers ; upon the top and high 
 terrace of St. Peter's at Rome is placed a gilded 
 cross of 25 hand-breadths in height, upon a gilded 
 globe of brass; in the forepart of this church are 
 five gates which are commonly used, and another 
 gate, called Porta Sancta, which stands open only 
 one year in 25 ; J in the same church, (as also in 
 that of St. Mary the Greater,) have been about 
 twenty-five altars § besides the great square altar 
 
 * See Potter, c. 22. The creed consisting of 25 articles, is 
 that famous one agreed upon by the council of Trent, and 
 composed by Pope Pius IV. 
 
 + Ibid. c. 24, pp. 166—171. 
 
 X Ibid. c. 25. Onuph. de prsecip. Basil, c. 4. 
 
 § The twenty-five altars here mentioned are those that existed 
 in the old cathedral of St. Peter's at Rome ; for, in consequence 
 
74 
 
 or sepulchre of Si. Peter, the measure of each side 
 of which is precisely 25 feet, and upon which no 
 man may celebrate mass but the Pope only ; upon 
 almost all their altars they have 25 squares on each 
 side, and in five squares of the upper side are im- 
 printed five times five cinques or round spots, in 
 allusion to Christ's five wounds ; these five cinques 
 are also accounted a symbolical device, and made 
 armorial, and are inserted into the arms of the 
 king of Spain, the emperor of the Romans, and 
 the archduke of Austria ; the Pope and cardinals 
 cause them to be imprinted in the frontispiece of 
 several books published at Rome for their better 
 success, and their greater confirmation ; their mass 
 of Christ's five wounds five times multiplied and 
 repeated is pretended to have been commanded by 
 the archangel Raphael ; their celebration of the 
 Jubilee takes place every 25 years ; their priests, 
 deacons, subdeacons, &c. are not accounted of a 
 perfect age till they have attained 25 years ; their 
 chief holidays are upon the 25th day of the month ; 
 upon the 25th day of December is the beginning 
 of the Popish year, and the celebration of Christ's 
 nativity ; upon the 25th of January is the conver- 
 sion of St. Paul ; &c. &c. &c. * It is also observed 
 that the general council of Trent was begun by 
 25 prelates, continued 25 sessions, ended with the 
 
 of the addition of building to this church in the 16th century, 
 the number of altars Jias been considerably increased. See 
 Potter, c. 25. 
 
 * Potter, c. 26, pp. 176—180. 
 
75 
 
 subscription of 25 archbishops ; and, last of all, the 
 doctrine and faith decreed in this council was after- 
 wards by the Pope and his cardinals reduced * to a 
 set form of words naturally branching themselves 
 into 25 articles. Finally, the number 25 is thought 
 by Dr. Potter to be peculiarly applicable to the 
 Papacy, as this number has been esteemed, both by 
 Heathens and Christians, a sign of evil, as Jerome,^ 
 Lyra, and Peter Serranus fully attest, f As to the 
 objection why 666 is called the number of the 
 Beast, as 25 is not the square root of 666, but of 
 625, Dr. Potter has given several very ingenious 
 answers : ^ the principal of which are the follow- 
 ing: If the number of the Beast had been called 
 625, then the square root would be exactly 25, and 
 in no respect could be called 26; which would give 
 the Jesuits room to object that the first number of 
 cardinals was 26, and not 25, as the Pope is also 
 numbered among the cardinals, it being customary 
 to paint a cardinal's hat upon the Pope's coffin, 
 thereby pointing him to be one of their number. 
 Secondly, if the number of the Beast had been 
 called 676, then the square root could in no sense 
 be said to be 25 but 26, in which case it might be 
 alleged that the Pope is Vicarius Christi, and 
 therefore not to be numbered among the cardinals. 
 Thirdly, if the number of the Beast had been call- 
 
 * Potter, c. 22. 
 
 t Ibid. c. 12. See Jerome upon Ezekiel viii. and xi. 
 
 i Ibid. c. 27, and 28. 
 
76 
 
 ed 605, that is, mid-way between the squares of 
 25 and 26, then the square root could not be pro- 
 perly denominated either 25 or 26. Fourthly, if 
 the number of the Beast had been one of the num- 
 bers between 625 and 650, then the root could in 
 no sense be called 26, which it was necessary it 
 should in order to meet the objection that the Pope 
 may be reckoned one of the cardinals. Fifthly, 
 of all the numbers between 650 and 676 there is 
 none that could be chosen with so much propriety 
 as 666, as not only the whole number of the root 
 is 25, but the numerator of the fraction is also 25, 
 the denominator being assumed 31, or more ex- 
 actly 258069758. * Another reason given by the 
 Dr. why 666 is chosen, is that it may also compre- 
 hend AarsTvog-, and divers other words which have 
 an allusion to the Papacy. 
 
 Such is the general outline of Dr. Potter's most 
 ingenious interpretation of the number 666, upon 
 which Mr. Mede has ppssed a very high and de- 
 served encomium. That the number 25 has pre- 
 vailed in the Papacy in many of the respects men- 
 tioned above no person will attempt to deny ; and 
 that the foundation on which the Dr. builds his su- 
 perstructure is very substantial, all must allow who 
 consider that 12 the number used in the composi- 
 tion of the New Jerusalem, is similarly spoken of 
 in the very book of prophecy where the number of 
 the Beast is revealed. The principal objection 
 
 * See Potter, r. U, pp. 64, 65. 
 
77 
 
 against this interpretation arises from the number 
 666 not being" the exact square of 25 ; and^ though 
 it must be allowed that the Dr. has replied to this 
 objection with very great ingenuity, as may be ob- 
 served above, yet I am far from thinking that his 
 arguments are conclusive. For it is totally incre- 
 dible that the Divine choice of the number 666 in- 
 stead of any other between 650 and 676 should 
 have been directed by the circumstance of its 
 square root being 25^^ especially when it is consi- 
 dered that this is not the exact root, but only a very 
 near approximation to it. It is also very improba- 
 ble that 666 should have been selected in prefer- 
 ence to any other between 650 and 676 because 
 AotreTvog and some other words contain this number 
 according to the rules of gematria ; for what rela- 
 tion has the computation of the total value of the 
 letters in Antichrist's name with the extraction of 
 the square root ? Upon the whole the interpreta- 
 tion, as it respects the surd quantity 25^' + is greatly 
 complicated, and totally incompatible with the sim- 
 plicity and consequent perspicuity necessary in a 
 prophecy of Scripture. 
 
 A majority of the various opinions of commen- 
 tators upon the number of the Beast has now been 
 noticed ; and it is worthy of remark, that a consi- 
 derable number are directed against the Pope or 
 his power, or the monarchies in communion with 
 him. But, notwithstanding the numerous attempts 
 in this way, it is abundantly evident, that not one 
 of those already before the public can be legiti- 
 
78 
 
 niately produced as an absolutely unequivocal de- 
 monstration that the Pope or his power is the 
 Beatst of the Apocalypse. For even those two 
 which appear to apply the best^ {^Aarzivog and 
 n'*''D'Tl,) are defective in so many particulars, that 
 it is impossible for any person to demonstrate either 
 of these to be the name intended. And as the 
 truth is necessarily free from every species of am- 
 biguity ; consequently every interpretation of the 
 number which is not sufficient to elucidate every 
 syllable uttered by the Spirit of God concerning 
 the Beast ought to be considered but of compara- 
 tively little moment. As for those interpretations 
 which respect Mohammed, Luther, Calvin, and 
 others, they are all (if we except Ludovicus) so ex- 
 cessively defective in their orthography, or so ex- 
 tremely unnatural in their formation, that no rea- 
 sonable person could, after a deep perusal of the 
 prophecy, suppose any one of them to be the name 
 or thing intended. And with respect to Ludovicus, 
 a word so strenuously supported by the Rev. David 
 Simpson, Bicheno, and others ; though its ortho- 
 graphy be correct, yet it must be allowed, that its 
 application to the French monarch Louis XIV. 
 as at first intended, or to the whole of the French 
 monarchs of this name, is perfectly indefinite^ as 
 there is no sufficient reason why these, more than 
 any other of the French kings in the service of 
 the Papacy, should be pointed out in the pro- 
 phecy. 
 Before vf^ close this chapter it will be highly 
 
79 
 
 necessary to examine a various reading of the 
 number of the Beast which existed in some copies 
 of the Revelation as far back as the time of Ire- 
 naeus. This reading- consists in stating the num- 
 ber of the Beast to be 616 instead of 666; but 
 Iren^eus positively asserts that the latter is the 
 proper reading, and attributes the other either to 
 the carelessness or wilful perversion of the copy- 
 ists. He further observes^ that he is " entirely ig- 
 norant how some could have deviated from the vul- 
 gar reading, in vitiating the middle number of his 
 name, and subtracting fifty from it, writing only 
 one decad instead of six decads." * It is impossi- 
 ble that a greater evidence for the number (S^^ 
 could be produced than that of Irenaeus, as this 
 father flourished only about a century after the 
 writing of the Apocalypse, and consequently was 
 best qualified to correct a vitious reading that 
 might creep into the text. Hippolytus, who flou- 
 rished not more than about 30 years later than 
 Irenseus, says, '' that Antichrist's seal upon his 
 forehead, and upon his right hand, is the number 
 %QQ." f And though the Codex Ephrem rescrip- 
 
 * Ovy. oiScc TfuJ; k(r(paXY^(ra,v rlvs§ litay.oXH^rio-a.vtsg IJfwrffr^u;, 
 ■KcCi rov iJ,&<roy r^Urrjcav dpiQiMy rou ovo^ocrog y' ■^T^<pi(ry,a, J^ixovrgf, 
 >tai avT< Tcuv i^ SsKclouiv fj^lccy osKclSa ^aXo^iyoi Hvai. — Iren. Lib. 
 T. c. 30, p. 447. 
 
 + "'H Sa (Ti^/jayV a,ufov ett) tou ^.zrdnts^ Y.oLi kit) r-^j Ss^itxg %£i/)Of 
 Ir* ^I/^ipoj %?r^ — Beati Hippolyti de Consummat. Mundi et de 
 Antichr. p. 355, Tom. IX. Bibliotheca Patrum. 
 
80 
 
 tus lias 616, yet in nearly all the most ancient MSS. 
 it is 666. * Among these stands pre-eminent that 
 most ancient MS. in the British Museum, the Co- 
 dex Alexandrinus, f in which the number is ex- 
 pressed at full length, thus s^axoa-ioi e^T^xovra e^. 
 To complete the evidence for 666 we can add, that 
 there is no example of computation extant, among 
 the vast variety in ancient Greek writers, which is 
 founded upon the number 616. 
 
 * See Griesbach and Wetstein in loc. 
 
 + This MS. is supposed to have been written sometime be- 
 twixt the fourth and seyenth centuries. 
 
81 
 
 {(TJ 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 The meaning of the prophetic pymhol Beast, as- 
 certained — The number 666 must be contained 
 in the Greek name of some power expressed in 
 the most simple form of Dbhich the language is 
 capable — The species of power represented hif 
 the Apocalyptic Beast, dejiionstrated to be the re- 
 gal or imperial — The number in the various 
 kingdoms or empires that have appeared in the 
 world, for which there are Greek appellations , 
 computed — Only one kingdom or empire contains 
 the number of the Beast, which must be that of 
 Antichrist. 
 
 Having examined in detail a vast variety of 
 opinions respecting- the number 666^ and demon- 
 istrated that they are all insufficient to explain the 
 whole that is predicted concerning the Beast ; it 
 must now be shewn in what mode of consider- 
 ing this subject we shall be the most likely to meet 
 with success. In the first place^ it will be neces- 
 sary to define the prophetic symbol Beast, as the 
 want of a proper understanding of this term hag 
 probably been one reason why so many discordant 
 hypotheses have been published to the world. In 
 
 G 
 
this investigation it is impossible to resoft to a 
 higher authority than Scripture, for Scripture 
 must always be the best interpreter of Scripture ; 
 and it is also sufficiently evident that what is meant 
 by the term Beast in any one prophetic vision, the 
 same species of thing must be represented by 
 the same term whenever it is used in a similar 
 way in any other part of the Sacred Oracles. 
 Having, therefore, laid this foundation, the an- 
 gel's interpretation of the last of Daniel's four 
 Beasts need only be produced, an account of which 
 is given in the seventh chapter of this prophet. 
 Daniel being very desirous to '^' know the truth of 
 the fourth Beast which was diverse from all the 
 
 others, exceeding dreadful— and of the ten 
 
 horns that were in his head," &c. the angel thus 
 interprets the vision. " The fourth beast, shall be 
 the fourth kingdom upon earth, which shall be di- 
 verse from all kingdoms, and shall devour the 
 whole earth, and shall tread it down, and break it 
 in pieces. And the ten horns out of this kingdom 
 are ten kings that shall arise," &c. In this Scrip- 
 ture it is plainly declared, that the fourth Beast 
 should be the fourth kingdom upon earth ; conse- 
 quently, the four beasts seen by Daniel are four 
 kingdoms. Hence the term Beast is the prophetic 
 symbol for a kingdom. In further illustration of 
 this point, it is said, that ''the fourth beast shall 
 be diverse from all the beasts that were before it ;" 
 that is to say, (taking up the angel's interpreta- 
 tion,) -^'^e fourth kingdom shall be diverse from 
 
till kingdoms."' It is also remarkable that the 
 fourth beast of Daniel has a very strikhig- resem- 
 blance to the Beast of St. John. The former ia 
 represented as rising out of the sea ; so is the lat- 
 ter : the former "' devours the whole earthy treads it 
 down^ and breaks it in pieces ;" the latter has "' pow- 
 er over all kindreds^ and tongues, and nations:" the 
 formei' has ten horns ; this is also the striking" cha-r 
 racteristic of the latter : the former shall be over- 
 thrown by the kingdom of Christ ; so must the lat- 
 ter. Consequently if Daniel's fourth beast repre- 
 sents some kingdom ; for the very same reason, some 
 kingdom must be typified by the Apocalyptic Beast. 
 As to the nature of the kingdom which is repre- 
 sented by the term Beast, we shall obtain no incon- 
 siderable light, in examining the most proper 
 meaning of the original word rr^H- This Hebrew 
 word is translated in the Septuagint by the Greek 
 •word (drjolov, and both words signify what we term 
 '' a wild beast ;" and the latter is the one used by 
 St. John in the Apocalypse. Taking up the Greek 
 word 0rjoiov in this sense, it is fully evident, if a 
 power be represented in the prophetical writings 
 under the notion of a wild beast, that the power so 
 represented, must partake of the nature of a wild 
 beast. Hence, an earthly belligerent power is evi- 
 dently designed. And the comparison is peculiarly 
 appropriate ; for, as several species of wild beasts 
 carry on perpetual warfare with the animal world; 
 so most govei'nments, influenced by ambition, pro- 
 Riote discord and depopulation. And^ also, as the 
 
 G 2 
 
g4 
 
 ^'arnivorous wild beast acquires hi« strength and 
 magnitude by preying- upon the feebler animals, so 
 most earthly monarchies are raised up by the sword, 
 and derive their political consequence from the un- 
 successful resistance of (he contending nations. 
 The three first beasts of Daniel are likened to a 
 lion^ a bear^ and a leopard^ respectively ; conse- 
 quently, the powers represented by these beasts 
 must have resembled these animals : i. e. they were 
 remarkably cruel, and continually hostile. The 
 fourth beast is not likened to any animal, but is re- 
 presented as of unprecedented voracity, and as de- 
 stroying all before it ; therefore, the fourth king- 
 *[om is raised up by extraordinary means, and is ag- 
 grandised by the total desolation of the earth. The? 
 kingdom of God, on the other hand, is represented 
 as a stone " cut out of the mountain without hands," 
 that is, without the instrumentality of earthly power ; 
 and is never resembled to a heast, because it is not- 
 raised up by the sword, as all other secular powers 
 are, but sanctifies the persons under its subjection, 
 in which last particular it essentially differs from all 
 other dominations. From what has been already 
 said, it is sufficiently evident that the Beast of the 
 Revelation is some secular /jottje?-; conseqnently the 
 number of the Beast must be the number of the 
 power represented by the Beast; that is to say, 
 the name of some power now existing must contain 
 the number (S&Q. 
 
 We are noAv to consider what is the most simple 
 Greek mode of naming a power ; for it is- evkleat 
 
85 
 
 no complex expression would have been used, 
 when one less involved might have bee4i adopted. 
 It hence follows^, that if tlic Greek name of 
 some power complexly expressed, could be proved 
 to contain the number 666, the very want of sim- 
 plicity in the expression would be an unanswer- 
 able objection to it ; even if all other things 
 were in perfect harmony with the symbolical lan- 
 guage of the Apocalypse respecting* this power. 
 The Greeks had only four modes of definitely * 
 naming a power; which could be denominated, 
 by any construct ion_, simple expressions. These, 
 (making use of the Roman power by way of ex- 
 amplej were expressed as follows: '^H rtou *Pw- 
 IxoLiaiv oiq^yji, (the power of the Romans^ ''H Tw«- 
 /jta»a)V oL%xh, (the power of the RomansJ'^H ao;;^^ ^ 
 "VioiKrxi^y], (the Roman power,) and ''H Tro/^aixi^ 
 aoyr^, (the Roman power.) Of these four expres- 
 eigns f it is evident that the fir§t is the most in- 
 
 * The indefinite form used by Ghronologers as a title to their 
 sections, and illustrated in the examples Bao-tAei'a KopivSlojVj 
 Kingdom of the Corinthians, and liacnKila. Aar/va-v, Kingdom of 
 the Latins, (Euseb. Pamph. pp. 367, 383,) can have no place in 
 I his argument, as it is The Name of the Beast for which we are 
 searching. 
 
 + The following are examples in illustration of the four forms 
 above referred to : 
 
 Examples of the first form. 
 
 "H rcyy AlyuTrTicciy /SaciAs/a, The kingdom of the Egyptians. 
 Euseb. Pamph. Chronicou, a Scaliger, p. 47, Amstel. 1658.-^ 
 A( t'Mv A-'iyjirmZv /SasriAf/aj, The kingdoms of the Egyptians, 
 lb. p. 7. — -"H tmv MaxfeiJ^ivwy fSatriAEtx, The kingdom of the 
 
86 
 
 volved, as it contains both the f^rcatest quantity of 
 letters, and the highest number. Besides, thie ex-^ 
 
 Macedonians, lb. p. 57. — ■"'H rwv 'A:d.to:v (oxrilt.slx^ The kirigi 
 
 dom of the Arabs, Jb. p. 14.-— 'H txv Sr/.ua-victv, r;roj TLsXoT'iv-^ 
 
 vryiivv Aeyo/xEvo-y pacriAEi'iz, The kingdom of the SicyrniaiiSj alsoj 
 
 called Peloponnesians, lb. p. 27. — ^^H roov ''Eps-^hiouj^ jSacriAeia, 
 
 The kingdom of the Erechthidaj, lb. p. 35, 131. — -"'H rr,^ 'A(tIxs 
 
 ^xe-iXilxy The kingdom of Asia, lb. p. 66, — ^'H rd-v ' KrTiy.SJy 
 
 ^OLo-iKilx, The kingdom of the Athenians, lb. p. 416, — ■*!! rtZv 
 
 ^Af(rvplu>y ^ari/^la, The empire of the Assyrians, lb. p. 32, 356, 
 
 357. — Ty)y rwv 'iH^ccluiy ^aa-iXsiccv, The kingdom of the Jews, lb. 
 
 p. 197. — Tr^v tivv 'Fmaal'xv ^aciXelxv, The empire of the Ror 
 
 mans. Josephi Scaligeri, Animad. in Euseb. p. 9. — -"^H rujv Mv- 
 
 •^y-j'Zy dcyji^ The power of the Mycenx. Euscb. Pamph. Chron. 
 
 p. 35. — T-^; tiMV nsc(rijuv (oy-triXslcc^, Of the empire of the Persians. 
 
 Diodorus Siculus, Vol, II. Lib. ii, p. 33, Edit. Bipont. Ann. vii. 
 
 — Tt/V rwv Qpa%ujv (^xo-iXslxv, The kingdom of the Thracians, 
 
 Ibid; Vol. II. Lib. iii. p. 357, Edit, ^ipont.— Tt^v tuv 'Ufxy,- 
 
 "kzi^wv ^aciXilay, The kingdom of the Heraclidae, lb. Vol. 
 
 VI. Lib. xiv. p. 40. — Tv 7M-/ AaTi'va'v apyj^-, The power of 
 
 the Latins. Dionysius Ilalicarn. Antiq. Rom. p. 249, Edit. 
 
 Lipsiae, 1691. — Tr;^ rJy IxXxai-Aiw ^xmXslx;, Of the kingdom 
 
 of the Salammians. Diod. Sic. Vol. VI. Lib. xv. p. 382.— T;;; 
 
 •Tou $o;vjKOf /3cc(r{A£(a;, Of the kingdom of Phenice. MichaeliS 
 
 Glycx, Part ii. p. 108, Veuet. 1729, Byzant. Histor. Corpus. 
 
 — Triv tiZv TovpKvjv dpy^riv, The power of the Turks. Niceph. 
 
 Greg. Tom. I. Lib. v. c. 5, p. 70. Edit. Byzant. Histor. 1729.— 
 
 *H rcov 'Pi:j[x,xljjv dpyj.y The power of the Romans. Joannis 
 
 Zonara; Annales, pp. 94, 356, Edit. Byzant. Hist. 1729. — Tv;z 
 
 Twv AxrlvMv ^xcriXclxvj The kingdom of the Ijatins. Diod. Sici 
 
 Lib. Tiii. p. 21. 
 
 . Examples cf the second form. 
 T-^y ISI-^'Jx'v ^xcriXsiavy The empire of the Medes. Euseh. 
 Pamph. p. 47. — ^'H AvS:Sv px<TiXalxj The kingdom of the Ly» 
 l^liansj lb. .pp. 50, 163, 367.— "H ^ocvi'.vfwv jSas-iAsIa, The king- 
 
 4 
 
$7 
 
 pression *H[ toJv 'P^ojaaiaJv af;^i the power of the 
 Romans, is not the direct name of the Roman 
 
 dom of the Sicyouians, lb. p. 19. — -^'H Uepc-ouv I2a.<ri/.£la, The 
 empire of the Persians, lb. p. 177, 369. — ^'H Mvy.riva.lujv ^ounXHay 
 The kingdom of the Mycenae, lb. p. 231. — ^Tr]y 'EAXy^i^v jSaci- 
 AEi'av, The empire of the Greeks, lb. p. 370. — -^H 'Pccixalxv dc- 
 ^r), The power of the Romans. Athensti Deipnoscph. Vol. I. p. 
 382. Edit. Bipont. — TtJs SxuSwv (SunXsU;, Of the empire of the 
 Scythians. Died. Sic. Vol. I. Lib. iii. p. 178. — Tr,v Aarlvcav dc- 
 XVj The power of the Latins. Joannis Zonarae Aunal. p. 236. — 
 Trjv Aoc^ivv |3a(r(A£(av, The kingdom of the Lazi. Agathiae Scho- 
 lastici, Lib. i. p. 11. Edit. Byzant. Histor. 1729. — Tr)v Aailvxy 
 rjyBiJ.ovixvy Tijf Aarlvmy rjy£ij.ovl:i;, The government of the La- 
 tins. Dionysii Ilalic. Autiq. Rom. pp. 52, 249. — T7;v 'A^^avcuv 
 /Sao-iAfiay, The kingdom of the Albans, lb. p. 61.— Tijy 'Pa;- 
 uolIxv /SaeriXEiay, The kingdom of the Romans, lb. p. 121. — T:^^' 
 MiXryt'xv SacTiAsIa;, Of the kingdom of (he Milesians. Photii 
 Bibliotheca, col. 42, Edit. Rathoraagi, 1653, fol. — Tr]y 'IraXla^ 
 /3a(riA£(ay, The kingdom of Italy. Procop. Caesar. Hist. Lib. i. 
 fap. 30, p. 107. 
 
 I have met with no example of any nation expressed in the 
 third form ; yet the idiom of the language will bear it, as is evi- 
 dent to every one acquainted with the Greek tongue. 
 Examples of the fourth form. 
 
 Trjs'Pu)ixx\K7i; S'jvxrBlx;, Of the Roman dynasty. Euseb.Pamph. 
 p. 50. — -"'H Tlsco-ixri jSacrjAfla, The Persian empire. Thucyd. 
 Vol. I. Lib. i. p. 26, Edit. Bipont. Photii Bibliotheca, col. 108. 
 ' — Tt/V Uspffiy.TjV jSaciAgjav, The Persian empire. Euseb. Pamph, 
 p. 57, Diodor. Sicuk Vol. VIL Lib. xvii. p. 384.— Ty/ Utaicx" 
 ri-KYiV dcyy-j^ The Epirotic power. Euseb. Pampji. p. 38. — ^11 
 Max£i?oy(>cr; jSaci^.sly., The Macedonian empire, lb. p. 62.- — Ty// 
 May.siJoyiy.y/ /Sas-iAsiay, The Macedonian empire, lb. p. 45. Diod. 
 Sic. Vol. V. Lib. xii. p. 105. Zonara; Annal. p. 94. — T-^j Max.j-. 
 covixv}; ^xTiXslx;, Of the Macedonian empire. Diod. Sic. Vol. 
 IX. Lib. xxvi. p. 307. — 'Er-yj; rr^; Mxy.ihviKri§ /Sacr/Asi'aj f.'Jj', 
 
88 
 
 monarchy. The expression '11 Vcofxaiwv oiqx'^^ 
 the power of the Romans, is similar to the for- 
 
 In the 174th year of the Macedonian empire. Euseb. Pamph. 
 p. 63. — Tr~,' MansJoviJi-^f °^PX^ih Of the Macedonian power, lb. 
 p. 58. — Tyj; Max£ Jokjc^; Y,yau.oviag, Of the Macedonian govern- 
 ment. Euseb. Pamph. p. 74.*— "H May.eSovi>i^ ^Jva/x;;, The Ma- 
 cedonian power. Diod. Sic. Vol. IX. Lib. xxii. p. 293. — -*H 
 JlovrLKTJ (SsctTiXslx, The kingdom of Pontus. Dionysii Orbis De- 
 scriptio, Annotation. Eustathii, et Hen. Stephani necnou Guili- 
 elmi Hill, Edit. Lond. 1688. — T^; UovtiKYjs ^XTO.ila.g^ Of the 
 kingdom of Pontus. Strabo, pp. 833, 851. Lib. xii. Edit. 
 Amstel. 1707. — ToJ Katririsn eSvgj', Of the Caspian nation, lb. 
 Lib. xi, p. 768. — Ta 'UTrsipiorud, aSvTj, Thg Epirotic nations, 
 lb. Lib. V. p. 338.— Too lapiLanxou — eSvyj, Of the Sarma- 
 tian nation, lb. Lib. vii. p. 480. — Toy AloXixov I5v8^, Of the 
 iEolian nation, lb. Lib. viii. p. 514. — Twv 'itripr/.xv i^vJv, Of 
 the Iberian nations, lb. Lib. iii. p. 228. — Tr, Aajca'vocr 'no?.irgl'Xf 
 The Lacedemonian republir. Athen. Deip. Vol. IL p. 50.~ 
 T^f AaxMyiKYiS TroXmlac^ Of the Lacedemorian republic. Dio- 
 nys. Hal. p. 87. — T-^y 'Ivhxrjv O'jvaiMtv, The Indian power. Diod. 
 Sic. Vol. IL Lib. ii. p. 55. — Tijv Ba^vXwvlxv 0'';%^-', The Baby- 
 lonian power, lb. p. 85. — Tr^g 'IraXiKrjs dpyj)^:^ Of the Italian 
 power. Pacliymejris Hist. Lib. iii. c. 15, p. 133, Edit. Byzant. 
 Hist. 1729. — Tr, 'Vcvi^aixy dpxfij The Roman power. Georgii 
 Cedreui, Hist. Cempend. Part ii. p. 453. — T^c 'PMiMcc'lKyji /3atr<- 
 Xs/aj, Of the Roman empire. Joan. Zonar. Annal. p. 8 ; 
 Georgii Syacelli Chrcnographia, p. 156. Edit. Byzant. Hist. 
 1729; Georgii Cedreui Hist. Compead. Tom. I. p. 355. — Tr// 
 'Pw^aaV/cy/ ^ao-iXelav^ The Roman empire. Niceph. Caesar, p. 6, 
 Praefat. Veuet. 1729. Edit. Hist. Byzant. — Ti? ipayhy.^ ttoAi- 
 rf/a. The French government. Agathiai Scholastici, p. 13. — 
 T^; Tor^iKY^S Yiysij^ovla^, Of the Gothic government, lb. p. 27. 
 — Tr^v My^^ikyjv dpy^Yjv xa) ty^v A'jJocijv, The power of tlie Medes 
 and Lydians. E>ionysii Orbis Descriptio, p. 147. — Tr)v nro/.e- 
 fj.cc'ixYjv ^ccc-iXiUv, The kingdom of the Ptolemies. Diod. Sicc 
 
S3 
 
 mer In its import, though considerably more simple 
 in its construction. As to the number of letters of 
 >vhich it is composed, it is as concise an expression 
 as any u«ed by the Greeks ; but as it is not abso- 
 lutely the direct name of the power, this is one rea- 
 son why it should be rejected. Another reason is 
 founded upon the ambiguity of the two expressions 
 ^H rm 'Vio[xrxuov oioy^, and*^!! 'P(«^ai«5y OLoyy], which, 
 rendered into English, appear to have precisely 
 the same meaning; but whether the Greeks at- 
 tached a particular meaning to each of these it is 
 very difficult to determine. Therefore, supposing 
 the Roman power was the Beast which is num- 
 
 Vol. yil. Lib. xviil. p. 6^.— Trjc 'ArraXix-^; ipy.Ti\H%;^ Of (ha 
 kingdom of Attalus, lb. Vol. IX. Lib. xxxiii. p. 85. — To J Sa- 
 fjVa fSvtff, Of the S'bine nation, lb. p. 173. — Tfs s^rTrspla jSa- 
 ciXsls.^, Of the Mf'tern empire. Photii Biblioth. col. 42. 
 
 Of the two first forms for which we have given several authori- 
 ties, there are two varieties; viz. of the first, instead of To tujv 
 Tccy.uJv fJvoc, The nation of the Sacaj, we read To sho^ rxv Sav.wv, 
 Diod. Sic. Vol. n. Lib, ii. p. 104; for T-^j rou ^olvtxos jScca-i- 
 Aslx^, Of the kingdom of Phenice, we read Trj; pccriXelxi roiji 
 ^Cilyiy.o^, Joannis Malala*, Chronographia, p. 12. The variation 
 in the second form is illustrated in the following examples: in- 
 stead of T15V HepTuv jSacTiAet'av, we read T-i;v (^a<n\ah.v Iltpcrxvy 
 The empire of the Persians; instead of Tr// iV^iuiv (iixciAstxv, 
 The kingdom of the Lydians, we read Tv;;' (icc^nAslccv AvSwv, 
 Euseb. Pamph. pp. 398, 367 ; and instead of Ty^ 'l\uij.cciMv dc' 
 '/y//, The power of the Romans, we read Tt^v a,'%r)y 'Pujfxatxvy 
 Ilerodiani, Hist. Lib. iii. c. 16. The thiid and fourth forms can- 
 not admit of a variety consistently with the rules laid down by 
 grammarians for the proper use of the prepositive article. See 
 ^onstautini Rhodocanacidis Chipnsis Tractatus de Articulis. 
 
90 
 
 bcrcd^ and the number was found In the words ''I{ 
 rcov 'Pa>/xa<a)v a.$)(rj, an objection might be raised 
 against the use of the prepositive article rmv ; and 
 if the number were found in ''H 'Pw/xafoiv ao^nj^ it 
 might reasonably enough be asked why the prepo- 
 sitive article rcav should be omitted^ as numerous ex- 
 amples could be produced where it was not omitted, 
 ds well as many in favour of its being rejected. 
 To these objections it would be impossible to give 
 any satisfactory answer; and the question would 
 consequently be involved in an inextricable diffi- 
 culty, which would be totally incompatible with 
 the perspicuity absolutely necessary in a prophecy 
 of this nature. The expression "JI clq^yi t) Tw^aaixi^ 
 is the direct name of the Roman power ; and con^ 
 sequently^ in this respect, is much superior to the 
 two preceding". There is only one objection that 
 can be brought against it, which is, that it is not 
 the sjimplest mode of naming a power used by the 
 Greeks. For it is a rule among them, that when 
 the adjective follows its substantive, if the preposi- 
 tive article be set before tlie substantive, that it 
 must also be set before the adjective. But the re- 
 petition of the article is avoided by placing the ad- 
 jective before the substantive ; as in the words ''H 
 'P(Ofx.a'ixr) cuoyji, which would be absurdly Avritten 
 "'H 'VinKLoiiKT] r^ oiQ)(rj, as no example could be pro- 
 duced to support this form, and the authority of 
 every Greek grammarian, &c, who have spoken 
 upon this point, is totally against it. Consequently, 
 the expression '11 T^o/jiaVx^ ^ex^, is the simplest 
 
possible ; and in this form alone must the name of 
 the power be found whose number is 666. 
 
 Before we proceed to examine whether any 
 power contains this number^ it is essentially ne- 
 cessary to determine what kind of a power it is 
 which is represented by the Apocalyptic Beast, 
 This has been in a great measure proved before, 
 when speaking of the meaning of the prophetic 
 symbol Beast, which was there demonstrated to re- 
 present a kingdom. In this place it is necessai'y to 
 observe that the Hebrew word ^^^2h?2, used by 
 Daniel, and translated kingdom, is synonymous 
 with the Greek word Ba<nAsja, both being derived 
 from a similar origni, viz. ]ii:2'?;t2:. a kingdom, from 
 dlD, a king ; and Bao-iXs/a, a kingdom, from Ba- 
 (yb^s'jg, a king, And in the Septuagint the Hebrew 
 word mDto is constantly translated Jja<ri7^siot., 
 which is no inconsiderable evidence, and may be 
 esteemed a demonstration, that the number of the 
 Beast must be contained in the name of some king- 
 dom expressed by the Greek word Bao-iXs/a. A 
 second circumstance in favour of the word Bao-iAs/a 
 is the high sense in which this word is used by all 
 Greek writers, the greatest monarchies of the 
 earth being pointed out by this word. The mighty 
 empires of the Babylonians, Persians, Macedo- 
 nians, and Romans, were called Bao-jXejai, literally 
 kingdoms, and the monarclis of these powers were 
 named 'BoicnXsic, kings. * In the ninth and tenth 
 
 * All this is exactly nue of the moaarchs of Uie tjabyloaiari, 
 
93 
 
 centuries of the Christian era, et seq. the GrceU 
 emperors had such a veneration for the appellation 
 
 Persian, and Grecian empires ; but the first Roman emperors 
 were not denominated Bx<riXs7s by contemporary historians, but 
 AvroKpdropecj as is evident from Josephus, who speaks of Ka7- 
 cao, Saurspos — 'Pa;aflt/a>y auroyipoirujp^ Caesar, the second em- 
 peror of the Romans; Ti^spios Nacrwy — rplros — avroxpoiruipy 
 Tiberius Naso, third emperor ; Tahs KcuTap, avroKpcctuip, Sixroi- 
 t'xp ro rkruprw^ &c. Caius ()aesar, emperor, dictator the fourth 
 time, &c. 'Ett'i KaolvcIs Kcu(rapo$ auTcxpxtoplcc;, Under the em- 
 pire of Claudius Caesar. Plutarch styles Galba and Otho auto- 
 a-pdrops;. See his Lives, Vol. V. Edit. Lond. 1729. The title of 
 imperator, or avroKpa.rwp^ which is now of such high import was, 
 in the time of the twelve Caesars, considered inferior to that of 
 rex, or ^ccaiAs-j; ; and Selden informs us that " it was long be- 
 fore any of the emperors used the title of king (although the em- 
 peror Aurelian wore a diadem and other ensigns that were pro- 
 per io the name of king) but in their letters, commissions, and 
 embassages, they styled themselves always emperors. Which (he 
 adds) is expressly delivered by Synesius that lived under Arcadius, 
 about CCCC years of Christ, shewing also, that it was then usual in 
 the writings and speeches directed to thcni, to have styled them 
 kings, especially by the Grecians. 'H/^sT; f^lv (saith he to tha 
 emperor) J/xaf d^ioviisv xa.) KaXovu^sv BxTiXio.;^ y.su ypd/poixsv 
 evTwc. 'TaeTj oa elrs s'i^orzg, sirs jU-vj, (ri/vr^Ssi'a SI (rvy^wpoijvrB; 
 fov oyxov Tr^s ■ffpoarjyopia,; dvxovo^kyoig eolHars. i. e. We think 
 you worthy of the name, and so call you kings, and write you 
 !o. But you, M'hether you know so much or not, yet agreeing 
 to custom, have seemed to dislike so swelling a title. — At length 
 tlie name of emperor and king grew to be as one, although the 
 Romans so much (for the remembrance of their liberty) at first 
 distinguished them." See his Titles of Honour, Part i. chap. 
 2, § 3. This last clause is confirmed by Zonaras in his Annals, 
 Lib. XV. c. 13, where, translating the Latin word Imperator by 
 the Greek word BacriAci'c he says, 'O ii ruiv ^pxyfivv 'Apyj^yc^ 
 
93 
 
 Baa-iT^zug, that they thoiig-ht it a degradation to the* 
 term to apply it to the emperors of the west which 
 succeeded Lotharius I. Gibbon speaks upon tliig 
 point in the following words : '' During the shorfe 
 union of virtue and power, they (the Greeks) re- 
 spectfully saluted the august Charlemagne with tha 
 acclamations of JSasilciis, and emperor of the Ro- 
 mans. As soon as these qualities were separated 
 in the person of his pious son, the Byzantine let- 
 ters were inscribed, ' To the king, or, as he styles 
 himself, the emperor of the Franks and Lombards.' 
 When both power and virtue were extinct, thej 
 despoiled Lewis the second of his hereditary title > 
 and, with the barbarous appellation of rex or rega, 
 i^rjyoL,) degraded him among the crowd of Latin 
 princes. His reply is expressive of his weakness : 
 he proves, with some learning, that, both in sacred 
 and profane history, the name of king is synony- 
 mous with the Greek word basileus : if, at Con- 
 stantinople it were assumed in a more exclusive 
 and imperial sense, he claims from his ancestors, 
 and from the pope, a just participation of the ho- 
 nours of the Roman purple. The same contro- 
 versy was revived in the reign of the Othos ; and 
 their ambassador describes, in lively colours, the; 
 insolence of the Byzantine court. The Greeks af- 
 fected to despise the poverty and ignorance of the 
 
 KapouXog BacriXsv; *VxiJ.c<.l.^y Tfapa. to-j Hxitx Atour^g — drnxyo- 
 fii^s)). But Charles, the ruler of the Franks, was denomiaated 
 Emperor of the Romao* by Pope Leo. 
 
94 
 
 pranks and Saxonfe j and, in their last decline, re- 
 fused to prostitute to the kings of Germany the ti- 
 tle of Roman emperors." * Thus it is evident 
 that in the middle centuries the T^'ord BatnT^shg via» 
 
 f As Selden's account of the appellation ^t;^ difft-rs consider- 
 ably from that of Gibbon, it will be proper to insert it here, 
 that the reader may be put in possession of both sid^s of the 
 question. " It hath been observed (says Selden) that the eastern 
 emperors did in contempt style the western reges only ; allow- 
 ing their basileus to hone but themselves and the king of BuIj 
 gary, who had also his crolvn of gold, his i'lkr of silk, and red 
 shoes, for his royal, being also imperial, habiliments. And so 
 Georgius Logotheta always names the king of Dulgary 'RaTiXiV(; 
 Tuiv BaAya'sci'v, but the king of Hungary and Sicily Oi-/'f,lc(; and 
 1Liy.zXloLg Pr)^, or rex Siciliai ; and the prince of Achaia only 
 Kya.\cLc TTi/y/e^', or Achaiae princeps. But I tliink it proceeded 
 not so much from contempt, as use, bred amongst them, to call 
 fpreign dignities bj the names of that prince's country to which 
 they were applied : as appears in Sultan, Ameras, Amermumnesy 
 and Chagan (the same with Chan) and the like, copiously men- 
 tioned by Simocatta, Anna Comnena, Codin, Achmet, Cantacti- 
 ?en, and the more obvious oriental authors. And they neVer 
 agreeing willingly to that translation of the empire, bat stippos- 
 ing themselves as emperors of new Rome, (for .so Constantinople 
 was called,) and to be the legitimate successors of that majestic 
 title ro~ KoVag Ku'rjoc, or Lord of the World, (wherewith Anto- 
 ninus long before blazoned himself to Eiula-mon,) could hardly 
 but endeavour such distinction of names, that so they miglit have 
 one peculiar i.o their own greatqess. Which, how could they 
 better do, than by keeping their own to themselves, (that is, BusU 
 leus^) and giving other princes every one the language of every 
 one's own territory ? and the princes of Sicily in the time of 
 Constantine the Great (saith Nicephoras Gregoras) were called 
 Vrijig or Teges only." See his Titles of Honour, Part i. chap. 
 2, § 4. 
 
0^ 
 
 tised in as lu^h. a sense by the Greeks as llic word 
 imperator among the western nations. In tlie New 
 Testament the word BafriTvs/ot very frequently oc- 
 curs; and is commonly applied to the most extent 
 sive dominations. We there find the following' 
 expressions : ''H ^aa-iT^sia ruju ou^avaiv, The kingdom 
 of heaven ; To hayl's'kiov t% ^acriT^zlag, The Gospel 
 of the kingdom ; ''H ^aa-iy^sla tou 0eoy, The king- 
 dom of God ; Tr^v {da(ri7i£iay eturoD rr^v sTre^aviov, His 
 heavenly kingdom; Tr^v alcoviov ^aariT^siav, The 
 everlasting kingdom; T'^ \drj.(Th\ua — 'IrjO-'oO Xot^-oy^, 
 The kingdom of Jesus Christy &c. &c. This com- 
 mon use of the word ^aciXs/a in the Scriptures is 
 po mean argument that the power of the Beast is 
 also to be numbered as a kingdom ; especially as 
 this power is represented as one of the most ex- 
 tensive that ever appeared in the world. But the 
 greatest evidence in favour of the word /3ao-i- 
 'ksioL, which can possibly be produced, and which, 
 of itself, would be sufficient if no other could be ad- 
 vanced, is its direct application to the Beast in the 
 loth verse of the 16th chapter of the Revelation. 
 The words arc as follow : Kal 6 7r£(x7rrQS ayyCAog sj. 
 , fp^ss Tr^v (p<aXr;V ctyroy ItvI tov '^qovov Toiu ^r^is/y' xcx) sys~ 
 V6T0 y] (^ao'iT^sicc aurou l<Txorcoixivri. " And the fifth 
 angel poured out his vial upon the throne of the 
 Beast; and his kingdom was darkened," 
 
 Having demonstrated that the name of some 
 kingdom or empire must contain the number Q>QQ, 
 the number of the various kingdoms or empires 
 that have appeared in the world must be computed 
 
96 
 
 in (lie next place, in order to discover wliicli is i\i6 
 Antichristian powfer spoken of by the Holy Spirit ; 
 and also to determine whether the nnmber of the 
 Beast be confined to one power. This last point 
 is of the utmost consequence ; for if it could b^ 
 proved that two or more powers, differing in name, 
 contained this iiilmber, then 666 cotld not be so 
 emphatically styled the number of the Beast as it is 
 in different parts of the Apocalypse ; especially in 
 the following Scripture : "" And I saw as it w ere 
 a sea of glass mingled with fire ; and them that had 
 gotten the victory over the Beast, and over his 
 image, and over the number of his name, stand ori 
 the sea of glass, having the harps of God." Here 
 the number 666 is apparently represented as a: 
 distinguishing characteristic of the Antichristian 
 power from all other powers of the habitable glob^. 
 And it is absolutely necessary it should be so ; for, 
 otherwise, the number of the Beast could be no ad- 
 ditional evidence to the prophetic description of 
 the Beast, as it is evidently designed to be ; for its 
 want of peculiarity in this respect would greatly 
 lessen the evidence that might be produced in its 
 favour from any other quarter. The Greek names' 
 of the various monarchies of the earth, with theif 
 Enghsh names and numbers affixed, are the fol- 
 io win 2: : 
 
97 
 
 CLASS I. 
 
 Containing the names of the various monarchies 
 of the earthy for which I have met with the 
 Greek national possessives^ and the amount of 
 the numerical letters in each name. 
 ORDER I. 
 
 Including the Greek national possessives, the declension of 
 tvhich is certain. 
 
 BaciXsja. 
 
 *H \\.yy7^i^av7\ * The kingdom of lEngland 
 
 393 
 
 'A5vjva/a 
 
 The k. of the Athenians 
 
 347 
 
 K\ysivouoi 
 
 The k. of .%ina 
 
 358 
 
 hlyiiVTiTixri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 692 
 
 K\yivoCio(, 
 
 ibid. 
 
 353 
 
 A^iyt'jr^riii7] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 687 
 
 AlyuTrria 
 
 The kingdom of Egypt 
 
 1072 
 
 AiyuTTTiaxT] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1100 
 
 AlyuTrriog + 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1341 
 
 AiSlOTTlXTl 
 
 The kingdom of ^Ethiopia 
 
 485 
 
 AlSlOTTlS 
 
 ibid. 
 
 657 
 
 Ah'ksios 
 
 The kingdom of yEoha 
 
 663 
 
 AloX/a 
 
 ibid. 
 
 SS9 
 
 AloT^ixr) 
 
 ibid. 
 
 416 
 
 AloX^i 
 
 ibid. 
 
 5S8 
 
 AircoX<a 
 
 The kingdom of ^toha 
 
 1419 
 
 AhcoT^ixr^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1446 
 
 A\Ta)7\)g 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1618 
 
 * Dosith. Patres Ilierosol. Lib. it. c. 2, § 4. 
 
 + ©poKiOi xo.) A'r/i-itnoi (y.a.prvcl7A), Thracian and iEgyptian, 
 testimonies. Photii Biblioth. col. 379. 
 
 H 
 
98 
 CLASS I.— Order f. 
 
 Ba<r*Xs/a. 
 'H 'Axafxavixr] * The kingdom of the Alemans 428 
 
 'AXav^ f 
 
 The k. of the Alans 
 
 357 
 
 ^A'kaviTiri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 387 
 
 'Ax/Sav^ 
 
 The kingxlom of the Albans 
 
 359 
 
 \\X^an(t X 
 
 The k. of Albania 
 
 362 
 
 ' ATi^avig 
 
 Thek. of the Albans 
 
 561 
 
 *A/xa^ov;;i^^ 
 
 The k. of the Amazons 
 
 474 
 
 *Ay.S^cx.>ii(x.xri 
 
 § The k. of Anibracia 
 
 470 
 
 ^AfJi^^aHiKri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 469 
 
 *A[Ji€^axicoTixrj | ibid. 
 
 1579 
 
 ^Ay.7r^axiKr} 
 
 5 ibid. 
 
 547 
 
 ^AvaroXiTcr^ 
 
 The eastern empire 
 
 7-57 
 
 *A^a^<a 
 
 The Arabian empire 
 
 382 
 
 'Aqol^ix'ti 
 
 ibid. 
 
 409 
 
 'A^aSios 
 
 ibid. 
 
 651 
 
 'Aqysioi 
 
 The kingdom of the Argives 
 
 387 
 
 'AgyoX/xT) 
 
 The k. of Argolis 
 
 509 
 
 "A^yoT^ig 
 
 ibid. 
 
 681 
 
 SiKog.) Of or belonging to the Franks, Alemans, Gepida?, and the 
 Longobards. Agathiae Scholastici, Lib. i. p. 11. Byzant. Hist. 
 Edit. Venet. 
 
 + 'AXavos opoSi Border of the Alans. Pionys. Orb. Descrip, 
 p. 56. 
 
 X A( 'AAbavja/ irvXai, Albanian gates. Claudii Ptolemael 
 Ceograph. Lib. v. cap. 11, Amstel. 1618. 
 
 § Strab. Geograph. p. 498, Edit. Oxen. 1707. 
 
 {I Dionys. Orb. Descrip. p, 96. 
 
 5 Thucyd. Hist. Vol. U. Lib. ii. p. 105, Edit. Blponl. 
 
99 
 CLASS I.— Order i. 
 
 Bao-<X=ta. 
 
 H 'Acxaoiaxr} 
 
 The kingdom of Arcadia 
 
 432 
 
 Aoxa^lHTj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 431 
 
 'Ag/Asyia 
 
 The kingdom of Armenia 
 
 474 
 
 *A^fJt.SVlOt,X7l 
 
 ibid. 
 
 502 
 
 ^Appd^ia 
 
 The Arabian empire 
 
 482 
 
 ^AppoL^ixrj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 509 
 
 ^Appa^iog 
 
 ibid. 
 
 751 
 
 "'Afrag 
 
 The kingdom of Asia 
 
 669 
 
 ^A<T10LV7\ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 537 
 
 ^Aa-ictTixri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 817 
 
 *A(Tiaris 
 
 ibid. 
 
 989 
 
 \\(r)g 
 
 ibid,' 
 
 678 
 
 *Aa-(ru^iax7} * 
 
 The Assyrian empire 
 
 1207 
 
 'Att/x:^ 
 
 The kingdom of Attica 
 
 906 
 
 *Au<rov<a 
 
 The k. of the Ausones 
 
 999 
 
 *Ap^aia 
 
 The k. of the Achivi 
 
 880 
 
 *A;^ai'ia 
 
 ibid. 
 
 890 
 
 "A^ai'ixri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 917 
 
 'A^aug 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1089 
 
 'A;^ai"x>j 
 
 ibid. 
 
 907 
 
 'Axcctg 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1079 
 
 BaS'uXcov^a 
 
 The Babylonian empire 
 
 1563 
 
 Ba^uXajViotxi^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1591 
 
 ^axT^iavr) f 
 
 The kingdom of the Bactrians 759 
 
 * Tujy 'Aa-a-vpiay.uJv.) Assyrian affairs. Euseb. Pampli. 
 
 Chron. 
 
 a Scaliger, p. 13. 
 
 
 
 + T«J Ba>cr«iiavc'j 
 
 BxTiXsl, The Eactrian king. Diod, S 
 
 lie. Vol. 
 
 VII. Lib. XYiii. p. C2, Edit. Bipont. 
 
 H 2 4 
 

 100 
 
 
 
 CLASS L— Order i. 
 
 
 
 Baci^cs/a. 
 
 
 *H V^aX7^iaciHrj ■ 
 
 ^ The kinfidom of the Balliares 
 
 1 479 
 
 Bav^iT^iXTj f 
 
 The Vandal empire 
 
 402 
 
 BiSwiaxYi '^ 
 
 The kingdom of Bithynia 
 
 777 
 
 Bo;a)T<a 
 
 The k. of Boeotia 
 
 1460 
 
 BoKoriaxri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1488 
 
 Bouorixr) 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1487 
 
 T^OfTTTo^avri § 
 
 The king-dom of Bosphorns 
 
 848 
 
 Bs7\.ya^iHr} [| 
 
 The k. of Bulgaria 
 
 911 
 
 IB^ivriot 
 
 The k. of the Brentii 
 
 735 
 
 B^sravixYj IT 
 
 The British empire 
 
 76S 
 
 ^^STOiVVlXT] 
 
 . ibid. 
 
 813 
 
 J^qsTraviKT] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1063 
 
 B^STTavig ** 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1235 
 
 ^^STTaUVtHT) • 
 
 ft ibid. 
 
 1113 
 
 B^STTia 
 
 The kingdom af the Brettii 
 
 985 
 
 By^avreTa 
 
 The Byzantine empire 
 
 1043 
 
 * To Ba.X'Ai7.ciKQy ttf Aayo;. The Balearic sea. Claud. Ptokm* 
 Geograph. Lib. ii. c. 4. 
 
 + TlXsro-j BavoiAi-Kov, Vandal riches. Procop. Cajsar. de 
 Bello Vandalico, p. 399. Edit. Venet. Byzant. Hist. 
 
 % Phot. Biblioth. col. 52. 
 
 § Dionys. Orb. Descrip. p. 88. 
 
 II To, £iti(rr,(x,a, rrj$ BsXyxpiy.yj; (Sccc-iXslcx,;, The Insignia of the 
 Bulgarian- kingdom. See Suiceri Thesaurus on the word Bxc-iXs-jf. 
 
 f Used by Strabo substantively, m ith yi; or xujpcc understood. 
 
 ** Tec; BperrscvlSa; yr^a-e^y The British isles. Athen. Deip. 
 Vol. II. p. 546, Edit. Bipont. 
 
 ++ Tov Bisrravvfxiv cVJavov, The British ocean. Claud, Ptof^ 
 Geograph. Lib. ix. cap. 8*^^ 
 

 CLASS I.— Order i. 
 
 
 
 BafTiXs/a. 
 
 
 H ^u^avTiaxri 
 
 The Byzantine empire. 
 
 10G6 
 
 JBu^avTiavi^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1096 
 
 Bu^avT/a^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1238 
 
 Bu^avriXTj * 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1065 
 
 Hv^oLVTig 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1237 
 
 YaT^arix'/] 
 
 The kingdom of Gaul 
 
 640 
 
 TaXXiXT] f 
 
 ibid. 
 
 nm 
 
 Ta^oifJ.ot.vTiHr^ 
 
 i X The k. of the Garamantes 
 
 801 
 
 Ts^^aviTCTj 
 
 The Germanic empire 
 
 504 
 
 TSTIXT} § 
 
 The king'dom of the Getse 
 
 613 
 
 TiTTS^ixri II 
 
 The k. of the Gepidae 
 
 407 
 
 TotSixti 5 
 
 The k. of the Goths 
 
 687 
 
 r§aij<^ 
 
 The Greek empire 
 
 409 
 
 AaxixT] ** 
 
 The king'dom of the Dacaa 
 
 330 
 
 A.a.ix.a.<TxriV7i 
 
 The k. of Damascus 
 
 599 
 
 Aa^Oavia 
 
 The k. of Dardania 
 
 438 
 
 AagSay<;<i^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 465 
 
 AiiXiax^n 
 
 The kinj^dom of Dclos 
 
 348 
 
 * Toj BLsCivrj/coG' rc/aaroj. The Byzantine mouth. Strab. 
 Geograph. p. 39. 
 
 + Ibid. p. 298. 
 
 + 'H Taf.c/.^.ayTi-n.ri <fdyay^, The Gaiamantic precipice. Claud. 
 Vtolem. Geograph. Lib. iv. cap. 6. 
 
 § Noao; — Titiy.o;, Law of thcGela:. Dionys. Orb. Descrip. 
 p. 55. 
 
 II Agathiae Scholastici, Lib. i. p. 11. Edit. Vcnet. Byzant. 
 
 Hist. 
 
 H Procop. Caesar. Hist. Lib. i. cap. 1. 
 ** Phot. Biblioth. col. 49. 
 

 103 
 
 
 
 CLASS I.— Order i. 
 
 
 
 Bao-As/a. 
 
 
 *H AvTlXTj 
 
 The Western empire 
 
 1009 
 
 A.(ooiaxri 
 
 The kingdom of Doris 
 
 1210 
 
 Aco^ixr) 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1209 
 
 ^w^iog 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1451 
 
 A(o^)g 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1S81 
 
 'E€^a7cc 
 
 The kingdom of the Hebrews 
 
 386 
 
 *JE^^aix>j 
 
 ibid. 
 
 413 
 
 lUo^oLig 
 
 ibid. 
 
 585 
 
 *E'Xso<rivia.xri The kingdom of Eleusis 
 
 1006 
 
 *Ei7^£0(riviag 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1178 
 
 *EAXaS<«^ 
 
 The Greek empire 
 
 375 
 
 'EXAav<;cr; 
 
 ibid. 
 
 421 
 
 'E7.7iag 
 
 ibid. 
 
 333 
 
 'Et7\.7,rivi,X7} 
 
 ibid. 
 
 428 
 
 *EX7^r}Uiog 
 
 ibid. 
 
 670 
 
 'E7\.7^riv)g 
 
 ibid. 
 
 600 
 
 ^EqsT^iaxr} 
 
 The kingdom of Eretria 
 
 816 
 
 ^Fj^sr^iXTi * 
 
 ibid. 
 
 815 
 
 "E^srgi^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 987 
 
 'E(r;r£§<a 
 
 The Western empire 
 
 668 
 
 'Ec-TTSOiVT^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 725 
 
 'EiTTrigio^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 937 
 
 
 The kingdom of Euboea 
 
 787 
 
 tiuboiig 
 
 ibid. 
 
 964 
 
 ^U^OIXY} 
 
 ibid. 
 
 782 
 
 JL'j^olg 
 
 ibid. 
 
 954 
 
 * Athen. Peipnos. Vol. III. p. 78o 
 
103 
 CLASS I —Order i. 
 
 H 'UxBiaxTi * The kingdom of Elis Si^ 
 
 *U.7rsi^(0T7i f The kingdom of Epire 1578 
 
 'HTTsiqwrixTi ibid. 1608 
 
 'H^axAsTa The kingdom of the Heraclidas 442 
 
 *lio(xx7<6coTtxr) ibid. 
 
 1569 
 
 SstTO'aXixrj 
 
 The kingdom of Thessaly 
 
 750 
 
 ©sTTaXij 
 
 ibid. 
 
 920 
 
 (^srraT^ixrj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 950 
 
 Srj^a'ixr) 
 
 The kingdom of Thebes 
 
 325 
 
 Soa'ixlcc 
 
 The k, of Thrace 
 
 418 
 
 Q^axicc 
 
 ibid. 
 
 408 
 
 S^axiXTj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 435 
 
 id^ax4og "^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 677 
 
 Sqaxcua § 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1198 
 
 Bev^iri II 
 
 ibid. 
 
 432 
 
 *l€rjaixri 
 
 The kingdom of Iberia 
 
 425 
 
 'lA<ax^ 
 
 The k. of IHiim 
 
 346 
 
 *l7s,7^uqixri H 
 
 The k. of Ulyria 
 
 875 
 
 'IvSiK^ 
 
 The Indian empire 
 
 369 
 
 ^Indciix^ ■ 
 
 The kingdom of the Jews 
 
 790 
 
 * Strab. Geograph. p. 539. 
 
 + Hvppis roiJ 'YiitsifiuitH fiaa-iXauj;, Pyrrhus the Epiratic king. 
 Dionys. Hal. Antiq. Rora, p. 744. 
 
 X Photii Biblioth. col. 379. 
 
 k'Tds <Qp%%JiXi iToXsLSy The Thracian cities. Nieetas Choni- 
 ates, p. 317, Edit. Venet. Byzant. Hist. 
 
 jl Dionys. Orb. Descrip. p. 102. 
 
 ^ Strab, Geograph. p. 164. 
 
^ 
 
 104 
 
 
 CLASS I. Order i. 
 
 
 
 Ba(7/X£/a. 
 
 
 'H 'I(nravr} * 
 
 The kingdom of Spain 
 
 616 
 
 'l^^iav^ 
 
 The k. of the Istrians 
 
 946 
 
 *I^^iav]s 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1148 
 
 'h^im 
 
 ibid. 
 
 953 
 
 'h^iXYj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 915 
 
 'Ira.'kixYi 
 
 The k. of Italy 
 
 646 
 
 'Ira?Jj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 818 
 
 "IroiXKOTixri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1756 
 
 *Ia)Vicx, 
 
 The kingdom of Ionia 
 
 1138 
 
 *lcovixrj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1165 
 
 'I(ov)g 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1337 
 
 J^afxTraVix^ 
 
 The kingdom of Campania 
 
 497 
 
 J^aTTTra^oxixTj 
 
 The k. of the Cappadocians 581 
 
 J^UTTuavrj 
 
 The k. of Capua 
 
 827 
 
 J^aTTvhri -j- 
 
 ibid. 
 
 836 
 
 Kagza 
 
 The kingdom of Caria 
 
 399 
 
 J^a^ixrj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 426 
 
 KsTvTi^rj^ixrj ^ 
 
 The kingdom of Celtiberia 
 
 780 
 
 l^sTirixri § 
 
 The k. of the Celt^ 
 
 660 
 
 J^iTiixsia, 
 
 The kingdom of Cihcia 
 
 373 
 
 KiXixia II 
 
 ibid. 
 
 368 
 
 * Athen. Deipnosoph. Vol. I. p. 467. 
 ■f Dionys. Hal. Antiq. Rom. p. 483. 
 4: Strab. Geograph. p. 246. 
 
 § Used substantively by Strabo, with yrj or x^pa understood. 
 II Tag KiAiKiag ttiXas, The Cilician gates. Claud. Ptolem. 
 Geograph. Lib. v. cap. 15. 
 

 105 
 
 
 
 CLASS I. Order i. 
 
 
 
 Bao-iXsja. 
 
 
 H KoJxiQs 
 
 The kingdom of Cilicia 
 
 637 
 
 'KllX^^lXT] * 
 
 The k. of the Cimbri 
 
 477 
 
 K.irx[X=0lX7j 
 
 The k. of the Cimmerians 
 
 520 
 
 Koy^X^^^ 
 
 The k. of Colchis 
 
 1025 
 
 KooivSioi 
 
 The k. of Corinth 
 
 537 
 
 K-O^lvSlOLX'T^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 565 
 
 J^O^lvSlXT, 
 
 ibid. 
 
 564 
 
 Ks^7}rixrj 
 
 The kingdom of the Curetes 
 
 1203 
 
 K§r;0-<a 
 
 The k. of Crete 
 
 606 
 
 J^^riCTiotxy] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 634 
 
 l^oi^G-Gria, 
 
 ibid. 
 
 806 
 
 KoririxYj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 733 
 
 l^u^ixrjVTi 
 
 The kingdom of Cyzicum 
 
 790 
 
 KuTT^lU f 
 
 The k. of Cyprus 
 
 878 
 
 l^UTTOlOCXYj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 906 
 
 Vio^rjVaixr} 
 
 Tlie kingdom of Cyrene 
 
 SS4 
 
 Koja 
 
 The k. of Coos 
 
 1088 
 
 Aayyo^a^hxYj ^ The k. of the Longobards 
 
 519 
 
 Aa^ixr; § 
 
 The k. of the Lazi 
 
 343 
 
 AaxsoaifjLovia \ The k. of LacedaBmon 
 
 509 
 
 Aaxz^OLiixovixr] ibid. 
 
 536 
 
 * Strab. Gpograph. p. 4.50. 
 
 + Athen. Deipnosoph. Vol. I. pp. 302, 303. 
 
 X Agathiae Scholastici, Lib. i. p. 11. 
 
 § This possessive is used by the Byzantine historians substan- 
 tively, with the prepositive article, and yr) or yjiopx uuder- 
 atood. 
 
 1] Athep. Deipnosoph. Vol. III. p. 15. 
 

 106 
 
 
 
 CLASS I. — Order r. 
 
 
 
 Bacr/Xs/a. 
 
 
 ^H Aecxcovi^yi 
 
 The kingdom of Lacedsemon 
 
 12m 
 
 AiaSia 
 
 The k. of Lesbos 
 
 515 
 
 Aecrbiax'^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 543 
 
 Ar'^avta 
 
 The kingdom of Lemnos 
 
 406 
 
 Ari^viXTj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 433 
 
 AiSiaVYj * 
 
 The kingdom of Libya 
 
 378 
 
 Ai^uxri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 737 
 
 Aiyv^ixri 
 
 The kingdom of Liguria 
 
 1248 
 
 Aoyyi^ap^r^ 
 
 t The k. of the Longobards 
 
 489 
 
 Aox^ia 
 
 The k. of Locris 
 
 498 
 
 AOXOIXT] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 525 
 
 Avosia 
 
 The kingdom of Lydia 
 
 717 
 
 A'j^ t 
 
 ibid. 
 
 709 
 
 Ad^iot, 
 
 ibid. 
 
 712 
 
 Aooiaxri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 740 
 
 Ao^teiot 
 
 ibid. 
 
 727 
 
 AyOiK:^ 
 
 ibid. 
 
 739 
 
 A6^iog 
 
 ibid. 
 
 981 
 
 Axjxiaxr^ 
 
 The kingdom of Lycia 
 
 756 
 
 SiaxtoovBiog 
 
 The Macedonian empire 
 
 742 
 
 MaxsooviXYj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 495 
 
 Mafra-a-ysrixri^ The k. of the Massagetse 1055 
 
 ^IsyaoiX'r) 
 
 The k. of Megara 
 
 454 
 
 '* Atlien. Dcipnosoph. Vol. I. p. 297. 
 • : i Tou AoyfiSdpSs tdvss, The nation of the Longobards. Thco- 
 ^phylacti Hist. Lib. iii. c. 10. 
 
 X Al^o; 'llf^dy.ksici, xcc) -^ Aioi), The Heracllan and Lydiaii 
 stone. Hill's Theophrastus, on Stones, p. 17, Edit. Lond. 1746. 
 
 ^ Dionys. Orb. Descrip. p. 139. 
 
107 
 CLASS I. — Order i. 
 
 The kingdom of Memphis 
 The k, of the Messenians 
 ibid. 
 
 The kingdom of the Medes 
 of the Milesians 
 of the Molossi 
 ibid, 
 ibid. 
 
 Mscorr^Via * 
 Mna-crrivtaxri 
 
 Mi7.:^(ria The k. 
 Mo7\,o(r(ri>cri The k, 
 ^lo7\.o(r<r)g 
 MoXorr/XT^ 
 MvcriixHr} f The kingdom of Mysia 
 Najia Thok. of Naxos 
 
 'Noixa.hxr, X The k. of Numidia 
 '05fo^aay<K^§ The Othman empire 
 OlvcoT^iHTj II The kingdom of the ffinotri 
 O'juvixr} The k, of the Huns 
 JIoLiovixYj The k. of Pfeonia 
 UaTifjLo^r^vrj The k. of Pahnyra 
 JJaoSixr] The Parthian empire 
 IIa<f)7^ayovix'^ The kingdom of Paphlagonia 
 XIs7M!iyix-^ The k, of the Pelasgi 
 TlsTvaa-yixTj ibid. 
 
 'ns7^o7irovv7}a-iO!.x7i The k. of Pelopponnesus 
 JJs^a-ixri The Persian empire 
 TIso(r]c; ibid. 
 
 Uovrixfj 
 
 The kingdom of Pontus 
 
 1900 
 
 781 
 
 809 
 
 S57 
 
 566 
 
 915 
 
 1087 
 
 1115 
 
 946 
 
 389 
 
 470 
 
 1275 
 
 1635 
 
 875 
 
 516 
 
 984 
 
 495 
 
 1040 
 
 524 
 
 624 
 
 949 
 
 690 
 
 S62 
 
 805 
 
 + Ibid. p. 847. 
 
 * Strab. Geograph. p. 535. 
 
 X Ibid. pp. 755, 778. 
 
 § IXosith. Patres Hieiosol. Lib. \iu c. 8, § 4. 
 
 11 .Stin.b. Gco^rapli. p. 392, 
 
108 
 CLASS I.— Order i. 
 
 BacTiXe/a. 
 
 'H UoorsyaXla * 
 
 The king'dom of Portugal 
 
 1332 
 
 Tl^aivs^ivr] f 
 
 The k. of Praeneste 
 
 1081 
 
 l^o^iaxri 
 
 The k, of Rhodes 
 
 480 
 
 Vo^iaVT) 
 
 ibid. 
 
 510 
 
 Vcoy.aioi. 
 
 The Roman empire 
 
 1219 
 
 Pa)jU,ai'xr| 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1246 
 
 Pa>o-<x>] 
 
 The Russian empire 
 
 1405 
 
 XaSiVT] ^ 
 
 The kingdom of the Sabines 
 
 538 
 
 %a.7M[xivi(X 
 
 The k. of Salamis 
 
 610 
 
 'SctXoiy.iviccxri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 638 
 
 XdlJLKX. 
 
 The kingdom of Samos 
 
 519 
 
 %ay.iaxri 
 
 ibid. 
 
 547 
 
 SajUiXTj 
 
 ibid. 
 
 546 
 
 %a[xvr^Tixri § 
 
 The k. of the Samnites 
 
 904 
 
 %<xixuiTixr) II 
 
 ibid. 
 
 906 
 
 'Xavvirixri H 
 
 ibid. 
 
 916 
 
 Xa^axTiViKvi ** The Saracenic empire 
 
 685 
 
 2)a^3foa 
 
 The kingdom of Sardinia 
 
 1373 
 
 XagSwvxa 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1433 
 
 %a^^0ivix7i 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1460 
 
 %(X.ooa)Vios 
 
 ibid. 
 
 1702 
 
 * UoprsyoiXlxy ^w^av. Country of Portugal. Chalcocoijdyl, 
 de Reb. Turc. II. 36. 
 
 + Strab. Geograph. p. 363. 
 
 % Athen. Deipnosoph. Vol. I. Lib. i. p. 101. 
 
 § Strab. Geograph. p. 335. || Ibid. 
 
 H Ibid. p. 369. 
 
 ** Ta — Saoaxryviy.a fuXa, The Saracenic tribes. Legatio 
 Justini ad Perias, p. 100. Edit. Venet. Byzant. Hist. 1729. 
 
109 
 CLASS I. — Order i. 
 
 'H'^aoixariK^ The kingdom of Sarmatia 947 
 
 XccijviTixr) The k. of the Samnites 1266 
 
 %S7,a€ixri * The k. of the Sclavi 547 
 
 S/SoW The k. of Sidon 612 
 
 :^i(imnocf ibid. 1342 
 
 SixsXiXTj The Sicilian kingdom 570 
 
 ^ixuwvioLHri The kingdom of S icy on 1786 
 
 "Xixvcovixri ibid. 1785 
 
 Xx7<a€r]vr) The kingdom of the Sclav i 586 
 
 Xx7<a^ ixTj J ibid. 558 
 
 ^xuSixri The kingdom of Scythia 934 
 
 txup^ia. The k. of Scyros 998 
 
 'Xvavixr, § The Spanish empire 63iy 
 
 %7ra^riaorri |{ The kingdom of Sparta 1367 
 
 X-Tra^TioLTixYj ibid. 1 297 
 Xv^rxomx-^ The kingdom of the Sybaritae 1318 
 
 Xv^aoix-^ ibid. 1008 
 
 X^oaxoa-ia, The kingdom of Syracuse 1269 
 
 X'j^oLXBa-la ibid. 1669 
 
 ■*''E9vr; SSAabiy.a, Sclavonlan nation.?. Joannis Zonarae, 
 Annal. Synopsis, p. 26. 
 
 t 'H Si?^v(a ^d\cx.<jo-cCy The Sidonian sea. Dionys. Orb. 
 Descrip. p, 21. 
 
 :!: SjiAatiJcwv ISfigv, Sclavonian nations. Coast. Porphyrog. 
 De Them. c. 30. 
 
 § Georgii Syncelli Chronog. p. 36, Edit. Venet. Byzant. Hist; 
 
 I Athen. Peipnos. Vol. IV. p. 154. 
 
110 
 CLASS I.-^Order I. 
 
 *HXo^ioi>iri The king-dom (yf Syria 100^ 
 
 Taoavriv^ The k. of Tarentum 1087 
 
 Tau^/x^ Thek. of Taurus 1106 
 
 Ta^aoixrj * The Tatarian empire 1307 
 
 Te^xixrjj- The Turkish empire 1195 
 
 To^aoixri 'I The Tatarian empire 1376 
 
 T^a7r£^8o-ia§ The empire of Trebizond 1441 
 
 T^i€a7.7.r4\\ The kingdom of the Triballi 778 
 
 T^^oi^rrMx^ The k. of Trcpzene 850 
 
 Toco-ix^ The k. of Troy 1505 
 
 T^coas ibid. 1668 
 
 T^a>)g ibid. 1677 
 
 T^Mioig ibid. 1678 
 
 Tupja^ The kingdom of Tyre 1078 
 
 TwppTjvixrj The k. of the Tyrrhenes 1263 
 
 Tupf^riv)g ibid. 1435 
 
 Tv^crriVixri ibid. 1363 
 
 TgKavia** The kingdom of Hyrcania 849 
 
 * Georgii Acropolitae, Hist. 
 
 + Niceph. Greg. Lib. v. c. 5, p. 71. 
 
 i In Byzantinis Scriptoribus. This word, as well as Ta-^oc" 
 piy.og, has been understood of the Tatars ; but 1 have not been 
 able to meet with the possessive of Tarasoi, Tatars, or Tacprdpoi^ 
 Tartars, both which Gentile names are used by Acropolita. 
 
 § Dionysii Orbis Descrip. p. 131. 
 
 II 'Vci(3xKXiKov ^syixov. Georgii Pachymeris Historiae Andro* 
 nici, Lib. ti. c. 34. 
 
 H Strabonis Geograph. p. 10^^,8. 
 
 ** Used by Strabo, with yij or x^P^' undcrs<:ood. 
 
Ill 
 
 CLASS I.— Order i. 
 
 *H 'Tgxavixrj * The king'dom of Hyrcania 876 
 
 <PSuoTix^ The k. of Phthiotis 1924 
 
 4>oiyixri The k, of Phcenice 935 
 
 *Poivixixyi ibid. %5 
 
 4>o/i/«r<rr, f ibid. 1315 
 
 ^oayyix-r^ J The French empire 912 
 
 *P^ayxix-r) § ibid. 929 
 
 ^^uyioLXYi The king-dom of Phrygia 1309 
 
 <^quyix7i ibid, 1308 
 
 ^puyiog ibid. 1 550 
 
 ipcoxdixy] || The kingdom of Phocis 1626 
 
 ^(oxixri^ ibid. 1625 
 
 XaxSaix:^ The empire of the Clialdeans 941 
 
 ^aT^xiQixr^ The kingdom of Chalcis 970 
 
 X/a The k. of Cliios 878 
 
 * Theophylacti, Hist. Lib. iii. c. 15. 
 
 + Diodorus Siculus, Vol. IV. Lib. viii. p. 119. 
 
 J AgatliijE Scholastici, Lib. i. p. 11. 
 
 § Const, Porphyrog. De Them. Part t. Lib. 1. 
 
 11 Strabouis Geograph. p. 23G. H Ibid. p. G22. 
 
 N. B. The possessives in this order which hare no refer,- 
 ences will be found in the Lexicons of llcsychius, Suidas. Hede- 
 ric, or Schrevelius, or the Thesaurus of Stephens. 
 
112 
 
 ORDER II 
 
 Including the Greek national possessives, the exacf 
 declension of which I have not been able to il- 
 lustrate by examples, and the amount of the nu- 
 merical letters in each.* 
 
 'H Aua-ovBiog, 1273, or 'H Ava-ouaU, 1004. The 
 king'dom of Ausonia. Straho. 
 
 H Baxr pios, 970, or li BaxTpiOL, 701. The king- 
 dom of the Bactrians. Straho. 
 
 'H BpsrravriG-iog, 1531, or 'H Bpsrravrifna, 1262. 
 The British empire. Ccdrenns. 
 
 'H Bu'CauTios, 1207, or 'H Bu^avnoi, 1038. The 
 Byzantine empire. Dion/^sius Periegetes. 
 
 'll'E7ri?ja6piog, 1147, or 'H 'ETrioavpta, 878. The 
 kingdom of Epidaurus. Thiici/dides. 
 
 *H 'lunog, 677, or 'H 'lovia, 408. The kingdom 
 of Ionia. Straho. 
 
 'H lovsToj, 682, or 'H lovsTa, 413. Ibid. 
 
 * The possessives in this order are those which I have found 
 only in the masculine or neuter gender, and consequently 1 have 
 not been able to determine in what way they are declined, as^ 
 
 for example, whether it be o y.a.) tj AiTO'/shg, '/.a) ro Avcovzhyj or 
 AJc-ovsTc/;, AJo-oveTa, AJtroveTov, or both ways. But thus much is 
 certain, that the feminine possessives in this order must terminate 
 in o; or a, or both. 
 
113 
 
 CLASS i.— Order ii. 
 
 'H Kf>r^Taios, 976, or 'H Kpr^raTa, 707. The king- 
 dom of Crete. Thesaurus of Stephens. 
 'H Kpr,r-/iiog, 983, or 'H KpTiTTiia, 714. Ibid. 
 'H Mocxe^wiog, 737, or 'H MaxsSo'via, 468. The 
 Macedonian empire. Dionysius the Geographer, 
 'H Maxri^oviog, 740, or 'H Ma;<rj5ovia, 471. Ibid. 
 'H \=-ksylos, 620, or 'H AsAsy/a, 351. The king- 
 dom of the Leleg-es. Straho. 
 'H Anrapaiog, 769, or 'H Xiirapaia, 500. The 
 
 kingdom of Lipara. Herodian. 
 'H Maupova-iog, 1758, or 'H Maupouo-ia, 1489. The 
 
 kingdom of the Manrusii. Herodian. * 
 'H Mva-iog, 1187, or 'H Mua-ia, 918. The king- 
 dom of Mysia. Strabo. 
 'H OuoT.ova'Ktog, 1807, or 'H Ouo7.oda-xia, 1538. The 
 kingdom of the Volsci. Uionys. Halic. Ant. Rom. 
 'H taiJ.o^p<x>ciog, 988, or 'H %VLiKO^paKia, 719. The 
 
 kingdom of Samothrace. AthencEus. 
 'H tapUviog, 972, or TI SapSovia, 703. The king- 
 dom of Sardinia. See Hederic's Lexicon. 
 'H tixudiviog, 2027, or 'H tixotovia., 1758. The 
 
 kingdom of Sicyon. Euseb. Pampk. 
 ^ Tpoi^r>/o^, 1092, or 'H Tpoi^^vio^, 823. The 
 
 kingdom of Troezene. Steph. Thesaur. 
 •H TpciHog, 1747, or 'H Tpcoia, 1478. The king- 
 dom of Troy. Ibid. 
 
 * Strabo uses Tijv Mau^aciav frequently, perhaps with yr^ or 
 ;^a/'pa understood. 
 
 I 
 
114 
 CLASS I. — Orders n. and ni. 
 
 Ba(r/Xe/a. 
 
 •H <PomKB7os, 1213, or 'H (pomnsla, 943. The 
 
 kingdom of Phoenicc. Stcph. Thesaw\ 
 'H ^omxr^ios, 1215, or 'H tI>o<v;xii<a, 946. Ibid. 
 'H ^pomxios, 1207, or 'H ^o<wx/a, 938. Ibid. 
 
 ORDER III. 
 
 Including' the various orthographies of the differ- 
 ent monarchies for which I have not met with 
 their corresponding possessives, with the amount 
 of the numerical letters in each. 
 
 N. B. The possessives are formed from those contained in 
 the two preceding orders, viz. raXAoypajHij from r^aiV-i) ; 'Icr<- 
 yoiSijc^ from ForSm^ J AayoaajiJocij from Aayyo^a/^Jocij ; &c. &c. 
 
 'H VaXkitypaixri* The k. of the Gallogreclans 543 
 
 lo-iVorMt Thek. of the Visigoths 907 
 
 Aayyo^cLpTjT] J The k. of the Longobards 489 
 
 Aayyo'oaphxyi J ibid. 519 
 
 Aayo'r>aply] § ibid. 486* 
 
 Aayo^apoixri § ibid. 516 
 
 * TaXXiypoCiMi. Strabo. 
 + 01 — ''Icrlyor^oi. Porphyrogenitus. 
 X Aayfo'SccpSui. Procopius Caeaariensis; 
 § AayotapSo;. Suidas. 
 
Aoyyo^apOTj f 
 
 ibid. 
 
 Ao'yyo^af><)iH7] f 
 
 ibid. 
 
 Aoye€ap(;ri j] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 Aoys^apOixri ;|] 
 
 ibid. 
 
 Mso-y'via § 
 
 The kinp^doi 
 
 MsG-YiViaJiTj § 
 
 ibid. 
 
 115 
 CLASS I. — Order hi. 
 
 *H Ao77<^a^3/;«r) * The k. of the Longobards 528 
 
 558 
 . 588 
 955 
 985 
 f Messenia 581 
 609 
 
 'O'i<nyQr0i:<^ || The kingdom of the Visigoths 977 
 OuiG-riyorSiHr^ 5 ibid. 1375 
 
 O'jia-iyorSiy.^''* ibid. 1377 
 
 OuviKYi f f The kingdom of the Huns 825 
 O'joivoa7,i>i-)i 11 The k. of the Vandals 861 
 
 Ouavori'AiH7i^§ ibid. 868 
 
 O'jXo-jc-x tog WW The kingdom of the Volsci 1737 
 OoT^ryjo-xia Ijjj ibid. 1468 
 
 0-k7<(rxiog ^'^ ibid. 1337 
 
 O-joT^a-xta 1^ ibid. 1068 
 
 * Aoy/joaiiia;, Of Lombardy. Joanuis Clnnami, IIi>t, A07- 
 jiSapoa.1. Procopiui Ctesaricni-. 
 
 + A'jyfo^ap^OAg. Procoplus C^v^sarionsis. 
 
 X Aoyo-jtaoSot. Porph) rogcnitus. 
 
 ^ Mscnjviof. Suitlas, 
 
 [1 'O'ia-iyori''jh Procopius Ci'sarien5i>i. 
 
 ^ 0-j icrr.y6r^jx'v: Ibid. ** 0.'.i-;;i.-b<. Ibid; 
 
 + + O'j'/o). Dobitheus. 
 
 IX OvdvSaXci. Photius. 
 
 §^ Ta'y OJaviijXx'/. Thoopbanes. 
 
 [jjj O'j\o\j<rxot. Suidas. 
 
 115 O'joXa-r.oi. Strabo. 
 
 12 
 
116 
 CLASS I —Order hi. 
 
 'HOu^ptyorQixr,* Thek. of the Ostrogoths 1767 
 
 %appoiKr)vixr f Tlie Saracenic empire 785 
 
 %TrapTia.rrj t The k, of Sparta 1267 
 
 '!So^ot.p£iTi}iri§ The k. of Sybaris 1323 
 
 * Ovrpiyot&ov. Procopius Caesariensis. 
 + l-cippaKrjVuJv. Nicetas Choniates. 
 X TcJy 'ZTfxptixt'Jjy. Diodorus Siculus. 
 § 'S.v^apiirwv. Philodemus de Musica- 
 
 CLASS II. 
 
 Containing the number of the different nations of 
 the world, which have either not been kingdoms, 
 or whose form of government I have not been 
 able to ascertain. * 
 
 ORDER I. 
 
 Including the Greek national possessives, the declension of 
 which is certain, with the amount of the numerical letters in each. 
 
 H *A€aqix7} The government of the Abari 656 
 *A8§aj(AUTT73v:5 The g. of Adramyttene 1726 
 
 ^Axapvavixr] The g. of the Acarnanians 775 
 'Axh'i'tolvkx. The g, of the Aquitani 1377 
 
 * Nearly all the Greek possessives contained in this order 
 will be found in Strabo's Geography. 
 
117 
 CLASS II.— Order l 
 
 'H'AfLi^iXoxixrj The g. of the Amphilochi 1803 
 
 Ba^apnxTi Tlie g\ of the Bastarni 1206 
 
 BsXyiHTi The g. of the Belga 592 
 
 Tsvus'iTiyri The republic of Genoa 1440 
 
 Aa7,[xaTix7i The government of Dalmatia 928 
 
 'EvsTtxr} The Venetian repubhc 913 
 
 'EpuQpaia The government of the Erythrse 1140 
 
 &8pivr} The g. ofThurium 1161 
 
 'loLTTohxTi The g-. of the lapodes 717 
 
 'la-aupix-^ The g\ of the Isaurians 1263 
 
 'l(rij.apixr} The g. of the Ismarians 903 
 
 Kap^Tjoovla.* The Carthaginian republic 1378 
 
 KoLp^'>]doviaxrj ibid. 1406 
 
 Kap^ri^ovixrj ibid. 1405 
 
 Kao-TTios The government of the Caspians 1095 
 
 Kao-TT/a ibid. 826 
 
 Ki^upctTixT] The government of Cibyra 1385 
 
 Kpri^wvixri The g. of Crestonia 2030 
 
 AeovTivri The g. of the Leontini 1037 
 
 AsuxahioL The g. of the Leucadians 985 
 
 Ai^upvtxrj The g. of the Liburnians 1144 
 
 Ai€upv\g ibid. 1316 
 
 Aso-iVav/a The g. of the Lusitani 1586 
 
 Mayv-^rixT] The g. of the Magnesians 954 
 
 Ma7^iaxy\ The g. of the Malians 624 
 
 * 'H Kap^rjSovia, is used substantively by Strabo for Ka^cp^ij^'cov, 
 Carthage. 
 
118 
 
 CLASS II.— Order i. 
 
 YloJ^iTsia. 
 
 'H Mapa-ixT] Th^ government of the Marsi 
 MstrtraTT/a Tlie g. of the Messapians 
 Mo(rxix'n T'^ic g-. of the IMoschi 
 Olrala The repubhc of the CEtans 
 'Ofj.'cpixri The g'overnment of the Umbrians 
 *07ro'jvTja The g. of tlie Opuntii 
 'Ops^ixri The g'. of the Orestae 
 Ua^JL^uXia The g. of the Pamphyhans 
 JJa[JL^u7iia7n-j * ibid. 
 
 JJarx^'jXiXT] 
 Tlspai^iXTj 
 JlsppaiSixr) 
 Jliori^ixr) 
 
 %(x.€e7\.7^ixr} 
 ^axoLia 
 
 "SsXyixrj 
 
 ^e^^ixri f 
 
 ^IV^lOCX^ 
 lElVOlXTl 
 
 The <^. 
 
 The g. 
 The g'. 
 The g-. 
 The g. 
 The g'. 
 The g'. 
 The g. 
 
 ibid. 
 of the Perrhffibi 
 
 ibid, 
 of the Pisidians 
 of Ravenna 
 of the SabelHans 
 of the Sacae 
 of Se]c:e 
 of the Servians 
 of the Sindi 
 
 ibid. 
 
 893 
 
 1051 
 
 1462 
 
 906 
 
 764 
 
 1495 
 
 1227 
 
 1576 
 
 1604 
 
 1603 
 
 750 
 
 850 
 
 856 
 
 941 
 
 820 
 
 747 
 
 790 
 
 859 
 
 817 
 
 816 
 
 * See Stephens' Thesaurus. 
 
 + l.ep'^ix.a] xuipoii-, Servian countries. Michaelis GlycaPj Hist, 
 p. 255. Edit. Venet. Byzant. Hist. 
 
119 
 
 CLASS II. 
 
 Order ii. 
 
 including the various orthog'raphies of the differ- 
 ent nations, for which I have not met with their 
 corresponding possessives, with the amount of 
 the numerical letters in each. 
 
 HoA/rs/a. 
 
 *H'AxuiVav<a* The (government of the Aquitani 1307 
 
 Bsvst/xt) f The Venetian repubhc 914 
 
 Au<r<Tavia J The g". of the Lusitani 1516 
 
 Me<ra7ria§ The g". of the Messapians 851 
 
 'OTTovTia 11 The g. of the Opuntii 1095 
 
 OusveT<;c75 1 The Venetian repubhc 1382 
 
 lli(r<Tihxri ** The g\ of the Pisidians 1056 
 
 c* 'ky.vira.yoi. Strabo. 
 
 + BsvsriK'Jjv. Nicephorus Gregoras. 
 
 X A-ja-irclvot. Strabo. 
 
 § Mstravlwv. Dionysius HalicarnassensiSj Antiq. Roman. 
 p. 29. 
 
 II 'Oiiovrl^, I do not recollect the author. 
 
 H Twv Oufvsrwv. Laooici Chalcocoudylae de Rebus Turcicis. 
 
 ** See Caroli a Sancto Paulo Geographia Sacra, cum Notis 
 et AnimadyersionibuSj Lucae IIolKtenH. 
 
120 
 
 Prom a close attention to the numbers of the 
 different nations set down in the preceding Classes 
 and Orders it will be sufficiently evident that there 
 is not one which contains the exact number of 666 
 This must be acknowledged a very singular cir- 
 cumstance^ when the great variety of examples pro- 
 duced are taken into the account. Yet the singu- 
 larity is much more remarkable when it is consi- 
 dered,, that even the use of the double article will 
 in no one instance produce the number^ that is to 
 say, whether ''H 'Fw^xa'ixr] (ia(ri7<sioL be computed, or 
 'H ^ao-iXsia ^ 'F(U[j.a'ixr} ; '^H IIs^(n>cr} ^a(n7<.sia, or'^H 
 ^aa-iksloi 71 rie^o-ixv) ; '^H Maxsoovix^ /BaciXs/ot, or H 
 ^aa-iT^eia 7} Muxe^ovixr), &c. &c. For in order that 
 any kingdom or power noticed in Classes I, or II. 
 might contain the number 666 when written with 
 the double article, it is necessary that the number 
 set down there should amount to only 658, the fe- 
 minine prepositive article >] having a numerical va- 
 lue equivalent to what 658 is deficient of the num- 
 ber of the Beast. In Class II. I have added to the 
 possessives the number contained in "H Tzoknua, 
 government, instead of that found in ''H 3ao-<Xe/a, 
 because I have not been able to determine the form 
 of government of several of the nations there 
 named, and the rest I have ascertained not to have 
 been kingdoms. lio'kiTsla contains 506 and ^acri- 
 y^sla 259; consequently the latter Avord has 247 
 less than the former. If the whole of the nations, 
 therefore, set down in Class II. be considered as 
 kingdoms, we shall find that even the subduction of 
 
m 
 
 239 from any of the numbers if the single article 
 be used, or of 247 if the double, will not leave 666 
 for a remainder. For that this should be the case 
 it is requisite that the nation numbered in Class II. 
 should contain 913 or 905. It is also worthy of 
 remark, that if even the word Trokirsia, which is 
 used by Aristotle for government in general, be 
 applied to all the nations in Class I. instead of /3a<r<- 
 Xsja, there is not one which will amount precisely 
 to ^^Qi, whether expressed with the single or dou- 
 ble article. This necessarily arises from the fol- 
 lowing- circumstance, that no kingdom noticed in 
 this Class contains 411 or 419. Hence no king- 
 dom or republic set down in the preceding Tables 
 contains the number of the Beast, whether it be 
 written with one or two prepositive articles. And 
 with respect to the two other forms used by the 
 Greeks to express the name of a power, (a consi- 
 derable number of examples of which have already 
 been given in the preceding part of this chapter,) it 
 is evident that the presence of the o), whose value 
 is 800, is sufficient to prevent the number of the 
 Beast from being found in either of these ways. 
 Therefore in no form whatever, which has been 
 used by the Greeks, can the number QQQt be shewn 
 to exist in any of the nations mentioned in the pre- 
 ceding Classes and Orders. But it has been already 
 proved that the Beast is some kingdom; and the 
 passage in the sixteenth chapter of the Revelation 
 has been produced in which the very term Bao-Ae/a, 
 or kingdom, is applied to the dominion of the 
 
122 
 
 Beast. This kingdom, therefore, can be no other 
 than that which is purposely omitted in the first 
 Order of the first Class ; I mean/H Aarlvr) ^ounT^zlct, 
 "'The Latin Kins:dom." It is thus numbered: 
 
 II = 8 
 
 
 A = SO 
 
 
 a = 1 
 
 
 T =300 
 
 
 « — 10 
 
 THE 
 
 V = 50 
 
 
 >) = 8 
 
 
 B = 2 
 
 LATIN 
 
 a = 1 
 
 
 0- =200 
 
 
 1 = 10 
 
 KINGDOM. 
 
 7i = 30 
 
 
 s = 5 
 
 
 1 = 10 
 
 
 a = 1 
 
 
 666 
 
 
 Having at length ascertained which is the king- 
 dom of the Apocalyptic Beast, it may be deemed al- 
 most unnecessary to inquire further into the legi- 
 timacy of the Greek words just numbered, as Aa- 
 Ttvog has been so largely treated of in a former 
 part of this work, and shewn to be used both as a 
 substantive and an adjective. But as this word 
 lias nnderg'one a considerable alteration in its pos- 
 
us 
 
 sesslve form^ it will be highly necessary to trace its 
 history from the time it was first iised^ to the pe- 
 riod in which the Greeks ceased to be a nation. It 
 is hardly necessary here to notice^ that this name 
 orig'inated in Latinus^ king' of the Aborigines, the 
 people over whom he reigned being called Latins,, 
 about 1 100 years previously to the commencement 
 of the Christian aM'a. From this period till a con- 
 siderable time after the apostolic age, every Greek 
 writer extant, who has had occasion for the posses- 
 sive o^ Latinushas used the adjective AarTvo^, Aar/j/oj, 
 Aar/fov, in its different cases and genders, accord- 
 ing as the occasion required; a considerable num- 
 ber of examples of which has already been given 
 in pp. 54, 55, and to which may be added the four 
 following out of Str^ibo, Tf; \arlvri <p(ovf„ * T^ AartV/ 
 y'XcoTTfi, f "^"tlie Latin tongue ;" T% Aarivris o3oO,J; 
 " the Latin way ;" Tfj Aoltivj) haTisxrw^ " the La- 
 tin dialect." § The earliest example of the cor- 
 ruption of Aar7mg, Aoltivt), Aar/vov, into Aarivixog, 
 AuTivixyj, AoLTivixlv, I believe is to be met Avith in 
 Dio Cassias, who flourished about A. D. 230. 
 The expression is Aanvixoi, pr'/xara, || '' Latin 
 words," instead of Aariva prjixara. The Greek 
 possessive of Latinus only occurs, I believe, three 
 times more in Dio Cassius, all which examples are 
 given in pp, 54, 55, and are free from the corrup- 
 
 * Pp. 201, 396. Edit. Amstel. 1707. + P. 242. ^ P. 382. 
 § P. 396. The adjective Aar/vvj, with o^o;, yi), or yjjjoot. un- 
 derstood, is frequently used by this writer. 
 II P. 713, Hamburg, 1650. 
 
124 
 
 tion just mentioned. * From the time of Dio 
 Cassius till the tenth century, I am not aware that 
 the corrupted Greek possessive Aoltivixos is to be 
 
 * The feminine possessive 'H AarTvij, rrji Aarr/iSoc, rri AanviSly 
 is applied to Latin women. Stephens, in his Thesaurus, gives 
 us as an example Aurhis ij,ov(ra, " The Latin muse ;" and I have 
 met with Fwai^] Aocrivla-iv, " Latin women," in the annals of 
 Nicetas Choniates, Lib. iii. p. 304, Edit. Venet. p. 370, Edit. 
 Paris. In the Pseudosibylline Oracles, Lib. v. I have met with 
 Aarr/iSos aoji, " Latin country," at the end of an hexameter 
 line. Aarjvioo; s'yiyo-^s Puii^r^;, " descendant from Latin Rome," 
 occurs at the end of two hexameter lines ; the first in the third 
 and the other in the eighth book of the Pseudosibylline Oracles. 
 In Nonni Dionysiacorum, Lib. xli. v. 160, is Aarjvioa oiArov, " a 
 Latin book." Nicetas Choniates has in one place (Lib. iii. p. 
 285. Edit. Venet.) Tou$ kx (pvXuJv Aa.uvlocjv, " Nations of the 
 Jjatin name;" and Dositheus, in his 'Iropia. itepk rujv kv 'Ispotro- 
 kvij^oig Xlccrciap^3VTa,vr'Mv, p. 4, has Tyj; Aanvloog (pwvYjg^ " The 
 Latin tongue." This possessive, however, is very rarely used; 
 and I have met with only one ancient example, which is that 
 given by Stephens. It is contained in the folloAving epigram 
 upon Apuleius, the Platonic philosopher, who flourished in the 
 second century, in the reign of the Antonines : 
 
 Ei; 'ATTuXijiOv TQv ^tkyov". 
 KoCi voEprjs a<pSr£y>ira. AactiviSos opyia ^uovtrris 
 K^sto Tta.irra.ivwy 'Attu Xry/oj-, ov riva, (J^vs-r/V 
 'Av(rov)s dfip-^ts (ro(plrjS dvz^pk^ciro Sei^^v. 
 
 On Apuleius the magician. 
 And Apuleius, intently looking into the silent rites of the in- 
 telligent Latin muse, worshipped a certain priest whom the Au- 
 sonian syren of secret wisdom had nourished. 
 
 Florilegii Variorum Epigr. Lib. v. Epigr. 59. 
 
 Accrivas is the only Greek possessive of Latinus, of which I cas 
 find an example so old as the Apostolic age. 
 1 
 
125 
 
 met with even once ; but after this time the posses*- 
 sive Aarhog became almost entirely disused^ and 
 Aarivixog was the word adopted in its stead. * Yet 
 even in the barbarous ages of the middle centuries, 
 when the Greek language was almost entirely 
 stripped of its ancient purity and elegance, the 
 possessive AaT7vo^ was sometimes used ; two noted 
 examples of which are the following : T% Aar/i/Tjg 
 <puX%, " the Latin tribe;" and T% Aarivrjg ^panag, 
 '" the Latin army/' both met with in the annals of 
 Nicetas Choniates, respecting the emperor Isaac 
 Angelus. f To what has already been said in fa- 
 vour of the possessive Atxrivag it may be added that 
 Aar<j/ixo<,' is not in any lexicon that I have met 
 with. Besides it would be absurd to suppose, that 
 the name of the Beast would be counted in the 
 barbarous Greek of the middle centuries, unless it 
 could be proved that the name did not exist till that 
 time, which we find was not the case. It therefore 
 
 * See the Byzantine Historians. The following examples, out 
 of a vast multitude which might be quoted, may be of use to 
 those who have it not in their power to consult these writers ; 
 Aarivixa s'pa.tBviua.ra.^ " Latin armies." Niceph. Greg. Lib. i. 
 c. 2. UXovm AartviKov, " Latin wealth." Ibid. Too Aurivmou 
 p^g(jw.wvo;, " the Latin tempest." c. 3. 'Eroocrov Aarivocov, " La- 
 tin army." Lib. ii. c. i. Tr^s AartviKrj; SeXslo-s, " the Latm 
 slavery." lb. Tpiy)pBiTiv Svo AattviKxl;, " two Latin Triremes." 
 c. 6. ToT; rs PujiJ,a,'iKot; na) Aar/vocoTj Uve(nv^ " the Roman and 
 Latin nations." Lib. iv. c. 5. 
 
 + Lib. i. p. 192. Edit. Venet. p. 234, Edit. Paris, and Lib. ii. 
 p. 205, Edit. Venet. and p. 251, Edit. Paris. Byzant. Ilistor. 
 Corpus. 
 
126 
 
 follows, that the Greek Avhicli Avas spoken in th«« 
 Apostolic ag-c, must be that in which the Beast is 
 numbered. 
 
 To complete the evidence for the possessive 
 \a,Tivog, this word was that Which was used by 
 Pkitarch, who hvcd between A, D. 50, and A. D. 
 120, (and consequently was contemporary with St, 
 John,) as may be seen in the following' examples : 
 Twv '^70\.riVixa)V 6vo[j.oCtcov tots jOtaXXov 7} vZv rois Aar?- 
 voig 6ivaxBKoaix.sv(oVy * " Greek words being* mixed 
 with Latin at that time^ rather than in the present 
 age/' Tag >ic0^8ij,evag Aarivctg eo^rag^ f " the Latin 
 feasts so called." 
 
 Before I close this chapter it will be proper to 
 notice the very striking- peculiarity of this number. 
 There is no other kingdom but that of the Latins 
 which contains it, that I have been able to disco- 
 ver. There are, indeed, hundreds of nations not 
 noticed in the preceding Tables, because I was not 
 able to find their national possessives ; and several 
 of those directly denominated kingdoms I have 
 been obliged to omit on the same account, such as 
 the kingdom t^Sv Aquo-rcov, of the Dryopes ; rujv Xt- 
 xavajpj of the Sicani ; rcov %=yz(;cLvwj, of the Seges- 
 tani ; r&v Xoyoia-vajv, of the Sogdiani ; rcZv 'Oa-goTji'oIy, 
 of the Osroeni ; rcos/ O'jctovMv, of the Varni ; r<:o> 
 Marsojv, of the Matei ; rwv Ila<puov, of the Paphians ; 
 ruiv A'jyxTjg-tyv, of the LyncestEe; raiv 'O^otrcov, of 
 
 * See his Lives, Vol. I. p. 139, EJit. Loud. 1729. 
 t Ibid. p. 289. 
 
127 
 
 the Odrysl ; rmv ^Xa-irT^rjoovuo'j, of the Aspledonii ; 
 rojv Vasa-iciov, of the Ragusans ; tojv AM^atayj, of the 
 Mlq\ ; T«)V Aiixaovaiv, of the Lycaonians ; rwv Kat- 
 vtTcHVj or KsvivrjTajv, of the Cseninensians ; rcov Ku^i- 
 r(ov, of the Quirites ; rcov K^.sa-ivuJv, of the Clusini ; 
 Tcov Mi/x^yoJVj of the Myceiia? ; * rwv ^la-^ar^7\.irajv, of 
 the Israehtes ; rwv ^¥^^s-)(BH(ic6v, of the Erechthidae ; 
 ToJv ^laxxa^a'ixui'j , of the Maccabees ; royv B^i/syev- 
 hwv, or T&j Bspysv^iovcov, of the Burgundians; rajff 
 Ouyy^cov, or rwv Oityyapcov, of the Iluiig'arians; row 
 Ils^yajote, of Pergamus ; rcuv ForoXcov, oftheRutuli; 
 rcov KA8<r/a)V_, of the Clusii ; raJv Tsysarmv, of the 
 Tegeates^ &c. &c. f 
 
 But there is a pccuharity in the Latin kingdom 
 which does not obtain in some of the others. Only 
 one kingdom appears to contain 666 ; but several, 
 other kingdoms have similar numbers, such as 'H 
 'Apa^txrj ^aa-iTisia, the Arabian empire, and 'H 
 TpaixYj fiacriTvsia, tlie Greek empire, both whicli con- 
 tain the number 409; 'H 'E7\.Xrjuix-^ ^aa-iT^sia, the. 
 Greek empire, and 'H W7>,s[xavixr, ^a<riXsla., the king- 
 ^lom of the Alemans, both containing 428 ; 'H 
 'AT^avri j6a(r<Xs/a, the kingdom of the Alans, and 'H 
 M-^oiHr; ^uG-iXsla, the empire of the Medes, both 
 containing 357; 'II ' Aix^paxiuxr^ (^ota-iTisia, the king- 
 
 * If Mv-KT/voclos be an adjective, which I rather think may be 
 proved, then 'H Mv}n^vahg jSao-iAsia, or 'H M-.y.rjVOiia. /3ao-iAe/a, 
 will contain 1066 or 797. 
 
 + The nations mentioned by Strabo, for which there are no 
 possessives, amount to several huwdreds. See his Geography 
 
128 
 
 fidtn of Ambracia, and *H No/Aa5ix>) ^octriXsla, the 
 kingdom of the Numidians, both containing 470; 
 'H 'A[x7rpaxixr} ^acriT^sia, the kingdom of Am- 
 bracia, 'H 'Sa.fj.iaxri ^0L<n7^sia, the kingdom of Samos, 
 and H "S^Xa^ixri ^ota-iT^sta, the kingdom of the 
 Sclavij all three containing 547 ; 'H 'A7<avix7i (iaa-i- 
 TiBia., the kingdom of the Alans ; and 'H 'Aoye/a 
 ^aa-iT^sia., the kingdom of the Argives^ both contain- 
 ing 387; 'H 'ApyoTiixrj ^a.<Ti7isla, the kingdom of 
 Argolis, 'H 'AppocSixT, ^aa-iT^sia, the Arabian empire, 
 and 'H Aaxs^az/xov/a ^aa-iXsia,, the kingdom of La- 
 cedaemon, all three containing 509 ; 'H 'Apxa^iaxr} 
 3ao-<X£/a, the kingdom of Arcadia, and 'H Spriixir} 
 (6cx.<riXsia, the kingdom of Thrace, both containing 
 432 ; 'H ^ArrtxTi ^aa-iT^sloc, the kingdom of Attica, 
 *H KuTTpiaxri (Sao-iXs/a, the kingdom of Cyprus, and 
 *H XafjLVirix-^ ^a(n7,eia, the kingdom of the Sam- 
 nites, all three containing 906; 'H W)(^oiix7) (^aa-i- 
 7is/a, the kingdom of the Grecians, and 'H 'Icriyor- 
 Qix-^ (ioLcri'ksla., tlie kingdom of the Visigoths, both 
 containing 907 ; &c. &c. 
 
 Having thus demonstrated that 666 is a distin- 
 guishing character of the Beast from an inex- 
 pugnable body of evidence; it will now be neces- 
 sary to examine whether the description of the 
 Beast corresponds exactly with the history of the 
 Latin empire ; and that it does, even in the mi- 
 nutest tittle, will I trust be fully evident to every 
 person who carefully examines the contents of the 
 following chapters. 
 
1^9 
 
 CHAP V. 
 
 Exposition of the twelfth Chapter of the Revela- 
 tion, respecting the Woman and the Dragon. 
 
 If may seem strange, at first sight, that I should 
 here leave the genie ral subject of this work, and 
 make a digression upon the twelfth chapter of the 
 Revelation ; but the reader's surprise will imme- 
 diately vanish, when he is informed, that the pro- 
 per understanding of the Beast is so intimately con- 
 nected with that of the Dragon, that they cannot 
 be satisfactorily explained independently of each 
 other. In fact, a great portion of the chapter now 
 under consideration has been generally misun- 
 derstood ; and this has arisen principally from sup- 
 posing that the heads of the Dragon and the Beast 
 were the same; a supposition which will in the fol- 
 lowing pages be proved to be without foundation. 
 
 St. John commences his prophecy of the Woman 
 and Dragon with- the following words: " There 
 appeared a great wonder in heaven, a woman 
 cloathed with the; sun, and the moon under her 
 feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars." 
 That the Woman here represents the true church 
 of Christ, most commentators that I have read, are 
 agreed ; and it will be further illustrated by the 
 
 K 
 
130 
 
 passages in tlie 1 9th and 21st chapters of the Re- 
 velation, where the pure church of Christ is evi- 
 dently represented by a woman. In the first a 
 g-reat niuUitiide are represented as saying-, '' Let 
 us be g-lad and rejoice, and give honour to Him : 
 for the marriage of the Lamb is come, and his wife 
 hath made herself ready." In the second, an angel 
 talks with St. John, saying, *' Come hither, I will 
 shew thee the bride, the Lamb's wife." But that 
 the Christian church is meant will appear also from 
 her being" " cloathed with the sun," a fine emblem 
 of Jesus Christ, the sun of righteousness, the light 
 and glory of the church. The woman has also 
 '' the moon under her feet." Bishop Newton un- 
 derstands this of the Jewish new moons and festi- 
 vals : and indeed^ the Mosaic system of rites and ce- 
 remonies could not have been better represented ; 
 for they were the " shadow of good things to come." 
 The moon is the less light, and derives all its illit- 
 minatLon from the sun ; in like manner the Jewish 
 ceconomy possesses a portion of the glorious light 
 of the Gospel. At the rising of the sun the lunar 
 light is no longer necessary, as the sun which en- 
 lightens her, shines full upon the earth ; and exactly 
 in the same way has the whole Jewish system of types 
 and shadows been superseded, and rendered unne- 
 cessary by the birth, life, crucifixion, death, resur- 
 rection, and ascension, of Jesus Christ. * Upon the 
 head of the woman is also a crown of twelve stars, a 
 very significant representation of the twelve apos^ 
 
 * See Kershaw on the Rerelation, Vol. II. p» 142. 
 
m 
 
 ths, who ^Vere the first founders of the Christian 
 church, and by whom the gospel was preached in 
 great part of the Roman empire. By these twelve 
 stars most commentators have understood the twelve 
 apostles ; but Dr. Mitchell differs from them, and 
 imag'ines that princes or eminent men were in- 
 tended, but certainly without any foundation, for 
 stars are here designed evidently to represent reli- 
 gious ministers ; and the number twelve defines the 
 meaning in this place. 
 
 The woman " being with child, cried, travailing 
 in birth, and pained to be delivered." This is a 
 striking figure, as Bishop Newton well observes, 
 of the great persecution which the church of Ciirist 
 should suffer under the heathen Roman emperors,* 
 but more especially of that long and most dreadful 
 one under Dioclesian. The woman is represented 
 as '' being with child," to shew that the time would 
 come when God's patient forbearance with the Hea- 
 then would be terminated, and that a deliverer should 
 arise in the Christian world wlio would execute the 
 Divine vengeance upon Paganism. She is also re- 
 presented as overtaken with the pangs of labour, to 
 denote that the time is close at hand when she 
 should be freed from all her persecutors, as well as 
 to shew that her deliverance sh'ould immediately 
 follow a time of great affliction. 
 
 * The ten principal persecutions of the Christians by the Ilea- 
 then emperors commenced intlie following years: A. D. 64, 95, 
 107, 118, 202, 237, 2ii0, 257, 273, and 303. This last was the 
 severest, and contimied about ten years. 
 
 K 2 
 
132 
 
 ^,/fi There appeared another wonder in heaven, 
 and, behold, a great red dragon, having seven 
 heads, and ten horns, and seven crowns upon \u» 
 heads." Tliat the Dragon is the symbol of the 
 Heathen Roman empire is the opinion of most 
 commentators; but none have given a sufficient 
 reason why it should be here called a Dragon. 
 The general sentiment upon this passage is con- 
 tained in the following words : " The principal in- 
 tention of the prophecy in calling , the Roman 
 power a dragon, was to set forth its religion and 
 enmity to Christ. It was under the influence of 
 the dragon or serpent, the devil, the destroyer of 
 mankind, and was instigated by him to worship 
 idols and false gods ; war and cruelty were its em- 
 ployment, and it became the great adversary of the 
 Woman, or Christian church, by persecuting and 
 slaying her children." * But all this reasoning is 
 totally inconclusive ; for in this sense every wicked 
 power might be called a dragon. It has been 
 already observed that the Dragon is the symbol 
 not of the Roman empire, but of the Heathen Ro- 
 man empire ; it therefore must be a representation 
 of the religion of this empire. But what is a dra- 
 gon ? An entirely fabulous beast of antiquity. ^ 
 
 * Sec Dr. Mitchell's New Exposition of the Revelation, Part 
 II. pp. 9, 10. 
 
 + The following strictures upon this imaginary anifhal are 
 given in Dr. Rees' Cyclopsedia upon the word Draco : " There 
 is nothing in the wide expanse of creation's range apparent to our 
 
133 
 
 Consequently a most proper emblem of the Hea- 
 then worship, which consisted in paying adoration 
 to great numbers of imaginary beings, termed 
 gods, goddesses, &c. &c. The very foundation of 
 
 knowledge that can incline us to believe that the conception of 
 the dragon originated from any natural object: it is assuredly 
 the spontaneous offspring of a glowing imagination created iti 
 immediate subserviency to the mythology of remote antiquity, 
 and in which it constitutes a pre-eminent character. The exist- 
 ence of the dragon was firmly credited among the ancients of 
 almost every nation, both in the eastern and western nations of 
 the earth, as may be clearly deduced from numberless authori- 
 ties : it occurs in the sacred allegories of the Jews, and in the 
 legends of the Chinese, from the earliest times of which any re- 
 cord is preserved; and even to this period is au object of wor- 
 ship in China; the like may also be said of Japan, and indeed of 
 most Oriental countries. The classic poets of Greece and Rome 
 afford abundant representations of this formidable monster: the 
 dark retreats of their gods, and their sacred groves, were de- 
 feiulexl by dragons ; and the Romans, Persians, and various other 
 nations, fought under its banners and protection. The chariot 
 of Ceres was drawn by dragons, and a dragon kept the garden of 
 the ITesperides. In the Scandinavian mysteries the dragon was 
 the minister of vengeance under their vindictive gods; and the 
 Britons, like the Gauls, -entertained a similar idea qf its vetigeful 
 powers, while enslayed in the trammels of Druidic superstition. 
 The dragon of the ancients was represented as possessing attri- 
 butes sometimes even approaching divinity: his form was that of 
 a serpent with wings and feet : his size was affirmed to be stu- 
 pendous, and the powers he possessed destructive and irresistible: 
 his agility in flight was compared sometimes Avith that of an 
 eagle, or sometimes with the" velocity of ligutning ; and it was 
 furthermore declared, that the brilliancy of his eyes was alono 
 sufficient to dissipate the darkness of midnightk'' 
 
134 
 
 their religipus system is mostly h\u\t upon fable ; 
 and it is very difficult to trace many of their super- 
 stitions to any authentic original; and even those 
 %vhich appear to derive their orig'in from the Sacre^ 
 Writing's * are so disguised in fable as literally to 
 bear no more resembla\ice to the ti'uth than the dia- 
 gon of the ancients does to any animal with which 
 we are acquainted. It is very remarkable that the 
 Heathen Roman empire is not said to be like a 
 dragon, as the Beast in the 13th chapter of the 
 Revelation is said to be like a leopard ; or as the 
 three first beasts mentioned in the seventh chapter 
 of the prophet Daniel are likened to a lion, a bear, 
 and a leopard respectively. The reason is obvious 
 from the consideration, that if this empire had been 
 likened to a dragon, it would argue that there is or 
 was such a beast as a dragon ; for it would be 
 highly absurd to say it was like an animal which we 
 know has never existed. But the Heathen Roman 
 empire is called a dragon, that is to say, its religion 
 is a system of fable ; f and a great dragon to shew 
 that its empire was very extensive ; and a great 
 MED dragon, to shew that it acquired its mighty 
 dominion by immense slaughter, and it is called so 
 likewise on account of its gveat persecution of the 
 
 * See Bryant's Ancient Mythology, wherein is an attempt io 
 divest many of the Heathen traditions of fable. In Vol. I. pp. 
 428 — 434. Edit. London, 1775, is given a detailed account of 
 the A^ajca-v of the ancients, 
 
 + Ammianus Marcellinus says, that the Romaus had figures of 
 4ragons painted in red on tbpir flags. 
 
Christians during the three first centuries. The next 
 thing we read of the Dragon is, that it has ^' seven 
 heads/' a circumstance which has been almost to-* 
 tally misunderstood by every commentator. The 
 reason that it has been misunderstood^ is in uni- 
 formly considering the seven heads of the Dragon 
 to be exactly the same with those of the Beast ; * a 
 supposition totally irreconcileable with the rest of 
 the description of the Dragon yet to be examined. 
 First, the heads of the Dragon and the Beast can- 
 not be the same, because the Beast is the Latin em- 
 pire, and the Dragon the Heathen Roman empire. 
 Secondly, the angel informs St. John that the sixth 
 head of the Beast was subsisting in his time, by 
 which is meant the sixth form of government, as 
 shall presently appear; but the form of govern- 
 ment of the Heathen Roman empire existing 
 in St. John's time, was the same which it had 
 
 * The general notion of commentators that the heads of the 
 Dragon and Beast are the same is thus expressed by Sir Isaac 
 Newton, who was of the same opinion: "The Dragon signifies 
 the same empire with Daniel's he-goat in the reign of his last 
 horn, that is, the whole Roman empire, until it became divided 
 into the Greek and Latin empires; and all the time of that divi- 
 sion it sigiufics the Greek empire alone ; and the Beast is Da- 
 niel's fourth beast, that is, the empire of the Latins. Before 
 the division of the Roman empire into the Greek and Latin em- 
 pires, the Beast is included in the body of the Dragon; and from 
 the time of that division the Beast is the Latin empire only. 
 Hence the Dragon and Beast hare the same heads and horns ; 
 but the Jicads are crowned upon the Dragon, and the horns upon 
 ihe Beast." See his Observations on Daniel and the Apoca- 
 lypse, p. 315. London, 173j. 
 
136 
 
 wlicn Paganism ceased to be the religion of the. 
 empire; consequently^ the imperial power must 
 have been the seventh or last head of the Dragon. 
 That the heads represent forms of government can- 
 not be doubted, when the symbol is properly con- 
 sidered. The head is the chief and most essential 
 part of an animal ; so is the g-overnment of an 
 empire ; the different heads of the Dragon must^ 
 therefore, represent as many heads or forms of 
 government. And in farther confirmation of this 
 point it is observable, that the head has been used 
 fig-uratively in all nations for the chief, principal^ 
 or topmost, of any thing-. The heads of the Dra- 
 gon have been differently named by different au- 
 thors. Lord Napeir enumerates them as follows : 
 *' 1 Kings, 2 Consuls, 3 Dictators, 4 Triumvirs, 
 5 Tribunes, 6 Emperors^ and 7 Popes." * But it is 
 evident that this cannot be the right enumeration 
 of them, for the Papal government formed no part 
 of the Heathen Roman empire. Dr Henry More^ 
 who flourished in the seventeenth century, counted 
 them as follows : Kings, Consuls, Tribunes, De- 
 cemviri, Dictators, Pagan Caesars or emperors_, 
 Christian emperors, and emperors Pagano-Chris- 
 tian. f But this is more unlikely than the former; 
 for the Christian emperors, and the emperors Pa- 
 gano-Christian, by whom he meant Popes, were 
 both subsequent to the conversion of the Roman 
 
 * See Napeir on the Revelation, p. 157. 
 t'See his Apocalypsis Apocalypsex-s, in lot, 
 
137 
 
 empire from Paganism. We will only produce one 
 more enumeration of the Draconic heads, which is 
 that adopted by Bishop Newton, and at present 
 most gehe'rally received. They are the following' : 
 King's,, Consuls, Dictators, Decemvirs, Military Tri- 
 bunes with consular authority. Emperors, and 
 Dukes. The principal defect in this last list is that 
 the emperors ore considered the sixth instead of the 
 seventh head, the dukedom of Rome never consti- 
 tuting a head of the Roman empire while in its Hea- 
 then or Christian state. In support of the general 
 assertion, that there were only five forms of Roman 
 government previously to the imperial, a passage in 
 the beginning of the sixth book of Livy 's Roman his- 
 tory has been unfairly quoted. For Livy's words are 
 to the following effect : "I have," says he, "^ in the 
 five former books, given an account of all the wars 
 abroad, and the seditions at home, which the Ro- 
 mans have had, from tlie first building of the city 
 to the taking of it, under kings, consuls, decemvirs, 
 dictators, and consular tribunes." * From this 
 quotation it is plain that Livy's sole meaning is, 
 that from the foundation of Rome, in the year be- 
 fore Christ 753, till the taking of the city by the 
 Gauls A. U. C. 364, and B. C. 389, the Romans 
 
 * Qufe ab condita urbe Roniii xid oaplam eandera urbem Ro- 
 jnani sub regibus priraum, consulibus deinde ac dictatoribus, de- 
 cemvirisque ac tribimis. consularibus gessere, foris bella, domi 
 seditiones, quinque libris exposui. Lib. vj, c. 1. See also Dr. 
 JVIitcteU's New ExposUiou of tho Revelation, Part ii. pp. 10, 11. 
 Stockport/ 1800. 
 
138 
 
 were under five different kinds of government. But 
 it is well known that the imperial power did not 
 commence till after the battle of Actium in A. U. C. 
 722, and B. C. 31, a period of 358 years after the 
 taking' of Rome by Brennus, and in the course of 
 which appeared a new form of Roman government, 
 tjiat of the Triumviri^ evidently as distinct from any 
 of the others, as kings are from consuls, or consuls 
 from emperors. For the triumvirate consisted in the 
 division of the Roman republic into three parts, 
 each governed by an officer possessed with consular 
 authority in his own province ; and all three united 
 together in the regulation of the whole Roman 
 state.* Consequently it differed entirely from the 
 imperial power, which was the entire conversion of 
 the Roman state from a republic to a monarchy. 
 The following must, therefore, be the seven heads 
 of the Dragon, viz. The Regal Power, the Con- 
 eulate, the Dictatorship, the Decemvirate, the con- 
 sular power of the Military Tribunes, the Trium- 
 virate, and the Imperial Government. In support 
 of this enumeration the celebrated passage in Ta^ 
 citus's Roman history, which has been so often 
 quoted to serve a different purpose, may be here 
 produced with great advantage. It is to the fol- 
 lowing effect: "The city of Rome was originally 
 governed by kings. L. Brutus instituted liberty 
 and the consulate. The dictatorship was only occa- 
 sionally appointed ; neither did the decemviral power 
 
 * See RoHin's Roman Ilrstory upon the Triumvirate, as well 
 as other historians who have written upon tjie same subject. 
 
1S9 
 
 last above two years ; and the consular power of the 
 m\lit^ry trii)>iines wag not of long- continuance. Nei- 
 ther had Cinna nor Sylla a long domination : the 
 power of Pompey and Crassus also was soon absorb- 
 ed in that of Gaesar ; and the arms of Lepidus and 
 Antony finally yielded to those of Augustus*," 
 Here^ it is evident, there are exactly seven forms of 
 government mentioned^ which are the same that 
 have been already noticed. It l«is been objected 
 that Tacitus mentions in this passagt? more than 
 jseven kinds of government-}-; but this objection 
 will be seen to rest upon no foundation^ when it is 
 considered that neither Cinna nor Sylla introduced 
 a change in the government, the power which the 
 first held being tlje consulate, and that of the latter 
 at one time being the consulate, and in a subsecjuent 
 period the dictatorship. And it is well known that 
 the power of Pompey, Crassus, and Cassar, was the 
 first triumvirate ; and that of Lepidus, Augustus, and 
 Antony, the second triumvirate. Thus we have froia 
 the testimony of Tacitus, one of the greatest Roman 
 historians, the names of the seven Draconic heads; 
 and it is also demonstrated that the imperial power is 
 <.he seventh, and not the sixth head, as commentators 
 
 * Uibcm Romatn i principio reges habuore. Liberfatem et 
 consulatiim L. Brutus in^tituit. Diclafurai ad tcnipus sumeban- 
 tur: neque decerav halls potestas ultra bicnnium, ncque tribu- 
 noruni militum consular^ jus diu valuit. Non Cinnai non SuUee 
 longa dominatio : et Pompeii Crassique potcntia clto in C<Esa- 
 rem ; Lepidi atque Antonii arma, in Augustum cesscre. Tacit. 
 Anrsal. Lib. I. in principio. 
 
 + S?e Poll Synopsis Criticorcin, in loc. 
 
 . 4 
 
140 
 
 have hitlierto imagined*. But tlie Dragon is also 
 represented Avith ten horns. That these ten horns 
 
 * The following is the history ofu'the rise, continuance, and 
 fall, of (he sevpn Roman forms of government: The regal gOf 
 Ternment commenced with the foundation of Rome, and conti- 
 nued 241 years, viz. from B. C 733 to B. C. 509. The kings 
 that reigned were seven in number, who began their reigns as 
 follows: Romulus, B.C. 753; Numa, 715; TuUus Ilostiliu^, 
 672; Ancus Martins, 640 ; Tarquinius Priscus, 616; Servius 
 Tollus, 578 ; and Tarquinius Superbus, 534. The consulate was 
 introduced by Lucius Junius Brutus; and continued at the head 
 ,of the republic, with frequent interruptions, till the establish* 
 inent of the triumvirate of Augustus, Antony, and Lepidus, 
 15. C. 43. The first that filled the oiTice of dictator was Titus 
 Laitius Flavins, B. C. 498. This office was originally held for 
 only six months at a time, and was only resumed when the af- 
 fairs of the Romans were in a critical state. The dictator knew 
 no superior in the republic, the consuls themselves being in sub- 
 jection to him. As his power was absolute, he could proclaim 
 ;war, levy forces, conduct them against an enemy, and disband 
 them at pleasure. But this office, so respectable and illustrious 
 in the first ages of the republic, became odious by the perpetual 
 usurpations of Sylla and Julius Cassar; and after the death of the 
 latter, the Roman senate, on the motion of the consul Antony, 
 passed a decree which for ever forbade a dictator to exist iu 
 Rome. The decemviral power was instituted B. C. 450, and 
 was so denominated from ten nien being invested with absolute 
 authority. But this form of government was of very short con- 
 tinuance; for in the third year it was entirely abolished in con- 
 sequence of the great dissatisfaction of the people, and consuls 
 were again appointed. The military tribunes with consular 
 authority wore fir&t elected B. C. 443, during whose administra- 
 tion the consular dignity was entirely suspended. They were 
 only three originally ; but the number was afterwards augmented 
 to six or more, according to the will of the people, and the emer- 
 
141 
 
 must signify aS m^ny kinj^doms, is evident from the 
 seventh chapter of Daniel, whtre the angel, speak- 
 ing of the fourth beast, says, that " the ten horns out 
 of this kingdom are ten kings that shall arise;" and 
 in this view of the passage many commentators are 
 agreed • who also admit that the ten kingdoms are to 
 be met with " amid the broken pieces of the Roman 
 empire." And it is evident that nothing less than 
 the dismemberment of the Roman empire, and its 
 division into ten independent kingdoms, can be in- 
 tended by the angel's interpretation just quoted. If, 
 therefore, the ten horns of Daniel's fourth beast 
 point out as many kingdoms ; for the very same 
 reason must the horns of the Dragon have a similar 
 meaning. But the .Roman empire was not dis- 
 membered, and divided into several kingdoms, till 
 a considerable time after it became Christian. In 
 what sense then can it be said^ that the different 
 kingdoms into which the Roman empire was divided 
 by the barbarous nations are horns of the Dragon ? 
 I answer, in two senses. First, they may be con- 
 sidered as horns of the Dragon, because they were 
 
 gencies of the state. Part of them were plebeians, and tlie rest 
 of patrician families. . When they had subsisted about 70 years^ 
 not without seme interruption, the office was totally abolished, 
 and consuls again elected, one of which was chos^en out of the 
 plebeians. The triumvirate was first established B. C. 60, so 
 denominated from three officers who Avere-put in possession of 
 Ihe whole power of the Roman state. This power was abolished 
 by the battle of Actium of September 2, B.' C. 31, and was 17UC- 
 ceeded by the imperial^ {ho last form of governraeiit of the Hea- 
 then Roman world. This form of government continued about 
 508 years. See Lempriere's Classical Dictionary. 
 
fonnded by great hosts of HcalUen bar1)arOTls rttf* 
 tions, whicli at first threatened the uttet subversion 
 of Christianity. Secondly^ they were horns of th6' 
 Drag-on, because it was the Roman monarchy, in its' 
 seventh Draconic form of gdvernment, which waJr' 
 dismembered by the barbarians. For, though th^ 
 Roman empire was not divided into ten kingdoms 
 till a considerable time after it became Christiati, 
 it is well known that the depression of the Heatheti 
 idolatry, and the advancement of Christianity to thc^ 
 throne, eifected not thelea^t chang-e in thaforihof 
 government : the Romans continued still to be' uW- 
 der subjection to the'wipcrial jiotver ; and'cons€'* 
 quently, when the Heathen barbarous nations di- 
 vided the Roman empire among* themselves, they 
 might very properly be denominated horns of the 
 Dragon, as it was by means of their incursions thai 
 Xh^im^perial ponder, founded by the Heathen Caesaf.^^ 
 Vf?i% abolished. Bishop Newton in his Dissertation 
 upon the seventh chapter of Daniel, gives us the enu- 
 meration of the ten kingdoms accorditig to different 
 authors. Mr. Mede reckons up the ten kingdoms thu» 
 in the year 456, the year after Rome was sacked by 
 Genseric, king' of the Vandals: 1. The Britons. % 
 The Saxons in Britain. 3. The Franks. 4. ThdBur- 
 gundians in France. 5. The Wisigothsin the south of 
 France, and part of Spain. 6. The Sueves and Alans 
 in Gallicia and Portugal. 7. The Vandals in Africa. 
 8. The Alemanes in Germany. 9. I'he Ostrogoths 
 wflpm the Longobards succeeded in Pannonia, and 
 afterwafds In Italv. 10. The Greeks iil the residue 
 
14 
 
 e% 
 
 Ve^. 
 
 --^ 
 
 6f the empire. Sir Isaac Newton num&ers theiti 
 thus: 1. The kingdom of the Vandals and Alans in 
 Spain and Africa. 3. The kingdom of the Suevians 
 in Spain. 3. The kingdom of the Visigoths. 4. The 
 kingdom of the Alans in Gallia. 5. The kingdom of 
 the Burgundians. 6. The kingdom of the Franks. 
 7. The kingdom of the Britons, 8. The kingdom of 
 the Huns. 9. The kingdom of the Lombards. 10. 
 The kingdom of Ravenna. Machiavel, in his his- 
 tory of Florence^ names them as follows: 1. The 
 Ostrogoths in MaBsia; 2. The Visigoths in Panno- 
 nia; 3. The Sueves and Alans in Gascoigne and 
 Spain; 4. The Vandals in Africa; 5. The Franks in 
 France ; 6. The Burgundians in Burgundy ; 7. The 
 Heruli and Thuringi in Italy ; 8. The Saxons and 
 Angles in Britain ; 9. The Huns in Hungary ; 10. 
 The Lombards at first upon the Danube^ afterwards 
 in Italy. Bishop Lloyd names them as follows : 1. 
 Huns about A. D. 356. 2. Ostrogoths 377. 3. Wisi- 
 goths378. 4. Franks 407. 5. Vandals 407. 6. Sueves 
 and Alans 407. 7. Burgundians 407. 8. Ilerules and 
 Rugians 476. 9. Saxons 476. 10. Longobards be- 
 gan to reign in Hungary A. D. 526, and were seated 
 in the northern parts of Germany about the year 
 483. Dr. Mitchell gives us the following list of them 
 in 455 : '^ In the north of Gaul the Merovingian 
 kingdom of the Franks had got possession of Bata- 
 yia, and a tract of country on the right and left 
 banks of the Lower Rhine : the Burgundians occu- 
 pied the middle provinces of Gaul, from Switzerland 
 to the ocean : the Visigoths possessed the southern 
 
144 
 
 provinces^ from the foot of the Alps to the Bay of' 
 Biscciy : the Saxons^ in 455, estabhshed themselves 
 ill Britain : the Suevi and Alans/united in one king- 
 dom, were settled in Galhcia in Spain, and the coun- 
 try now called Portugal : the Vandals occupied part 
 of Spain and Africa: the Alemanni were settled in 
 Rhoetia, the north of Switzerland, and Swabia: the 
 Boii reigned in Noricum, now called Bavaria,, and 
 Austria; the Thuringians held the western part of 
 Maesia : and the Ostrogoths held the strong country 
 of Pannonia, now called Hungary." * Of these va- 
 rious accounts of the ten kingdoms the two first will 
 not suit our purpose ; for in Mr. Mede's scheme the 
 kingdom of the Britons, and that of the Greeks, can 
 in no sense be considered horns of the Dragon, be- 
 cause they were not separated from the empire, till 
 after the time that they loecame Christian. And it 
 appears improper to unite the Ostrogoths and Lon- 
 gobards into one kingdom, as one was founded upon 
 the ruin of the other. In Sir Isaac Newton's scheme, 
 the kingdom of Ravenna cannot be called a Dra- 
 conic horn^ because it was a Greek power dependent 
 upon the eastern empire. The principal objectioft 
 I have to Dr. jMitchcii's list is, that he numbers 
 them at too early a period, even before the entire 
 dissolution of the western empire. The lists of Ma- 
 chiavel and Bishop Lloyd appear to me by far tiie 
 most probable, as the whole of the powers^ named by 
 these authors were Heathen nations at tlie timp wlien 
 the barbarians settled in the different parts of the 
 
 *See Dr. Mitchell's New E.^position of the Revelation, in loe» 
 
145 
 
 Roman dominions. The following mnst be, there- 
 fore, the ten liorns of the Dragon : 
 
 1. The kingdom of the Huns. 
 
 2. The king-dom of the Ostrogoths. 
 
 3. The kingdom of the Visigoths. 
 
 4. The kingdom of the Franks. 
 
 5. The kingdom of the Vandals. 
 
 6. The kingdom of the Sueves and Alans. 
 
 7. The kingdom of the Burgundians. 
 
 8. The kingdom of the Heruli, Rugii, Scyrri, 
 
 and other tribes which composed the 
 Italian kingdom of Odoacer. 
 
 9. The kingdom of the Saxons. 
 10. The kingdom of the Lombards.* 
 
 It is remarkable that the Draconic horns are not said 
 to be crowned as those of the Beast are.f The rea- 
 son of which is, that though the Barbarians invaded 
 the empire in their idolatrous heathen state, yet their 
 almost universal conversion to Christianity, so soon 
 after their transmigration, caused their dominions to 
 pass from being horns of the Dragon, or Heathen 
 empire, to those of DaniePs fourth Beast, or Roman 
 empire. It is also remarkable that the Dragon is 
 said to have " seven crowns upon his heads," which 
 denotes that in every form of Roman government 
 the heathen religion has been that of the state ; and 
 also that it was supported by the civil power. This, 
 therefore, is an additional evidence to what has been 
 
 * See Faber on the Prophecies, Vol. II. p. 270, Edit. Lend. 
 1810. 
 
 + Rev. xiii. 1 
 
 L 
 
146 
 
 already g"iven, that the imperial power was the 
 seventh and not the sixth Draconic head. 
 
 " His tail" also " draweth* the third part of the 
 stars of heaven." This passage does not appear to 
 have been understood by any commentator. A 
 pretty general opinion respecting the tail is^ that 
 it is a symbol here used^ because the strength of the 
 Dragon is supposed to reside in his tail, f But 
 Dr. Mitchell comes nearest to the true meaning, 
 when he says it alludes to the hindmost or last of 
 the heathen emperors ; and his quotation of a pass- 
 age of Scripture is very appropriate for this pur- 
 pose. He observes that it is no unusual mode of ex- 
 pression in the Old Testament to call the hindmost 
 of an enemy the tail ; as in Joshua x. 19. " Ye 
 shall cut off the hindmost of them/' which is literally 
 in Hebrew 'QT\^^ Dr!3371, " ye shall cut off their 
 tail." J Though Dr. Mitchell be right in suppos- 
 ing the tail to mean the last part of the Dragon ; 
 yet his application of it solely to the last heathen 
 emperors^ is incorrect. The truth is, the tail of 
 the Dragon is the seventh or last form of govern- 
 ment in the Heathen Roman world, viz, the impe- 
 rial power. And the tail, or imperial power, 
 " draweth the third part of the stars of heaven." 
 By the third part has generally been understood, 
 
 * In our common translation a-vpzi is translated " drew," but 
 this is evidently a mistake ; for the Greek word is in the pre- 
 sent tense, and consequently ought to be translated "draweth." 
 
 + See Poli Synopsis Critic, in loc. 
 
 J See his New Exposition of the Revelation, in loc. 
 
147 
 
 that the Roman empire subjected the third part of 
 tlie princes and potentates of the earth.* But 
 that this is not a correct statement of the fact is 
 evident from the testimony of ancient history. The 
 Roman empire was always considered and called 
 the empire of the ivorld by ancient writers ; and it 
 is even so named in Scripture, for St. Luke, in the 
 second chapter of his Gospel, informs us that 
 '' there went out a decree from C^sar Aui^ustus 
 that the whole world should be taxed," by which is 
 evidently meant the Roman empire. Dionysius of 
 Halicarnassus gives an account of the extent of the 
 Roman empire in words to the following effect : 
 " The city of Rome rules over the whole earth, 
 even over places which are inaccessible, as well as 
 those inhabited by men : for she sways the whole 
 sea, not only within the pillars of Hercules, but 
 also over every part of the ocean which is navigxi- 
 ble : and is the first and only city, in the memory 
 of man, which made the east and west the bounds 
 of its empire." f Pctronius informs us that '^'^ the 
 Roman conqueror had already in possession the 
 whole globe, wherever there is sea, or land, or 
 
 * See Poll Synopsis Critic, in loc. 
 
 ^aro; ks'''tv, aXA' uV' dv^lcujirujv KocroiKslrxi' Trcca-r.; Ss KcccTfi ^ac- 
 Ka,(r<rYjg, ou ^jlovov rri^ hros 'HpaxXslajv s-rj?^'Jov^ aAAa r.a.] rrj; 'Hkb- 
 aviriSos, ocrrj TrAeTtrSai [myj dSwaros er'j itf/ajtrj y.a] jU-oVtj roov sk rav 
 Ttavto; a]cit3VQ§^ [j.vritj.oi'zuoi^svwvy dvaroXa.s kx) ^vcsig opug Troir^cra- 
 ixBvyj TYig Swas-sloc^' Lib. i. prope principiuni. 
 
 L 2 
 
148 
 
 star ;" * and Ovid observes that "' the territories of 
 other nations were circumscribed within certain li- 
 mits, but that the dominion of the Roman city is 
 that of the world." f Hence it is evident, the third 
 part of the stars of heaven, cannot mean the third 
 part of tlie princes and potentates of the earth ; for 
 it is totally incredible that the whole world should 
 signify in the Apocalypse any thing- more than 
 what it did in the time when that book was 
 written, that is to say, the whole earth known at 
 that time. Others suppose, that the reason why 
 the Roman empire was called the third part, is be- 
 cause its power was principally exerted in Europe, 
 one of the three grand divisions of the ancient 
 world. J But this is entirely indefinite. For the 
 words of the prophecy are evidently designed to 
 comprehend the whole, and not a principal part, of 
 the imperial power. Secondly, it could not be 
 properly called the third part in this sense, unless 
 it could be proved that the Roman empire only 
 ruled over Europe, the then third part of the 
 known globe ; but that it had great dominion out 
 of Europe is a fact well known to every one con- 
 versant in Roman history. The whole mystery of 
 
 * Orbem jam totum victor Romanus habebat, 
 
 Qua mare, qua tellus, qua sidus currit utrumque. 
 See Sam. Pitisci, Antiq. Roman, on the word Imperium. 
 f Gentibus est aliis tellus data limite certo, 
 Romaiiae spatium est urbis, et orbis idem. 
 
 Fast. II. 683. See also Pitiscus^ ib. 
 X See Bishop Newton^ in loc. 
 
149 
 
 this passage consists in the misapprehension of its 
 symbohcal language. In order, therefore, to un- 
 derstand it, the symbols here used, must be exa- 
 mined. By heaven is meant the most eminent, or 
 ruling' part, of any nation. This is evident from 
 the very nature of the symbol : for " heaven is 
 God's throne ;" they, therefore, who are advanced 
 to the supreme authority in any state, are very pro- 
 perly said to be taken up into heaven, because they 
 are raised to this eminence by the favour of the 
 Lord, and are " ministers of his, to do his plea- 
 sure." And the calamity which fell upon Nebu- 
 chadnezzar was to instruct him in this important 
 truth, that " the Heavens do rule," that is, that all 
 monarchs possess their kingdoms by Divine ap- 
 pointment, and that no man is raised to power by 
 the chances of war, but " that the Most High ruleth 
 in the kingdom of men, and giveth it to whomso- 
 ever he will, and setteth up over it the basest of 
 men.'* The meaning of the symbol heaven being 
 thus ascertained, it cannot be difficult to compre- 
 hend the meaning of earth, this being evidently 
 its opposite, that is, every thing in subjection to 
 the heaven or ruling part. The figure is very 
 appropriate, for as heaven is God's throne, so is 
 the earth his footstool ; and as the heaven of an 
 empire is the throne of that empire ; so the earth 
 must be all in subjection to it. Stars have been al- 
 ready shewn to denote religious ministers; and 
 this is more fully evident from the first chapter of 
 the Revelation, where the seven stars which the 
 
150 
 
 Son of God holds in his ria;ht hand are explained 
 to signify the seven angels of the seven churches ; 
 by whom must be meant the seven pastors or mi- 
 nisters of these churches ; for as angels are '' mi- 
 nistering' spirits sent forth to minister unto them 
 who shall be heirs of salvation ;" so ministers of 
 the Gospel are the spiritual pastors of the Chris- 
 tian church. The resemblance of ministers to stars 
 is very striking ; for as the stars are the lamps of 
 heaven which give light upon the earth ; so are mi- 
 nisters the lights of the cause they advocate : and 
 their position in heaven, the symbol of domination, 
 very fitly betokens the spiritual authority of priests 
 or ministers over their flocks. Hence as the Woman , 
 or Christian church, has " upon her head a crown 
 of twelve stars/' which signifies that she is under 
 the guidance of the Twelve Apostles, who are the 
 twelve principal lights of the Christian world ; ^o 
 has the Dragon also his stars or ministers. The 
 stars therefore which the Dragon is said to draw 
 with his tail must represent the whole body of Pa- 
 gap priests, who were the stars or lights of the 
 Heathen world. From what has been said it is 
 evident, that the third part of the stars of heaven 
 which the Dragon draws with his tail, must mean 
 that the Heathen Roman empire draweth to his 
 side, the third part of religious priests or ministers. 
 But it has been already proved that the Heathen 
 Roman empire ruled over all the world then 
 known ; in what sense then can it be said that it 
 draws only a third part of the stars of heaven } The 
 
151 
 
 answer is, the religious world in the time of Sf, 
 John was divided into three f^rand branches, viz. 
 The Christian world, the Jewish world, and the 
 Heathen or Pagan world ; consequently as a dragon, 
 a fabulous animal, is an emblem of a religion founded 
 infahle, it necessarily follows, that the stxirs or minis- 
 ters of the Jews and Christians cannot be numbered 
 among those which the Dragon, or the Heathen 
 Roman power, draws with his tail, as they were 
 not the advocates of his idolatry, but were ministers 
 of a religion founded by the God of Heaven, and 
 consequently formed no part of the Pagan world ; 
 though they were in subjection, in secular matters, 
 to the Pagan Roman empire. The tail of the 
 Dragon, therefore, draweth after him the whole 
 Heathen loorld, " and hath cast them upon the 
 earth," that is, reduced all the Pagan priests under 
 the Roman yoke. The words of the prophecy are 
 very remarkable. It is said the tail of the Dragon 
 " draweth the third part," speaking in the present 
 tense ; but it is added, '' and hath cast them upon 
 the earth." What is the reason that the Greek xoci 
 couples verbs in different tenses ? Evidently to 
 shew that in the time when St. John wrote the 
 Apocalypse, the world was divided into the three 
 grand religious divisions already referred to, but 
 that the tail of the Dragon, or the Pagan Roman 
 power under its last form of government, had 
 brought the whole Heathen world into subjection 
 previously to the introduction of Christianity, when 
 the world was divided religiously into only two 
 
152 
 
 g-rand branches, viz. Jews and Gentiles. That 
 the meaning in which the third part is here under- 
 stood is that which is designed, is put beyond all 
 controversy when it is considered that this very di- 
 vision is made in the first and third verses of the 
 chapter now under consideration. In the first 
 verse we are informed of the woman, the Christian 
 church ; and the moon under her feet, the Jewish 
 church; and in the third verse a great red Dragon 
 is mentioned, which has been shewn to be the Hea- 
 then power. 
 
 " And the Dragon stood before the Woman 
 which was ready to be delivered, for to devour her 
 child as soon as it was born." This, I think, can- 
 not be better explained than in the following words 
 of Dr. Mitchell : '' Before the death of Constan- 
 tius, the heathen party being aware that the filial 
 piety of Constantine would induce him to follow 
 the example of his father, who so much favoured 
 the Christians, beheld him with a watchful and 
 malignant eye : many were the snares that, accord- 
 ing to Eusebius, were laid for him by Maximian 
 and Galerius : he relates the frequent and danger- 
 ous enterprises to which they urged him, with the 
 design that he might lose his life. When Galerius 
 heard of the death of Constantius, and that he had 
 appointed Constantine for his successor, he was 
 filled with the most ungovernable rage and indigna- 
 tion ; notwithstanding he did not dare to take any 
 steps contrary to the interest of Constantine ; the 
 dread of the armies of the west^ which were mostly 
 
153 
 
 composed of Christians^ was a sufficient check to 
 all attempts of that kind. Thus the Drao^on, or 
 Heathen power^ stood before the Woman^ or Chris- 
 tian church, to devour her son or deliverer, as soon 
 as he was born." * 
 
 "^ And she broug-ht forth a man-child who was 
 to rule alf nations with a rod of iron." That is, 
 the Christian church, when her full time came, ob- 
 tained a deliverer, who, in the course of the Divine 
 Providence, was destined to rule all nations, that is, 
 the Heathen Roman empire, with a rod of iron, a 
 strong fig-ure to denote the very great restraint 
 that should be put upon Paganism, so that it should 
 not be able longer to persecute the Christian 
 church. This man-child is the dynasty of Chris- 
 tian emperors, beginning- with Constantine's con- 
 version from Paganism, which happened in the 
 latter part of A. D. 312, after the defeat of the em- 
 peror Maxentius. 
 
 '' And her child was caught up unto God, and 
 to his throne." That is, a succession of Christian 
 emperors was raised up to the church ; for the Ro- 
 man throne is here called the throne of God, as 
 Bishop Newton very properly observes, because 
 ' there is'no power but of God ; the powers that be 
 are ordained of God.' 
 
 '' And the woman fled into the wilderness," a 
 very striking figure to represent the great and ra- 
 
 * See Dr. Mitchell's New Exposition of the Revelation, in 
 loc. 
 
154 
 
 pid increase of errors and heresies in the Christian 
 world after the time that Christianity was made the 
 religion of the empire, " Where she hath a place 
 prepared of God that they should feed her there a 
 thousand two hundred and threescore days." How 
 this was accomplished will be seen in a subsequent 
 part of this chapter. 
 
 '' And there was war in heaven." As heaven 
 here means the throne of the Roman empire, the 
 war in heaven consequently alludes to the breaking" 
 out of civil commotions among the governors of 
 this empire. But it appears that the war is under- 
 taken on a religious account : for " Michael and 
 his angels fought against the Dragon." Michael 
 is evidently put in opposition to the Dragon ; there- 
 fore the former must represent the Christian power, 
 as the Dragon comprehends the Heathen power. 
 The Christian power is very properly represented 
 by Michael, because he '' is the great Prince which 
 standeth for the children of God's people." '' The 
 Dragon" also " fought, and his angels," or minis- 
 ters, '' and prevailed not" against the cause of 
 Christianity ; '' neither was their place found any 
 more in heaven," the advocates of the Heathen 
 idolatry were deposed from having" any further 
 share in the government of the empire. The civil 
 wars evidently alluded to in the prophecy are thus 
 given by Dr. Mitchell from the Encyclopaedia 
 Britannica: " Licinius is convicted of having per- 
 secuted Christianity, which was so highly favoured 
 by his rival ; and Constantine is known to have 
 
155 
 
 been the first to begin the preparations for an open 
 rupture. Both sides exerted all their power to 
 make opposition : and^ at the head of very formi- 
 dable armies, came to an engagement, near Cyba- 
 lis, in Pannonia. Constantine, previously to the 
 battle, in the midst of his Christian bishops, begged 
 the assistance of heaven ; while Licinius, with 
 equal zeal, called upon the Heathen priests to inter- 
 cede with the gods in his favour. Constantine, 
 after an obstinate resistance from the enemy, be- 
 came victorious, took their camp, and after some 
 time compelled Licinius to sue for a truce, which 
 was agreed upon. But this was of no long conti- 
 nuance ; for soon after the Avar breaking out afresh, 
 and the rivals coming once more to a general en- 
 gagement, it proved decisive; Licinius was en- 
 tirely defeated. The consequence of this victory 
 was, the supreme power of the whole empire came 
 into the possession of Constantine, the first Chris- 
 tian emperor, and the religion of Jesus Christ was 
 established through all his dominions." 
 
 ^' And the great Dragon," or Heathen power, 
 "' was cast out, that old serpent, called the Devil 
 and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world: he 
 was cast out into the earth, and his angels were 
 cast out with him." Here the Heathen power is 
 represented under some of the most horrid charac- 
 ters of the great apostate spirit, the enemy of man- 
 kind. First, it is called the '' serpent which de- 
 ceiveth the whole world," in evident allusion to 
 that which deceived our first parents ; and it is 
 
156 
 
 well known tliat the Pag-an power has deceived 
 the whole world or Roman empire. Secondly^ it is. 
 called an '' old serpent/' to shew that idolatry 
 Avhich was the religion of the world in St. John's 
 days, had been the general religion of mankind 
 from the earliest ages. It is called the '' Devil/' 
 on account of its continual false accusations against 
 the true worshippers of the Lord ; for the Devil 
 " is a liar from the beginning, and abode not in 
 the truth, because there is no truth in him : he is a 
 liar, and the father of it." It is also denominated 
 '' Satan/' which is a Hebrew w^ord signifying an 
 adversary ; and the history of the frequent perse- 
 cutions of the Christians by the Heathens, is a suffi- 
 cient proof that they merited this appellation in the 
 fullest sense of the word. It is worthy of remark, 
 that there is a singular difference of expression be- 
 tween this passage and its parallel one in the 20th 
 chapter of the Apocalypse. In the former the 
 words are, '' that old serpent called the Devil and 
 Satan/' in the latter it is '' that old serpent which 
 is the Devil and Satan." If there be a difference 
 of meaning designed by these two expressions^ and 
 it appears to me there must be, then the sense of 
 the first passage is, that the old serpent here spo- 
 ken of, is not literally the Devil and Satan, or that 
 spirit which works in the children of disobedience ; 
 but is only so denominated because he is actuated by 
 the great apostate spirit under his two characters 
 of Devil and Satan, or liar and adversary. In the 
 second passage the meaning is, that the Dragon 
 
157 
 
 there spoken of, is literally the Devil and Satan ; 
 and the context consequently shews^ that this in- 
 veterate enemy of mankind will be entirely pre- 
 vented from deceiving- the world (till the thousand 
 years mentioned in that place be fulfilled J either 
 under the character of a " Drag'on/' by inciting" to 
 false worship, under that of '' Devil/' by falsely 
 accusing' the brethren, or under that of " Satan/' 
 by becoming an adversary to the church. The 
 Dragon and his angels are said to be cast out ; 
 which is more than was said in the preceding verse. 
 There, mention is made of his being' found no 
 linger in heaven, or on the throne of the Roman 
 empire; here, he is entirely cast out from all offices 
 of trust in the empire ; his religion is first only to- 
 lerated, and then totally abolished by the imperial 
 power. This great event was not the work of a 
 reign ; it took up many years ; for it had to contend 
 with the deep rooted prejudices of the Heathen, 
 who to the very last endeavoured to uphold their 
 declining superstition. Paganism received several 
 mortal strokes in the time of Constantine and his 
 sons Constans and Constantius. It Avas farther re- 
 duced by the great zeal of Jovian, Valentinian, 
 and Valens ; and was finally prohibited by the 
 edicts of Gratian, Theodosius I. and his successors. 
 It was not till A. D. 388, that Rome itself, the re- 
 sidence of the emperor, was generally reformed 
 from the absurdities of Paganism ; but the total 
 suppression of Paganism soon followed the conver- 
 sion of the metropolitan city ; and about A. D. 395, 
 
158 
 
 the Dragon may be considered to have been cast 
 into the earth, that is, into a state of utter sub- 
 jection to the ruling dynasty of Christian empe- 
 rors. 
 
 " And I heard a loud voice in heaven, saying", 
 Now is come salvation, and strength, and the king- 
 dom of our God, and the power of his Christ : for 
 the accuser of our brethren is cast down, which 
 accused them before our God day and night." 
 This is a song of triumph of the Christian church 
 over the Heathen idolatry ; and is very expressive 
 of the great joy of the Christians upon this most 
 stupendous event. The loud voice of triumph is 
 said to be heard in heaven, to shew that the Chris- 
 tian religion was now strenuously supported by the 
 heaven, or throne, of the Roman empire. " It is 
 very remarkable," as Bishop Newton observes, 
 " that Constantine himself, and the Christians of 
 his time, describe his conquests under the image of 
 a Dragon, as if they had understood that this pro- 
 phecy had received its accomplishment in him. 
 Constantine himself, in his epistle to Eusebius and 
 other bishops concerning' the re-edifying- and re- 
 pairing of churclies, saith that 'liberty being now 
 restored, and that Dragon being removed from the 
 administration of public affairs, by the providence 
 of the great God, and by my ministry ; I esteem the 
 great power of God to have been made manifest 
 even to all.' Moreover, a picture of Constantine 
 wfis set up over the palace-gate, with the cross 
 over his head, and under his feet the great enemy 
 
159 
 
 of mankind^ who persecuted the church by the 
 means of impious tyrants, in the form of a Dragon, 
 transfixed with a dart through the midst of his body, 
 and falHng* headlong into the depth of the sea." * 
 
 " And they overcame him by the blood of the 
 Lamb, and by the word of their testimony ; and 
 they loved not their lives unto the death." Here is 
 given the reason why tlie followers of Christ pre- 
 vailed at this time against all their adversaries ; 
 because, " they overcame the Dragon by the blood 
 of the Lamb," by their continual intercession at the 
 throne of grace for the conversion of the Hea- 
 then world; " and by the word of their testi- 
 mony," by continually testifying against the errors 
 and follies of mankind, " and they loved not their 
 lives unto the death," they regarded not their pre- 
 sent temporal estate, but even delivered up their 
 lives to the fury of their persecutors, and thus 
 sealed the truth of what they spoke with their 
 blood. " Therefore rejoice ye heavens, and ye 
 that dwell in them." Let the Christians which 
 are now partakers of the present temporal prospe- 
 rity, and advanced to places of trust in the empire, 
 praise and magnify the Lord who has thus so 
 mightily interfered in their behalf. But it is 
 added, '' Woe to the inhabiters of the earth and of 
 the sea ! for the Devil is come dow n to you, having 
 great wrath, because he knoweth that he hath but 
 a short time." By the earth is meant the people 
 
 * See Bishop Newton, in Joe. 
 
\60 
 
 in subjection to the Roman empire; and by the sea 
 those parts of the Roman dominions appear to be in- 
 tended that were reduced to a state of anarchy by the 
 incursions of the barbarous nations. It is not with- 
 out precedent to liken g'reat hosts of nations com- 
 bined together^ to the sea ; for, in the 3d verse of 
 the ^6th chapter of Ezekiel, God says of Tyre, 
 '' Behold, I am ag-ainst thee, O Tyrus, and will 
 cause many nations to come up against thee, as the 
 sea causeth his waves to come up." Here then is 
 a woe denounced against the whole Roman world, 
 which will be excited by the Devil, the father of 
 lies ; and his wrath is great, " because he knows 
 he hath but a short time," the Christian relig-ion 
 he sees is rapidly gaining* ground every where ; 
 and, if not timely checked, must soon brave all op- 
 position. How this woe was executed by the ma- 
 lice of the Heathen idolaters upon the whole Ro- 
 man empire, will be sufficiently evident in the re- 
 maining part of this chapter ; suffice it here to say, 
 that in consequence of the excitement and mahcious 
 misrepresentations of the Pagans of the empire, a 
 transmigration of a great swarm of nations came 
 upon the Romans, and ceased not their ravages till 
 they had desolated the eastern empire even as far 
 as the gates of Byzantium ; and finally possessed 
 themselves of the western empire. Thus the woe 
 came upon the earth, or that part of the empire, 
 which through all these troubles continued an in- 
 tegral part of the Roman world; and also upon 
 the sea, or that part of the Roman empire, which. 
 
161 
 
 i?i the anarchy of the times, was finally separated 
 fix)ni the empire^ and inundated, or overrun, by a 
 great host of barbarians who divided the westera 
 empire among- them. 
 
 " And when the Drag-on saw that he was cast 
 unto the earth, he persecuted the woman which 
 brought forth the man-child." In the former 
 verse the general effect of the wrath of the Dra- 
 gon (there named the Devil, because of his false 
 accusations against the Christians not only before^v 
 but also after, his deposition from the imperial 
 throne) was pointed out, and its final issue in the 
 general desolation of the Roman world ; here the 
 subject is resumed ; and the progress of this dread- 
 ful calamity is particularly marked. No sooner is 
 the Dragon deposed from the imperial throne, but 
 his malice, as might naturally be expected, is vi- 
 sibly exerted against the Christian worship. '' He 
 persecutes the woman which brought forth the 
 manchild." Though the Pagans had now lost 
 a great part of their power to persecute the Chris- 
 tians ; yet the great moderation of the Chris- 
 tian emperors in allowing them freedom of speech 
 was abused by them in continual defamation of the 
 followers of Christ, and in their attempts to draw 
 them from the worship of their holy religion. 
 Among the writers in the Pagan interest, Hierocles, 
 Julian the Apostate, Himerius, Libanius, and Eu- 
 napius were most conspicuous ; " Himerius and 
 Libanius, in their public harangues, and Eunapius, 
 in his lives of the philosophers, exhausted all their 
 
 M 
 
ra^e and bitterness in their efforts to defame the 
 Christian religion ; while the calumnies that abound- 
 ed in the discourses of the one^ and the writings of 
 the others^ passed unpunished." * So successful 
 were the Pagans in their endeavours^ that they even 
 gained over to their side Julian, (afterwards named 
 The ApostateJ who, in his reign not only tolerated, 
 but recommended, the Pagan worship ; and did all 
 in his power to undermine the principles of the 
 Christian system. The civil power was also some- 
 times exerted against the Christians out of the 
 bounds of the empire. '' Among others Athanaric, 
 king of the Goths, persecuted, for some time, that 
 part of the Gothic nation which had embraced 
 Christianity. In the remote provinces, the Pagans 
 often defended their ancient superstitions by the 
 force of arms, and massacred the Christians, who, 
 in the propagation of their religion, were not al- 
 ways sufficiently attentive, either to the rules of 
 prudence, or the dictates of humanity. The Chris- 
 tians, who lived beyond the limits of the Roman 
 empire, had a harder fate. Sapor II. king of 
 Persia, vented his rage against those of his domi- 
 nions in three dreadful persecutions. The first of 
 these happened in the 18th year of the reign of 
 that prince ; the second in the 30th, and the third 
 in the 31st of the same reign. This last was the 
 most cruel and destructive of the three; it carried 
 off an incredible number of Christians^ and Qonti- 
 
 * Mosheim's Ecclesiastical Historyj Cent. IV. Fart. i. 
 
 4 
 
163 
 
 nued during' the space of forty years, having com- 
 liienced in the year 330, and ceased only in 370. 
 It was not, however, the religion of the Chrifrtians, 
 but the ill-grounded suspicion of their treasonable 
 designs against the state, that drew upon them this 
 terrible calamity. For the Magi and the Jews 
 persuaded the Persian monarch that all the Chris- 
 tians were devoted to the interests of the Roman 
 emperor, and that Symeon, archbishop of Seleucia, 
 and Ctesiphon, sent to Constantinople intelligence 
 of all that passed in Persia," * 
 
 " And to the woman were ";iven two winsrs of a 
 great eagle, that she might fly into the wilderness, 
 into her place ; where she is nourished for a time, 
 and times, and half a time, from the face of the ser- 
 pent." The great eagle here mentioned can be 
 no other than the Roman empire, and is so called! 
 because the eagle was the standard of the ancient 
 Romans. This is not the only place where a na- 
 tion is named from some animal which it has pecu- 
 liarly appropriated to itself; for in the eighth' chap- 
 ter of Daniel's prophec}^ the angel, who inter- 
 preted the vision of the ram and he-goat, says ex- 
 pressly, " The ram with two horns are the kings 
 of Media and Persia, and the rough goat is the 
 king of Grecia." In this passage it is evident that 
 these two empires must have been so denominated 
 from the circumstance of their appropriating these 
 
 * Mosheim's Ecclesiastical History. Cent. IV. Part i. 
 
 M 2 ' 
 
164 
 
 animals to themselves. * The two wings of the' 
 great eagle must, therefore, refer to the two grand 
 independent divisions of the Roman empire which 
 took place Jan. 17, A. D. 395 ; and it is wellknowri 
 that after this division^ though not on account of 
 it, the Christian church fled into the wilderness, 
 that is, into a state of great desertion. But in this 
 desolate condition she is nourished, for the space of 
 a time, and times, and a half. It was said before, 
 that '' the woman fled into the wilderness, Avhere 
 she hath a place prepared of God, that they should 
 feed her there a thousand, two hundred, and three- 
 score days." These two events must, therefore, 
 be the same : consequently the 1260 days is the 
 same with a time, times, and a half. But in no 
 other sense can they be considered the same, than 
 by understanding a time to signify a year, times 
 two years, and half a time, half a year, that is, 
 three years and a half. And as each prophetic 
 year contains 360 days ; so three years and a half 
 will contain precisely 1260 days. But 1260 days 
 must mean 1260 years ; for they are prophetic 
 days which are meant. That a day, when spoken 
 of prophetically, signifies a year is evident from the 
 fourth chapter of Ezekiel, where this prophet lies 
 upon his left side 390 days as a prophecy that the 
 house of Israel should bear their iniquity as many 
 years ; and 40 days upon his right side as a pro- 
 phecy that the house of Judah should bear their 
 
 •• See Bishop Newton's Dissertation upon Dan. Tjii, 
 
165 
 
 iniquity 40 years. By the two wings of tlie great 
 eagle being said to be the place where the Woman 
 is to be nourished for this long period from the face 
 of the serpent is certainly meant that the Christian 
 religion^ though in a degraded condition^ should be 
 the religion of the two empires, Avhile the rest of 
 the world should be under the influence of the ser- 
 pent, or false religion. 
 
 '' And the serpent cast out of his mouth water 
 as a flood, that he miglit cause her to be carried 
 away of the flood." The water here evidently 
 means great multitudes of nations and people ; for 
 in Rev. xvii. 15, the angel says, " The waters 
 
 which thou sawest are peoples, and multitudes, 
 
 and nations, and tongues." This water, then, 
 Avhich the Dragon cast out of his mouth must be 
 an inundation of barbarous nations upon the Ro- 
 iuan empire ; and the purpose which the Dragon 
 has in view by this inundation is, that he might 
 f ause the Woman, or Christian church, to be en- 
 tirely swept away from the face of the earth. 
 
 ■■ But the earth helped the woman ; and the 
 earth opened her mouth, and swaflowed up the 
 flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth.'* 
 This verse is thus explained by Bishop Newton. 
 *' Nothing indeed was more likely to produce the 
 ruin and \ittcr subversion of the Christian church 
 than tile irruptions of so many barbarous nations 
 into the Roman empire. But the event proved 
 <ontrary to human appearance and expectation: 
 ' the earth swallowed up the flood ;' the barbarians 
 
166 
 
 were ratbcr swallowed up by the Romang^ than tlid 
 Romans by the barbarians ; the Heathen conquer- 
 ors instead of imposinj^ their own, submitted to 
 the rehgion of the conquered Christians; and they 
 not only embraced the rehgion, but affected even 
 the lawS;, the manners^ the customs, the language, 
 and the very name of Romans, so that the victors 
 were in a manner absorbed and lost among the 
 vanquished," The following quotation from INIos- 
 heim's Ecclesiastical Histoi*y will be of use to shew 
 that the invasion of the barbarous nations wa^ 
 excited by the Dragon in order to destroy the 
 Christian church. In the commeneeraent of his se- 
 cond chapter upon the fifth Century, he observes, 
 *"' that the Goths, the Heruli, the Franks, the Huns; 
 and the Vandals, with other fierce and warlike na- 
 tions, for the most part strangers to Christianity, 
 had invaded the Roman empire, and rent it asunder 
 in the most deplorable manirvcr. Amidst these ca- 
 lamities the Christians were grievous, nay, we may 
 venture to say, the principal suflerers. It is true, 
 these savage nations were much more intent upon 
 the acquisition of wealth and dominion, than upon 
 the propagation or support of the Pagan supersti- 
 tions ; nor did their cruelty and opposition to the 
 Christians arise from any religious principle, or 
 from an enthusiastic desire to ruin the cause of 
 Christianity ; it was merely by the instigation of 
 the Pagans, w^ho remained yet in the empire, that 
 they wer^ excited to treat with such severity and 
 violent^e the followers of Christ, The painful con- 
 
167 
 
 sideration of their abrogated rites^, and the hopes of 
 recoveriiifi^ their former hberty and privileges by 
 the means of their new masters,, induced the wor- 
 shippers of the gods to seize with avidity every op- 
 portunity of inspiring them with the most bitter 
 aversion to the Christians. Their endeavours^ 
 however, were without the desired effect^ and their 
 expectations were entirely disappointed. The great- 
 est part of these barbarians embraced Christianity ; 
 though it be also true, that, in the beginning of their 
 Usurpations the professors of that religion suffered 
 heavily under the rigour of their government." 
 
 '' And the dragon was wroth with the woman, 
 and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, 
 which keep the commandments of God, and have 
 the testimony of Jesus Christ." These words evi- 
 dently mark out the continued great and deep rooted 
 enmity of the Dragon against the Christians; and 
 at the same time his impotence in executing his fell 
 designs. The earth had already swallowed up his 
 mighty flood contrary to all human expectation ; 
 and what remains with him is little more than his 
 unconquerable enmity. He is still " wroth with 
 the woman ;" as is evident from the following his- 
 tory : '' To destroy the credit of the Gospel, and 
 to excite the hatred of the multitude against the 
 Christians, the Pagans took occasion, from the ca- 
 lamities and tumults which distracted the empire, to 
 renew the obsolete complaint of their ancestors 
 against Cliristianity, as the source of these compli- 
 cated woes. They alleged that, before the coming 
 
168 
 
 of Christ, the workl was blessed with peace and 
 prosperity ; but that, since the progTess of his reli- 
 gion every where, the gods, filled with indignation 
 to see their worship neg-lccted and their altars aban- 
 ijonedj had visited the earth with those plag'ues and 
 desolations, which increased every day." * Not- 
 withstanding* the present g'reat impotence of the 
 Drag'on, he still contended with the AVoman ; and 
 *' Avent," (aTT^x^sJ '' departed," to make war with 
 the remnant of her seed." He had now^ lost nearly 
 all his influence in the Roman world, his ancient 
 sphere of domination; yet on the confines of the 
 once mighty Roman empire, he continued to have 
 considerable power, for " the Christians, who lived 
 in the extremities of the two empires, felt the per- 
 secuting rage of their barbarous invaders. In 
 Gaul and Britain the Christian cause suffered se- 
 verely, especially in the latter, where an immense 
 number of Christians were put to death by the 
 Anglo-Saxons who remained wedded to their an- 
 cient superstition." f It is here said that " the 
 Dragon went to make war with the remnant of her 
 feeed^ which keep the commandments of God and 
 have the testimony of Jesus Christ, '' which implies," 
 as Bishop Newton excellently observes, '' that at this 
 time there was only a remnant, that corruptions 
 were greatly increased, and that '' the faithful were 
 minished from among the children of men." 
 
 ^Mosheim's Ecclesiastical History, Cent. V. Part i. 
 + lb. Cent. V. Part i, 
 
169 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 JExposition of the seventeenth Chapter^ of the Apo^ 
 calypse, rcspectiug the Whore and the Beast. 
 
 In tiie preceding' chapter the two wonders which 
 appeared in heaven have been considered, namely, 
 that the whole earth was under the dominion of 
 pne Heathen empire; and, that Cliristianity was 
 advanced to the throne of the Ctesars notwithstand- 
 ing' the very violent opposition it experienced from 
 the Pagan world. The condition of the Christian 
 church under the Heathen and Christian emperors 
 has also been examined ; and its flight traced into 
 the wilderness, or its reduction to a desolate condi- 
 tion. It was also observed that the wilderness into 
 which the woman fled, in the course of God's pro- 
 vidence, were the two wings of tlie great eagle, or 
 the two grand independent divisions of the Roman 
 empire, which took place A. D. 395, and in which 
 at least the profession of Christianity was main- 
 tained for a long' period, while the rest of the world 
 was under the influence of false religion of every 
 description. In the chapter now under considera- 
 tion we have a most painful account of the yccy de.r 
 plorable state of religion in one of the wings of the 
 pnce miglity Roman empire ; aud as it is well 
 
170 
 
 linown, by all acquainted with ecclesiastical history, 
 tliat the rehgion of the Roman empire was finally 
 divided into the Latin and Greek churches^ it will be 
 presently evident from multifarious and indisputable 
 arguments, which of these two churches is the sub- 
 ject of the prophecy in this chapter. 
 
 '' And there came one of the seven angels which 
 had the seven vials^ and talked with me, saying un- 
 to me. Come hitlier; I will shew unto thee the 
 judgment of the great whore that sitteth upon many 
 waters." Here one of the angels which had the 
 seven vials full of the seven last plagues is com- 
 missioned to shew the apostle John the judgment 
 of the great Whore that sitteth upon many waters. 
 That idolatrous worship is frequently represented 
 in Scripture under the Character of a whore, or 
 whoredom, is evident from numerous passages 
 which it is unnecessary to quote. One need only 
 be noticed, which will be found in 1 Chron. v. 25, 
 The words are, " They transgressed against the 
 gods of their fathers, and went a whoring after the 
 gods of the people of the land, whom God de- 
 stroyed before them." But the woman mentioned 
 here is called a " great Whore" to denote her ex- 
 cessive depravity, and the awful nature of her ido- 
 latry. She is also represented as '' sitting upon many 
 waters," to shew the vast extent of her influence. 
 
 " With whom the kings of the earth have 
 committed fornication, and the inhabitants of the 
 earth have been made drunk with the wine of her 
 fornication." What an awful picture this is of the 
 
171 
 
 state of the religion of the world in suhjection to 
 this Whore. Kings have committed spiritual for- 
 nication with her ; and even their very subjects 
 have drunk deep, dreadfully deep, into the doctrine 
 of her abominable errors. 
 
 " So he carried me away in the spirit into the 
 wilderness." This wilderness which St. John had 
 a view of was the desolate state of the church ; and 
 it was a truly awful sight, a terrible desart; a 
 waste howling" wilderness; for when he came thi- 
 ther he '^ saw a woman sit upon a scarlet coloured 
 beast, full of names of blasphemy, having' seven 
 heads and ten horns." No doubt can now be en- 
 tertained that this Woman is the Latin church; for 
 she sits upon tiie Beast with seven heads and ten 
 horns, which has been already proved to be the La- 
 tin empire, because this empire alone contains i\\t 
 number 6(SQ. This is a representation of the La- 
 tin church in her greatest splendour; for she sits 
 upon the scarlet-coloured beast, a striking emblem 
 of her complete domination over the Latin empire. 
 Her posture of sitting adds to her security ; she is 
 under no apprehension of being thrown from hei? 
 seat; but has under her complete and easy subjec- 
 tion, the whole Latin world. * The state of the 
 
 * As the phrases Latin charoh, Latin empire, &c. are not very 
 generally understood at present, it will not be improper here to 
 explain them. During the period from the division of the Ro- 
 man empire into those of the East and West till the final dissolu- 
 tion of the western empire, the subjects of both empires were 
 isijually known by the name of Uomuns, Soon after this event, 
 
172 
 
 Latin church in the beginning of the fourteenth 
 century may be considered that which corresponds 
 
 Ihe people of the West lost entirely the name of Romans, and 
 ■were denominated after their respective kingdoms which were 
 established upon the ruins of the western empire. But as the 
 pastern empire escaped the ruin which fell upon the Avcstern, 
 the subjects of the former still retained the name of Romans, 
 and ca-Ued their dominion ike Roman empire ; by Avhich name 
 this empire was known among them till its final dissolution in 
 A. D. 1-133, by Mohammed II. the Turkish sultan. But the 
 subjects of the eastern emperor, ey.er since the time of Charle- 
 magne, or before, called the M'estern people, or those under the 
 influence of the Romish church, Latins, and their church the 
 Jjdtin church. And the western people, in return, denominated 
 the eastern church, the GreeJc churchy and the members of it 
 Greeks. Hence the division of the Christian church intq 
 those of the Greek and Latin, For a confirmation of what has 
 Tbeep here said, the reader may consult the Byzantine Avriters, 
 where he will find tlie appellations of Roman and Latin used in 
 the senses I have jast mentioned in very numerous instances. Ho 
 may also consult every writer of Constantincpolitan and ecclesi- 
 estical history ; where he will also find these names frequently 
 used. In Gibbpn's Decline of the Roman epipire, and Mosheim'^ 
 -ecclesiastical history, the following expressions are met with, 
 Tvhen speaking of the western church, and its members, &c. The 
 Latin world. The Latin church. The French or Latin kingdom, 
 *rhe Latin clergy, The Latin princes. The Latin allien, The La- 
 tin kingdom of Cyprus, The Latin subjects, The Latin pilgrims, 
 The Latin powers. The Latin Christians, The Latin empire. The 
 Latin emperors. The Latin throne. The Latin patriarch, The 
 Latia monarchies, The Latin arms. The Latin priests. The Latin 
 monks. The Ijatin synod. The Latin archbishop. The Latin 
 camp, The Latin principality of Edessa, &c. &c. Sec. In the 
 public instruments drawn up by the general Popish councils, the 
 Roman Catholics are sometimes denominated Latins, as may be 
 
to this prophetic description in the most literal and 
 extensive sense of the words : for at this time she 
 
 Instanced in the following AVords -vrhich form a part of a decree 
 of the council of Basil, dated Sept. 26, 1437, " copiosissimara 
 subventionem pro uuione Graecorum cum Latir.is," * a very- 
 great contention for the union of the Greeks ivith the Latins. 
 Even in the very Papal bulls this appellation has been acknow- 
 ledged, as may be seen in the edict of Pope Eugenlus IV. dated 
 Sept. 17, 1437, where in one place mention is made of ''• Eccle- 
 
 siae Latinorum quffisita unio," + the desired union of the 
 
 church of the Latins; and in another place we read, " Nee su- 
 peresse modum alium prosequendi operis tam pii, et servaudi La- 
 tinas Ecclesiaj honoris;" | that no means might be left untried 
 of prosecuting so pious a work, and of preserving the honour of 
 the Latin church. By the Latin cnipire is meant the whole of 
 the powers Vhich support the Latin church. In this sense Mos- 
 heim evidently uses it, when speaking of the Christian sects of 
 the ninth century. " The sects, that had sprung up in the ear- 
 lier ages of the church, subsisted still, Avithout almost any change 
 in their situations or circumstances that is worthy of mention. 
 Such of them as were considerably numerous fixed their settle- 
 ments beyond the limits both of the Greek and Latin empires, 
 and thus out of the reach of their enemies." The following are 
 a few of the very numerous instances to be met w Ith in Greek 
 ■writers, in which the members of the Roman Catholic churrh 
 are named Latins: 'H yap irpiyKitKra'cc avrrj cr) d'!toy(^-/o; ovcrez, 
 BaAiJai'Va, o; Bv^x-zrld b^uo'IXs'jo's lit] y.Xipov xaS' 6v Jro Axrlyo;^ 
 %oi,Xui yjovo'j. For this princess was a relation of Baldwin, who 
 reigned at Byzantium for some time after i^ was taken by the 
 I^atins. Joannis Cantacuzeni, Ilist. Lib. ii. c. 34. — Aia roy 
 kitsysy^^evfa rots Ttcuca, AoLrlvuiv 'Pa;,aa/o<? ito/.cy.ov. On account 
 ©f the war which was carried on by the Latins against the Ro- 
 
 . « See Dumout's Corps Dipltfraatiquej Tom. TIL p. 35. t lb. p. S2, 
 % lb. p. S3. 
 
had ascended to her highest pitch of worldly gTlii-^ 
 deur and temporal authority. And Butler^ speaks 
 
 mans. lb. c. 36. — To"; Iv Ta.Xa.rS. Aarlvoisy The Latirts in Ga- 
 lata. lb. Lib. iv. c. 25. — ToT; ay. Bsverh.s Aari-/Cif, The Latins 
 of Venice. lb. — Bxa-iXsvs o irpu^To; Miy^iy.T,X.^ bttb) BvT,civriov a've- 
 ccv(rato 'Puji/^alot^y y.cc) QpaKriV, y.OA Mx-Kscoylccv^ xcc) rvjV a/.Xr^y 
 ittacrav k<ntfpct.v s^riKoyta, oXiyjj kXh'm IVtj ^sAe-jcravro Aa-lvoi^^ 
 TrsX^Y/ u.\v xa» 'intittyj/fV SvvaiMv, txsydx-fjv £("%£. Michael (the first 
 emperor, after that Byzantium was recovered by the Romans^ 
 together with Thrace, Macedonia, and the other western pro- 
 vinces, when they had been somewhat more than sixty years un- 
 der the tyranny of the Latins,) had a great force of infantry and 
 cavalry, lb. — Aarlvoi yap 6?Jyoi fi-Ag Ir. Tsp[j,ay!iuv kv Bu^avriu) 
 iiarpl^o'/tss. For there were a few German Latins still remain- 
 ing in Byzantium. lb. Lib. iii. c, 91. — Baa-iXix ij.lv 'ly^Tticxropoc 
 TtaAeTv ISof Aarlvoig af\. It is a custom with the Latins to call 
 the king Imperator. Annae Comnenae Alexiados, Lib. ii. c. 12. 
 ——'Ev cy Sb raura, hyzvsto^ 'jfpa<r'Sei; itpog ryj 'P:'Ja7;j 'Apyispsuj; Ir; 
 vov; '?u>waicov r/X^ov ^tpatrfyovg, ov Hditav Aarlvois oyoiJ^d^siv a^cf 
 Ir). In the mean time the Legates from the Roman pontiff (s 
 name which it is usual with the Latins io give the pope) came to 
 the generals of the Romans. lb. Lib. iii. c. 5. — 'Aito y.rla-suj; 
 xocr^a BMS rrjg ^au-iXilag Aoy'xa, ev r, xa] sxXuj i^ KouyravrlvBTtoXig 
 irapx r-MV Aarlvtjov, arri r^iS'. From the creation of the world 
 to the reign of Ducas, in which time Constantinople was takei^ 
 by the Latins, were 6712 years. Ducas Michaelis Nepotis, Hist, 
 Byzant. c. 1.— Tot; fpujxaaucri Aar/vwr, The Latins of Phocea. 
 Niceph. Greg. Lib. ii. c. 1. — 'H os rou Mapxaa-ls rd^is, ov ruv 
 J7r<crr^jw,a-v sf) ntapd Aarlvotg' ccAa' oifsp av rolg 'Puj[j,alujv rparavt 
 [xac-iv IttjV ^acriXiy.yjv y.araywv <Tr,^.a\a.y^ rovro itapoc Aarrlvoig Map- 
 Ksa-ioc. The dignity of marquis is not very eminent among the 
 Latins ; for he that carries the imperial standard in the Roman 
 armies is by the Latins styled marquis. lb. Lib. vii. c. 5, § 4. — 
 Ot £•• Tavvova, T^ itixsi AxtIva^ The Latins in the city of Genoa. 
 Ip. Lib.xiii. c. 17. § 2. — ^'H Axrlyujv hy.nXy,Tlay Tr~i txv Accrlvwv 
 
175 
 
 ing" of tlie temporal power of the popes, observes, 
 that " the beginning of the fourteenth century, 
 
 syiyJ.riC-lo!,;, Tf, rwv Aarlvujv ay.KXryioc, The church of the Latins. 
 Nicolai Cabasils Liturgiae Exposition c. 29, 30. — Aiafocoysfuj? 
 Aocrlvwv, Latins of different nations. Nicetse Choniatae, An- 
 nalcs, Alexii Comneni, § 10. — ^Hvydp Aar/voj 'IcrTtxvos roj ysvBi, 
 lie was a Latin, a Spaniard by nation. Ducse Michaclis Nepotis, 
 Hist. Byzaut. c. 44. — 'OpcoyTss ol li Xpiriavc) Axrhoi rs, vm) 'Pw- 
 f/,a7oi toy o^^ov, itdyrig s'lg ro'jg Tovpyisg sTtsiryjor^crav, xoc) rov; /xsj' 
 ^/^£<, rov; Ss 0yAojf Biraiov. The Christians, both Latins and 
 Romans, seeing the multitude, fell all upon the Turks ; and beat 
 them some with the sword, and some with clubs. lb. c. 43. — 
 To SI i^^(Toy KoppdSos Kcua-ap [j.sroi rcuv lir) jucrSip dyrp/Ep'j.ivi-'sv 
 Aarlviov \titsvjv re %ou likC^iuy. Conrad Ca3sar, with the Latia 
 horse and foot in his pay, occupied the centre. Nicetse Cho- 
 niatae, Annales de Isaacio Angelo, Lib. i. p. 202. Edit. Venet, 
 p. 246, Edit. Par. — Kaj iTpcijro; 6 KoppoiSo; Sicx.mvs'irat ^oivixo?a- 
 Ccg jw,£ra roJv d'jnp c-vyovtuv Accnyuv ra rcuv oiiKicv ^y(^MV iTtioTjixoy^ 
 And Conrad, with his Latins, whose armour had a remarkably 
 purple hue, made the first attack. lb. p. 247, Edit. Par. — • 
 "AKXa; TrAsiVa; "EvpiaKcis vtrp/xyifi •jr'oXsic, AaTivoi; /A£V VTtr^y.oaS 
 Ttpotepovy rots 03 TrpcKTKs^cijpriK'jla.; Sacaji^jvoTf. lie reduced many- 
 pther Syrian cities, which first had been in subjection to the La- 
 tins, and had afterwards revolted to the Saracens- lb. Lib. ii. 
 p, 219, Edit. Venet. p. 266, Edit. Par. — ■'Oj alv ovv Iv rij Kwv- 
 S-a.ynvii'n'oXsi AarTvoi, xa) o Iv auro7g rdya. (Bzo-iKsvujv BaAJaTxOf 
 <jrps(rtih.y sfsiXav itpog rh Ba&'jAia. The Latins in Constanti- 
 nople, and Baldwin who reigned over them, sent an embassy 
 to the emperor. Georgii Acropolitie Ilistoria, p. 70, Edit. Ve- 
 net. — 0'Jra> //,£•/ Tj Kajv s-ccynvcvTroXtg itpoyola, Qsou uiro 'Pcvaaia-v 
 h/svsT'o, 'isAis ayovTQC xs • o'vcr^g 'ETTr/e/x-z^o-Eic;; 6 . y.o.\ diro ysysa'SMC 
 xo'cr^xa IVa; ovrog r^'^^'* '^'^o AoLrrlywy y.pxrrfisiTO, ;i/60va; Tsvnj- 
 y.ovra. OKrcti. Thus Constantinople, by the providence of God, 
 came again under the Romans, on the 25th of July, the Indic- 
 tion being 4, and the year from the creation of the world 6765; 
 
176 
 
 tnay be assigned for the a?ra of their hig'hcst eleva- 
 tion ; as, about that time, tlieir territorial posses- 
 sions had their largest extent : they had then made 
 their greatest progress in exempting the clergy 
 from the civil power ; and they then experienced 
 least resistance to their general claim of Divine 
 right to temporal po^yer. They might, therefore, 
 at this time be thonght to have secured the dura- 
 tion of their temporal power." * The beast upon 
 which the woman sits is of the colour of scarlet, to 
 denote the spl ndour and great parade in which 
 the Latin empire has constantly delighted, scarlet 
 being often used figuratively for splendid and rich 
 attire. The beast is also " full of names of blas- 
 phemy." Blasphemy si'^nifies wip'ious speaking 
 when applied to God : it also means the unhal- 
 lowed use of sacred things : a name of blasphemy 
 must be, therefore, the prostitution of a sacred 
 name to an unholy purpose. That this is the 
 meaning of blasphemy in Scripture is evident 
 from the 9th verse of the second chapter of the 
 Apocalypse, where God says '' I know the blas- 
 phemy of them which say they are Jews, and are 
 
 after it had been governed by the Latins fifty-eight years. lb. 
 p. 116. — Ylpos (li TYiv Scvrspacv o Ovp'Savos syccc^sv r/a, -/.vcxo-fjy 
 QTi oTTti Xpiriocvoi iropsvSs'r/] £]g 'iBpsa-ccKTiiJ. l2or,r7i<rai 'Tol; Aarhot; 
 xccrd rwv '2xcc(.-/.rivuj-/y ilvca Tourov c-jy/.cyjjjcr^uJvov. Urban 
 wrote to the second synod that a decree might be passed, that 
 whatsoever Ciui-tian should goto Jerusalem to assist the Litins 
 againsjt the Saracens should have his sins remitted. Doaith. 
 Patriarch, Hierosolymit. Bookviii. c.7. § 1. 
 * See his Revolutions of the Germanic' empire. 
 
177 
 
 not^ but are the synagogue of Satan." It is well 
 known that the nations in support of the Latin or 
 Romish church have a])ounded in blasphemous ap- 
 pellations ; and have not blushed to attribute to 
 themselves and to their church the most sacred ti- 
 tles. The king of France was addressed by the 
 title of Christianissimus, * (Most Christian,) the 
 imperial palace was called sacrum, (sacred,) a name 
 given to it at least as early as the year 874. f The 
 church of. Rome is called sancta, J (holy,) sacro- 
 sancta, § (most holy). The Pope is or has been 
 addressed by Sanctissimus et beatissimus Pater, {| 
 (Most holy and blessed father,) Beatissimus et Deo 
 amabilissimus Pater, ^ (Most blessed father, most 
 beloved by God,) Sanctissimus et beatissimus Ro- 
 manorum archiepiscopus,** (The most holy and 
 blessed archbishop of the Romans.) Innocent III. 
 in the beginning of the thirteenth century, appro- 
 priated to himself the title of Vicarius Jesus Chris- 
 ti, ff (The Vicar of Jesus Christ.) The Roman 
 
 * See Mabillon De Re Diplomatica, Lib. ii. c. 3, § 5. 
 
 + lb. Lib. vi. p. 544. 
 
 J See in Rymer's Fccdera, frequenter. § Ibid. 
 
 II See Mabillon, prope jnitiura. H Ibid. ** Ibid. 
 
 ++ lb. Lib. ii. c. 2, § 12. The use which the Roman pontiff 
 has made of this title is sufficiently evident in the following 
 blasphemous words which form a part of the benediction of Pius 
 V. in his inauguration of Cosmo Medici into the office of Grand 
 Duke of Tuscany : " Sanctus Christi vicarius in te inspiret, ut 
 quemadmodum hie tibi ditiones terrestres contulit, ita in -coelis 
 praemia tibi aeterna largiatur." The holy viear of Christ breathes 
 en theCj that as he hath conferred on thee terrestrial possessions, 
 
 N 
 
178 
 
 pontift' is styled Sua Sanctitas^ * Ejus Sanctitas.f 
 (His Holiness.) He is addressed by Sanctitas 
 Vestra, J (Your Holiness), Sanctissimus Dominus 
 nosterPapa, § (Our most holy Lord, the Pope.) 
 The see of Rome is called, Sancta Sedes, || (The 
 Holy See.) The college of Cardinals is denomi- 
 nated Sanctum Collegium, Sacrum Collegium, 
 (The sacred college). The crown of the kingdom 
 of Hungary was styled, sacra corona, sancta coro- 
 na, (The holy crown.) 1 The form of this appella- 
 tion in the state instruments was, Sacrae nostri 
 Regni Hungariae Corona, Sacram nostram Regni 
 Hung-ariae Coronam, ** (The holy crown of our 
 kingdom of Hungary.) In one place I have met 
 with it in the following form : Nostram sacri 
 Regni Hung. Coronam, (Our crown of the holy 
 kingdom of Hungary.) ff The Papal councils 
 were styled sanctae, (holy,) sacrosanctae, (most 
 
 so also he may bestow on thee everlasting rewards in heaven. 
 See Seldeu's Titles of Honour, Part ii. chap. i. § 31. 
 
 * See Limborch's History of the Inquisition, Lib. i. c. 30. 
 
 t See in Burnet's History of the Reformation, frequenter. 
 
 .t Ibid. 
 
 § This is one of the most common titles by which the Pope 
 has been addressed. See in Dumont, sEepissime. 
 
 II See Burnet's History of the Reformation, and also Rerum 
 Germanicarum Scriptores Germanicos ab Henrico Meibomio, 
 and other historians. 
 
 f See in Scriptores Rerum Hungaricarum a Schwandtnero, 
 saepissime. 
 
 ** See in Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, frequenter. 
 
 f + lb. Tom. II. p. 358. 
 
179 
 
 holy,) as may be instanced in Sacrosancta generalis 
 Synodus Basileensis, * (The most holy general 
 synod of Basil,) Sacrosancta generalis Synodus 
 Constantiensis, f (The most holy general synod 
 of Constance,) Sancta Synodus, :[ (The holy sy- 
 nod,) Sacrum Concilium, (The holy council,) &c. 
 &c. The title. of the instruments issued by the ge- 
 neral councils was generally as follows: ''^ Sacro- 
 sancta Generalis Synodus in Spiritu Sancto 
 
 legitime congregata, Universalem Ecclesiara repre- 
 sentans, ad perpetuam rei memoriam/'§ (The 
 most holy general synod, — in the Holy Spirit legally 
 gathered together, representing the Universal 
 Church, — to be held in perpetual remembrance.) 
 Here is then a beast full of names of blasphemy, 
 appropriating the most sacred titles to itself and 
 its most idolatrous religion ; not only blaspheming 
 by the improper use of sacred names, but even by 
 applying to its bishop those names, which alone 
 belong to God ; for God hath expressly declared, 
 that he '' will not give his glory to another, neither 
 his praise to graven images." 
 
 '' And the woman was arrayed in purple and 
 scarlet colour, and decked with gold, and precious 
 stones, and pearls, having a golden cup in her 
 hand, full of abominations and filthiness of her for- 
 
 * See Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, Tom. II. p. 290, et iu 
 aliis locis. 
 
 + lb. p. 90, et in aliis locis. 
 
 X See in Dumont, frequentissime. 
 
 § See in Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, frequenter, 
 
 N 2 
 
180 
 
 nication." This verse cannot be better explained, 
 I think, than in the following words of Bishop 
 Newton, " The woman is arrayed too in purple 
 and scarlet colour, this being' the colour of the 
 popes and cardinals, as well as of the emperors and 
 senators at Rome. The woman is also decked 
 with gold and precious stones, and pearls : and who 
 can sufficiently describe the pride, the grandeur, 
 and magnificence, of the church of Rome in her 
 vestments and ornaments of all kinds ? Alexander 
 Donatus hath drawn a comparison between ancient 
 and modern Rome, and asserts the superiority of 
 his own church in the pomp and splendour of reli- 
 gion. You have a remarkable instance in Paul II. 
 of whom Platina relates, that in his pontifical vest- 
 ments he outwent all his predecessors, especially in 
 his regno, or mitre^ upon which he had laid out a 
 great deal of money, in purchasing at vast rates 
 diamonds, sapphires, emeralds, chrysoliths, jas- 
 pers, and all manner of precious stones, 
 
 wherewith, adorned like another Aaron, he would 
 appear abroad somewhat more august than a man, 
 delighting to be seen and admired by every, one. 
 But lest he alone should seem to differ from the rest, 
 he made a decree, that none but cardinals should, 
 under a penalty, wear red caps ; to whom he had 
 in the first year of his popedom given cloth of that 
 colour, to make horse-cloths or mule-cloths of 
 when they rode. You have another conspicuous 
 instance in the Lady of Loretto; the riches of 
 whose — image, and house, and treasury ; the 
 
181 
 
 •'olden angels, the g'old and silver lamps ; the vast 
 number^ variety, and richness of the jewels, of the 
 
 vestments for the image, and for the priests ; 
 
 with the prodig'ious treasures of all sorts ; are far 
 bc} ond the reach of description ; and, as Mr. Ad- 
 dison says, ' as much surpassed my expectation, as 
 other sights have g-enerally fallen short of it. Sil- 
 ver can scarce find an admission, and gold itself 
 looks but poorly amongst such an incredible num- 
 ber of precious stones.' Moreover the woman, 
 like other harlots who give philters or love-po- 
 tions to inflame their lovers, hath a golden cup in 
 her hand, full of abominations and filthiness of her 
 fornication ; to signify the specious and alluring 
 arts, wherewith she bewitcheth and inciteth men 
 to idolatry, which is abomination and spiritual for- 
 nication." In addition to what Bishop Newton 
 has said, I think, with Dr. Mitchell, that the cup 
 which the Woman holds in her hand being of gold^ 
 is to denote the most pompous and costly manner 
 in which the Latin church has held forth to the na- 
 tions, the rites and ceremonies of its idolatrous and 
 corrupt worship. 
 
 " And upon her forehead was a name writ- 
 ten, MYSTERY, BABYLON THE GREAT, 
 THE MOTHER OF HARLOTS AND ABO- 
 MINATIONS OP THE EARTH." This in- 
 scription being written upon her forehead is in- 
 tended to shew that she is not ashamed of her 
 doctrines, but publicly professes and glories in 
 them before the nations : she has, indeed, " a 
 
182 
 
 whore's forehead ; she has refused to be ashamed." 
 But the inscription upon her forehead is exactly the 
 portraiture of the Latin church. This church is 
 certainly^ as Bishop Newton well expresses it^ " a 
 mystery of iniquity." It is a great and unfathom- 
 able mystery^ that such a church should be per- 
 mitted to exist upon the face of the earth ; but 
 God hath promised^ for the consolation of his peo- 
 ple, that upon the sounding- of the seventh trumpet 
 " the mystery of God shall be finished, as he hath 
 declared to his servants the prophets." This Wo- 
 man is also called Babylon the Great : she is the 
 exact antitype of the ancient Babylon in her ido- 
 latry and cruelty ; but the ancient city called Ba- 
 bylon is only a drawing of her in miniature. This 
 is, indeed, Babylon the Great. '' She affects the 
 style and title of ' our holy mother the church,' but 
 she is in truth the mother of fornications and abo- 
 minations of the earth." * . 
 
 — 4 
 
 '' And I saw the woman drunken with the blood 
 of the saints, and with the blood of the martyrs of 
 Jesus ; and when I saw her, I wondered with great 
 admiration." It is one of the articles of the Latin 
 church that it should have no faith with heretics ; 
 and how the members of this church have acted 
 upon this most dreadful tenet, the pages of eccle- 
 siastical history plainly declare, as I shall have 
 occasion to notice more at larg'e in a subsequent 
 part of this work. But it is expressly declared that 
 
 * Bishop Newton, in loc. 
 
183 
 
 this churchy this Latin church, which is supported 
 by the Latin empire, is guilty of the blood of the 
 saints, and of the blood of the martyrs of Jesus ; 
 great numbers of those whom she has denominated 
 heretics have, therefore, been the saints of God and 
 the martyrs of Jesus. Hear this, thou apostate and 
 cruel church ! They were saints of God ; but 
 thou hast treated them as the filth of the world, 
 and as the otfscouring of ail things. They were 
 the martyrs of Jesus, whom thou burnedst in thy 
 fires, and torturedst in thy inquisitions. * Thou 
 hast been drunken, intoxicated with pride, because 
 thou hast had power over these holy men of God, 
 whom thou hast called heretics, but whom the 
 Lord owns as his holy ones, as his faithful martyrs. 
 No marvel then that the Christian prophet is af- 
 fected with so great wonder ; for thou hast assumed 
 to thyself the most sacred names ; he saw the beast 
 upon which thou sittest full of names of blasphemy, 
 such as holy, most holi/, most Christian, sacred, 
 most sacred ; and yet thou art drunken with the 
 blood of the saints, and with the blood of the mar- 
 
 * The most sacred titles have been given by the Papists to 
 this horrid tribunal. The inquisition is called Sanctum Oflkium, 
 (The holy office ;) the prison of the inquisition is styled Sancta 
 Domus, (The holy house;) the Tribunal is named Sacrum In- 
 quisitionis Tribunal, Sanctse Inquisitionis Tribunal, (The holy 
 Tribunal of the Inquisition, The Tribunal of the holy Inquisi- 
 tion.) The Papists have even gone so far as to call it Sanctis- 
 sima Inquisitio, (The most holy Inquisition ! !) See Liraborch's 
 Hist, of the Inquisition, Lib. i. c. 1, 25, 30. 
 
184 
 
 tyrs of Jesus. What horrid blasphemies thou hast 
 been^ and still art guilty of, in thus prostituting 
 the sacred names of God and Christians^ and ap- 
 plying them to thy most abominable idolatries, and 
 thus alluring men to drink of thy poisoned cups of 
 idolatry and pride. " But thy time is near to 
 come ; and thy days shall not be prolonged." 
 
 " And the angel said unto me. Wherefore didst 
 thou marvel ? I will tell thee the mystery of the 
 woman, and of the beast that carrieth her, which 
 hath the seven heads and ten horns." St. John 
 was greatly astonished at this symbolical represent- 
 ation of the Woman sitting upon a beast. But the 
 angel who shewed him the vision asks him the rea- 
 son of his astonishment, evidently intimating to him 
 by this interrogation, that the Woman, from such 
 a character as that he saw inscribed upon her fore- 
 head, must be capable of committing every species 
 of cruelty, and of uttering all manner of blasphe- 
 mies. The angel also undertakes to explain the 
 vision ; and the explication is of such great im- 
 portance, that had it not been given, the mystery 
 of the Dragon and the Beast could never have been 
 satisfactorily explained in all its particulars. The 
 angel begins with saying, " The beast that thou 
 sawest was, and is not ; and shall ascend out of the 
 bottomless pit, and go into perdition : and they 
 that dvvell on the earth shall wonder (whose names 
 were not written in the book of life from the foun- 
 dation of the world,) when they behold the beast 
 that was, and is not, and yet is." There have been 
 
185 
 
 several interpretations of this passage, some of 
 which it may not be improper here to notice. Lord 
 Napeir, upon the foundation that the Revelation 
 was written during' the interregnum which took 
 place in the Roman empire between the reigns of 
 Domitian and Nerva, explains it thus : " This 
 Beaste that Sainct lohn did see, was, and is not, 
 and shall rise of lowe estate, and shall goe into de- 
 cay : Was (saith hee) because the Romane Empire, 
 and gouernment of E7nperors, was before that 
 time, that hee wrote : Is not (saieth hee) because 
 the time wherein hee wrote, the Emperour Domi- 
 tian was dead, and the Empire waked, for the 
 nexte Emperour Jserva Cocceius, who was the first 
 straunger, or Barbarian Emperour: This (saith hee) 
 shall goe into decay : that is, shall goe shortlie in- 
 to decaie : for otherwise simplie, all fleshe must 
 goe at some time into decay : And so was it indeed, 
 that this Nerua goeth shortlie into decaie : For 
 hee lined Emperour but one yeare, three monethes, 
 and nine daies, and then he died. Againe, the 
 Beaste (saith that same text) Was, and is not, and 
 yet is, that is to say, there were Emperours before 
 Sainct lohn \>rote, none when he wrote, and yet 
 when he wrote the Empire stood, and the gouern- 
 ment by Emperours was vnabolished." * The in- 
 terpretation here given is very ingenious ; but it 
 rests upon a very slender foundation. For, first, 
 
 * See Napeir on the Revelation, Prop. 24, p. 37, Edit. Edia. 
 burgh, 1593. 
 
186 
 
 ancient writers are not agreed with respect to the 
 time when the Apocalypse was written ; for though 
 Jrena?us says it was written (ttooj rto reAsi rr^g Ao- 
 [jLsrtavoZao^rig,) '^ at the end of Domitian's reign ;" * 
 yet Epiphanius asserts it was written in the reign 
 of the emperor Claudius ;f and the churches of 
 Syria have thus inscribed their version^ " The Re- 
 velation made to John the Evangelist by God in the 
 island of Patmos into which he was banished by 
 Nero the Ca?sar." J The great uncertainty, there- 
 fore, in this point is a sufficient refutation of Lord 
 Napeir's opinion ; for it is totally incredible that 
 such an important part of the description of the 
 Beast, as the one we are now considering, should 
 be suffered to rest upon such doubtful history. 
 Secondly, it is the Beast that was, and is not, and 
 yet is ; therefore an interregnum cannot be alluded 
 to, for the Beast is an empire, and not an emperor 
 or emperors. Mr. Mede's interpretation is as fol- 
 lows : " The beast that had already been in the 
 course of five of his heads, was not then in that 
 state of sovereignty in which the whore should ride 
 him ; and yet was even then (in St. John's time) 
 in present being in the sixth head, the Caesars then 
 reigning."§ This is also ingenious, but upon exami- 
 nation will be found not to comport with the words 
 of the text. For the text does not say, that the Beast 
 
 * Adversus Haereses, Lib. v. c. 30. 
 
 + See Bishop Newton's Dissertation on the Prophecies, m 
 Apoc. i. J Ibid. 
 
 I See his Works, p. 922, Edit. Lond. 1662. 
 
187 
 
 was not then in that state in which the Whore 
 should ride him^ but absolutely zoas not, that is, had 
 no existence in the time of St. John. Fr. Junius's 
 gloss upon the phrase^ '' The beast that was, and 
 is not, and yet is/' is to the following* effect : by 
 the Beast, understanding the Roman empire, he 
 thus comments upon it : " It was in the kindred or 
 house of Julius ; and now it is not in that kindred, 
 having been translated into another at the death of 
 Nero: yet the family that at present occupies the 
 throne of the Caesars shall soon pass away, and 
 another family be raised to the imperial dignity; 
 and yet it is the same beast still, for though different 
 families have had dominion over the Romans, yet 
 each monarch has had equal power with any of his 
 predecessors; and through these various mutations 
 of ruling families, the Roman empire has neverthe- 
 less continued to be as extensive and as powerful as 
 in the time of Augustus." * This opinion is over- 
 thrown by the consideration that the phrase ivas, 
 is not, and yet is, is in reference to the empire, and 
 not to the imperial families. Dr. Johnston's com- 
 ment upon this text is as follows : " He was, be- 
 fore John's day, in the imperial and other preced- 
 ing heads of Roman government. He is not in 
 John's day, in his public and visible character as 
 the Papal and last head of Roman government : 
 yet in another sense he then actually existed. That 
 spiritual pride, ambition, desire of pre-eminence, 
 
 * See Thomson's English Bible, in loc. 
 
188 
 
 fondness for abrogated and uninstitntcd modes o^ 
 religious worship, implicit attachment to men's 
 persons, and the robbing Christ of his real glory, 
 which are the essential qualities of the Papal con- 
 stitution, were in the world, and had discovered 
 many symptoms of their existence in the apostolic 
 age. Hence, in this view, John, the last of the 
 apostles, could say of the Beast, ' He is.' To this 
 purpose John thus expresses himself, in his first 
 Epistle, chap. iv. 5. ' And this is that spirit of An- 
 tichrist, whereof you have heard that it should 
 come, and even now already is it in the world.' By 
 the influence of Satan these essential qualities of 
 Antichrist were nourished and gradually strength- 
 ened in the world, even in the apostolic age. In a 
 succeeding period, they were to become more visi- 
 ble ; when that person, the constitution of whose 
 government should be made up of them, should be 
 raised to his throne. But before he could be raised 
 to his throne, it must be left vacant by the demise 
 of that king who then possessed it." * This ap- 
 pears to have considerably more evidence in it than 
 the preceding; yet, it is subject to a similar ob- 
 jection, viz. that it is an empire, and not the spi- 
 rit of Antichrist, which was, is not, and yet is. 
 Another interpretation of the passage is the follow- 
 ing, upon the supposition that the words are in re- 
 ference to the Roman pontificate. The office of 
 Pontifex Maximus was separate from the Roman 
 
 * See his Coramentary on the Revelation, in loc. 
 I 
 
189 
 
 civil power, previously to the imperial government ; 
 is not a separate office^ because at present absorbed 
 in the imperial power, the Roman monarch being 
 Pontifex Maximus as well as Imperator ; but shall 
 again be separated from the civil power in the 
 time of the Papacy, when the Pope will assume 
 that title; and ^et is, for though the office be not 
 separate, yet it is still retained in the person of the 
 emperor. * This is extremely ingenious, and is 
 one of the best I have met with. Its grand error 
 lies in considering the Pontificate the Beast, instead 
 of the different monarchies in communion with the 
 church of Rome. But the opinion which is most 
 generally received, is that given by Dr. Henry 
 More, and adopted by Bishop Newton and others. 
 It is as follows : " The Roman empire, which is 
 understood by the beast with seven heads and ten 
 horns, is represented here under such a state and 
 condition, that at some time it might be said truly 
 of it in its pre figuration that it is the beast that was 
 and is not ; which was only true in the time of pure 
 Christianity obtaining in the empire, that is, from 
 Constantine's time, suppose, to the apostasie of the 
 church into Antichristianism or idolatry. For the 
 beast is the empire idolatrizing, which idolatrizing 
 empire ceased to be in the reign of the pure Chris- 
 tian Caesars : but being there, would be an aposta- 
 sie again into a kind of Pagano-Christian idolatry 
 in the empire, and so the empire become a beast 
 
 * See Poll, Synopsis Criticorum, ta loc. 
 
190 
 
 again ; it is therefore called the Beast that icas, 
 namely,, under the Paganical idolatry, but is not, 
 namely, in tliat time that pure Christianity is the 
 religion of the empire, but should be afterwards, 
 which is expressed by. And shall ascend out of the 
 bottomless pit. The empire becoming Pagano- 
 Christian, and exercising their idolatry upon other 
 objects than the old Pagans did,, could not properly 
 be said to be the same Pagan empire revived again, 
 but rather the image thereof, that is, an idolatrous 
 empire, bearing an analogie or similitude to the old 
 Pagan idolatrous empire, in a manner in all their 
 strokes of idolatry. Prom whence it is rightly 
 termed that was, as being idolatrous, as the Pagan 
 empire ; and is not, that is to say, is not that very 
 Pagan empire, their idolatry having now new ob- 
 jects; and yet is, (viz.) because the idolatry is the 
 same though disguised under new titles and ob- 
 jects." * This opinion seems to me much more 
 exceptionable than the preceding. In the first 
 place, it does not explain the phrase was, and is 
 not, in any probable sense; for the words were 
 evidently spoken to St. John, by the angel, in re- 
 ference to the time in which the apostle lived; but 
 the Roman empire was in its Pagan state till the 
 time of Constantine, which was long after that of 
 St. John, therefore the words cannot be taken in 
 the sense of Dr. More. Secondly, the words and 
 yet is, must be understood of the time of St. John, 
 
 * See his Apocalypsis Apocalypsews, in loc. 
 
191 
 
 tor otherwise they can have no definite meaning* 
 whatever. Thirdly^, the supposition that St. John 
 lived in that state of the Beast^ which the angel told 
 him was, and that there were to follow those 
 states of the Beast called is not, shall arise, and yet 
 is, is truly the greatest absurdity of interpretation 
 possible^ and must contain in itself its own entire re- 
 futation. Those who wish to examine other opinions 
 upon this subject may consult Poole's Synopsis 
 Criticorum, and Dr. Gill's commentary on the Re- 
 velation. The solution of the passage is as follows: 
 The Beast is the Latin kingdom (''H Aan'vTj Bao-<- 
 Tisia.;) consequently the Beast ivas, that is^ was in 
 existence previously to the time of St. John^ for 
 Latinus was the first king of the Latins and Nu- 
 mitor the last ; is not now^ because the Latin na- 
 tion has ceased long ago to be an independent 
 power^ and is now under the dominion of the Ro- 
 mans ; but shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, 
 that is^ the Latin kingdom, the Antichristian power^ 
 or that which ascendeth out of the abyss, or bottom- 
 less pitj is yet in futurity. But it is added, '' all 
 they that dwell on the earth shall wonder (whose 
 names were not written in the book of life, from the 
 foundation of the world,) when they behold the 
 Ijeast that was, and is not, and yet is." By the 
 ^arth is here meant the subjected part of the Latin 
 empire, that is to say, the Latin world; therefore 
 the meaning is, that all who dwell in the Latin 
 world shall adhere to the idolatrous and blasphem- 
 ous religion of the Latin church which is supported 
 
192 
 
 by the Latin empire, except those^ whom God 
 knew from the foundation of the worlds as believ- 
 ing in the true Sacrifice, receiving his holy word, 
 and keeping- themselves unspotted from the corrup- 
 tion that is in the world ; therefore the names of such 
 are represented as written in the book of life, from 
 the foundation of the world, as those who would finally 
 be partakers of eternal life ; and their Lord hath as- 
 cended into the heavens that he might prepare their 
 places for them. But the inhabitants of the Latin 
 world_, under the dominion of the Romish religion, 
 shall wonder when they behold the Beast, or Latin 
 empire, that is, as Lord Napeir remarks, '' shall haue 
 in great admiration, reuerence, and estimation, this 
 great monarchic." They shall wonder at it, by 
 considering it the most sacred empire of the world, 
 that in which God peculiarly delights ; but those 
 that so wonder have not their names written in the 
 book of life, but are among the corrupt part of 
 mankind, for '' no idolater hath inheritance in the 
 kingdom of God." In the preceding part of the 
 verse the Beast is considered in three states, as that 
 which was, and is not, and shall ascend out of the 
 bottomless pit ; here a fourth is introduced, and yet 
 is. * This is added to shew that though the Latins 
 
 * The authenticity of this last clause, Avhich is supported by 
 several good manuscripts, has been called in question. There 
 exist three various readings of it, viz. Kcairlp is-}-/, "and yet is,'* 
 (which is the one generally received,) xa,] rapsriv, " and novr 
 is," and kcx.) Trapsfa), " and shall be." Bengel, Griesbach, and 
 Wetstein, approve of the last reading, because several of the 
 
193 
 
 were subjugated by the Romans ; nevertheless the 
 Romans themselves were Latins, for Romulus, the 
 founder of their monarchy, was a Latin ; conse- 
 quently that denominated in St. John's days the 
 Roman empire, was in reality the Latin kingdom, 
 for the very language of the empire was the Latin ; 
 
 best and oldest manuscripts appear in its favour, among which is 
 the Codex Alexandrinus known to be one of the most ancient ex- 
 tant. Notwithstanding this great testimony for the future verb, I 
 am satisfied that the common reading is that which was written by 
 the apostle, from the following reasons : 1. Ka) iracss-oc) is un- 
 necessary ; for the context shews, independently of this clause, 
 that the Beast was in futurity in the time of the apostle as may 
 be easily gathered from the following Mords: " And all they 
 that dwell on the earth shall m onder, (whose names were not 
 Written in the book of life from the foundation of the world,) 
 AVHEN THEY BEHOLD the bcast that Avas," <S:c. consequently, the 
 following reading of the Vulgate is considerably more concise, 
 in omitting this clause, videntes bestiam quae erut^ ct non est, 
 " when they behold the beast that m as, and is not." 2. It is 
 evident from the angel's explanation, that the Bciist existed iu 
 St. John's time; for in his account of the seven heads, it is said, 
 that " five are fallen and one is, and the other is not yet come." 
 Therefore, whether >ca; itxcer^^i be the genuine reading or no, it 
 is certain that xaiTrsp Iriv, or y.cLi irocpsfiy, is also true of the 
 Beast in the apostle's time. But it has been shewn that kk) Ka- 
 p^roCi contains no meaning that may not be gathered from the 
 context, which is not the case vr ith xaiTrsp sf]v, or xa) Trapsriv. 
 It hence follows that the present verb must be the genuine read- 
 ing. The Syriac and Coptic versions of the Apocalypse were 
 evidently made from manuscripts which contained the common 
 reading, for the Latin translation of the first is, quod erat, et 7wn 
 est, et appropinquavU, " that was, and is not, and hath ap- 
 proached ;" and that of the latter, quce est, et no7i est, ct ce- 
 cidit, " that is, and is not, and hath fallen." 
 
 o 
 
194 
 
 and the Greek writers who lived in the time of the 
 Roman empire expressly tell us, '' that those for- 
 merly called Latins are now denominated Ro-- 
 mans." * The meaning of the whole passage is, 
 therefore, as follows : the corrupt part of mankind 
 §hall have in great admiration the Latin empire yet 
 in futurity, which has already been, but is now ex- 
 tinct, the Romans having' conquered it; and yet is 
 still in being, for though the Latin nation has been 
 subjugated, yet its conquerors are themselves La^ 
 tins. But it may be objected to what has been al- 
 ready said concerning the phrases was, is not, shall 
 ascend out of the bottomless pit, and yet is, that 
 these are spoken of the Beast upon which the apos- 
 tle saAv the ^V^oman, or Latin church, sit; for the 
 angel says, '" The beast that thou sawest, was, 
 and is not," &c. what reference, therefore, can the 
 Latin empire which supported the Latin church, 
 have to the Latin kingdom which subsisted before 
 $t. John's time, or to the Roman empire which 
 might properly be so denominated. This objection 
 has considerable weight at first sight, and cannot be 
 answ ered satisfactorily till the angel's explanation of 
 the Beast has been examined ; therefore it is added, 
 *' Here is the mind which hath wisdom." It was 
 said before, Rev. xiii. 18. " Here is wisdom : let 
 him that hath (voSv) a mind count the number of the 
 
 * Aarlvoi, 01 xa) 'Fccy.alor. The Latins who are also Romans. 
 Suidas's Lex. in loc. IlesychiuSj in his lexicoDj makes Aar/m 
 synonjTnous with 'Pu;aa^o^ 
 
195 
 
 beast." Wisdom, therefore, here means, a correct 
 view of what is intended b}^ the number 666 ; con- 
 sequently, the parallel passa^^e, " Here is the mind 
 which hath wisdom/' is a declaration that the an- 
 gel's interpretation of the Beast can be under- 
 stood only by those who have this loisdo^n, for 
 the words of the ang'cl have such a pointed refer- 
 ence to THE NA.ME of the Bcast which is g-athered 
 from his number, that it is utterly impossible to com- 
 prehend them thoroughly, without being previously 
 acquainted with his name, as will be fully shewn in 
 the sequel. 
 
 " The seven heads are seven mountains on which 
 the woman sitteth." This verse has been almost 
 universally considered to allude to the seven hills 
 upon which Rome originally stood ; * and it is well 
 known that ancient Rome did stand upon seven 
 hills, for the proof of which many authorities might 
 be adduced; but we will on'ry notice one, which is 
 to be met with in Dionysius Halicarnassensis. This 
 writer, when speaking of tiie great dimensions of 
 Rome, says that " Tullius enclosed the seven hills 
 
 * Lord Napeir, who was of this opinion, expresses himself as 
 follows : " This Beast, whereon the said whoorish zcoman or Ba- 
 bijlonkal citie sitteth, hath seuen heads, which the text interpret- 
 eth to be seuen mountaines: Euen so Ro?ne, the chief city or 
 MdropoUtane seat of the Latine Empire, is set upon seuen 
 hilles." See his 24th Proposition, Avherein he endeavours to 
 prove that " the great ten-horned beast is the v, hole bodie of the 
 Latine Empire, whereof the Antichrist is a part." 
 
 O 2 
 
1% 
 
 \Vitli a \val]." * But it has been objected, that mo- 
 dern Rome is not situated upon the seven hills, but 
 is in the Campus Martins, f and that, consequently. 
 Pagan Rome is the city intended in the prophecy. ;|; 
 This is certainly a very formidable objection ; and 
 the more especially as it has been already proved 
 that the Woman is the Latin church. And it is 
 also a fact that so far from the present city being' 
 seated on seven hills, the hills themselves are but 
 little inhabited, the ruins of old structures render- 
 ing the air so unwholesome as to be only fit for gar- 
 dens or vineyards. § Another formidable objection 
 which might be made is, that the seven hills are not 
 a distinguishing characteristic of Rome ; for even 
 Constantinople, formerly the capital of the Greek 
 empire, is also seated upon seven hills ,• || and 
 therefore the seven-hilled city is not sufficient of 
 itself to distinguish betw^een the Greek and Latin 
 churches. Another objection to the common in- 
 terpretation of the seven mountains being the se- 
 ven hills of Rome is^ that the Greeks did not call 
 
 * "'O 0£ TuXXioc: T'ou; hitra, X6<p8s av) rei'^si TfEcuXatsv. 
 
 Antiq. Rom. p. 219. 
 
 + See Poll Synopsis Criticorum, in loc. The names of th« 
 seven hills of Rome are, The Capitolino, The Palatine, The 
 Ayentine, The Cclan, The Esquiline, The Viminal, and tha 
 Quirinal. 
 
 :}: See the Douay Testament, Calmet's commentary, &c. 
 
 § See the History of Italy, translated by Edmund Warcopp^ 
 p. 150, Edit. Lond. 1660. 
 
 II See Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman empire* 
 
197 
 
 the Roman eminences ooyj, mountains, as those 
 which tlie Woman is represented as sitting- upon are 
 called; hut only Xo(po;, hills; this is evident from 
 the passag-e in Dionysius already cjuoted; and is 
 still further confirmed hy the epithet l/rraAo:^©^, 
 seven-hilled, which was given to the city. * It is 
 true that the Romans named them Monies, moun- 
 tains ; but unless it could be proved that they were 
 ^Iso so named by the Greeks, this argument could 
 iiave but little weight. Another objection is, that 
 the mountains are here understood literally ; where- 
 as in other parts of the RevelatiA^n where the word 
 is used, it would be absur-d to understand it so ; as 
 for instance in Rev. vi. W. where it is said, ''every 
 mountain and island were moved out of their 
 places;" and in Rev. xvi. 20. where we are told, 
 *' every island fled away, and the mountains were 
 not found." From all these objections it is evident 
 that tlic seven hills of Rome are not intended; and 
 we must look elsewhere for the interpretation. In 
 order to understand this scripture aright we must 
 ascertain the meaning of the figurative expression 
 mountain. In this we shall be greatly assisted by 
 a reference to those texts of scripture where the 
 word is used ; in several of which we shall find it is 
 unequivocally the emblem of great and mighty 
 power. In Isaiah ii. 2. this is evidently its mean- 
 ing ; for it is prophesied that " it shall come to pass 
 in the last days, that the mountain of the liord's 
 
 * See the different Greek lexicons. 
 
108 
 
 house shall be established in the top of the moiin- 
 tains, and shall be exalted above the hills ; and all 
 nations shall flow unto it." In the 14th verse of 
 the same chapter it is said^ that " the day of the 
 Lord of hosts shall be upon all the high mountains, 
 and upon all the hills that are lifted up." Thesfe 
 words, it is evident, can be taken only in a figura- 
 tive sense ; and must mean that the Lord's ang-er 
 ■will be levelled against every proud government, 
 whether they be mountains, or extensive domina- 
 tions ; or only hills, or inferior powers. The king-' 
 dom of Chaldea is called, in Jer. li. 25. '' a de- 
 stroying mountain, that destrO} eth the earth," and 
 in Daniel ii. 35. the kingdom of God, represented 
 by a stone, becomes a great mountain, and fills the 
 ■whole earth, by which is meant, as the ang-el in- 
 forms us, that the kingdom of God shall consume 
 all the kingdoms mentioned in that chapter, and 
 fchall itself stand for ever. The mountains upon 
 Avhicli the Woman sitteth must be, therefore, seven 
 great powers ; and as the mountains are heads of 
 the Beast, they must be the seven greatest emi- 
 nences of the Latin world. In order therefore to 
 find out which are the mountains, it must be first 
 premised that the Latin empire is composed of se- 
 veral monarchies, a circumstance well known to 
 ievery one acquainted with its history ; the head of 
 the Latin empire must, consequently, be the prin*? 
 cipal power composing it, or the German empire, ^ 
 But the Beast is said to have seven heads, that is to 
 say^ the Latin empire ha$ seven heads or principal 
 
m 
 
 powers ; and these heads or "pt'incipal powers are 
 explained by the ailgel to be the seven mountains 
 on which the Woman, or Latin church, sits. As 
 no other power was acknowledged at the head of 
 the Latin empire but that of Germany ; how can it 
 be said that the Beast has seven heads ? This ques- 
 tion can only be solved by the singular constitution 
 of the Germanic league. The history of it is 
 briefly as follows : " Monarchy Was first eslablished 
 in Germany by ClOvis. After him Charlemagne 
 extended his power and his dominions ; and so 
 great had the empire become, that, during his reigrt 
 and that of his son, g'overnment was administered 
 ill the provinces by persons vested with power 
 for that purpose, under the title of dukes. In each 
 district of these provinces justice was distributed 
 by a comes or count, in German called Graf But 
 from their courts lay an appeal to that of the em- 
 peror, before a president, styled Comes Palatinus, 
 that is, count Palatine, or of the palace, in German 
 denoininated Psalzgraf The frontiers or marches 
 were governed by a marquis, styled by the Ger-^ 
 mans Markgraf, similar to our lord warden. The 
 centre of the empire was generally ruled by an of- 
 ficer who possessed a similar power, but a greater 
 extent of dominion, than the graf under the title 
 of Landgrave. Towns and castles, which were 
 occasionally honoured with the residence of the em- 
 peror^ were governed by a burggraff. But the sig- 
 nification of these titles, and the extent of power 
 which accompanied them, differed at different pc- 
 
200 
 
 riods, according to the gradual developement of the 
 German constitution. By family broils and civil 
 wars the dignity of the sovereign was depressed, 
 and a new form in the government raised up. The 
 dukes exalted their power above that of the empe- 
 ror ; while the sovereign, to strengthen the bond of 
 personal attachment, ratified to others and their 
 descendants that sway which had been formerly de- 
 legated and dependent on his will. Hence arose 
 the modern constitution of distinct principalities, 
 acknowledging one head in the person of an em- 
 peror." * Before the dissolution of the Germanic 
 league, there were about 300 princes of the em- 
 pire, each sovereign in his own country, and might 
 enter into alliances, and pursue by all political 
 measures his own private interest, as other sove- 
 reigns do ; for if even an imperial war were de- 
 clared he might remain neuter, if the safety of the 
 empire were not at stake. Here then is an empire 
 of a construction without exception the most singu- 
 lar and intricate that ever appeared in the world ; 
 for the '' emperor," as Gibbon observes when 
 speaking of Charles IV. " was no more than the 
 elective and impotent magistrate of an aristocracy of 
 princes." f Germany was, therefore, speaking in 
 the figurative language of Scripture, a country 
 abounding in liills, or containing an immense num- 
 ber of distinct principalities. But the different 
 
 * See the Encyclopedia Perthensis, in loc. 
 
 t See his Decline and Fall, chap. 49, prope finem, 
 
201 
 
 German states did not each possess ail equal share 
 9f power and hilluence ; some were more eminent 
 than others. Among them there were, also, a few 
 which might, with the greatest propriety, be deno- 
 minated mountains, or states possessing a very high 
 degree of political importance. But the seven 
 mountains on whicli the Woman sits must have 
 their elevations above all the other eminences in the 
 whole Latin world; consequently they can be no 
 other than the seven electorates of the German 
 empire. Tliese were, indeed, mountains of vast 
 eminence, for in their sovereigns w^as vested the 
 sole power of electing the head of the empire. But 
 this was not all : for, " besides the power of elect- 
 ing an emperor, the electors had a right to capitu- 
 late with the new head of the empire, to dictate the 
 conditions on which he was to reign, and to depose 
 him if he broke those conditions. They actually 
 deposed x\dolphus of Nassau in 1298, * and Wen- 
 
 * The form of deposition of this emperor was in words to the 
 following effect: " Six years ago, the empire being vacant, we 
 canonically elected Adolphus count de Nassau king of the Ro- 
 mans, knowing at that time no person more worthy of that dig- 
 nity. At first he conducted himself wisely, following the advice 
 of the most prudent electors and princes of his court ; but, in a 
 little time, he began to despise their advice, and listen to the 
 counsels ol young persons, without either sense or experience: 
 then he found himself destitute of means and friends to assist 
 him sincerely in be,aring the burden of government. The elec- 
 tors, perceiving his indigence, and swayed by twenty other mo- 
 tives, have demanded the Pope's consent to depose him -«iid 
 cjioose another emj)eror. We are told that our envoys have ob- 
 
202 
 
 ecslaus in 1400. * They were sovereign and in- 
 dependent princes in their respective dominions^ 
 
 tained the consent of his holiness; though those of Adolphu* 
 affirm the contrary. But we, having no regard to any authority 
 but that which is vested in ourselves, and finding Adolphus in- 
 capable of governing the empire, do depose him from the impe- 
 rial dignity, and elect Albert duke of Austria king of the Ro- 
 mans." See Modern Universal History, Vol. XXIX. pp. 
 249, 250. 
 
 * The following extract from the public instrument respecting 
 the deposition of the emperor Wenceslaus exhibits in a very re- 
 markable manner the great influence and authority of the Elec- 
 tors of the Empire. After summing up the various instances in 
 "(rhich the emperor had shewn himself uuMorthy of the govern- 
 ment, the electors proceed to depose him as follows : " Idcirco ma- 
 . lum hoc, toti Christianae Reip. exitiale, minime diutius ferendum 
 «ttolerandum consentes, animo bene confirmato, post multos va- 
 rioscjue Tractatus consultationcsque, turn inter nos ipsos turn 
 etiam cum aliis Principibus et Optimatibus Sacri Imperii, seriQ 
 iiabitasj pro Ecclesize salute, Christiani Orbis consolatione, Sa- 
 tti Imperii honore et utilitate, praefatum Dominum Wenceslaunij 
 fenquam negligentem et destructorem Imperii, eoque indignum, 
 a Sacro Romano Imperio, omnique ejus dignitate hoc tempore 
 penitus reraovendum esse duximus. Nos itaque Joannes Archi* 
 ffpiscopus, nomine praidictorum Dominorum Sacri Romani Im* 
 perii Co-electorum, nostroque, turn commemoratis, turn pluribug 
 aliis insignibus defectibus causisque moti, hac nostra Sententia, 
 quam praesenti Scripto damus atquc ferimus, praedictura Domi- 
 num Wenceslaura, ceu inutilem, negligentem, dissipatorem, et 
 indignum Sacri Romani Imperii Defensorem, eodem Romano 
 Imperio, omnique ejus gradu, Dignitate ac Ditione ad idem per* 
 tinente, privamus et submovemus : cunctis Princ'rpibus, Optima- 
 tibus, Equitibus, Ingenuis, Urbibus, Provinciis, et Subditis Sa« 
 Yri Romani Imperii denunciantes, eos ab omni Homagio et Ju- 
 VamentO; Personae WerKspslai nomine Imperii praestito, prorsuf 
 
f^ad the ^ privilegmm de noii appellando illimitS^- 
 liim,' that of making war, coinings and exercising 
 
 ^se Itberos : requireiites atque tnohentes tos snb Jurisjurandi 
 fide, quii Sacro Imperio aditiicti tenentur, ne pra-dlcto Domino 
 Wenceslao, tanquam Romaiiorum Regi, deinceps obediaut et ob- 
 sequantur; ncque il!i Jus ullum, obsequium, censum, reditum 
 aut ullara aliam obveutionem, quocunque nomine tandem appel^ 
 landa vcniat, ceii Ilomanorum Rogi, pendant, exhibeant, aut 
 exhiberi permittant: sed ejusmodi debita utili et idoneo Roma-, 
 norum Regi, divine favente Numine deinceps suffidendo, asser* 
 
 vent. c publico Solio in Tribunalis tisum 
 
 erecto, Dominis Co-electoribus nostris ibidem judicio assiden-? 
 tibus, anno Dominicae Incarnationis millesimo quadringente- 
 simo, Indictionc octava, fcria sexta, die vigesima mensis Au- 
 gust!, paulum ante Nonarum tenipus ; Pontificatiis Sanctissimi ia 
 Christo Patris ac Domini, Domini Bonifacii Noni, Divina Pro- 
 cidentia, Papa^, anno undecimo." See Dumont's Corps Diplo« 
 ITiatique, Tom. 11. pp. 274, 275, 'vvhere the whole of this instru>» 
 nient will be found. 
 
 " We, therefore, agreeing that this evil, so destructive to the 
 Christian republic, is to be no longer borne with and tolerated, 
 our mind being completely made up, after many and various 
 treaties and consultations seriously had, as well among ourselves 
 as also with the other princes and grandees of the Holy empire, 
 for the safety of the church, the consolation of the Christian 
 world, and the honour and advantage of the Holy empire, we 
 have resolved that the aforesaid Lord Wenceslaus shall be hence- 
 forward entirely removed from the Holy Roman empire and all 
 its dignity, as one negligent, the destroyer of the empire, and 
 unworthy of it. We, therefore, John, archbishop, in the name 
 of the aforesaid lords, co-electors of the Holy Roman empire, 
 moved by our owti interest, as well as by the notorious failings 
 already mentioned, with many other causes, do, by this our sen- 
 tence, which we give and report in the present instrument, de- 
 prive ani| rerapv^^ ^'le ^foro'said Lord Wenceslaus, (as a person 
 
S04 
 
 every act of sovereignty. They formed a separate 
 college in the diet of the empire^ and had among- 
 themselves a particular covenant^ or league^ called 
 the Kur verein. * They had precedence of all the 
 
 useless and negligent, a dissipated character, and an unworthy 
 defender of the Holy Roman empire,) of and from the same 
 Roman empire, and all his rank, dignity and power appertaining 
 thereto. We also signify to all the princes, grandees, knights, 
 freemen, cities, provinces, and subjects of the Holy Roman em- 
 pire, that they are entirely liberated from all homage, and their 
 oath given to the person of Wenceslaus in the name of the em- 
 pire. We also require and admonish them by the oath which 
 binds them to the Holy empire, that they do not henceforth 
 obey and submit to the aforesaid Lord Wenceslaus as king of the 
 Romans ; and that they do not submit, present, or suffer to be 
 presented to him as king of the Romans any law, favour, tribute, 
 revenue, or any other matter by whatever name it may be called; 
 but that they preserve dues of this kind for a proper and fit king 
 of the Romans, through the favour of the Divine Being to be af- 
 terwards appointed. From the public throne erected for 
 
 the use of the Tribunal, our Lords co-electors sitting in judg- 
 ment, in the year from the Incarnation of our Lord 1-100, the 
 Indiction being 8, the day of the week Friday, on the 20th of 
 August, a little before the commencement of the Nones ; and in 
 the eleventh year of the Pontificate of the most holy father and 
 lord in Christ, Boniface the ninth, by the providence of God, 
 Pope." 
 
 * This Treaty of Union was drawn up at Mentz the Monday 
 after the Exaltation of the Holy Cross, in the year of our Lord, 
 1399. The title of the instrument is thus translated into French 
 by Dumont, in his Corps Diplomatique, Tom. IL p. 271. 
 *' Traite d'Union entre les Electeurs du St. Empire, par lequel 
 lis se promettent reciproquement de se tenir etroitement unis 
 tout le tems de leur Tie, de se preter une assistance mutuelle pour 
 
other princes of the empire, and even ranked with 
 king's." * The heads of the Beast understood in 
 this way is one of the finest emblems of the Ger- 
 man constitution which can possibly be conceived ; 
 for as this empire was at the head of the Latin mo- 
 narchy, the seven mountains very fitly denote the 
 neven PRINCIPAL powers of which the German 
 empire was composed. And, also, as each electorate,, 
 by virtue of its union with the Germanic body, was 
 more powerful than any other Roman Catholic 
 state of Europe not so united ; so was each electo- 
 rate, in the most proper sense of the word, one of 
 the highest elevations in the Latin world. The 
 lime when the seven electorates of the empire were 
 first instituted is very uncertain. The general 
 opinion of German historians, especially the canon- 
 ists, is that they derived their orig-in from an edict 
 of Otho in. confirmed by pope Gregory V. in the 
 year 996. Others say that they were not instituted 
 before the reign of the emperor Henry IV in the 
 eleventh century. Others refer their origin to 
 
 ie mahitlen de leur Droit d* Election, et de ne consentir a, aucuna. 
 diminution de I'Empire, soit de la part du Roi des Romains, ou 
 de quelque autre que ce soit." Treaty of Union betwixt the 
 Electors of the Holy Empire, by which they reciprocally pro- 
 mise to keep strictly united the whole term of their life : mu- 
 tually to assist each other for the support of their right of Elec- 
 tion ; and not to consent to any diminution of the empire, whe- 
 ther on the part of the king of the Romans, or from any other 
 quarter. A similar treaty was again drawn up by them at Gela- 
 hausen, July 5, 1502. See Dumont, Tom. IV. p. 31. 
 * See Rees' Cycloptedia on the word Elector. 
 
Predcvic II. wlio died in 1250; and others -^vill 
 have it that they did not exist before 1280; avid 
 have, therefore, ascribed their institution to Ru- 
 <Jolph of Habsbiirgh, the founder of the house of 
 Austria. But Wiquefort differs from all other his- 
 torians in this point, and says they were instituted 
 by virtue of the Golden Bull of Charles IV. in 
 1356. But that they existed long; before this latter 
 year, is evident from history; for Cardinal Ostia 
 who lived in the time of Pope Innocent IV. between 
 1243 and 1254, speaks of them in his commentary 
 on the decretal of Innocent III. where he affirms 
 that the electors mentioned in that place, are the 
 archbishops of Mentz, Cologme, and Triers, the 
 count palatine of the Rhine, the duke of Saxony^ 
 the marc^uis of Brandenburg'h, and the duke of 
 Bohemia. These were exactly the same with those 
 afterwards acknowledged by the Golden Bull. 
 Martinus Polonus, who also lived about the same 
 time with the Cardinal of Ostia, names the seven 
 ^lectors as follows : the archbishop of Mentz, the 
 chancellor of Germany ; the archbishop of Triers, 
 chancellor of Gaul ; the archbishop of Cologne, 
 chancellor of Italy; the marquis of Brandenburgh, 
 high chamberlain ; the palatine of the Rhine, high 
 steward; the duke of Saxony, gentleman of the 
 horse ; and the king of Bohemia, high cup-bearer. 
 These are also the same with those mentioned by 
 the Cardinal ; consequently it follows that the in- 
 stitution could not have been later than the time of 
 
^07 
 
 Innocent IV.* But how lon^ they existed befor* 
 A. D. 1356 it is impossible to determine ; therefore 
 we must say with Selden that '" there is no other kind 
 of certainty of it than thus, that by a tacit consent 
 of the states and of the empire (since it came into 
 Germany) this septemviral election hath been re- 
 ceived, and that so the dignity of electorship hath 
 been settled by the same consent upon those three 
 ecclesiastical and four secular princes. But when 
 or at what time this was first so received is not de- 
 livered in any testimony that is certain enoug'h to 
 decide the controversy." f But the uncertainty in 
 this respect does not in the least weaken the evi- 
 dence of the mountains being the seven electorates^ 
 but rather confirms it ; for, as we have already ot- 
 
 * See Du Pin's Ecclesiastical History of the Tenth Century, 
 chap. vi. Kees' Cyclopaedia, and Chambers' Diet, on the word 
 Elector ; and the different German historians. Koch says, that 
 the first mention of the seven electors was in a letter of Urban 
 IV. respecting the contested election of Richard, king of Eng- 
 land, and Alphonsus, king of Castille, Avhere his words ar« 
 *' Principes vocem in hujusraodi electione habentes, qui sunt s^p- 
 tem numero." The princes having a voice in this election, 
 who are seven in number. See his Tableau des Revolution?, 
 Tom. I. p. 180. The whole of this letter is inserted in the first 
 Tome of Dumout's Corps Diplomatique, pp. 216 — 219. and th« 
 electorates here mentioned are precisely the same with those af- 
 terwards acknowledged by the Golden Bull. The date of th« 
 letter is Aug. 31, without the year of our Lord; but, according 
 to Dumont, it must have been in 1262, 1263, or 1264, as th« 
 pontificate of Urban IV. was only in these years. 
 
 t See bis Works, Vol. III. Tom. i. Col. 487. 
 
20B 
 
 served^ the representation of tlic Woman sittin<*^ 
 upon the Beast is a fii>ure of the Latin cluirch in 
 the period of her greatest authority spiritual and 
 temporal ; this we know did not take place till about 
 the commencement of the fourteenth century^ a pe- 
 riod subsequent to the institution of the seven elec- 
 torates. Therefore^ the Woman sits upon the se-' 
 ven mountains, or the German empire in its elec- 
 tive state : * she is said to sit upon them, to denote 
 
 * The state of the German constitution in the reign of the 
 emperor Charles IV. is thus described by Gibbon : " It is in the 
 fourteenth century, that we may view in the strongest light the 
 state and contrast of the Roman empire of Germany, Avhich no 
 longer held, except on the borders of the Rhine and Danube, a 
 
 single province of Trajan or Constantine. The German 
 
 emperor was no more than the elective and impotent magistrate 
 of an aristocracy of princes, who had not left him a village that 
 he might call his own. His best prerogative was the right of 
 presiding and proposing in the national senate, which was con- 
 vened at his summons ; and his native kingdom of Bohemia, less 
 opulent than the adjacent city of Nuremberg, was the firmest 
 seat of his power, and the richest source of his revenue. The 
 army with which he passed the Alps, consisted of three hundred 
 horse — such was the shameful poverty of the Roman emperor, 
 that his person was arrested by a butcher in the streets of 
 Worms, and was detained in the public inn, as a pledge or hos- 
 tage for the payment of his expenccs. From this humiliating 
 scene let us turn to the apparent majesty of the same Charles in 
 the diets of the empire. The golden bull, which fixes the Ger- 
 manic constitution, is promulgated in the style of a sovereign and. 
 a legislator. An hundred princes bowed before his throne, an^i 
 exalted their own dignity by the voluntary honours which they 
 yielded to their chief or minister. At the royal banquet, the he- 
 reditary great officers, the seven electors, who in rank and titl* 
 
209 
 
 that she has the whole German empire under her 
 direction and authority, and also that it is her chief 
 support and strength. Supported by Germany she 
 is under no apprehension of being successfully op- 
 posed by any other power; she sits upon the seven 
 mountains, therefore she is higher than the seven 
 highest eminences of the Latin world ; * she must^ 
 therefore, have the Latin empire under her com- 
 
 were equal to kings, performed their solemn and domestic service 
 of the palace. The seals of the triple kingdom were borne in 
 state by the archbishops of Mentz, Cologne, and Treves, the 
 perpetual archchancellors of Germany, Italy, and Aries. The 
 great marshal, on horseback, exercised his function w iih a silver 
 measure of oats, which he emptied on the ground, and irnmedi- 
 ately dismouMted to regulate the order of the guests. The great 
 steward, the count palatine of the Rhine, placed the dishes on 
 the table. The great chamberlain, the margrave of Branden- 
 burgh, presented, after the repast, the golden ewer, or bason, to 
 wash. The king of Bohemia, as great cupbearer, vpas repre- 
 sented by -the emperor's brother, the duke of Luxemburgh and 
 Brabant ; and the procession was closed by the great huntsmen, 
 who introduced a boar and a stag, with a loud chorus of horns 
 and hounds. Nor was the supremacy of the emperor confined 
 to Germany alone ; the hereditary monarchs of Europe con- 
 fessed the pre-eminence of his rank and dignity : he was the first 
 of the Christian princes, the temporal head of the great republic 
 of the west." See his Decline and Fall of tlxe Roman empirej 
 chap. 49, near the end. 
 
 * It is worthy of note that those states which were fi.nally ad- 
 vanced to the dignity of electorates were a long time before the 
 issuing of the Golden Bull, great and powerful ; and might in a 
 peculiar sense be denominated mouutains, in reference to the 
 other minor states with which they were surrounded. But as 
 several other states were abo of great political importance, the 
 
 P 
 
210 
 
 plelc subjection. But this state of emmence vras 
 not of very lon^ continuance; the removal of the 
 Papal see from Rome to Avignon tended consider- 
 alily to diminish the temporal sovereii^nty of the 
 Latin cluirch, And the g^reat schism from 1377 to 
 1417 was also detrimental to it. But the g-reatest 
 shock of all was the light of the glorious Reforma- 
 tion which first broke out in Germany in 1517; and 
 in a very few years gained its way not only over 
 several of the great principalities of Germany^ but 
 was also made the established religion of Several 
 Popish countries. Consequently^ in the sixteenth 
 eentnry the Woman no longer sat upon the seven 
 mountains, the electorates not only having refused 
 to be ruled by her, but some of them having also 
 despised and abandoned her doctrines. The 
 changes, therefore, which were made in the seven- 
 teenth, eighteenth, and present centuries, in the 
 number of the electors, will not affect, in the least, 
 the interpretation of the seven mountains already 
 given. * 
 
 propheay only denominates those mountains which finally ob- 
 tained the exclusive right of electing the head of the empire.^ 
 
 * The changes alluded to are the following : In 1G23, the 
 emperor Ferdinand II. transferred the electoral dignity frora 
 Frederic V. count palatine to Maximilian duke of Bavaria. This 
 translation of dignity, and many other acts of soiereignty, which 
 the empire remarked in Ferdinand with a jealous eye — obliged 
 the princes to join in a league, and to call strangers to their as- 
 sistance. The war was long, and so bloody, that it is said to 
 have swept away more than half the people of Germany. At 
 la^tj both sides being weary, au assembly was held at Muuster t» 
 
211 
 
 But the beads of the Beast have a double signi- 
 iicatioii ; for the angel says, '' They are also seven 
 
 conclude a peace, and the ambassadors there found themselves 
 in a great strait how to satisfy the two principal branches of 
 that house. Each of them pretended to the electorate : the first 
 having had possession thereof for many agesj rco^uired the resti- 
 tution of it ; and the second, alleging the signal services he had 
 done the empire, would not consent to the peace, unless it were 
 provided that he should still enjoy that honour. In conclusion, 
 as Maximilian had many friends, so Charles Lewis did not want 
 his supporters : whereupon they came to this agreement, (in 
 1G48,) that Maximilian duke of Bavaria should have the first 
 electorship, and an eighth should be erected for Charles Lewis 
 prince palatine of the Rhine ; upon this condition, tliat if the 
 Guilielmine branch failed before the Rodolphino, those latter 
 should again take possession of their ancient electorship, and the 
 other be wholly abolished. — " In 1692 a ninth electorate was 
 added by the emperor Leopold in favour of the duke of Hanover 
 of the house of Brunswick Luneburg. From that period to the 
 year 1777 the electoral college consisted of the three ecclesiasti- 
 t'.al electors, Mentz, Treves, and Cologne, and the six secular, 
 Bohemia, the palatinate of the Rhine, Saxony, Brandenburg, 
 Bavaria, and Hanover. The dominions of the last elector pala- 
 tine of the R-hine having devolved, in December 1777, to the 
 electpr of Bavaria, the electoral college was again reduced to 
 eight members until the peace of Luneville ; when the three ec- 
 clesiastical electors were secularized, the archbishop of Ratisbon 
 introduced as a new clector-archchancellor, and the duke of 
 Wirtemberg, the landgrave of Hesse-Cassel, the margrave of 
 Baden, and the grand duke of Tuscany, as duke of Saltzburg, 
 raised to the electoral dignity. This increased the number of 
 electors to ten, viz. the elector-archchancellor, Bohemia, Ba- 
 Taria, Saxony, Brandenburg, Hanover, Wirtemberg, Hesse-Cas- 
 sel, Baden, and Saltzburg. But this arrangement was not of 
 long duration. Li the ye^r 1806 the German empire was dis- 
 
 P 2 
 
 w 
 
2V2 
 
 king's." Pe^orc, it was said^ they "^ are seven 
 mountains ;'' here '' they are also seven kings/* 
 "which is a demonstration that kingdojns are not 
 here meant by mountams ; and this is a further 
 argument that the seven electorates are represented 
 by seven mountains, for though the sovereigns of 
 these states ranked with kings, they were not kings ; 
 that is to say^ they were not absolute and sole 
 lords of the territories they possessed, indepen*- 
 deiitly of the emperor ; for their states formed a 
 part of the Germanic body. But the seven heads 
 of the Beast are also seven kings; that is to say, 
 the Latin empire has had seven supreme forms of 
 government; for king' is used in the prophetical 
 writings for any supreme governor of a state or 
 people, as is evident in Deut. xxxiii. 5, where 
 Moses is called a kino-. * 
 
 Of these seven kings, or supreme forms of g'o- 
 vernment, the angel informs St, John " five are 
 fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come ; 
 and, when he cometh, he must continue a short 
 space.'* Several interpretations of this passage 
 have been noticed in explaining the heads of the 
 Dragon ; and it is plain that none of them can be 
 
 solved ; and the electoral college wvls not only dissolved with 
 the dissolution of the German empire ; but the title of elector, 
 a title which for so long a series of years conferred a rank equal 
 to that of the old kings of Europe, became altogether extinct." 
 See E-^tate of the Empire, by Lewis du May, knight. Edit. Lond. 
 1676 ; and Rees' Cyclopaedia on the word Elector. 
 * See Poii Synopsis Criticorum, in ioc. 
 
213 
 
 right, from reasons already g'ivon. We must, 
 therefore, look for them among* the governments 
 of the Latin nation, where they can only be found, 
 as will presently appear. It is well known that the 
 first form of Latin government was that of kings, 
 vvhich continued after the death of Latinus 428 
 years till the building of Rome, B. C. 753. * After 
 Numitor's decease the Albans, or Latins, instituted 
 the form of a republic, and were governed by dic- 
 tators. We have only the names of two, viz, Clu- 
 ilius and Metius Pufetius or SuiTetius ; but as the 
 dictatorship continued at least 88 years, it is possi- 
 ble there might be -others though their names and 
 actions are unknown, f In the year before Christ 
 6C)0 Alba, the metropolis of the Latin nation, was 
 destroyed by Tullus Hosiilius, the tiiird king of the 
 Romans, and the inhabitants carried to Rome, 
 This put an end to the monarchical republic of the 
 Latins ; and the Latins elected two annual magi- 
 etrates whom Dionysius calls dictators, but who 
 
 * The Latin kings, beginning uith jEneas, reigned in the fol- 
 lowing order: iEneas 3 years, Ascanius 3S years, Silvius 29 
 years, ji^neas Silvius 31 years, Latinus Silvius 50 years, Alba 
 Silvius 39 years, Capetus Silvius 26 years, Capys Silvius 28 years^ 
 Calpetus Silvius 13 years, Tiberinus Silvius Syears, Agrippa Sil- 
 vius 40 years, AUadius Silvius 19 years, Aventinus Silvius 37 
 years, Procas Silvius 23 years, Amulius Silvius 44 years, and 
 Numitor 2 years. See Dionysius Ilalicarnassensis, Antiq. Rom. 
 Lib. i. 
 
 + See Vetus I^tium a P. Marcellino Corradino, Lib. i. cap. 8. 
 Edit. Rom. 1701. 
 
214 
 
 arc called pra?tors by other writers. ^ Tliirj form 
 of government continued till the time of P. De- 
 cius ]Mus, the Roman consul; for Festus in his 
 fourteenth book informs us "' that the Albans en- 
 joyed prosperity till the time of king Tullus ; but 
 that Alba being' ihen destroyed, the Consuls till the 
 time of P. Dccius Mus held a consultation with the 
 Latins at the head of Ferentina, which is under the 
 Alban mount, and tlic empire was governed by the 
 council of both nations." f The Latin nation was 
 entirely subjugated by the Romans B. C. 336, 
 which put an end to the government by praetors, 
 after it had continued upwards of 300 years. The 
 Latins from this time ceased to be a nation, as it 
 respects the name; therefore the three forms of 
 government already mentioned were those which 
 
 • * Alba itaque eversa, Latina gens reipublicae instav vixit, et 
 duos dictatores, quos alii pratores vocant elegit, quibus summum 
 imperii jus esset, quandcquidem Latini populi quovis anno atl 
 Lucum Ferentinse coibant, ut ibi annuum magistratum crearent. 
 " Alba being therefore overthrown, tlie Latin nation lived like 
 a republic, and elected two dictators, whomothers'^call praetors, 
 tvho were ii\yested with the chief authority of the state, since 
 the Latins assembled at the Ferentine grove that they might 
 there create an annual magistrate." See Vetus Latiura a P. 
 Marcellino Corradino, Lib. i. cap. 8. Edit. Rom. 1704. This 
 author calls them dictators from the authority of Dionysius, 
 which will be examined in another place. 
 
 + Albanos rerum potitos usque ad Tullum regem, Alba deinde 
 diruti, usque ad P. Dacium Murem, consules populos Latinos ad 
 <;aput Ferentinas, quod est sub monte Albano consulere solitos, 
 et imperium communi cousiiio administrare. lb. 
 
^15 
 
 the Latins had during- that period which the angel 
 speaks of, when he says, '"' the beast which thou 
 sawest was." But as five heads, or forms of g'o- 
 vernment^had fallen before St. John's time, it is evi- 
 dent that the two other heads of government whicli 
 had fallen, must be amon^ those of the Romans ; 
 first, because though the Latin nation so called was 
 deprived of all authority by the Romans, yet the 
 Latin power continued to exist, because the very 
 conquerors of the Latin nation were Latins; and, 
 consequently, the Latins, though a conquered peo- 
 ple, continued to have a Latin government. Se- 
 condly, because the angel expressly says, when 
 speaking to St. John, that one is, that is, the sixth 
 head, or Latin form of government, was then in ex- 
 istence, which could be no other than the imperial 
 power, because the Romans were masters of the 
 whole earth then known. It therefore neces- 
 sarily follows, that the Roman forms of govern- 
 inent by which Latium was ruled must be the re- 
 maining heads of the Beast. Before the subjuga- 
 tion of the Latins by the Romans four of the Ro- 
 man forms of g'overnment had fallen, the regal 
 power, the dictatorship, the dccemvirate, and the 
 consular power of the military tribunes, the last of 
 which was abolished about B. C. 366 ; none of 
 these, therefore, ruled over Latium, But as the 
 Latins were finally subdued about B. C. S3G, the 
 consular s^overnment of the Romans which was 
 then in existence, must be the fourth head of the 
 Beast. This head continued, Avith very little inter- 
 
216 
 
 ruptlon, till the rising up of the triumvirate, the 
 fifth head of the Beast, B. C. 43. The dictator- 
 ship of Sylla and Julius Cassar could not be consi- 
 dered a new head of the Beast, as the Latins had 
 already been ruled by it in the persons of Cluilius 
 and Fufetius. The sixth head of the Beast, or that 
 which existed in the time of St. John, was, conse^ 
 Cjuently, the imperial power, the seventh Draconic 
 form of government. The seventh Latin form of 
 government was in futurity in St. John's time, but 
 when it should come it was to endure but a short time. 
 This part of the prophecy is thus explained by Bi- 
 shop Newton : '' The sixth is the power of the Cae- 
 sars or emperors, which was subsisting in the time 
 of the vision. An end was put to the imperial name 
 in the year 476 by Odoacer king of the Heruli, 
 who, having taken Rome, deposed Momyllus Augus- 
 tulus, the last emperor of the west. He and his 
 successors the Ostrogoths assumed the title of kings 
 of Italy : but though the name was changed, the 
 power still continued much the same. This, there- 
 fore, cannot well be called a new form of govern- 
 ment ; it may rather be considered as a continua- 
 tion of the imperial power^ or as a renovation of 
 the kingly authority. Consuls are reckoned but 
 one form of government, though their office was 
 frequently suspended, and after a time restored 
 again: and in the same manner kings may be 
 counted but one form of govemment, though the 
 name was resumed after the interval of so many 
 years. A new form of government was not erected. 
 
till Rome fell under the obedience of the eastern 
 emperor, and the emperor's lieutenant, the exarch 
 of Ravenna, dissolved all the former mag-istracies, 
 and constituted a Duke of Rome to govern the 
 people, and to pay tribute to the exarchate of Ra- 
 venna. — This form of government commenced in 
 566, according- to some accounts, or in the year 
 568 according to others ; and the city revolted from 
 the eastern emperor to the Pope in the year 727/' * 
 plausible as this explication of the seventh head of 
 the Beast may appear at first sig'ht, a little consi- 
 deration will shev/ that it is totally insufficient to 
 explain the words of the text in a satisfactory man- 
 ner : for a head of the Beast signifies a supreme in- 
 dependent form of g-overnment ; consequently the 
 Roman duchy cannot be the seventh head as it was 
 dependent upon the exarchate of Ravenna; and 
 the exarchate of Ravenna cannot be the head as 
 it was itself in subjection to the Greek empire. 
 It hence follows, that the form of government 
 which the Romans had during the exarchate, was 
 the imperial power, the sixth and not the seventh 
 head of the Beast. The Rev. G. Faber has as- 
 certained the truth exactly, in denominating- the 
 Carloviiigian patriciate the seventh head of the 
 beast, f That this was a supreme independent 
 form of government is evident from history. The 
 
 * See his Disscrtat. on the Prophec'e?, in loc. 
 + Sje his Dissertation on tiie Prophecies, Vol. il. pp.227, &c. 
 Loud. ISIO. 
 
'^18 
 
 patriciate was the highest dignity in the Greek em- 
 pire; and Justinian calls it summam dignitatem.'^ 
 The Greek governors of Ravenna were indilVc' 
 rently styled exarchs and patricians ;f and as h)ng 
 as the exarchate was in power, the patriciate was 
 only a subordinate dignity. But after the conquest 
 of the exarchate by the Lombards^ the patriciate of 
 Rome became independent of the Greek empire, 
 especially after Pipin the French sovereign dispos- 
 sessed the Lombards of the exarchate, and bestow- 
 ed it upon the Pope, A. D. 755. Gibbon, in speak- 
 ing of the patriciate, observes, that '' the decrees of 
 the senate and people successively invested Charles 
 Martel and his posterity with the honours of Patri^ 
 cian of Rome. The leaders — of a powerful na- 
 tion would have disdained a servile title and subor- 
 dinate office : but the reign of the Greek emperors 
 \vas suspended ; and, in the vacancy of the empire, 
 they derived a more glorious commission from the 
 Pope and the republic. The Roman ambassadors 
 presented these patricians with the keys of the 
 shrine of St. Peter, as a pledge and symbol of so- 
 vereignty ; and with a holy banner, which it was 
 their right and duty to unfurl in the defence of the 
 church and city. In the time of Charles Martel 
 and of Pipin, the interposition of the Lombard 
 kiugdom, covered the freedom, while it threatened 
 the safety, of Rome ; and the Patriciate represented 
 
 ■* See Encyc. Brit, on the word Patrician. 
 + See Gibbon's Decline and Fallj chap. 49. 
 
219 
 
 only the titse, the service, the alliance, of these dis^ 
 (ant protectors. The power and pohcy of Charle^ 
 mag'ne annihilated an enemy, and imposed a mas- 
 ter. In his first visit to the capital, he was received 
 with all the honours which had formerly been paid 
 to the exarch, the representative of the emperor ; 
 and these honours obtained some new decorations 
 from the joy and g-ratitude of Pope Adrian I. — 
 In the portico Adrian expected him at the head of 
 his clergy ; they embraced as friends and equals : 
 but, in their march to the altar, the king-, or patri- 
 cian, assumed the right hand of the Pope, Nor 
 was the Frank content with these vain and empty 
 demonstrations of respect. In the 26 years that 
 elapsed between the conquest of Lombardy and his 
 imperial coronation, Rome, which had been deli- 
 vered by the sword, Avas subject, as his own, to the 
 sceptre of Charlemagne. The people swore alle- 
 giance to his person and family ; in his name mo- 
 ney was coined, and justice \\as administered : and 
 the election of tiie Popes was examined and con- 
 firmed by his authority. Except an original and 
 self-inherent claim of sovereignty, there was not 
 any prerogative remaining-, which the title of em- 
 peror could add to the patrician of Rome," * In 
 
 '* Gibbon's Docline and Fall, chap. 49,— Strurius's account of 
 ihe patriciate is as foUows : — Exinde memoranda veniunt iura 
 aduocatice atque Patritiatus Romanorum, quae Carolus M, fuit 
 adeptus. Scilicet, postquam Caroli M. pater Pipinus, Stephanum 
 papam ab Aistulpho Longobardorum rege liberasset, ipsum non 
 tiGluoi feed ctiaai Ulios ejus Carolum atque Carolomannum, A. C. 
 
220 
 
 confirmation of what has already been said with re- 
 spect to the patrician digniity becoming an inde- 
 
 75-1. constituit Patritios, per quam dignitatem ipsis tunc tempo- 
 rjs iura defensionis sedis Uomanaj fuerunt concessa. Dum au- 
 tcm Adrianus Papa per legatum suam Petrum, Carolum ad auxilia 
 contra Desiderium fereiida inuitaret, hac ratione vtebatur, quod 
 ipse legitimus tutor et defensor esset ipsius ecclesia?, quoniam 
 ilium Stephanus Papa in Patricium Romanorum ordinauerit. 
 Jlinc denuo iura defensionis atque aduocatiae Romaus Carolo 
 fuerunt concessa. Dum vero per mensium spatium Carolus in 
 obsessione Papias vrbis morarctur, circa Paschatis festum Romara 
 properaus, vbi cum magna solemnitate a Papa et proceribu.s Ro- 
 manis cum crucibus et vexillis fuit receptus, ipseque in Patritium 
 Romanorum non solum constitutus, sed etiam sub hac dignitate 
 iurequc, Adrianus Papa habita K)nodo, sanctione pragmatica 
 omne ius eligendi pontificem et ordinandi sedem Papalem con- 
 cessit, vt hac ratione sub titulo atque dignitate Patritiatus omne 
 ius in vrbem et Papam Romanum Carolo concederetur. Adri- 
 ano defuncto, Leo Pontificatum suscepit, et mox per legates suos 
 claves Confessionis S. Petri ac vexillum Roman'se vrbis cum aliis 
 muneribus Regi misit, rogauitque, vt aliqucm de suis optimatibus 
 Romam mitteret, qui populum Romanum ad suam fidem atque 
 subiectionem per sacramentum firmaret. Hinc etiam iura su» 
 premi dominii tanquam Patritius in Yrbem et Papara Romanum 
 exercuit, dum in controversia Romanorum cum Leone Papa iu- 
 dicem, ageret, monetas Romaj cudi faceret, hoc Patricii titulo 
 inter alios vteretur, eosdemque regiis Kquipararet, dum ista aetate 
 non nisi regnorum tituli essent vsitati, atque ab eodem anni re^ 
 giminis computarentur. Quare etiam Scriptores adserere non 
 dubitant, Carolum Romam, antequam Imperator fieret, suis 
 sceptris addidisse. See his Corpus Historias GermanicaSj Tom. 
 I. pp. 136—139. Periodiis iv. § 25, '26. 
 
 " From that time the rights of the office of protector, and of 
 the patriciate of the Romang, which Charlemagne obtained, be- 
 gan to be mentioned. Fer after that Pipin, the father oX Char* 
 
221 
 
 pendent Roman government^ we may add the fol- 
 lowing- words of Dr. John Jacob Mascoii : '' As 
 the title of Patricius is so eminent in the histories 
 of Pipin and Charlemaig-n^ it may be worthy our 
 
 lemagiif , had delivered Pope Stephen from Aistulphus king of the 
 Lombards, the Pope constituted not only him, but also his sons 
 Charles and Caroloman, patricians in the year of Christ 754, by 
 ■which dignity the right of defending the Roman See was at that 
 time conceded to them. For when Pope Adrian had, by his le- 
 gate Peter, iutreated Charles to afford him assistance against De- 
 sidcrius, he availed himself of tliis plea, that he was the lawful 
 guardian and protector of the church, as Pope Stephen had or- 
 dained him patrician of the Romans. Hence the right of de- 
 fending and advocating the cause of the Romans was again 
 conceded to Charles. But when Charles had been detained 
 some months in the siege of Pavia, he hastened to Rome about 
 the feast of the Passover, where he was received with great so- 
 lemnity by the Pope and the Roman noblemen, and himself not 
 only appointed patrician of the Romans ; but also under this dig- 
 nity and power Pope Adrian, having called a synod for the pur- 
 pose, by a pragmatic sanction yielded up to him the whole right 
 of electing the pontiff, and of regulating the Papal See. It is 
 lience evident that under the title and dignity of the patriciate 
 the whole power over the city and the Pope of Rome was com- 
 mitted to Charles. Upon the death of Adrian, Leo acceded to 
 the pontificate; and shortly after sent to the king, by his legates, 
 his keys of the shrine of St. Peter, and the ensign of the Roman 
 city, with other gifts ; and intreated him that he would send some 
 one of his grandees to Rome, who would establish by oath the 
 Romans under his protection and subjection. Hence he had su- 
 preme authority as patrician over the City and the Pope of Rome, 
 whilst in the controversy of the Romans with Pope Leo he acted 
 as judge, caused money to be coined at Rome, used this title of 
 patrician among others; and made them equal with the regal, 
 
enquiry, what was the real signification of it. The; 
 Patritiat, in itself, was not so much an office, or 
 kind of public employ, as the exarchatus, dMcaius, 
 and other offices of the empire were, as rather a 
 peculiar dig'nity in the empire, which had likewise 
 its proper insignia. Constantine the Great, in 
 particular, placed it in high esteem : And, after 
 this, persons of the greatest distinction, when they 
 had enjoyed the offices of consuls and prcefecll 
 picetorii, or other the principal posts of the empire, 
 were honoured with it. Even several kings of fo- 
 reign nations have accepted of it. Odoacer sued 
 for this title from the emperor Zeno, that he might 
 rule, with the better face, in Rome and Italy. 
 When this emperor afterwards encouraged Thco- 
 deric, king of the Ostro-Goths, to march into Italy, 
 he nominated him Patricius. Even Clovis accepted 
 of this dignity from Anastasius. But after the 
 Pnpes conferred the title of Patricius on king 
 Pipin and his sons, it may have received a new and 
 particular signification. From this time we might 
 agree with Peter de Marca and Pagius, that the 
 Patricii were the protectors of the Roman church, 
 and, at the same time, had the temporal jurisdiction 
 in Rome." * Selden says that "' the title of patri- 
 
 (whea in that ags only the titles of kingdoms had been used ;) and 
 the years of his reign were computed from the same. AVhrre- 
 fore writers even scruple not to assert, that Charlemagne, be- 
 fore he was made emperor, had annexed Rome to his sceptre." 
 * See his History of the Ancient Germans, translated by Tho- 
 
cms was of such honour^ that Charlemagne, befofe 
 he was crowned emperor, had it as an additament 
 of g;reatness." * Finally, '^ that Charlemagne was 
 Patrician of the Romans, and ruled over them un- 
 der this name, is attested by numberless state-in- 
 struments and historians." f This form of govern- 
 ment continued till the imperial coronation of 
 Charlemage in 800, when the title of Roman pa- 
 trician was absorbed in that of Roman emperor ; 
 for Du Cange informs us that ''' the patriciate of 
 the Romans is properly to be understood of the 
 pragfecture of the City of Rome, or even of Italy, 
 which used to be governed by patricians. — There- 
 fore, (he adds,) it is no wonder that Charles, when 
 made emperor, should abandon the title of patrician, 
 as the patrician dignity was in subjection to the im- 
 perial." "l The point of time when the Patriciate 
 
 mas Lediard, Esq. Vol. IV. pp. 637, 638. Edit. Lond. and 
 Westm. 1738. 
 
 * See his Titles of Honour, Col. 1012. 
 
 + Carolum M, Patricium fuisse Romanorum, iisque hoc no- 
 mine imperasse infiuita diplomata et historic! tcstantur. See 
 Capitularia Rerum Francorum a Stephano Baluzio, Tom. II. 
 p. 920, Paris. 1677. 
 
 J Patriciatus Romanorum intelligendus proprie de urbis Ro- 
 mae, vel etiam Italias pra^fecturS, quae a Patriciis — rcgi solebat. 
 — Non mirum igitur, si Carol us imperator factus k patricii ti- 
 tulo abstinuit, cum Patriciatus dignitas fuerit imperatorias sub- 
 dita. Sr-e his Glossary on the word Patriciatus. See also Jo- 
 anuis Meursi Glossariura GrEeco-Barbarum on the word ITa- 
 
224 
 
 of Rome commenced cannot be readily ascertained. 
 Alberic (in his Chron. ad A. D. 750) will have it 
 that Charles Martel was the first patrician; for he 
 says '' Gregory III. not only suspended the tribute^, 
 (scilicet to the Greek emperor,) but also having 
 sent relics and precious g'ifts to Charles Martel, 
 prince of the Franks^ saluted him in his Apostolic 
 writing's, in which he sig'nified that the Roman 
 clerg-y and people had elected him patrician of the 
 Roman city, and defender of the church. There- 
 fore Charles Martel was Roman patrician, hig 
 ^on Pipin was Roman patrician, Charlemag'ne his 
 son was Roman patrician till he was made emperor, 
 a title of greater eminence." * But Mascou and 
 others think it extremely doubtful whether Charles 
 Martel was ever invested with the insignia of the 
 Patriciate, or was even proclaimed Patricius. f 
 Yet notwithstanding" the uncertainty of this point, 
 all agree that his son Pepin was made patrician ; 
 and Hugo Flaviniacensis (Chron. Verdunensi apud 
 
 * Tertius autem Gregorius non solum vectlgalia interdixit, sed 
 etiam Karolo Martello Francorum principi missis reliquiis et 
 muneribus pretiosls, salutavit eum Apostolicis scriptis, quibus et 
 siguificauit, quod Roinanus eum clerus etpopulus elegissent Ro- 
 manas patricium vrbis et ecclesise defensorem. Itaque Karolus 
 Martellus fuit patritiuii Romanus, Pippinus filius eius fuit patri- 
 tius Romanus, Karolus Magnus filius eius fuit patritius Roma- 
 nus, donee factus fuit Imperator, quod mains est. See Struvius^s 
 Corpus Hist. Germanicae, Tom. I. p. 137, n. 46. 
 
 + See Mascou's History of the Ancient Germans translated by 
 Thomas Lediard, Esq. Vol. II. pp. 638, 639. 
 
2^5 
 
 Labbeum, Tom. I. p. 104,) says, that " Stephen, 
 who had succeeded Zacharias, left Rome on account 
 of the oppression of Aistulphus, king of the Lon- 
 gobards, on the fourteenth day of the month Octo- 
 bei% being the seventh Indiction, the second year of 
 his Pontificate, and the 754th from the Incarnation, 
 and came to Pipin in France, and constituted him 
 both Defender of the Roman church, and prince ; 
 confirmed him as king' by his unction, and anointed 
 his two sons Caroloman and Charles. And then 
 was Rome withdrawn from her allegiance to the 
 empire of the Greeks." * If we follow the first of 
 these opinions, the patriciate, as an independent 
 form of government existed about 60 years ; but if 
 the latter, which is by far the most certain, then 
 its duration was about 46 years. The seven heads 
 of the Beast are, therefore, the following : The 
 Regal power. The Dictatorship, The power of the 
 Prietors, f The Consulate, The Triumvirate, The 
 
 * Stephanus, qui Zachariae successerat propter infestatlonem 
 Aistulphi Regis Longobardorum decimo quarto die mensis Octo- 
 bris Roma egressus Indictione septima Papatus sui anno secundo 
 ablncarn. Dom. DCCLIV. ad Pipinum venit in Francia, et con- 
 Stituit eum Romana; ecclesise defensorcm, et Principem, et con- 
 firmauit vnctioiie sua in Regem, etNvnxit duos fillos eius Carolo- 
 mannum et Carolum. Et tunc ablata est Roma a subiectione 
 Imperii GraeCorum. See Struvius's Corpus Hist. Germanics, 
 Tom. I. p. 137, n. 46. 
 
 + I call this the government of praetors, because this is the 
 name by which it is called by almost all writers. But LiciniuSj 
 whom Dionysius Halicarnassensis quotes, appears to dissent from 
 all others in this particular ; for speaking of the origin of the 
 
 Q 
 
22(5 
 
 Imperial power^ and The Patriciate. The last of 
 these was to remain a short time^ which was actu- 
 
 oflice of dictator among the Romans, he quotes the opinion 
 of Licinius, who derives it from the Albans, jaera tov 'A/xaAl» 
 xa< 'No[xirujpo$ ^dvatoy, sKXsiTrcivTr^s ryjs ^xa-iXi-Kr^^ a-vyfsvslasy hi" 
 ava-txlas apy^ovra; oLito^sl^ai^ trfV dvrrjV s^ovrccc s^scrlav rolg ficccri- 
 Xsva-t^ HccXslv Se avtciig Sf^roctoupxi. " After the death of Amu- 
 lius and Numitor, the royal family becoming extinct, annual 
 magistrates, called dictators, were appointed, which possessed 
 equal power with kings." Here Licinius evidently confounds 
 the two separate governments of the dictatorship and the prato- 
 rian power ; for the Latins, previously to the destruction of Alba, 
 did not elect annual magistrates, but only a perpetual dictator, 
 as is evident from Dionysius's own history; for, speaking of Clu- 
 ilius, he says, ryj^ ixsyls-r^g '^PX^i^ a^wSs;;, " he was esteemed 
 worthy of the chief authority;" and, in another part of his 
 work it is observed of Metius Fufetius, that he was one ov dvroi 
 "^V /^^7'5'r a/^%f iHOcr/xT^trav, ^' whom they (the Albans) invested 
 with the chief authority." From these two last passages it is 
 evident the chief authority of the Alban or Latin state was in- 
 tested in one person only, and not two as would appear by the first 
 quotation made above. That the government of the Latins previ- 
 ously to the destruction of Alba was not only different in nature, 
 but also in name, from that which they had subsequently to that 
 event, is fully evident from Livy, who, in the fif st book of his his- 
 tory, numbering Cluilius among the Alban kings, says, Cluilius Al- 
 banus rex moritur; dictatorem Albani Mettum Fuffetium creant. 
 *' Cluilius the Alban king dying, the Albans create Mettus Fuf- 
 fetius dictator;" and in his eighth book, when describing the 
 final war of the Romans with the Latins, he says, Praitores tum 
 duos Latium habebat, L. Annium Setinum et L. Numicium Cir- 
 ccieftsera- " Latium had at that time two pr^tors, L. Annius 
 of Setia, and L. Numicius of Circcii." See also Sigonius de an- 
 tique jure Italiae, Lib. i. c. 3, and Rollin's Roman history, Vol* 
 
227 
 
 ftlly the case ; for^ from its first rise to independent 
 power to its utter extinction, there passed only about 
 45 yearSj a short time in comparison to the duration 
 of several of the other heads ; for the primitive re- 
 gal government continued at least 428 years ; the 
 dictatorship was in power about 88 years ; the 
 power of the praetors was in being" for upwards of 
 300 years ; the consulate lasted about 280 years ; 
 and the imperial power continued upwards of 500 
 years. 
 
 " And the Beast that was, and is not, even he is 
 an eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into per- 
 dition." That is to say, the Latin kingdom that 
 has already been, but is now no longer in existence, 
 shall immediately follow the dissolution of the se- 
 venth form of Latin government; and this domi- 
 nion is called an eighth, because it succeeds to the 
 seventh. Yet it is not an eighth head of the Beast, 
 because the Beast has only seven heads ; for to con- 
 
 III. p. Ill, Edit. Lond. 1754. Sigonlus says, (speaking of the 
 Latin councils,) Concilium — Latinorum tale fuit, quale in Grascia 
 Amphyctionum : sic enim ab initio erat traditum, ut omnes La- 
 tini nomiuis rerum communium caussa ad lucum Ferentinas, qui 
 erat' sub monte iVlbanb, coirent; ibique de summa republica con- 
 sultarent, ac duobus pftetoribus rem universam Latinorum com- 
 mitterent. " The council of the Latins was similar to that of the 
 Amphyctions in Greece : for thus it was ordered from Its begin- 
 ning, that all bearing the Latin name should assemble at the 
 grove of Ferentina, in one common cause, and there consult 
 about the republic, and commit their whole state to the care of 
 two praetors." See Sigon. ib. 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 stitute a new head of the Beast, the form of govern- 
 ment must not only difibr in nature, but also in 
 name. This head of the Beast is, therefore, '^ of 
 the seven/"' (e;^ raJv eTrra,) * that is, one of the seven, 
 the preposition btc having- precisely this meaning. 
 The form of government represented by this head 
 is, consequently, the restoration of one of the pre- 
 ceding seven. But the form of government hera 
 intended must be that from which the Beast obtains 
 his name, for it is said, '' The Beast — is an eighth, 
 and one of the seven ;" the restored head is, there- 
 fore, the regal state of the Latins, or, in other 
 words, the Latin kingdom, ('^H Aa,r ivri BaciXe/a,) 
 w hich followed - the patriciate, or seventh head of 
 Latin government. But the Beast, in his eighth 
 state, or under his first head restored, ^' goeth into 
 perdition." No other Latin form of government 
 shall succeed ; but the Beast, in his last, or Anti- 
 christian state, shall be '" taken, and — cast alive in- 
 to a lake of fire burning with brimstone." 
 
 *' And the ten horns which thou sawest are ten 
 kings, which have received no kingdom as yet ; 
 but receive power as kings one hour with the 
 beast." The meaning of horns has already been 
 defined when speaking of those of the Dragon ; but 
 it is evident the ten horns of the Beast and Dragon 
 cannot be the same, as interpreters commonly con- 
 
 * The following Greek words h. ruiv hirrd is translated 
 •** one of the seven ;" in three of the old English versions. Cal- 
 Biet's translation of the Vulgate, de septem^ is " une de sept,'"^ 
 oae of the seven. 
 
S29 
 
 ceive ; because the powers represented by the Beast 
 and Dragon are different. Therefore Bishop New- 
 ton aims at a more probable interpretation in count- 
 ing' the horns as they stood in the eighth century, 
 when the Pope was advanced to temporal authority. 
 *' The principal states and governments/' he tells 
 us, " then were, 1. of the senate of Rome, who 
 revolted from the Greek emperors, and claimed and 
 exerted the privilege of choosing a new western 
 emperor ; 2. of the Greeks in Ravenna ; 3. of the 
 Lombards in Lombardy ; 4. of the Huns in Hun- 
 gary ; 5. of the Alemancs in Germany ; 6. of the 
 Franks in France ; 7. of the Burgundians in Bur- 
 gundy ; 8. of the Goths in Spain ; 9. of the Bri- 
 tons ; 10. of the Saxons in Britain." * The grand 
 objection against Bishop Newton's scheme is, that 
 these ten were not the principal Latin monarchies 
 which subsisted during the temporal authority of 
 the church; for of the horns of the Beast the angel 
 thus speaks :" These have one mind, and shall 
 give their power and strength unto the beast;'* 
 therefore the ten horns must be the principal 
 strength of the Latin empire, that is to say, this 
 empire is to be under the dominion of ten monarchs 
 independent of each other in every other sense, 
 except in their implicit obedience to the Latin 
 church. That this must be the meaning may be 
 gathered from the angel's words : '' The ten horns 
 which thou sawest are ten kings which have re- 
 
 * Sec his Dissertation on the seventh chapter of Daniel, 
 
230 
 
 ccived no kingdom as yet_, bnt feceiye po^yer as 
 kings one hour with the beast." That is to say, 
 though the Latin empire be now in existence, the 
 ten horns refer to ten Latin kingdoms yet in futu- 
 rity, and consequently they have received no domi- 
 nion AS YET ; for that part of the Latin empire no\Y 
 in power is the sixth head, or imperial government 
 of the Heathen Ca?sars. But the ten states of the 
 jLatins receive dominion as monarchies or indepen- 
 dent powers one tirn^e * with the Beast, that is to 
 say, at the same time with him ; consequently the 
 Latin empire here intended, is the one which is yet 
 to arise. 
 
 ''^ These shall make war with the Lamb, and the 
 Lamb shall overcome them : for he is Lord of lords, 
 and King of kings ; and they that are with him are 
 called, and chosen, and faithful." The ten powers 
 
 * The most common meaning of wca, here translated hour, is 
 season or time ; and in Ilederic's Lexicon the first Latin mean- 
 ing given is iempiis, which signifies time or season. The evident 
 sense of t^v i.afivrjv wpav in Polybius is " the spring season." 
 See his Mag. Hist. Lib. iii. p. 356. Amstel. 1670. And even in 
 the New Testament wpa is sometimes translated time as in Mark 
 vi. 35. xa.] rjSTj upa Tr'OAAry ; '• and now the lime is far passed." See 
 also Rom. xiii. 11. MiHv cvpav must, therefore, mean, one iimCf 
 that is to say, the ten horns are in existence one time (the same 
 time) with the Beast. Miccv yva-y^y/, in the following verse, is 
 translated one mind, and evidently means that the ten kings had 
 the same mind. Vitringa's translation oi fMidv Jjpccv by the Latin 
 words uno codcmque tempore, " in one and the same time," I am 
 satisfied contains the sense of the original; as does also the 
 French version en un mcme temps, words of the same import. 
 
23i 
 
 of the Beast must compose the khi^dom of Anti- 
 christ, for they make war with the Lamb, who is 
 Christ Jesus. This is perfectly true of all Popish 
 states ; for they have constantly opposed, as long 
 as they have had any power, the progress of 
 pure Christianity. They make war with the Lamb 
 by persecuting his followers ; but the Lamb shall 
 in due time overcome them, for he is Lord of lords^ 
 and King of kings ; all lords have their authority 
 from him ; and no king can rule without him ; there- 
 fore the ten Latin kings are God's ministers to ex- 
 ecute his vengeance upon the idolatrous nations. 
 But when these Antichristian monarchies have ex- 
 ecuted the Divine purpose, those that are with the 
 Lamb, the called, the chosen, and the faithful, those 
 who have kept the truth in the love of it, shall, 
 must, prevail against all their adversaries, because 
 their battles are fought by the Lamb, who is their 
 God and deliverer. 
 
 '' And he saith unto me. The waters which thou 
 sawest, where the whore sitteth, are peoples, and 
 multitude^, and nations, and tongues.'' " So many 
 words," Bishop Newton observes, '' in the plural 
 number fitly denote the great extensiveness of her 
 power and jurisdiction :— -She herself glories in the 
 title of the Catholic church, and exults in the number 
 of her votaries as a certain proof of the true religion. 
 Cardinal Bellarmin's first note of the true church 
 is the very name of the Catholic church : and his 
 fourth note is amplitude, or multitude and variety 
 of believers ; for the trul}' cathohc church, says 
 
23% 
 
 he, ought not only to comprehend all aj^e?, but 
 likewise all places^ all nations^ all kinds of men." * 
 " And the ten horns which thou sawest upon the 
 beast, tl'.cse shall hate the w hore, and shall make 
 her desolate and naked, and shall eat her flesh, and 
 burn her with fire." Here is a clue to lead us to 
 the right interpretation of the horns of the Beast ; 
 and I totally dissent from Bishop Newton, who. 
 thinks that the ten horns are here put by a common 
 figure, of the whole, for a part. It is said the ten 
 horns shall hate the whore, by which is evidently 
 meant, when connected with what follows, that the 
 whole of the ten kino-doms in the interest of the 
 Latin church, shall finally despise her doctrines, be 
 reformed from Popery, assist in depriving her of 
 all influence, and in exposing her follies ; and in the 
 end consign her to utter destruction. From this it 
 follows that no Roman Catholic power which did 
 not exist as late as the Reformation can be number^ 
 cd among" the horns of the Beast ; the ten horns 
 must, therefore, be found among the great states of 
 Europe at the commencement of the Reformation. 
 These were exactly ten, viz. France, Spain, 
 England, Scotland, The Empire, Sweden, Den- 
 mark, Poland, Hungary, and Portugal. In these 
 were comprehended most of the minor states, not 
 styled monarchies ; and which, from their first rise 
 to the period of the Reformation, had been subdued 
 by one or more of thp ten grand Roman Catholic; 
 
 * See his Dissertat, on the Propheciesj in loc, 
 
2S3 
 
 powers already named. Consequently these ten 
 eonstitiitcd tlie power and strengih of the Beast ; 
 and each minor state is considered a part of that 
 monarchy under the authority of which it was finally 
 reduced previously to the Reformation. 
 
 The Kingdom of France, the first monarchy in 
 the interest of the Latin church, had the powerful 
 duchy of Normandy annexed to it in 1204, and the 
 king-dom of Navarre in 1512. The first Roman 
 Catholic monarch of the Franks was Clovis, who 
 was baptized, in 496. 
 
 The Kingdom of Spain was orig'inally divided 
 into a great number of states. The principal na- 
 tion in this peninsula was that of the \ isig'oths who 
 embraced Arianism at the time of the dismember- 
 ment of the Western Roman Empire. In this creed 
 they continued above 123 years till the reig^n of 
 their king- Reccared or Recared I. surnamed The 
 Catholic. The conversion of this monarch to the 
 Romish relig-ion had been early brought about by 
 Leander, metropolitan of Seville ; but the declaring 
 himself a Catholic publicly, was considered a very 
 delicate point. At length, after a great victory 
 which he obtained over the Franks, it was resolved 
 that the king should propose, to the grandees and 
 prelates about his person, introducing the Catholic 
 religion throughout his dominions, which he accord- 
 ingly did, in October, A. D. 586 ; and in 589 King 
 Ileccared, being very desirous to settle the affairs 
 of the church on so firm a basis that it should never 
 be shaken, summoned for that purpose a council 
 
234 
 
 at Toledo Avliere five metropolitans and sixty-two 
 bit^hops assembled, and made several canons, which 
 w ere signed by the king', the metropolitans, and the 
 prelates ; and thus the conversion of the Goths be- 
 came a national act. * The Gothic monarchy in 
 Spain was completely subverted by the Moors on 
 Kov. 11, 711 or 712, after it had subsisted nearly 
 S50 years. Don Pelayo restored the Spanish mo- 
 narchy in the Asturias, Sept. A. D. 718, whose de- 
 scendants governed it under the name of the king- 
 dom of Oviedo and Leon for almost 320 years, when 
 it was united by marriage to the kingdom of Castile 
 on July 22, 1037. A considerable part of Spain 
 >vas subdued by Sancho III. called The Great. He 
 divided his dominions among his children ; in con- 
 sequence of which three principal Spanish mo- 
 narchies in the interest of the Latin church were 
 founded in 1035, viz. the kingdoms of Navarre, 
 Castile, and Arragon. The Moors had also estab- 
 lished a powerful monarchy in Spain called thq 
 kingdom of Granada ; but the Moors received re- 
 peated OAcrthrows till about the year 1492, whert 
 all the kingdoms in Spain were united by the mar- 
 iiiage of Ferdinand, king of Arragon, and Isabella 
 the heiress, and afterwards queen, of Castile, who 
 took Granada, and expelled out of Spain the Moors 
 and Jews, who would not be converts to the Ro- 
 man Catholic faith, to the number of 170,000 fa- 
 
 * See Modern Universal History, Vol. XIX. pp. 301, 395.. 
 Edit. 8vo. 
 
235 
 
 ^milies. * The kingdom of Naples and Sicily passed 
 glider different masters. The Normans conquered 
 it, and Roger wa^ named king qf Sicily by the Pope_, 
 in 1130. The Norman line continued till their 
 kingdom was subdued by Henry VI. emperor of 
 Germany. After internal contests Charles of An- 
 jpu became king of Sicily 1266 : after the Sicilian 
 vespers^ 1282, Sicily was seized by a fleet sent by 
 the kings of Arragon ; but Naples continued to 
 acknowledge the line of Anjou, which expired in the 
 year 1382. Rene of Anjou, king of Naples 1435, 
 was the father of Margaret, wife of Henry VI. of 
 England: but the French line failed in 1481, in 
 Charles count de Maine, who named Louis XI. 
 king of France his heir, whence the pretension of 
 France to the kingdom of Naples. The last revo- 
 lution it underwent, before the period of the Refor- 
 mation, was its annexation to the crown of Spain in 
 1'504. f From this it appears that the kingdom of 
 Naples and Sicily cannot be considered one of the 
 ten horns of the Beast, as its independent power 
 was totally extinguished many years previously to 
 the Reformation. 
 
 The Kingdom of England was increased by the 
 addition of the Irish heptarchy in 1 172, and of the 
 Welsh dominions in 1285. The Roman Catholic 
 
 * See Guthrie's Geographical Grammar ; from which the his- 
 tory of some of the other kingdoms in the interest of the Latin 
 church, has been partly collected. 
 
 t See Piukertoo's Geography, in loc. 
 
25G 
 
 doctrines Avcrc preached amongst the English by 
 Austin, (commonly called The Apostle of the 
 English^ who arrived in 597, and died in 605. 
 The conversion of the Saxon nations from Pagan- 
 ism was completed in the course of the seventh and 
 cia:hth centuries. 
 
 The Kingdom of Scotland was principally con- 
 fined within the limits of the country so called ; 
 and the annexation of this kingdom to that of Eng- 
 land was not till 88 years after the commencement 
 of the Reformation in Germany, and about for- 
 ty years subsecjuent to its establishment in Scot- 
 land. 
 
 The German Empire at first comprehended the 
 kingdom of France ; but these two very powerful 
 monarchies were finally separated as far back as 
 888, when Eudes was the first monarch of France 
 after its separation from Germany. The kingdom 
 of Italy which formed a part of the empire under 
 Charlemagne, but was afterwards separated and 
 g'overned by tyrants, was finally j'eunited by Otho 
 I. in 962. Batavia and Holland became indepen- 
 dent of Germany, to which it had been united un- 
 der one of the grandsons of Charlemagne, in the 
 beginning of the tenth century, when the supreme 
 authority was lodged in the three united powers of 
 a count, the nobles, and the towns. At last they 
 were swallowed up by the house of Burgundy, 
 anno 1433. The emperor Charles V. the heir of 
 that family, transferred them, in the year 1477> to 
 the house of Austria^ and ranked them as part of 
 
S37 
 
 the empire^ under the title of tlie Circle of Burr- 
 gundy. The kingdom of Bohemia has been con- 
 sidered a fief of the empire from its first erection 
 into a kingdom ; and the emperor Charles IV. who 
 was also king of Bohemia^ acknowledged it one of 
 the electorates by his Golden Bull published in 
 1356. 
 
 The Kingdom of Sweden was first converted 
 from Paganism some time in the ninth century ; the 
 introduction of the Roman Catholic doctrines was 
 about 853, by Ansgarius, bishop of Bremen. This 
 monarchy was united to that of Denmark in 1387, 
 by Margaret daugliter of Valdemar ; and in 1394 
 this princess became queen of Denmark, fSorway, 
 and Sweden, Sweden, after many tragical revo- 
 lutions, was liberated from the Danish yoke by the 
 celebrated Gustavus Vasa in 1523, five years be- 
 fore the establishment of the Reformed religion in 
 this country. Sweden was the first Roman Catho- 
 lic country in which the Reformation was estab- 
 lished by law. 
 
 The Kingdom of Denma.rs. had Norway an- 
 -nexed to it in the fourteenth century, an union 
 which subsists to the present day. The Roman 
 Catholic doctrines were introduced into this king- 
 (lom about A. D. 858. 
 
 The Kingdom of Poland is the next in order of 
 the ten Latin monarchies. It was originally go- 
 verned by dukes ; and Eoleslaus was the first who 
 assumed the title of king, in 999. He conquered 
 IVIpravia, Prussia, and Bohemia^ making them tri- 
 
238 
 
 butaryto Poland. Boleslaus II. added lied Russia 
 fo Poland, by marrying' the heiress of that duchy, 
 anno 1059. But this prince, who is surnamed The 
 Cruel, son of Casimir I. having put to death St, 
 Stanislaii?, bishop of Cracow, Poland, by Avay of 
 punishment for his crime, forfeited the title of a 
 kingdom, and was reduced to a principality, whiclt 
 was given to Uladislaus in 1082. It did not reco- 
 ver the name of a kingdom, until Primislaus IT. 
 who Avas chosen by the nobility, and was anointed 
 and crowned in the church of Giiezna, towards the 
 year 1295. He was succeeded by Ladislaus 11, 
 called The Small ; who, to maintain this dignity of 
 a king*, sent ambassadors to the Pope, who or- 
 dained, that he should be solemnly anointed in 
 the church of Cracow, in 1320. Jagello, who in 
 ISS4 mounted the throne, was grand duke of Li- 
 thuania, and a Pagan ; but on his being elected 
 king of Poland, he not only became a professor of 
 Christianity, but was at pains to bring over his sub- 
 jects to that religion. He united his hereditary do- 
 minions to those of Poland ; and the crown conti- 
 nued in his family till 1572. The Roman Catholic 
 doctrines were first introduced into Poland by 
 duke Mieczlaus (surnamed the Eye of Christianity) 
 about A. D. 964. This prince appointed Adelbert, 
 sent by the Pope to propagate Popery in Poland, 
 primate of the whole republic. 
 
 The Kingdom of Hungary commenced about 
 the year 1000. Geysa was the first Roman Ca- 
 tholic monarch in Hungary. He was cOilvciicd by 
 
 4 
 
239 
 
 Adelbert, bishop of Prague, in 989. In the yeai* 
 997 Geysa died, and was succeeded by his son Ste- 
 phen, then very young-, but who liad been declared' 
 king by the states the year before his father died * 
 which title, with the addition of that of apostolic, 
 four years after, (IQGO,) was confirmed to him by 
 Pope Sylvester II. Stephen, at that time surrender- 
 ing his kingdom to the church. This Stephen i* 
 reckoned the first of the- kings of Hungary ; tor his- 
 predecessors were kings more by authority and 
 power than by ordinary title. * This monarchy re- 
 ceived considerable additions in the fourteentli cen- 
 tury ; for about the year 1310 king Charles Robert 
 ascended the throne, and subdued Bulgaria, Servia, 
 Croatia, Dalmatia, Sclavonia, and many other pro- 
 vinces ; but many of these conquests were after- 
 wards reduced by the Venetians, Turks, and other 
 powers. In the fifteenth century Huniades, who 
 was guardian to the infant king Ladislaus, bravely 
 repulsed the Turks, when they invaded Hungary ; 
 and, upon the death of Ladislaus, the Hungarians, 
 in 1438, raised Matthias Corvinus, sonof Huniades^ 
 to their throne. Lewis, king of Hungary, in 1526, 
 was killed in a battle, fighting against Solyman, 
 emperor of the Turks. This battle had almost 
 proved fatal to Hungary ; but tlie archduke Ferdi- 
 nand, brother to the emperor Charles V. having mar- 
 ried the sister of Lewis, he claimed the title of kin<r 
 of Hungary, to which he succeeded with some diffi- 
 
 * Modern Universal Hist. Vol. XLII. p. d. 
 
240 
 
 eulty. On lus being chosen emperor of Germanyy 
 in 1558^ Ferdinand retained the crown of Hun- 
 gary till 1562^ when he resigned it to his son 
 Maximihan ; and it has since continued a constant 
 appendage of the house of Austria. By this short 
 history it is evident that the kingdom of Hungary 
 is to be considered one of the horns of the Beast, 
 because its final subduction by the house of Aus- 
 tria did not take place till after the Reformation. 
 
 The Kingdom of Portugal was the last of the 
 ten Latin monarchies. The history of its rise is 
 briefly as follows : In the tenth century Aiphonsus 
 VI. king of Castile and Leon^ rewTiided Henry, 
 grandson of Robert king of France, for his bravery 
 and assistance against the Moors, with his daugh- 
 ter, and that part of Portugal then in the hands of 
 the Roman Catholics, Henry was succeeded by 
 his son Aiphonsus Henry, in 1095, who gained a 
 decisive victory over five Moorish kings in July 
 1139, This victory proved the origin of the mo- 
 narchy of Portugal ; for Aiphonsus was then pro- 
 claimed king by his soldiers. This kingdom con- 
 tinued from this time an independent monarchy till 
 a considerable time after the Reformation ; for ie 
 was not united to Spain before the 12th of Septem- 
 ber, 1580, and it was again separated by John, 
 duke of Braganza, on tlie 1st of December 1640. 
 
 From this very slight sketch of history it is evi- 
 dent thai the ten horns of the Beast must be the 
 Roman Catholic monarchies of France, Spain, 
 England, Scotland, The Empire, Sweden, Dca- 
 
241 
 
 mark, Poland, Hungary, and Portugal, * as these 
 were the ten grand divisions of the Latin world, 
 which included in them every monarchy, and al- 
 most all the other minor states of the Romish com- 
 munion, and were consequently those which gave 
 their power and strength to the Beast. 
 
 * Tiapp, in his Commentary ad loc. enumerates the following 
 as the ten kingdoms of the Beast; Naples, Spain, Portugal, 
 France, Poland, Bohemia, Hungary, Denmark, Sweden, and 
 England. But Vitringa, in his Apocalypsis Joannis Exposita et 
 Illustrata, pp. 1044, 1045, has given the following list, which 
 is very near the truth : " Rcgna Galliarum sive Franciae, 
 Ilispaiiiarum, Germaniae, Anglias, Scotiae, Daniae, Sueciae, Hun- 
 gariae, Bohemiie, et Poloniae." The kingdoms of Gaul or 
 France, Spain, Germany, England, Scotland, Denmark, Sweden, 
 Hungary, Bohemia, and Poland. The error in this scheme con- 
 sists in enumerating the monarchies in the interest of the Latia 
 church as they stood in the eleventh century, before the rise of 
 the kingdom of Portugal ; and in denominating Bohemia a horn, 
 which Avas only a fief of The i*lmpire,— ^It is remarkable that the 
 kingdoms of the Latin world have been precisely ten at particu- 
 lar times before the complete formation of the ten grand mo- 
 narchies. Gibbon has taken notice of one instance, when 
 speaking of Roger, the first king of Sicily, who ascended the 
 throne A. D. 1130. He says, " the chiefs of the nations, who 
 attended his coronation at Palermo, might doubtless pronounce 
 under what name he should reign over them ; but the example of 
 a Greek tyrant or a Saracen emir were insufficient to justify his 
 regal character ; and the nine kings of the Latin world * might 
 justly disclaim their new associate, unless he were consecrated 
 by the authority of the supreme pontiff." See his Decline and 
 Fall, chap. 56. 
 
 * These were the kings of France, England, Scotland, Castile, Arragon, 
 Navarre, Sweden, Denmark, and Hungary, 
 
 R 
 
S42 
 
 *' For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his 
 will, and to ag'ree, and give their kingdom unto the 
 beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled." 
 Let no one imagine that these ten Latin kingdoms, 
 because they support an idolatrous worship, have 
 been raised up by the power of man, or the chances 
 of war. No kingdom or state can exist without 
 the will of God ; therefore let the inhabitants of the 
 earth tremble, when they see a wicked monarchy 
 rise to power ; and let them consider that it is raised 
 up by the Lord in order to execute his vengeance 
 upon the idolatries and profligacies of the times. It 
 is said of the kings in communion with the church 
 of Rome, that *' God hath put in their hearts to 
 fulfil his will." How is this Divine will accom- 
 plished ? In the most awful and afflictive manner ! 
 In causing ten Latin kings to unite their dominions 
 into one mighty empire for the defence of the La- 
 tin church. Here is a dreadful dispensation of Je- 
 hovah ; but it is such as the nations have most 
 righteously deserved, because when they had the 
 truth they lived not according to its most holy re- 
 quisitions, but loved darkness rather than light be- 
 cause their deeds were evil. Therefore hath " the 
 Lord sent them strong delusion that they should 
 believe a lie, that they might all be damned who be- 
 lieve not the truth, but have pleasure in unrigh- 
 teousness." But this deplorable state of the world 
 is not perpetual; it can only continue till every 
 word of God is fulfilled upon his enemies; and 
 when this time arrives, (which will be that of 
 
243 
 
 Christ's second advent,) then shall the Son of God 
 slay that Wicked " with the spirit of his mouth, 
 and shall consume him with the brightness of his 
 coming." 
 
 '' And the woman which thou sawest is that great 
 city, which reigneth over the kings of the earth." 
 It has already been shewn that the Woman sitting 
 upon the seven-headed Beast is the representation 
 of the Latin church ; here we have the greatest as- 
 surance that it is so ; because the Woman is called 
 a city, which is a much plainer emblem of a 
 church, as this word is used unequivocally in this 
 sense in so many parts of Scripture that we cannot 
 mistake its meaning. In Rev. iii. 12. we read '' of 
 the city of God, the New Jerusalem, which coraeth 
 down out of heaven from God." This no person 
 can think literally means a city; but must allow 
 that the whole church of God on earth is intended. 
 In Rev. xxi. 10. we read of " that great city, the 
 holy Jerusalem, descending out of heaven from 
 God." In Rev. xi. 2. we read that " the holy city 
 shall be trodden under foot by the Gentiles." In 
 Rev. xxii. 19. it is written, that '' if any man shall 
 take away from the words of the book of this pro- 
 phecy, God shall take away his part out of the book 
 of life, and out of the holy city." Psal. xlvi. 4. 
 " There is a river, the streams whereof shall make 
 glad the city of God." Psal. Ixxxvii. S. '' Glo- 
 rious things are spoken of thee, O city of God." 
 Heb. xii. 22. '' But ye are come unto mount Sion, 
 and unto the city of the living God, the heavenly 
 
 R2 
 
244 
 
 Jerusalem." In the above quotations from the 
 Sacred Oracles, city of Jerusalem, holy city, &c. 
 evidently mean the church of God ; for in no other 
 sense can these symbols be properly understood. 
 The Woman, therefore, must be the Latin church; 
 and as St. John saw her sitting' upon the Beast ; 
 this must signify that she " reignieth over the kings 
 of the earth/' that is, over the kings of the Latin 
 world, for that this is the meaning of earth has 
 been already shewn in a preceding part of this 
 work. She is also called a great city, to denote the 
 very great extent of her jurisdiction; for she has 
 comprehended within her walls the subjects of the 
 mighty dominations of Prance, Spain, England, 
 Scotland, The Empire, Sweden, Denmark, Poland, 
 Hungary, and Portugal. What an extensive city 
 was this ! Surely such as to justify the prophetic 
 denomination '' that great city." 
 
 Having now gone through the whole of the an- 
 gel's interpretation of St. John's vision of a Wo- 
 man sitting upon the seven-headed and ten-horned 
 Beast ; it will be essentially necessary, for reasons 
 already given, to examine a little more attentively 
 the following words of the angel : '' The beast that 
 thou sawest was, and is not ; and shall ascend out 
 of the bottomless pit^ and go into perdition : and 
 they that dwell upon the earth shall wonder (whose 
 names were not written in the book of life from the 
 foundation of the world,) when they behold the 
 beast that was, and is not, and yet is." It has al- 
 ready been shewn that the phrases icas, is not, shall 
 
245 
 
 ascend out of the bottomless pit, and yet is, refer to 
 the Latin kingdom which existed before the build- 
 ing of Rome ; to the Roman empire in the time of 
 St. John; and to the Latin empire which A^as in 
 futurity in the apostohc age. But as the words 
 was, is not, &c. are spoken of the Beast upon 
 which St. John saw the Woman or Latin church 
 sit ; how can it be said that this Beast had an exist- 
 ence before the date of the Apocalypse, when the 
 Woman, whom it carried, was not in being till long 
 after this period ? And what connection has the 
 Latin empire of the middle ages with that which 
 derived its name from Latinus, king of the Abori- 
 gines, and was subjugated by the ancient Romans ; 
 or even with that which existed in the time of the 
 apostle ? The answer is as follows : St. John saw 
 the Beast upon which the Woman sat with all his 
 seven heads and ten horns. Consequently, as the 
 angel expressly says, ihsXjive of these seven heads 
 had already fallen in the time of the vision, it there- 
 fore necessarily follows, that the apostle must have 
 seen that part of the Latin empire represented by 
 the seven -headed Beast, Avhich had already been 
 under the emblem of Jive heads. Therefore, the 
 Woman sat upon the Beast that was. But' it is 
 plain from the angel's interpretation that the whole 
 of the seven heads fell before the Beast, upon which 
 the Woman sat^ arose ; and yet the Woman is re- 
 presented as sitting upon the seven-headed Beast, 
 to denote, as has already been shewn, that it is the 
 Latin kingdom in its last estate^ or under one of 
 
246 
 
 its heads restored, which is the kingdom of Anti- 
 christ. The Beast is also said not to have any ex- 
 istence in the time of the vision ; from which it is 
 evident tlrat tlie monarchy of the Latins, and not 
 that of the Romans, is here intended ; because the 
 latter was in the time of the vision. Again, the 
 Beast which St. John saw had not yet ascended out 
 of the bottomless pit in his time ; consequently, the 
 whole seven heads and ten horns were in futurity ; 
 for all these heads and horns rose up out of the 
 abyss at the same time with the Beast. How is this 
 apparent contradiction reconciled? I answer. In 
 the most plain and satisfactory manner by means of 
 the angel's double interpretation of the heads : for, 
 if the seven heads be taken in the sense of seven 
 mountains, then the Beast with all his heads and 
 horns was altogether in futurity in the apostle's 
 time ; for the seven heads are the seven electorates 
 of the German empire, and the ten horns the ten 
 monarchies in the interest of the Latin church. 
 Finally, the Beast is said to exist in the time of the 
 vision; therefore, the Roman empire, which go- 
 verned the world, must be here alluded to ; and, 
 consequently, the phrase and yet is, is a proof that, 
 as the Beast is the Latin kingdom, and this Beast 
 is said to have an existence in the time of the apos- 
 tle, that the empire of the Caesars, though gene- 
 rally known by the name of the Roman, is in a 
 very proper sense the Latin kingdom, as the Latin 
 was the language which prevailed in it. Hence 
 tlie seveu-headed and ten-horned Beast is at once 
 
247 
 
 the representation of the ancient Latin power ; of 
 the Roman empire whicli succeeded it ; and of the 
 Latin empire which supported the Latin church. 
 Here is then the connection of the ancient Latin 
 and Roman powers with that upon which the Wo- 
 man sat. She sits upon the Beast that was and 
 is not, because three of his heads represent the 
 three forms of government of the ancient Latins 
 who no longer exist as an independent nation, viz. 
 The Regal Power, The Dictatorship, and The 
 Power of the Praetors. She sits upon the Beast 
 which shall ascend out of the bottomless pit, because 
 all his seven heads, taken in the sense of mountains, 
 are yet to come. She sits upon the Beast ihaii/et 
 is, because four of his heads represent four forms 
 of government of the Roman or Latin empire now 
 in existence, viz. The Consulate, The Triumvii'ate, 
 The Imperial Power, and The Patriciate. It is 
 hence evident, that the seven-headed Beast is the 
 Latin power in general from its first rise ; and, 
 consequently, the Beast which carried the Woman 
 can be no other than the Latin empire which has 
 now, in this its last estate, supported the Latin 
 church for more than a thousand years. 
 
248 
 
 CHAP. vn. 
 
 Exposition of the thirteenth Chapter of the Reve- 
 lation, respecting the seven-headed and ten- 
 horned Beast which 7'ises out of the sea ; and of 
 the two-horned Beast which lises out of the 
 earth. 
 
 The angel's explanation contained in the seven- 
 teenth chapter of the Apocalypse may be considered 
 an interpretation of the one now under considera- 
 tion^ as well as of the vision of the Woman sitting 
 upon the seven -headed and ten-horned Beast. In 
 factj without the assistance of the angel's interpre- 
 tation^ it is impossible to understand arig-ht the 
 mysteries of the Beasts spoken of in the thirteenth 
 chapter^ as we shall presently discover ; and this 
 is the chief reason why the consideration of the 
 thirteenth chapter of the Apocalypse has been re- 
 served to this place. 
 
 " And I stood upon the sand of the sea^ and saw 
 a beast rise up out of the sea^ having- seven heads 
 and ten horns^ and upon his horns ten crowns^ and 
 upon his heads the name of blasphemy." This is 
 evidently the same Beast upon which St. John saw 
 the Woman sit^ because it has got seven heads^ and 
 ten horns;, and^ consequently^ must be the Latin 
 1 
 
249 
 
 empire. It was seen rising' up out of the sea, 
 which is the same that is said of the four beasts of 
 Daniel; the sea must, therefore, be the symbol of 
 a g-reat multitude of nations, as has already been 
 proved. And as a beast is the symbol of an etn- 
 pire, the meaning is, that every mighty empire is 
 raised upon the ruins of a great number of nations, 
 against which it has successfully contended, and in- 
 corporated with its dominions. And, in like man- 
 ner, the Latin empire rises up out of the sea, in 
 eradicating all the hostile nations in its way, and 
 establishing its mighty sway over the many subju- 
 gated countries. But this Latin empire which St. 
 John saw rising up out of the sea had ten crowns 
 upon its ten horns ; which is a demonstration that 
 the empire here intended is that which was com- 
 posed of ten distinct monarchies in the interest of 
 the Latin church. But this was not the case with 
 the ancient Latin monarchy, nor with the Roman 
 empire which might be so called ; consequently, 
 neither of these is the empire here represented. 
 There only remains, therefore, the Latin empire 
 which supported the Latin church ; and with this 
 it cjuadrates exactly, as it was composed of the ten 
 grand independent monarchies of France, Spain, 
 England, Scotland, The Empire, Sweden, Den- 
 mark, Poland, Hungary, and Portugal. Upon the 
 seven heads of the Beast was also a name * of blas- 
 
 * Our translation has it " the name of blasphemy," which is 
 too definitely expressed, for the original words are oVsaa SXxiT' 
 
250 
 
 pliemy. This has been variously understood, Je- 
 rome and Prosper give it as their opinion, that the 
 name of blasphemy consists in the appellation urbs 
 sterna, " eternal city," applied to Rome.* Lord Na- 
 peir understands it not of one particular name but 
 of the whole which have been applied to Rome, 
 heathen or Papal ; as also of every other blasphem- 
 ous superscription and title, adopted by the ancient 
 Romans or modern Papists, f Dr. Johnston thinks 
 that the name of blasphemy consists in the title of 
 '' His Holiness" applied to the Pope, j; Dr. Henry 
 More thinks, that by the name of blasphemy is 
 meant the system of idolatrous worship of the Ro- 
 mans and Papists. § This sentiment has been 
 adopted by Dr. Mitchell ; and of this opinion is 
 also Bishop Newton, and with him a great host of 
 commentators. The names produced by these 
 commentators are ougavoTroXsT 'Pco^^, (The heavenly 
 city Rome ;) Terrarum dea, gentiumque Roma, 
 (Rome, Goddess of the earth and nations;) 0eaj 
 'Pa>/Jt%, (Rome the goddess, &c. &c.) || But some 
 particular name must be alluded to, because the 
 
 ^Tjjxi'a;, literally, " a name of blasphemy." The French translate 
 it *' un nom de blaspheme," which is exactly in unison with the 
 generally received Greek text, 
 
 * See Bishop Newton's Dissertat. on the prophecies, in loc. 
 
 + See Napeir on the Revelation, pp. 106, 107. 
 
 ;|: See his Commentary on the Revelation, in loc. 
 
 § See his Apocalypsis Apocalypsecys, in loc. 
 
 j] See Bishop Newton, in Apoc. xiii. 1. 
 
251 
 
 Greek word ouoft.a is singular ; * and this blasphem- 
 ous appellation is said to be upon all the seven 
 
 * There is a various reading of ovoaara, names, m hich is sup- 
 ported by many great authorities, among which is the Codex 
 Alexandrinus ; but I believe the singular word ovo/>ca to be the 
 proper reading, as it is the generally received one, is supported 
 by the ancient Coptic and ^thiopic versions, and is the one 
 adopted in the English and French translations. Erasmus, in his 
 elaborate edition of the New Testament, has ovojxa. Bengel, in 
 his very accurate edition, considers oyoy^aTO, an inferior reading; 
 while, on the other hand, Harwood, Wetstein, and Griesbach, 
 maintain that 6vo[j,a,TC(. is best supported by manuscripts. But 
 what may be considered a very powerful evidence in favour of 
 the common reading is the early comments upon it by Jerome 
 and Prosper. Jerome, commenting upon St. Paul's words, " Et 
 nunc quid detiueat, scitis ; ut reveletur in suo tempore," And 
 now ye know what withholdeth, that he might be revealed in his 
 own time, observes, " Nee vult aperte dicere Romanum impe- 
 rium destruendum, quod ipsi qui imperant, aeternum putant. 
 Unde secundum Apocalypsim Johannis, in fronte purpuiatse me- 
 retricis, scriptum est nomen blasphetniee, id est, Romai a^ternas. 
 Si enim aperte audacterque dixisset, non veniet Antichristus, 
 nisi prius Romanum deleatur imperium, justa caussa persecutio- 
 nis in orientem tunc Ecclesiam consurgere videbatur." Neither 
 will he openly affirm that the Roman empire will be destroyed, 
 because they who rule, consider it eternal. Whence, ac- 
 cording to the Apocalypse of John, a name of blasphemy was 
 written on the forehead of the scarlet whore, that is, the name 
 of Roma aeterna. For if he had openly and boldly said, that An- 
 tichrist will not come till the Roman empire was destroyed, a 
 just cause of a persecution against the eastern church would at 
 that time appear to be afforded. See his Works printed at Paris 
 in 1706, Tom. IV. col. 209. I have not seen the work of 
 Prosper ; but Spanheim, speaking of the inscription of 0EA2 
 'PflMHS, which he so frequently met with on the ancient Greek 
 
252 
 
 heads. In order^ therefore, to determine what this 
 name is, the meaning of the seven heads in this 
 place must be ascertained. It has ah'eady been 
 shewn that the heads of the Beast have a double 
 sig'nification ; and as this is the first place where 
 the heads have been mentioned with any descrip- 
 tion, it may be taken for granted that, that meaning 
 which is the first mentioned in the angel's interpre- 
 tation must be the one in this place. This is, 
 '' the seven heads are seven mountains on which 
 the woman sitteth ;" the name of blasphemy will, 
 consequently, be found upon the seven electo- 
 rates of Germany. That the order in which the 
 angel explained the double meaning of the heads 
 must be designed to illustrate the thirteenth chap- 
 ter in the manner already asserted, appears evident 
 from the want of chronological arrangement in the 
 two expositions ; for the forms of government were 
 previous to the electorates of Germany, and would 
 have doubtless been explained first, had not the 
 
 coins, and considers as the name of blasphemy mentioned in the 
 Apocalypse, observes, " Quo autem referendum mihi videtur 
 illud nomen blasphemise, quod septem capitibus inscriptum ges- 
 tasse iegitur bestia in sacro Revelationum libro, et quod Hiero- 
 nymus ac Prosper ad urbis oeternce appellationem retulerunt." 
 To which inscription that name of blasphemy appears to me to 
 refer, which we read in the sacred book of the Revelations, that 
 the beast had inscribed upon his seven heads, and which Jerome 
 and Prosper have applied to the appellation of urbs ceterna 
 (eternal city). See Spanhemii Dissert. Tertia de Pra;stant. et 
 Usu Numm. Ant. Sect. 3, p. 138, Vol. I. — Bishop Newton 
 «n the Prophecies, in loc. and Dr. Hammond, in Apoc. xiii. 1. 
 
253 
 
 perfect understanding- of every thing- spoken rela- 
 tive to the headsj rendered a different arrangement 
 necessary. As the name of blasphemy must be. 
 therefore, upon the seven electorates of Germany 
 it will not be difficult to determine what this name 
 is. And this will soon be resolved by considering' 
 that the seven electorates comprise the seven prin- 
 cipal powers of the German empire. Consequently, 
 as the name of blasphemy is common to these seven, 
 it cin, therefore, be no other than that which 
 was also common to the whole empire, or that 
 well-known one of. Sacrum Imperium Romanum, 
 "^ The Sacred (or Holy) Roman empire." Here 
 is a sacred appellation blasphemed by its ap- 
 plication to the head-power of the Beast. No 
 kingdom can be properly called holy but that of 
 Jesus ; therefore it would be blasphemy to unite 
 this epithet with any other power ; but it must be 
 horridly blasphemous to apply it to the German 
 empire, the grand supporter of Antichrist from his 
 very rise to temporal authority. Can that empire 
 be sacred which has killed the saints, which has 
 professed and supported with all its might an ido- 
 latrous system of worship ? It is impossible. There- 
 fore its assumption of sacred, or holy, is, in the 
 highest sense the words can be taken, '' a name of 
 blasphemy." But it is not the imperial family 
 alone which has so denominated their empire; the 
 whole of Europe have agreed in the appellation. 
 The word sacrum has been understood in the same 
 sense with sanctum; and Sacrum Imperium Roma- 
 
254 
 
 num luis been translated into the various languages 
 of Europe in the same manner as if it were Sanc- 
 tum Imperium Romanum. In the public state in- 
 struments of the Dutch, the Roman empire of Ger- 
 many is called holy, as is evident in the treaty and 
 ag-reement between Wenceslaus and Joan, duke 
 and duchess of Brabant, and Louis count of Flan- 
 ders, concerning Antwerp and its dependencies, 
 drawn up on the 20th of March, 1357. The 
 words are the following : " Wencelaus van Behem 
 by der gratien Gods Hortoghe, ende Johanne by 
 der selver gratien Hertoginne van Lucembourg, 
 van Lotrijke, van Brabant, van Lymborch, Marck- 
 greve des Heylichs Rijcks;" that is, " Wenceslaus 
 of Bohemia, by the grace of God Duke, and Joan 
 by the same grace Duchess of Luxembourg, Lor- 
 raine, Brabant, and Limbourg, marcgrave of the 
 Holy empire.'' * The French have called it, Le 
 Saint Empire Romain, (The Holy Roman em- 
 pire ; f ) and the English translation of Sacrum 
 Imperium Romanum, in the Golden Bull of Charles 
 IV. of 1356, is The Holy Roman empire ; % and 
 Chambers tells us that " the empire of Germany is 
 called in juridical acts and laws, the Holy Roman 
 empire, S. R. I. q. d. Sacrum Imperium Roma- 
 
 * See M. J. Dumont's Corps Umversel Diplomatique, Tom. L 
 p. 328, Amsterdam, and Hague, 1726. 
 
 + See Dumont's Corps Diplomatique. 
 
 X See Modern Universal History, Vol. XXX. pp. 481—518; 
 Edit. 8vo, London, 1761. 
 
 a 
 
255 
 
 num." * Even the Germans themselves have so 
 called it, as is evident in the following sentences: 
 " Die vier graven desz heillgen Romischen reichs/' 
 that is, the four graves of the Holy Roman em- 
 pire ; f " Des heiligen Romischen reichs hqffe- 
 graven," counts of the house of the Holy Roman 
 empire. J The name of blasphemy is very pro- 
 perly said to be upon the seven heads of the Beast, 
 or seven electorates of the German empire, be- 
 cause the electors are styled Sacri Imperii Prin- 
 cipes Electores, § (Princes, Electors of the Holy 
 empire,) Sacri Romani Imperii Electores, jj (Elec- 
 tors of the Sacred or Holy Roman empire,). The 
 propriety is still further evident, because each elec- 
 tor held some office named after the empire. Thus 
 the archbishop of Mentz was, Sacri Imperii per 
 Germaniam Archicancellarius, 1[ (archchancellor of 
 the Holy empire in Germany ;) the archbishop of 
 Triers was, Sacri Imperii per Galliam et regnum 
 Arelatense archicancellarius, ** (archchancellor of 
 the Holy empire among the Gauls, and in the king- 
 dom of Aries;) the archbishop of Cologne was, 
 Sacri Imperii per Italiam archicancellarius, ff 
 (archchancellor of the Holy empire in Italy ;) the 
 
 * See his Dictionary on the word Empire, and also Rees' Cj^' 
 clopsedia. 
 
 + See Selden's Works, Vol. III. Tom. I. Col. 434. 
 
 X Ibid. Col. 449. 
 
 § See Dumont's Corps Diplomatique. Tom. I. p. 308. 
 
 II Ibid. p. 312. t lb. p. 307. ** lb. p. .306. 
 
 Hlbid. 
 
256 
 
 king of Bohemia was, Sacri Imperii arcliipin- 
 cerna, * (arch-cupbearer of the Holy empire ;) the 
 Count Palatine of tlie Rhine was, Sacri Imperii 
 arcliidaphiferus, f (grand-steward of the Holy 
 empire ;) the duke of Saxony was, archimares- 
 callus Sacri Imperii, | (g-rand- marshal of the Holy 
 empire ;) and the marcgrave of Brandenburg" was, 
 Sacri Imperii archicamerarius, § (archchamberlain 
 of the Holy empire.) The mouth of blasphemy 
 cannot be more evident than in the following im- 
 pious words which form a part of the Golden Bull 
 published by Charles IV. in Jan. 1356: " But 
 thou. Envy ! how often hast thou attempted to ruin 
 by division the Christian empire, which God hath 
 founded upon the three cardinal virtues, faith, hope, 
 and charity, as upon a holy and indivisible Tri- 
 nity ; vomiting the old venom of discord among 
 the seven electors, which are the pillars and seven 
 principal members of the Holy empire, by the 
 brightness of whom the Holy empire ought to be 
 illuminated as by seven torches, the light of which 
 is reinforced by the seven gifts of the Holy Spi- 
 rit." II The Roman empire of Germany is in one 
 
 * See Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, Tom. I. p. 308. 
 
 + Ibid. + lb. § lb. 
 
 II Tu quidem Invidia Christianum Imperium, a Deo ad instar 
 Sancte et individue Trinitatis, fide, spe, et caritate, virtutibus 
 Tlieologicis, roboratum, cujus fundameiitum super Christianis- 
 simo regno feliciter stabilitur, antiquo veneno, velut serpens in 
 palmites Imperiales, et membra ejus propinquiora, impio scelere 
 Tomuisti, ut concussis columpnis totum edificium ruine subjiceres. 
 
257 
 
 part of the Golden Bull called sacro sanctum, as in 
 the following' words : Decor et gloria Sacrosancti 
 Romani Imperii, * (the ornament and glory of the 
 most holy Roman empire !) It is not easy to define 
 the exact time when the word sacrum was applied 
 to the Roman empire of Germany. The most an- 
 cient instrument in which I have found it is that of 
 a treaty of peace between Rodolph king- of the 
 Romans, and Philip count of Savoy, drawn up on 
 the 27th of December, 1C83. It is contained in 
 the exordium as follows : " Rudolphus Dei Gratis 
 Romanorum Rex semper Aug'ustus. Universis 
 Sacri Romani Imperii fidelibus, preesentes literas 
 inspecturis, gratiam suam et omne bonum." f 
 '' Rudolphus by the grace of God king of the Ro- 
 mans, always august. To all the faithful of the 
 Holy Roman empire who shall inspect the present 
 letters, his favour and all g'ood." But it is certain 
 that this appellation did not come into g'eneral use 
 till the latter part of the thirteentli century. 
 
 *' And the beast which I saw was like unto a leo- 
 
 divisionem inter septem Electores Sacri Imperii, per quos velut 
 septem candelabra lucentia in unitate Spiritus septiformis, Sa- 
 crum illuminari debet Imperium, multotiens posuisti. lb. 303; 
 and Modern Universal History, Vol. XXX. 
 
 * See Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, Tom. I. p. 308. In the 
 Burgundian protestation against the prace of Munster made by 
 the Empire with the French king, in 16 48, without the consent of 
 His Catholic Majesty, we find the following expression : " Sa- 
 crosanctum hoc Imperium," This most holy empire, 16. Ton}, 
 VII. p. 484. 
 
 + Ibid. p. 58. 
 
 s 
 
258 
 
 pard^ and his feet were as the feet of a bear, and 
 his mouth as the mouth of a Hon." The Latin 
 empire which St. John saw with ten crowns upon 
 its ten horns is likened to a leopard. This simili- 
 tude of the Beast to a leopard, 1 conceive, together 
 with many commentators, to be an allusion to the 
 third beast of Daniel, which is well known to re- 
 present the empire of the Greeks. '' The leopard 
 is remarkable for swiftness ; ' their horses (saith the 
 prophet Habakkuk, i. 8.) are swifter than the leo- 
 pards:' and Alexander and the Macedonians were 
 amazing-ly swift and rapid in their conquests."* 
 In like manner the Latin empire was mightily in- 
 creased, and consolidated in a surprisingly short 
 space of time, by the powerful arms of the illustrious 
 Charlemagne, who, in the course of his reign raised 
 up an empire little, if at all, inferior to the w estern 
 division of the Roman empire in the time of Theo- 
 dosius. But the greatest similitude of the La- 
 tin empire to a leopard consists in its great re- 
 semblance to the modern Greek empire ; for, that 
 the power of the Greeks was still said to be like a 
 leopard even after its subjugation by the Romans, 
 is evident from the 12th verse of the seventh chap- 
 ter of Daniel : '' As concerning the rest of the 
 beasts, they had their dominion taken away : yet 
 their lives were prolonged for a season and time." 
 The Latin empire was, in the first place, like to 
 its contemporary, because both adhered to an ido- 
 latrous system of worship, professedly Christian^ 
 
 * See Bishop Newton's Dissertation on Dan. Tii. 
 
259 
 
 but really Antichristian ; and it is well known that 
 the Greek and Latin churches abound in monstrous 
 absurdities. Secondly, both empires were similar 
 in respect to their opposition to the spread of pure 
 Christianity ; thou«^h, it must be allowed that the 
 Latins far outstripped the Greeks in this particu- 
 lar. Thirdly, both empires Avere similar in respect 
 to the civil authority being powerfully depressed 
 by the ecclesiastical ; though it must be allowed 
 the authority of the Latin church was more strongly 
 marked, and of much longer continuance. The 
 excommunication of the Greek emperor by the pa- 
 triarch Arsenius, and the consequences of that ex- 
 communication, afford a remarkable example of the 
 great power of the Greek clergy. But there 
 is a property in the Latin empire which does 
 not exist in its contemporary ; for we are told 
 '' his feet were as the feet of a bear." The second 
 beast of Daniel was likened to a bear, and there 
 can be no doubt that the kingdom of the Medes 
 and Persians was intended ; and it is very properly 
 likened to this animal, because it was one of 
 the most inhuman governments that ever existed; 
 and a bear is the well-known emblen) of cruelty. 
 See 2 Sam, xvii. 8. and Hos. xiii. 8. Bishop 
 Newton speaks of the Medo-Persian cruelties in 
 the following words : " Cambyses, Ochus, and 
 others of their princes^ were indeed more like bears 
 than men. Instances of their cruelty abound in 
 almost all the historians who have written of their 
 affairs, from Herodotus, down to Ammianus Mar- 
 
 S 2 
 
260 
 
 cellinus, who describes them as proud, and cruel, ex-' 
 ercising the power of hfe and death over slaves and 
 obscure plebeians. They pull off the skins, says 
 he, from men alive by pieces, or all together : and 
 they have abominable laws, by which for one man's 
 offence all the neighbourhood is destroyed. Well, 
 therefore, might a learned French commentator 
 (Calmet) say, that the Persians have exercised the 
 most severe and the most cruel dominion we know 
 of. The punishments used among' them beget hor- 
 ror in those who read of them." What a strik- 
 ing picture is all this of the abominable cruelties 
 of the Latin empire ! Have not the subjects of this 
 empire literally traiiipled to death all those in their . 
 power who would not obey their idolatrous requi- 
 sitions ? Read the history of their inquisitions in 
 Fox's Book of Martyrs, and other books which treat 
 upon this subject, in all which will be found a me- 
 lancholy catalogue of the horrid tortures and most 
 lingering deaths which they have obliged great 
 numbers of Christians to suffer. In this sense the 
 feet of the Beast " were as the feet of a bear." 
 Another particular in which the Beast differed from 
 a leopard, was in having a mouth like a lion. This 
 part of the prophecy is thus explained by Dr. 
 More : " It is like the Babylonish kingdom (the 
 first beast of Daniel, which is likened to a Hon,) in 
 its cruel decrees against such as will not obey their 
 idolatrous edicts, nor worship the golden image 
 that Nebuchadnezzar had set up. Their stub- 
 bornness must be punished by a hot fiery furnace. 
 
261 
 
 Fire and faggot must be prepared for them that 
 will not submit to this New Roman idolatry." 
 
 " And the dragon gave him his power^ and his 
 seat^ and great authority." It was said of the 
 dragon, in Rev. xii. 8. that his place was found 
 no more in heaven ; the dragon here cannot, 
 therefore, be the Heathen Roman empire, as this 
 was abolished previously to the rising up of the 
 Beast. It must then allude to the restoration of 
 one of the Draconic heads of the Beast, as will be 
 seen in the explanation of the following verse. 
 
 " And I saw one of his heads as it were wounded 
 to death ; and his deadly wound was healed : and 
 all the world wondered after the beast." This is 
 the second and last place where the heads of the 
 Beast are mentioned with any description ; and, 
 therefore, the meaning liere must he forms of go- 
 vernment, as these were noticed last in the angel's 
 double explanation. The head that was wounded 
 to death can be no other than the seventh Draconic 
 head, which was the sixth head of the Beast, viz. 
 the Imperial power ; for '' this head," as Bishop 
 Newton observes, " was, as it were, wounded to 
 death, when the Roman empire was overturned by 
 the northern nations, and an end was put to the 
 very name of emperor in Momyllus Augustulus." 
 It was so wounded that it was wholly improbable 
 that it could ever rise again to considerable power; 
 for the western empire came into the possession of 
 several barbarous nations of independent interests. 
 But why is the wounded imperial power here called 
 
262 
 
 a head of the Beasts and not a head of the Dra- 
 gon. Evidently to shew that only that division of 
 the Roman empire was dismembered which ruled 
 over Latium. For the seventh Draconic head 
 ruled over the whole Roman empire, which was not 
 wounded, as it were, to death at the time spoken of. 
 Ag-ain,, when the Roman monarchy was divided in- 
 to the eastern and western empires, the western 
 division might very properly be called the Latin 
 empire as Latin Avas the language which prevailed 
 in '\i, while the eastern might be called the Greek 
 empire from its prevailing language. Therefore, 
 when it is said that one of the heads of the Beast 
 was wounded, as it were, to death, the meaning 
 will be, that the western division of the Roman 
 empire, or in other words, the Latin empire, was 
 broken to pieces. But the wounded head was 
 healed; consequently, the western empire must be 
 restored. This was effected, as Lord Napeir very 
 properly observes, '' by Charlemaign — in whose 
 person and successors, that deadly wound of the 
 empire was healed, and the cstat of Emperors re- 
 nued." * Here is then the western empire re- 
 storedj the emperor having assumed all the marks 
 of the ancient emperors of the west, with the titles 
 of Semper Augustus, Caesar, and sacred majesty, f 
 
 * See his Commentary on the Revelation, p. 174. 
 
 + The empire of Charlemagne, which may be compared, with 
 regard to its extent, to the ancient western empire, comprised 
 the greatest part of Europe, as it included all Gaul, Germany, 
 Spain as far as the Ebro, Italy, Pannonia, Dalmatia, Croatia, &c. 
 
^63 
 
 From what has been said above it is evident that the 
 head-power of tlie Beast must be the Roman em- 
 pire ; for to constitute a complete restoration of the 
 sixth head of the Beast, not only its dominion, but 
 also its name, must be restored. But as the Eastern 
 and Western Empires from the time of Charle- 
 magne were equally known by the name of the Ro- 
 nian empire ; which of these constituted the head 
 of the Beast ? The words of the prophecy decide 
 this point in the most clear and satisfactory man- 
 ner. It is that Roman empire which has affixed to 
 it a name of blasphemy ; therefore it is not the 
 eastern or Greek empire, which was simply called 
 by the Greeks, The Roman empire ; but it is the 
 Roman empire of Germany, which has been most 
 blasphemously named in almost all public instru- 
 ments, from the thirteenth century. Sacrum Impe- 
 rium Romanum, The Holy Roman empire. This 
 
 extending from west to east from the Ebro to the Elbe and 
 Oder, and from south to north from the duchy of Benevento 
 and the Adriatic sea even to the Eyder which separates the Ger- 
 mans from the Danes. See Koch's Tableau des Revolutions, 
 Tom. I. p. 53 ; and other historians. With respect to Charle- 
 magne's dominions in Italy, Coccinius, in his book, De Bello 
 Maximiliani cum Venetis, Anno 1511, says that " Carolus Mag- 
 nus postquam Romae a populo et clero Romano Iro.perator est 
 nuncupatus, et foedus cum Graeco Imperatori iniit, vt Apulia et 
 Sicilia Graeco Imperatori cederent, et reliquum quod esi^et Italiae 
 ab vrbe vsque Alpes, Latini Imperatoris esset." Charlemagne, 
 after he was named emperor at Rome by the people and Roman 
 clergy, made a league with the Greek emperor, that Apulia and 
 Sicily should be ceded to the Greek etmperor, and that the rest of 
 
264 
 
 is therefore an additional evidence, to what has 
 been already advanced, tliat the Latin empire, with 
 the Roman empire of Germany at its head, is the 
 Beast of the Apocalypse. 
 
 But it is said that the Dragon gave the Beast his 
 power ; by which is meant that the revived Western 
 Empire Avas added to the other powers in the inte- 
 rest of the Latin church, thereby forming one 
 mighty empire. That this was literally the case 
 will appear from the following brief account of 
 events which led to the restoration of the Roman 
 monarchy in the west : '' The primitive western 
 empire continued to Augustus Romulus, surnamed 
 AugustuluSj who lost it in 476. Odoacer, king of 
 the Heruli, the Goths and Lombards having reduc- 
 ed it, they were in possession of it 300 years. 
 This division of the empire gave rise to that of 
 the Eastern and Western churches; and towards 
 the fifth century, under Honorius and Valentinian 
 in. the Roman empire entirely decayed ; and the 
 Barbarians, who had been often repulsed into the 
 countries beyond the Danube and the Rhine, which 
 served, as it were, for the two barriers of the em- 
 pire, passed those two rivers, and made themselves 
 masters of several Roman provinces. The Cimbri 
 were the first who penetrated through all Ger- 
 many^ and settled themsel es on the lands of the 
 Romans ; the old Saxons made themselves formi- 
 
 Italy, which was from the city to the Alps, should be the Latin 
 emperor's. SeeRerum Germanic. Scriptores, Tom. II. p. 665. 
 Argentorati, 1767. 
 
^65 
 
 dable on both sides of the Elbe^ as well as Didier 
 king" of the Lombards^ and an infinity of other 
 people ; so far that Pope Adrian III. in fear of the 
 churchj whose countries were over-run by the Bar- 
 barians^ iin))lored the succour of Charlemag'ne_, king- 
 of France, who, after many victories over the ene- 
 mies of the church, obliged them for the most part 
 to be Christians, and dispersed them. In acknow- 
 ledgment of so great a service Pope Leo III. 
 anointed and crowned Charlemagne emperor of 
 the west, at Rome, by the consent of Nicephorus 
 emperor of the east. — This coronation took place 
 on Christmas-day, 800." * Thus it evidently ap- 
 pears the Dragon f gave his power, o6vu[jt.iv, his ar- 
 mies, or military strength, J to the Beast; that is, 
 
 * See M. Meniu's Coronation of the kings of France, pp. 
 178, 179. Lond. 177.5. 
 
 + The revived western empire being here designated the Dra- 
 gon, is an additional evidence to what has been already advanced, 
 that the three Heatlien forms of government which ruled over 
 Latium are reckoned heads of the Beast. 
 
 X That Charlemagne pledged himself to support the Roman 
 Catholic faith with all his might is plainly visible in the follow- 
 ing oath which he took at the time of his coronation in 800 : 
 <■' In nomine Christi spondee atque polliceor ego Carolus Impe-^- 
 rator coram Deo et beato Petro Apostolo me Protectorem et 
 Defensorem fore hujus Sanctae Romance ecclesije in omnibus uti- 
 litatibus, quatenus divinofultus fuero adjutorio, prout sciero po- 
 teroque." In the name of Christ I promise and purpose that I 
 Charles, emperor, before God and the blessed apostle Peter, 
 will be the protector and defender of this Holy Roman churclt 
 in all necessary cases as far as I shall be assisted by Divine aid, 
 and to the best of my knowledge and ability. See Dumont's 
 Corps Diplomatique, Tom. I. in principio. 
 
266 
 
 he gave his strength in support of the Latin em- 
 pire. He also gave his seat, ^^ovou, (Hterally, his 
 throne,) to him ; that is, his whole empire formed 
 an integral part of the Latin empire by its conver- 
 sion to the Roman Catholic faith. He also gave 
 him great authority. This is literally true of the 
 Roman empire of Germany, which, by its great 
 power and influence in the pohcies of Europe, ex- 
 tended the religion of the empire over the various 
 states and monarchies of Europe, thus incorporat- 
 ing them as it were in one vast empire, by uniting 
 them in one common faith. " And all the world 
 (oAt; r} yrj, ail the earth,) wondered after the beast." 
 As the original word signifies earth, and not world, 
 as in our translation, the Latin world, which is the 
 earth of the Beast, is here intended ; and the mean- 
 ing of the passage consequently is, that the w^hole 
 body of the Roman Catholics were affected with 
 great astonishment at the rapidly- increasing and 
 mighty sway of the Latin empire considering it as 
 a great and holy power. 
 
 '' And they worshipped the dragon which gave 
 power unto the beast ; and they worshipped the 
 beast, saying. Who is hke unto the beast ? who is 
 able to make war with him ?" Worshipping the 
 Dragon here evidently means the voluntary sub- 
 jection of the members of the Latin church to the 
 revived western empire because of the eminent 
 part it has taken in the support of their faith. 
 The empire of Germany was also worshipped by 
 the epithet sacrum, sacred, being apphed to it. 
 
267 
 
 But it is not the new western empire only which 
 is worshipped, the whole Latin empire is a par- 
 taker in the adoration. The manner in which it 
 is worshipped consists in the subjects of it sayinj>% 
 *' Who is hke unto the beast ?" Is it not the only 
 holy power in the universe ? Is it possible for any 
 person not a subject of it to be saved ? " Who is 
 able to make war with him ?" Can any nation suc- 
 cessfully fight with it ? Is not the Roman empire 
 which is at the head of it, ininctissimum, (most in- 
 vincible ?) * 
 
 " And there was given unto him a mouth speak- 
 ing great things, and blasphemies ; and power was 
 given unto him to continue forty and two months ;" 
 that is, there was given power to the emperor, 
 (who may be considered the mouth of tlie Beast, as 
 he represented in his person the /ie«f/-power of the 
 Latin empire,) to assume, with a considerable shew 
 of propriety, the greatest and most lofty titles ; 
 such as Romanorum Imperator, semper Augustus, 
 (Emperor of the Romans, always august.) The 
 instruments of Charlemagne generally began as 
 follows : " In nomine Patris, et Filii, et Spiritus 
 Sancti, Carolus serenissimus Augustus, a Deo coro- 
 natus, magnus et pacificus Imperator, Romanorum 
 
 * The subscription of Otho III. emperor of Germany, was 
 " Signum D. Othonis, Ccesaris invictissimi," The seal of Lord 
 Otho, the most invincible Caesar. See Duraont's Corps Diplo- 
 matique, Tom. I. p. 41. His successors also subscribed them- 
 selves in this manner. See Rerum Germanicarura Scriptores 
 Germanicos, ab Henrico Meibomio, Juniore, Tom. II. fre- 
 quenter. 
 
268 
 
 gubernans imperium^ qui et per misericordiam Dei 
 Rex Francorum et Lang'obardorum/' * In the 
 name of the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, Charles, 
 the most serene Augustus, crowned by God^ the 
 great and pacific emperor, governing the empire of 
 the Romans, who by the mercy of God is also king 
 of the Franks and Longobards. When Charle- 
 magne was made emperor the words of the procla- 
 mation were the following : '' Karolo Augusto a 
 Deo coronato, magno et pacifico Imperatori Roma- 
 norum vita et victoria;" f Life and victory to 
 Charles Augustus, crowned by God, the great and 
 pacific emperor of the Romans. A very frequent 
 subscription of the emperors is instanced in the fol- 
 lowing one of Charles, the grandson of Charle- 
 magne : " Signum Caroli gloriosissimi Augusti," j; 
 The seal of Charles the most glorious Augustus. 
 But blasphemies are also uttered by this mouth, to 
 shew that the system of worship which he supports 
 is a system of blasphemy, as there will be occasion 
 presently to observe. The Beast is to continue 
 forty-two months. As these forty-two months are 
 prophetic, they must mean so many years as there 
 are days contained in them, that is to say, 1260 
 years, each month containing 30 days. § The 
 
 * See Mabillon De Re Diploraatica, Lib. ii. c. 3, § 8. 
 
 + Ibid. X IlJ- P- 555. 
 
 § That days^ in the language of prophecy, mean years has 
 already been shewn when speaking of the Woman's flight into 
 the wilderness for 1260 days ; and it is further confirmed by the 
 seventy weeks of Daniel, which all allow to represent 490 
 years. 
 
269 
 
 Beast, therefore, will continue to prevail more or 
 less throughout this whole space ; but when its ter- 
 mination will take place is rather difficult to say, 
 as the beginning- cannot at present be indubitably 
 ascertained. That the 1260 years commenced be- 
 fore the coronation of Charlemagne as emperor of 
 Germany in 800 would appear from the circum- 
 stance of the Dragon giving his power to the Beast, 
 which supposes that the Beast was, previous to the 
 conversion of the Western Empire to the Catholic 
 faith. The majority of commentators think that 
 the year 606 was the first of the 1260 years, be- 
 cause at this time the Greek emperor Phocas de- 
 clared the Pope infallible. Bishop Newton sup- 
 poses the year 727 as probable as any for the com- 
 mencement ; as it was then that the city of Rome 
 revolted from the Greek emperor and the exarch of 
 Ravenna. Some have thought that the beginning 
 was not till 755, when Pepin, king of Prance, be- 
 stowed the exarchate of Ravenna upon the Pope, 
 and thereby made him a temporal prince. 
 
 " And he opened his mouth in blasphemy against 
 God, to blaspheme his name, and his tabernacle, 
 and them that dwell in heaven." As the heads of 
 the Beast have been understood in two senses, so 
 must the mouth. If the German empire be consi- 
 dered the head of the Beast, then the mouth will 
 signify the emperor ; as has been already shewn. 
 But if we understand the regal state of the Latins, 
 to be the head ('' for the beast is an eighth, and one 
 
270 
 
 of the seven,") then all the Roman Catholic kings 
 united together in one purpose, will be the mouth. 
 That this last is the meaning- in tliis place is evident, 
 not only from the circumstance that it is in unison 
 with the order of the angel's explication, but also 
 from the objects against which the blasphemy is 
 directed, as will be fully shewn in the sequel. The 
 Latin empire is here represented as a blasphemous 
 power in three respects : first, he blasphemes the 
 name of God. This has been most notoriously the 
 case with the different Popish princes^ who conti- 
 nually blaspheme the sacred names of God by 
 using- them in their idolatrous worship. They 
 have blasphemed the name of God in instituting' a 
 religious order called The Society of Jesus, the 
 members of which^ usually known by the name of 
 Jesuits, have done all in their power to g-ain con- 
 verts to their abominable doctrines. The French 
 monarch, Henry III. has blasphemed the name of 
 God by instituting-, (horrid to relate,) knights of 
 the order of the Holy Ghost ! * The Beast also 
 blasphemes the tabernacle of God. This passage 
 cannot properly be understood till the meaning; of 
 the word tabernacle be ascertained. Tabernacle 
 is any kind of dwelling-place ; and, in an eminent 
 sense, among- the Jews, was a kind of tent to take 
 
 * This order was instituted, with great pomp, on the 2d of 
 January, in the year of Our Lord, 1579, in the church of the 
 Great Augustines, at Paris. 
 
271 
 
 up and down as occasion required, which was, as il 
 were, the palace of the Most High, the dwelhn^ of 
 the God of Israel. It was divided into two parti- 
 tions, one called The Holy Place, and the other 
 The Most Holy Place ; in the latter of which, be- 
 fore the building of the temple, the ark of the co- 
 venant was kept, which was a symbol of God's gra- 
 cious presence with the Jewish church. All this 
 the author of the Epistle to the Hebrews, in the 
 eighth and ninth chapters, explains to prefigure the 
 body of Christ, as is evident in the following 
 words : '' But Christ being come a high priest of 
 good things to come, by a greater and more per- 
 fect tabernacle, not made with hands, that is to say, 
 not of this building ; neither by the blood of goats 
 and calves, but by his own blood, he entered in 
 once into the holy place, having obtained eternal 
 redemption for us." The tabernacle of God, is, 
 therefore, as Dr. Henry More well observes, the 
 body of Christ, and differs from the temple men- 
 tioned in Rev. xi. 2. Avhich represents the church 
 of Christ. From the foregoing observation re- 
 specting the meaning of tabernacle, I perfectly 
 agree with Dr. Henry More and the Rev. E. W. 
 Whitaker, who understand the blasphemy of the 
 tabernacle of God by the Beast, of his impious doc- 
 trine of transubstantiation, in which it is most blas- 
 phemously asserted that the substance of the bread 
 and wine in the sacrament, is literally converted by 
 the consecration of the priest, into the very bod){ 
 
272 
 
 and blood of Jesus Christ ! ! * This doctrine was 
 first advanced among the Latins in the tenth cen- 
 
 * Mosheim gives the following account of the doctrine of 
 Transubsfantiation : " It Avill not appear surprising that the 
 bread, consecrated in the sacrament of the Lord's supper, be- 
 came the object of religious worship : for this was the natural 
 consequence of the monstrous doctrine of Transubstantiatiou. 
 But the efl'ects of that impious and ridiculous doctrine did not 
 end here ; it produced all that train of ceremonies and institu^ 
 tions that are still used in the church of Rome in honour of that 
 deified bread as they blasphemously call it. Hence those rich 
 and splendid receptacles that were formed for the residence of 
 God under this new shape, and the lamps and other precious or^ 
 naments that were designed to beautify this habitation of the 
 Deity. Ai\d hence the custom that still prevails, of carryir>g 
 about this divine bread in solemn pomp through the public 
 streets, when it is to be administered to sick or dying persons^ 
 with many other ceremonies of a like nature, which are disho- 
 nourable to religion, and opprobrious to humanity. But that 
 which gave the finishing touch to this heap of absurdities, and 
 displayed superstition in its highest extravagance, was the insti- 
 tution of the celebrated annual Festival of the Holij Sacramenty 
 or, as it is sometimes called, of the body of Chriat, whose origin 
 was as follows: A certain devout woman, whose name Avas Ju- 
 liana, and who lived at Liege, declared that she had received a 
 revelation from heaven intimating to her, that it was the will of 
 God, that a peculiar festival should be annually observed in hes 
 nour of the holy sacrament, or rather of the rea.1 presence oi 
 Christ's body in that sacred institution. Few gave attention or 
 credit to this pretended vision, whose circumstances were ex- 
 tremely equivocal and absurd, and which would have come to 
 nothing, had it not been supported by Robert, bishop of Liege, 
 who, in the year 1246, published an order for the celebration of 
 thi$ festiTal throughout the whole province, notwithstanding tli» 
 

 273 i^^^, 
 
 tiiry by Paschasius Radbertii^, abbot of Corbie in 
 France ; and met with considerable opposition at 
 first; but was afterwards (1215) fuily received, 
 iuid became an article of the Roman Catholic faith. 
 It is for the pages of ecclesiastical history to recoixl 
 the incredible numbers which have been martyred 
 by the Papists for their non-reception of this most 
 unscriptural and Antichristian doctrine. The Beast 
 also blasphemes '' them that dwell in heaven." By 
 heaven is here meant the throne of God, and not 
 the throne of the Beast, because it is against God 
 the Beast blasphemes; for ^' he opened his mouth 
 in blasphemy against God, to blaspheme his name^ 
 and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven." 
 This must, therefore, allude to his impious adora- 
 tion of the saints and angels, whose residence is in 
 heaven. He blasphemes against God by paying 
 
 opposition which he knew would be made to a proposal fpun4e4 
 only on an idle droam. After the death of Juliana, one of her 
 friends and companions, whose name was Eve, tooje up her cause 
 M ith uncommon zeal, and hajl credit enough with Urban IV. to 
 engage him to publish, in the year 1264, a solemn edict, by 
 which the festival irt question was imposed upon all the Christian 
 churches without exception. This edict, however, did, not pro- 
 duce its full and proper effect, on account of the death of the 
 pontiff, which happened soon after its publication ; so that the 
 festival under consideration was not celebrated universally 
 throughout tlie Latin churches before the pontificate of Clement 
 V. Avho, in the council, held at Vionne in France, in the year 
 1311, confirmed the edict of Urban." Mosheim's Eccles. Hist, 
 Cent. Xltl. Part ii. chap. iv. § 2. 
 
 T 
 
274 
 
 that adoration to the celestial inhabitants, which 
 alone belongs to God. That this sort of wor- 
 ship has been, and still is, kept up among the Ro- 
 man Cathohcs^ their mass-book is a sufficient evi- 
 dence. 
 
 '" And it was given unto him to make war with 
 the saints, and to overcome them : and power was 
 given him over all kindreds, and tongues, and na- 
 tions." After what has been already said respect- 
 ing the Beast, it is no wonder that he is found op- 
 posing the true church of Christ, for his doctrines 
 are in total hostility to it. But the Beast could 
 have no power over the saints unless it were given 
 him from heaven ; therefore it is said that "' it was 
 given unto him to make war with the saints, and to 
 overcome them." Bishop Newton's comment upon 
 this passage is as follows : " Who can make any 
 computation, or even frame any conception, of the 
 numbers of pious Christians who have fallen a sa- 
 crifice to the bigotry and cruelty of Rome ? Mede 
 Upon the place hath observed from good authorities, 
 that in the war with the Albigenses and Waldenses 
 there perished of these poor creatures in France 
 alone a million. From the first institution of the 
 Jesuits to the year 1480, that is, in little more than 
 thirty years, nine hundred thousand orthodox Chris- 
 tians were slain. In the Netherlands alone the 
 Duke of Alva boasted, that within a few years he 
 had dispatched to the amount of thirty-six thousand 
 «ouIs, and those all by the common executioner 
 
In the space of scarce thirty years the inquisition * 
 destroyed by various kinds of torture a hundred 
 and fifty thousand Christians. Sanders himself 
 confesses, that an innumerable multitude of Lol- 
 lards and Sacramentarians were burnt throughout 
 
 * Dupin's account of the Tribunal of the Inquisition is briefly 
 as follows : " There had been already (before the thirteenth cen- 
 tury) several instances of heretics condemned to fines, to banish- 
 ments, to punishments, and even to death itself; but there had 
 never yet been any war proclaimed against them, nor any croi- 
 sade preached up for the extirpation of them. Innocent III. 
 was the first that proclaimed such a war against the Albigenses 
 and Waldenses, and against Raymond count of Toulouse their 
 protector. War might subdue the heads, and reduce whole bo- 
 dies of people ; but it was not capable of altering the sentiments 
 of particular persons, or of hindering them from teaching their 
 doctrines secretly. Whereupon the pope thought it advisable to 
 set up a tribunal of such persons whose business should be to 
 make inquiry after heretics, and to draw up their processes. 
 For this purpose he made choice of the Dominican and Fran- 
 ciscan friars who were newly established, to whom he gave com- 
 mission to make an exact inquiry after heretics, and to draw up 
 informations against them. And from hence this tribunal was 
 called The Inquisition, ^y degrees the authority of those in- 
 quisitors increased ; and whereas at the first they only drew up 
 the process of heretics, and solicited the ordinary judges to con- 
 demn them, they afterwards had the power granted them of 
 trying the crime of heresy conjunctly with the bishops. The 
 emperor Frederic II. approved of this tribunal, took the inqui- 
 sitors into his protection, and attributed to the ecclesiastics the 
 taking cognizance of the crime of heresy ; leaving only to the 
 secular judges tiie power of inflicting the punishment of death on 
 those who were condemned. This tribunal of the inquisition 
 was at first set up at Toulouse, and in the other cities of Langue- 
 doc, where the heresy of the Albigenses and Waldenses had the 
 
 T 2 
 
216 
 
 all Europe ; who yet, he says, were not put to 
 death by the pope and bishops^ but by the civil ma- 
 gistrates. " The following extracts from Limborch's 
 History of the Inquisition will be of great service 
 to shew the truly diabolical spirit by which the 
 Papists were influenced in their persecution of 
 those they denominated heretics. '" Some of the 
 Valdenses coming into the neighbouring kingdom 
 of ArragoH;, king Ildefonsus, in the year 1 194, put 
 forth against them a very severe and bloody edicts 
 by which he ' banished them from his kingdom, 
 and all his dominions as enemies of the cross of 
 Christy profaners of the Christian religion^ and pub- 
 lic enemies to himself and kingdom.' He adds : 
 ' If any, from this day forwards, shall presume to 
 receive into their houses the aforesaid Valdenses 
 and Inzabbati^ or other heretics^ of whatsoever 
 profession they be^ or to hear in any place their 
 abominable preachings^ or to give them food^ or to 
 do them any kind office whatsoever ; let him know, 
 that he shall incur the indignation of Almighty God 
 and ours ; that he shall forfeit all his goods, with- 
 out the benefit of appeal, and be punished as 
 though guilty of high treason^ &c. Let it be far- 
 ther observed. That if any person, of high or low 
 condition, shall find any of the often before-men- 
 tioned accursed wretches, in any part of our domi- 
 
 deepest rooting. The Popes likewise set it up in Italy, from 
 whence it passed a long time after into Spain ; but it was ba- 
 nished France, and could never be introduced into Germany." 
 Cent. XIII. chap. 10. 
 
^77 
 
 nions, who hath had tliree days' notice of this our 
 edict, and who either intends not to depart at all;, 
 or not immediately, but who contumaciously stays, 
 or travels about; every evil, disgrace, and suffer- 
 ing-, that he shall inflict on such person, except 
 death or maiming, will be very grateful and accept- 
 able to us ; and he shall be so far from incurring 
 any punishment upon this account, that he shall 
 rather be entitled to our favour. However, we 
 give these wicked wretches liberty till the day after 
 All Saints, (though it may seem contrary to justice 
 and reason,) by which they must either be gone 
 from our dominions, or upon their departure out of 
 them. But afterwards they sliall be plundered, 
 whipped, and beat, and treated with all manner of 
 disgrace and severity." The emperor Frederic II. 
 put forth many laws against heretics, their accom- 
 plices, and favourers, at Padua, by which the hor- 
 rid tribunal of the Inquisition was greatly promoted. 
 We shall only extract one, which is as follows : 
 " Frederic, by the grace of God, Emperor of the 
 Romans, and always August, king of Jerusalem, 
 and Sicily, to his beloved princes, the venerable 
 archbishops, bishops, and other prelates of the 
 church ; to the Dukes, Marquises, Earls, Barons, 
 Governors, Scultets, Burgraves, Advocates, Judges, 
 Ministers, Officials, and all other his faithful sub- 
 jects, throughout the whole empire, to whom these 
 letters shall come, greeting and all happiness : 
 
 " The care of the Imperial government, com- 
 mitted to us from heaven, and over which we pre- 
 
278 
 
 side, by the ^ift of God, and the height of our dig- 
 nity, demand the material sword, which is given to 
 us separately from the priesthood, against the ene- 
 mies of the faith, and for the extirpation of hereti- 
 cal pravity, that we should pursue, with judgment 
 and justice, those vipers and perfidious children, 
 who insult the Lord and his church, as though they 
 would tear out the very bowels of their mother. 
 We shall not suffer these wretches to live, who in- 
 fect the world by their seducing doctrines, and be- 
 ing themselves corrupted, more grievously taint 
 the flock of the faithful. We therefore appoint 
 and ordain, that heretics, of whatsoever name, 
 throughout our empire, being condemned by the 
 church, and delivered over to the secular power, 
 shall be punished according to their deserts. If 
 any of them, after their being apprehended, shall 
 return to the unity of the faith, through the fear of 
 death, let them suffer perpetual imprisonment, and 
 do penance according to the canons. Farther, 
 whatsoever heretics shall be found in the cities, 
 towns, or other places of the empire, by the inqui- 
 sitors appointed by the Apostolic see, or other or- 
 thodox persons zealous for the faith, let those who 
 have jurisdiction there, seize their persons, at the 
 , instance of the inquisitors and other Catholics, and 
 keep them in strict custody, till, being condemned 
 by the censure of the church, they perish by an ac- 
 cursed death, for their denying the sacraments of 
 faith and life. We condemn also to the same pu- 
 nishment, all whom the craft of the deceitful encm> 
 
279 
 
 shall employ as advocates, unlawfully to defend the 
 error of these heretics, especially since those who 
 are defiled with such wickedness are equal in guilt; 
 unless they desist upon proper admonition^ and 
 wisely consult the preservation of their lives. We 
 subject also to the same punishment those who, 
 being- convicted of heresy in any one place, fly to 
 another, that they may more safely pour out the 
 poison of their heretical pravity ; unless in this in- 
 stance, they have a testimony in their favour from 
 those who have been converted to the faith from the 
 same error, or from those who have convinced them 
 of their heresy, which in this case we allow may 
 lawfully be done. We condemn also to death all 
 such heretics, who, being brought to trial, shall ab- 
 jure their heresy when in extreme danger of life, 
 if afterwards convicted of having dissembled and 
 taken a false oath, and of having willingly relapsed 
 into the same error, that thereby their vile dissimu- 
 lation may be more destructive to themselves, and 
 their falsehood meet with its deserved punishment. 
 We farther deprive heretics, their receivers and 
 favourers, of all benefit of proclamation and ap- 
 peal ; being willing that every seed of this heretical 
 stain should, by all means, be extirpated out of our 
 empire, in which the true faith ought ever to be 
 preserved. Moreover, as we have received greater 
 favours from the Divine mercy, and are exalted to 
 a higher dignity than the children of men, we 
 ought to pay the more solemn services of grati- 
 tude. If then we manifest our displeasure against 
 
280 
 
 those who contemn us, and condemn traitors in 
 their persons, and by stripping their children of 
 their inheritance, how justly shall we be more in- 
 censed against those who blaspheme the name of 
 God, and revile the Catholic faith, and deprive, by 
 our imperial authority, all heretics, their receivers, 
 abettors, and advocates, and their heirs and poste- 
 rity, even to the second generation, of their tem- 
 poral estates, public offices, honours, that they may 
 continually mourn at the remembrance of their fa- 
 thers' crimes, and certainly know that God is a jea- 
 lous God, punishing- the iniquities of the fathers 
 upon their children. Not that we would exclude 
 from our mercy those, who keeping themselves 
 free from the heresy of their fathers, shall discover 
 their secret perfidiousness : for whatever punish- 
 ilient their guilt may receive, we would not subject 
 their innocent children to it. We hereby also de- 
 clare our pleasure, that we appoint the friars pre* 
 dicant of the order of Predicants, to take care of 
 the faith against heretics, in all parts of our em- 
 pire. We also take under our special Imperial 
 protection all others whatsoever, that shall come to 
 judge heretics, and grant them leave to go, stay, 
 or return, except those who are under the ban of 
 the empire ; and will that none shall injure them ; 
 but that they shall have the assistance and recom- 
 mendation of all the faithful in the empire. W^e 
 farther command all, and singular of you, that 
 wheresoever, and to whomsoever of you they shall 
 come, ye receive them kindly, and keep their per- 
 
^81 
 
 sons safe from all the attempts of heretics, who 
 may lay in wait for them, and grant them your ad- 
 vice, safe conduct and assistance in the execution 
 of affairs, so acceptable before God. And as to all 
 heretics they shall discover to you in their jurisdic- 
 tion, let them be apprehended, and kept in safe cus- 
 tody, till being ecclesiastically condemned, they 
 shall suffer the deserved punishment ; as knowing 
 that in so doing, their obedience will be pleasing to 
 God, and acceptable to us, viz. in assisting, with 
 their utmost endeavours, the said friars to root out 
 of all the parts of our empire this new unheard of 
 and infamous heretical pravity. And if any one 
 shall be negligent and remiss in this matter, let 
 him know that he shall be unprofitable before God, 
 and justly incur our highest displeasure. 
 
 Dated at Padua, Feb. 22." * 
 The Beast had also power '' over all kindreds, and 
 tongues, and nations." As the Book of the Reve- 
 lation is a prophecy of all that should come upon 
 the Christian world till the end of time, " all kin- 
 dreds, and tongues, and nations" must imply the 
 whole Christian world. And that the Latin empire, 
 in the course of its reign, has had the extensive 
 power here spoken of is evident from history. It 
 is well known that the profession of Christianity 
 was chiefly confined within the limits of the Greek 
 
 * The year when this edict was published is uncertain. Pau- 
 lus Servita refers it to the year 1244, and Bzovius aud Raynald 
 to 1225. See Limborch's History of the Inquisition, ib. 
 
282 
 
 and Latin empires till the period of the Reforma- 
 tion. By means of the Crusades the Latins ex- 
 tended their empire over several provinces of the 
 Greeks. In A. D. 1097 " Baldwin — extended his 
 conquests over the hills of Armenia and the plain 
 of Mesopotamia, and founded the first principality 
 of the Franks or Latins^ which subsisted fifty-four 
 years, beyond the Euphrates." * Of the increasing 
 power of the Latin king'dom of Jerusalem, Gibbon 
 thus speaks : '" Within this narrow verge (Jerusa- 
 lem and Jaffa, with about twenty villages and towns 
 of the adjacent country,) the Mahometans were 
 still lodged in some impregnable castles ; and the 
 husbandman, the trader, and the pilgrims, were 
 exposed to daily and domestic hostility. By the 
 arms of Godfrey himself, and the two Baldwins, his 
 brother and cousin, who succeeded to the throne, 
 the Latins breathed with more ease and safety ; 
 and at length they equalled, in the extent of their 
 dominions, though not in the millions of their sub- 
 jects, the ancient princes of Judah and Israel. Af- 
 ter the reduction of the maritime cities of Laodicea, 
 Tripoli, Tyre, and Ascalon, which were power- 
 fully assisted by the fleets of Venice, Genoa, and 
 Pisa, and even of Flanders and Norway, the range 
 of the coast from Scanderoon to the borders of 
 Egypt was possessed by the Christian pilgrims. 
 If the prince of Antioch disclaimed his supremacy, 
 
 * Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman empire, chap. 
 38. This was called the Latin principality of Edessa. 
 
283 
 
 the counts of Edessaand Tripoli owned themselves 
 the vassals of the king of Jerusalem : the Latins 
 reigned beyond the Euphrates; and the four cities 
 of Hems, Hamah, Damascus, and Aleppo, were the 
 only relics of the Mahometan conquests in Syria." * 
 In 1204 the Greeks were expelled Constantinople 
 by the Latins, f who set up an empire there, 
 
 * Gibbon's Decline and Fall of the Roman empire, chap. 58. 
 
 + In this and the two following years the Greek empire was 
 split into several independent principalities, an account of which 
 is thus given us in the Ancient Universal History, Vol. XVII. 
 p. 172, Edit. 1748. " The Latins, now masters of the imperial 
 city, proceeded to the election of a new emperor; when Bald- 
 win, earl of Flanders, a prince in every respect equal to that 
 high trust, was, after some deliberation, chosen, and crowned 
 with extraordinary pomp and magnificence in the church of St. 
 Sophia. To him was allotted the city of Constantinople, and 
 the country of Thrace, with a limited sovereignty over the other 
 provinces, which already were, or should afterwards be, taken 
 from the Greeks. To Boniface, marquis of Montferrat, they 
 assigned Thessaly, which was erected into a kingdom. The Ve- 
 netians had for their share the islands of the Archipelago, part 
 of Peloponnesus, and several cities on the Hellespont. But 
 while the Latins were thus dividing their new acquisitions, Theo- 
 dorus Lascaris, son-in-law to the tyrant Alexius Angelus, hav- 
 ing, at the taking of Constantinople, made his escape into Bi- 
 thynia, was there joyfully received by the inhabitants ; and, pos- 
 sessing himself not only of that country, but of Phrygia, Mysia, 
 Ionia, and Lydla, from the Maeander to the Euxine sea, took 
 upon him the title of emperor, and fixed his imperial seat in the 
 famous city of Nice. At the same time David and Alexius 
 Comneni, grandchildren to the late tyrant Andronicus, seizing 
 on the more eastern countries of Pontus, Galatia, and Cappa- 
 docia, erected a new empire at Trapezus or Trapezond, where 
 
284 
 
 which, however, was but of short duration. Mos- 
 heim's account of it is briefly as follows : " About 
 two years after this (1206) the Greeks resolved to 
 set up, in opposition to this Latin emperor (Bald- 
 win) one of their own nation ; and elected for 
 that purpose Theodore Lascaris, who chose Nice 
 in Bithynia for the place of his imperial residence. 
 From this period till the year 1261 two emperors 
 reigned over the Greeks^ the one of their own na- 
 tion^ who resided at Nice ; and the other of Latin 
 or French extraction^ who lived at Constantinople, 
 
 their posterity reigned, till their empire, as well as that of Con-' 
 stantinople, fell into the hands of Mohammed the Great.--Thus 
 the Greek empire was no longer one, but divided into several 
 empires, Baldwin reigning at Constantinople, the marquis of 
 Montferrat in Thessaly, Theodorus Lascaris at Nice, the Coni- 
 neni at Trapezond, and the Venetians in the islands, not to 
 mention several other toparchies or principalities erected on the 
 ruins of the Constantinopolitan empire." The following are the 
 names of the five Latin emperors who successively reigned at 
 Constantinople, with the year in which they respectively began 
 their reign : Baldwin I. A. D. 1204; Henry, his brother, A. D. 
 1206; Peter, count of Auxerre, A. D. 1217; Robert, his son, 
 A. D. 1217; and Baldwin II. A. D. 1227. "Some writers 
 reckon John of Brienne, formerly king of Jerusalem, among 
 the Lat n emperors of Constantinople; and tell us, that it was 
 agreed among the Latin princes, that he should be honoured 
 with the title of emperor during his life, he being then near 
 eighty years of age ; and that upon his death the empire should 
 return to Baldwin, Avho was to marry Martha, or, as some style 
 her, Mary, the daugliter of John, by his second wife Berengaria, 
 the daughter of Alphonso, king of Castile." Ancient Univer- 
 sal History, Vol. XVII. p. 177, note (A). 
 
285 
 
 the ancient metropolis of the empire. But in the 
 year 1261 the face of things was changed by the 
 Grecian emperor, Michael Palseologus, who, by 
 the valour and stratag-ems of his general, Caesar 
 Alexius, became master of Constantinople, and 
 forced the Latin emperor Baldwin II. to abandon 
 that city, and save himself by flight in Italy. Thus 
 fell the empire of the Franks at Constantinople, 
 after a duration of fifty-seven years." * The total 
 overthrow of the Latin states in the east soon fol- 
 lowed the recovery of Constantinople by the Greeks, 
 an account of which is thus given by Mosheini, 
 " Lewis was the last of the European princes that 
 embarked in the holy war ; the dangers and diffi- 
 culties, the calamities and disorders, and the enor- 
 mous expences that accompanied each crusade, dis- 
 g'usted the most zealous, and discouraged the most 
 intrepid promoters of these fanatical expeditions. 
 In consequence of this, the Latin empire in the east 
 declined apace, notwithstanding the efforts of the 
 Roman pontiff's to maintain and support it; and in 
 the year 1291, after the taking of Ptolemais, or 
 Acra, by the Mahometans, it was entirely over- 
 thrown." f Prom the above short historical ex- 
 tracts it is evident that the Latins have had power 
 over the whole world professedly Christian ; but it 
 is not said that the whole world was in utter sub- 
 
 * Cent. XIII. Part i. chap. 1, § 3. 
 
 + See his Ecclesiastical History. Cent. XIII. Part i. chap. 
 1. §8. 
 
286 
 
 jection to him, for we read in the foHowing' verse^ 
 '' And all that dwell upon the earth shall worship 
 him whose names are not written in the book of 
 hfe of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the 
 world." The earth here is the Latin world, as has 
 been observed before in similar cases. The mean- 
 ing, therefore, is that all the corrupt part of man- 
 kind, who are inhabitants of the Latin world, shall 
 submit to the religion of the empire except, as Bi- 
 shop Newton expresses it, " those faithful few whose 
 names, as citizens of heaven, were inrolled in the 
 registers of life." 
 
 '' If any man have an ear let him hear." These 
 words are evidently introduced to impress the 
 reader with the awfulness of what has been just 
 spoken, '' all shall worship him whose names are 
 not written in the book of life ;" as well as to fix 
 his attention upon the following words: 
 
 " He thatleadeth into captivity shall go into cap- 
 tivity : he that killeth with the svv'ord must be killed 
 with the sword." The Latin empire here spoken 
 of, or that which is composed of ten distinct mo- 
 narchies, must go into captivity. Why ? Because 
 it has led into captivity, by not only propagating 
 among the various nations its abominable Anti- 
 christian system, but also in compelling them to 
 embrace it under penalty of forfeiting the protection 
 of the empire. The Latin empire must be also 
 killed with the sword, because it has killed the 
 saints of God. 
 
 '' Here is the patience and the faith of the saints." 
 
By these words, as Dr. Mitchell observes, '^ God 
 calls upon his saints to keep in view, under all 
 their persecutions, his retributive justice : there is 
 no violence that has been exercised upon them but 
 what shall be retaliated upon the cruel and perse- 
 cuting government and governors of the Latin em- 
 pire." 
 
 " And I beheld another beast coming up out of 
 the earth ; and he had two horns like a lamb, and 
 he spake as a dragon." As a beast has been already 
 shewn to be the symbol of a kingdom or empire, 
 the rising up of this second Beast must consequently 
 represent the rising up of another empire. This 
 beast '' comes up out of the earth ;" therefore it is 
 totally different from the preceding, which rose up 
 out of the sea. Earth here means the Latin world, 
 for this word has been shewn to import this already 
 in several instances ; the rising up of the Beast out of 
 this earth must, consequently, represent the spring- 
 ing up of some power out of a state of subjection to 
 the Latin empire: therefore, the Beast, here called 
 ^' another beast," is another Latin empii^e. Com- 
 mentators are generally agreed that this second 
 Beast is an ecclesiastical domination ; therefore, if 
 this general opinion be correct, (of which I have no 
 doubt, as abundant evidence can be produced to sup- 
 port it, as will be fully shewn in the sequel,) this 
 Beast can be no other than the spiritual Latin em- 
 pire, or, in other words, the Romish hierarchy. 
 How this Beast came up out of the earth may be 
 seen in the following history. In the time of Char- 
 
288 
 
 lemagne the ecclesiastical power was in subjection 
 to the civil ; and it continued to be so for a long 
 time after liis deatli; therefore the Beast, whose 
 deadly wound was healed, ruled over the whole 
 Latin world, both clerg-y and laity ; these, conse- 
 quently, constituted but one Beast, or empire. But 
 the clergy, with the Pope at their head, kept conti- 
 nually g,'ainin^ more and more influence in the civil 
 affairs of the empire ; and in the tenth century 
 their authority was greatly increased. Dr. Mos- 
 heim's account of the growing authority of the La- 
 tin clergy is contained in the following words : 
 '' The adventurous ambition of the bishops of 
 Rome, who left no means unemployed to extend 
 their jurisdiction, exhibited an example which the 
 inferior prelates followed with the most zealous and 
 indefatigable emulation. Several bishops and ab- 
 bots had begun, even from the time that the de- 
 scendants of Charlemagne sat on the imperial 
 throne, to enlarg-e their prerog-atives ; and had ac- 
 tually obtained, for their tenants and their posses- 
 sions, an immunity from the jurisdiction of the 
 counts and other magistrates, as also from taxes 
 and imposts of all kinds. But in this century they 
 carried their pretensions still farther ; aimed at the 
 civil jurisdiction over the cities and territories in 
 which they exercised a spiritual dominion, and as- 
 pired after nothing- less than the honours and au- 
 thority of dukes, marquises, and counts of the em- 
 pire. Among- the principal circumstances that 
 animated their zeal in the pursuit of these dignities 
 
289 
 
 we may reckon the perpetual and bitter contests 
 concerning- jurisdiction and other matters, that 
 reig'ned between the dukes and counts, who were 
 g"overnors of cities, and the bishops and abbots, 
 who were their ghostly rulers. The latter, there^ 
 fore, seizing- the favourable opportunity that was 
 offered them by the superstition of the times, used 
 every method that might be eifectual to obtain that 
 hvgh rank, that hitherto stood in the way of their 
 ambition. And the emperors and kings to whom 
 they addressed their presumptuous requests, gene- 
 rally granted them, either from a desire of pacify- 
 ing the contentions and quarrels that arose between 
 civil and military magistrates, or from a devout re- 
 verence for the — order ; or with a view to aug- 
 ment their own authority, and to confirm their do- 
 minion by the good services of the bishops, whose 
 influence was very great upon the minds of the 
 people." * In the subsequent centuries the power 
 of the Romish hierarchy ascended even above that 
 of the emperors ; and led into captivity the kings 
 of the whole Latin world, as there will be occasion 
 to shew in commenting upon the following verses. 
 Thus it plainly appears that the Romish hierarchy 
 was at length entirely exempted from the civil 
 power, and constituted " another Beast," as it be- 
 came entirely independent of the secular Latin em- 
 pire. And this Beast came up out of the earth, 
 that is, the Latin clergy, which composed a part of 
 
 * Cent. X. Part ii. chap. 2. i 9. 
 
 u 
 
290 
 
 the earth, or Latin world, raised their authority 
 against that of the secular powers ; and_, in process 
 of time, wrested the superintendence of ecclesiasti- 
 cal affairs from the secular princes. As the seven- 
 headed Beast is represented as havinj^ ten horns, 
 which signify so many kingdoms leagTied together 
 to support the Latin church ; so the Beast which 
 rises out of the earth has also two horns, which 
 must, consequently, represent two kingdoms, for 
 if horns of a Beast mean kingdoms in one part of 
 the Apocalypse, kingdoms must be intended by this 
 symbol whenever it is used in a similar way in any 
 other part of this book. As the second Beast is 
 the spiritual Latin empire; the two horns of this 
 Beast denote that the empire thus represented is 
 composed of two distinct powers. These, there- 
 fore, can be no other, as Bishop Newton and Faber 
 excellently observe, than the two grand independ- 
 ent branches of the Romish hierarchy, viz. the La- 
 tin clergy, regular and secular. " The first of 
 these comprehends all the various monastic orders; 
 the second comprehends the whole body of paro- 
 chial clergy." These two grand branches of the 
 hierarchy originally constituted but one dominion, 
 as the monks as Avell as the other clergy were in 
 subjection to the bishops ; but the subjection of the 
 monks to their diocesans became by degrees less ap- 
 parent; and in process of time, through the influ- 
 ence and authority of the Roman pontiffs, they 
 were entirely exempted from all episcopal jurisdic- 
 tion, and thus became a spiritual power entirely in- 
 
291 
 
 dependent of that of the secular clergy, as will 
 fully appear from the following extract out of Puf- 
 fendorf's Introduction to the History of the Prin- 
 cipal States of Europe : '' Monks being as submis- 
 sive to their superior as private soldiers are to their 
 colonel^ the pope had nothing to do but brinj^ its 
 head into his views, and every convent was a 
 sort of regiment at his call. It having been found 
 by playing them off, if the interest of Rome re- 
 quired it, against the secular clergy as well as 
 against the laity, that they were of great service to 
 the Holy see, monks were towards the end of the 
 thirteenth century encouraged by the pope to throw 
 off all obedience to their diocesans, and to put 
 themselves under his immediate protection. This 
 point being gained, popes, in the quarrels which 
 from time to time arose between different orders, 
 as for instance between the Dominicans and Fran- 
 ciscans, always took care to carry it with so even a 
 hand that one could not oppress the other ; and as 
 neither could complain of partiality, both were 
 thereby kept firm in their interest. By degrees 
 monks engrossed alms and legacies, and interfered 
 in other things to the great prejudice of the secular 
 clergy. This, of course, drew upon them the envy 
 and hatred of bishops, whose interest was strongly 
 connected with that of the secular clergy ; but be- 
 ing assured of the pope's countenance these were 
 not regarded. Whenever any bishop disputed the 
 authority of a pope, monks, like so many bulldogs, 
 were set upon him : and the people, deluded by 
 U 2 
 
292 
 
 their hypocrisy, commonly sided with them. They 
 besides kept a watchful eye over the behaviour of 
 bishops, and constantly informed the generals of 
 their respective orders, who resided at Rome, there- 
 of; so that before any scheme to throw off his au* 
 thority could be brought to maturity the pope had 
 time to take his measures," * That we may have 
 the greatest assurance possible that the two-horned 
 Beast is the spiritual Latin empire, it is called in 
 Rev. xix. 20. '' the false-prophet," f '' than which," 
 as Bishop Newton justly observes, "' there cannot 
 be a stronger or plainer argument to prove, that 
 false-doctors or teachers were particularly design- 
 ed ;" for prophet, in the Scripture-style, is not un- 
 frequently used for a preacher or expounder of 
 God's word, as in Exod. vii. 1. " And the Lord 
 said unto Moses, See I have made thee a god unto 
 Pharaoh ; and Aaron thy brother shall be thy pro- 
 phet." In 1 Cor. xiv. this is unequivocally its 
 meaning, where the apostle says, '' He that prophe- 
 sieth speaketh unto men to edification, and exhor- 
 tation, and comfort. He that speaketh in an un- 
 known tongue edifieth himself; but he that pro- 
 phesieth edifieth the church." It hence follows 
 that the two-horned Beast, which rose up out of the 
 earth or Latin world, is an empire of false-doctors 
 or teachers ; and, consequently, it can be no other 
 than the spiritual Latin empire, or the Romish hie- 
 
 » Vol. II. pp. 84, 85. 
 
 1- Compare Rev. x\x. 20. with Rev. xUi. 12 — 17. 
 
293 
 
 rarchy. The second Beast is said to liave " two 
 horns hke a lamb." As lamb, in every other part 
 of the Apocalypse^ evidently means Christy who is 
 "^ the Lamb of God which taketh away the sin of 
 the world/' it must have a similar import in this 
 passa^^e ; therefore the meaning- here is evidently 
 that the two horns of the Beast^ or the regular and 
 secular clergy^ profess to be the ministers of Christ ; 
 to be like him in meekness and humihty ; and to 
 teach nothing that is contrary to godliness. The 
 two-horned Beast_, or spiritual Latin empire^ has in 
 reality the name^ and^ in the eyes of the Latin 
 world, the appearance, of a Christian power. But 
 he is only so in appearance, and that alone among- 
 his deluded votaries ; for when he spake, '" he spake 
 as a dragon." The doctrines of the false-prophet 
 are very similar to those contained in the old Hea- 
 then worship ; for he has introduced " a new spe- 
 cies of idolatry nominally different, but essentially 
 the same, the worship of angels and saints instead 
 of the gods and demigods of antiquity." * 
 
 * That the false-prophet spake like a Dragon is evident from 
 his adoration of multitudes oi fabulous saints and angels, as will 
 fully appear from the following account given by Dr. Mos- 
 heim of the state of the Latin church in the ninth century : 
 *' The ignorance and corruption that dishonoured the Chris- 
 tian church, in this century, were great beyond measure ; 
 and were there no other examples of their enormity upon 
 record, than the single instance of that stupid veneration that 
 was paid to the bones and carcases of departed saints; this 
 would be sufficient to convince us of the deplorable progress of 
 
294 
 
 '' And he exerciseth all the power of the first 
 beast before him ; and causeth the earth, and them 
 
 superstition. This idolatrous devotion was now considered as 
 the most sacred and momentous branch of religion ; nor did any 
 dare to entertain the smallest hopes of finding the Deity propi- 
 tious, before they had assured themselves of the protection and 
 intercession of some one or other of the saintly order. Hence 
 it was, that every church, and indeed every private Christian, 
 had their particular patron among the saints, from an apprehen- , 
 sion that their spiritual interests would be but indifferently ma- 
 naged by those, who were already employed about the souls of 
 others. The priests and monks set their invention at work, and 
 peopled, at discretion, the invisible world with imaginary pro- 
 tectors. They dispelled the thick darkness which covered the 
 pretended spiritual exploits of many holy men ; and they invented 
 both names and histories of saints that never existed, that they 
 might not be at a loss to furnish the credulous and wi etched 
 multitude with objects proper to perpetuate their superstition 
 and to nourish their confidence. — The ecck'siastical councils 
 found it necessary, at length, to set limits to the licentious su- 
 perstition of these ignorant wretches, who, with a view to have 
 still more friends at court, for such were their gross notions of 
 things, were daily adding new saints to the list of their celestial 
 mediators. They accordingly declared, l)y a solemn decree, 
 that no departed Christian should be considered as a member of 
 the saintly order, before the bishop in a provincial council, and 
 in presence of the people, had pronounced him worthy of that 
 distinguished honour. This remedy, feeble and illusory as it 
 was, contributed in some measure, to restrain the fanatical te- 
 merity of the saint-makers; but, in its consequences, it was the 
 occasion of a new accession of power to the Roman pontiff. 
 Even so early as this century, many were of opinion, that it was 
 proper and expedient, though not absolutely necessary, that the 
 decisions of bishops and councils should he confirmed by the 
 consent and authority of the Roman })ontiff, whom they consi- 
 
295 
 
 which dwell therein, to worship the fir9,t beast 
 whose deadly wound was healed." In the preced- 
 
 dered as the supreme and universal bishop; and this will not 
 appear surprising to any who reflect upon the enormous stiides 
 which the bishops of Rome made towards unbounded ambition 
 in this barbarous and superstitious age, whose corruption and 
 darkness were peculiarly favourable to their ambitious preten- 
 sions. It is true, we have no example of any person solemnly 
 sainted by the bishop of Rome alone, before the tenth century, 
 when Udalric, bishop of Augsburg, received this dignity in a for- 
 mal manner from John XV. It is, however, certain that before 
 that time the Roman pontiffs were consulted in matters of that 
 nature, and their judgment respected in the choice of those that 
 were to be honoured with sraintship; and it was by such steps as 
 these, that the church of Rome engrossfed to itself the creation 
 of these tutelary divinities, which, at length, was distinguished 
 by the title of Canonization. This preposterous multiplication 
 of saints was a new source of abuses and frauds. It was thought 
 necessary to write the lives of these celestial patrons, in order to 
 procure for them the veneration and confidence of a deluded 
 multitude ; and here lying wonders were invented, and all the 
 resources of forgery and fable exhausted, to celebrate exploits 
 which had never been performed, and to perpetuate the memory 
 of holy persons who had never existed. We have yet extant a 
 prodigious quantity of these trifling legends, the greatest part of 
 which were, undoubtedly, forged after the time cf Charlemagne 
 by the monastic writers. The same impostors, who peopled the 
 celestial regions with fictitious saints, employed also their fruit- 
 ful inventions in embellishing with false miracles, and various 
 other impertinent forgeries, the history of those who had been 
 really martyrs or confessors in the cause of Christ. — It was not 
 enough to reverence departed saiuts, and to confide iu their in- 
 tercession and succours; it was not enough to clothe them with 
 an imaginary power of healing diseases, working miracles, and 
 delivering from all sorts of calamities and dangers ; their bones, 
 
296 
 
 ing verse the two-horned beast was represented as 
 rising- out of the earth, that is, obtaining* gradually 
 
 their clothes, the apparel and furniture they had possessed dur- 
 ing their lives, the very ground which they had touched, or iu 
 which their putrefied carcases were laid, were treated with a stu- 
 pid veneration, and supposed to retain the marvellous virtue of 
 healing all disorders both of body and mind, and of defending 
 such as possessed them against all the assaults and devices of Sa- 
 tan. The consequence of this wretched notion was, that every 
 one was eager to provide himself with these salutary remedies, 
 for which purpose great numbers undertook fatiguing and peril- 
 ous voyages, and subjected themselves to all sorts of hardships ; 
 while others made use of this delusion to accumulate their 
 riches, and to impose upon the miserable multitude by the most 
 impious and shocking inventions. As the demand for relics was 
 prodigious and universal, the clergy employed all their dexterity 
 to satisfy these demands, and were far from being nice in the 
 methods they used for that end. The bodies of the saints were 
 sought by fasting and prayer instituted by the priest in order t© 
 obtain a Divine answer, and an infallible direction; and this 
 pretended direction never failed to accomplish their desires ; the 
 holy carcase was always found, and that always in consequence, 
 as they impiously gave out, of the suQ;gestion and inspiration of 
 God himself. Each discovery of this kind was attended -with 
 excessive demonstrations of joy, and animated the jjeal of these 
 devout seekers to enrich the church still more and more with 
 this new kind of treasure. Many travelled with this view into 
 the eastern provinces, and frequented the places which Christ 
 and his disciples had honoured with their presence, that, with 
 the bones and other sacred remains of the first heralds of the 
 Gospel, they might comfort dejected minds, calm trembling con- 
 sciences, save sinking states, and defend their inhabitants from 
 all sorts of calamities. Nor did these pious travellers return 
 home empty ; the craft, dexterity, and knavery, of the Greeks 
 found a rich prey in the stupid credulity of the Latin relic-hunt- 
 
more and more influence in the civil affairs of the 
 Latin \> orld. Here he is represented as having- ob- 
 tained the direction and management of all the 
 power of the first beast, or secular Latin empire, be- 
 fore him, evMTTiQv aurou, in his presence. That the 
 false-prophet had the extensive power here spoken 
 of is evident from history ; and it is well known that 
 the civil power was in subjection to the ecclesiastical, 
 ""Many (German) bishops," Mr. Lowman observes, 
 '' had larg-e temporal dominions bestowed upon 
 them, in which they had regal and sovereign au- 
 thority : they receive homage, and an oath of fealty 
 from their subjects : they have the supreme power 
 of the sword, both in the punishment of their sub- 
 jects, and in making war ; they coin money, levy 
 taxes, make treaties with the other princes of the em- 
 pire, and with foreign princes; and have all the rights 
 of sovereignty, in as full manner as any of the se- 
 ers, and made a profitable commerce of this new devotion. The 
 latter paid considerable sums for legs and arm^, skulls and jaw- 
 bones, (several of which were Pagan, and some not human,) and 
 others that were supposed to have belonged to the primitive wor- 
 thies of the Christian church ; and thus the Latin churches came 
 to the possession of those celebrated relics of St. Mark, St. 
 JanHO^, St. Bartholomew, Cyprian, Pantaleon, and others, which 
 they shew at this day with so much ostentation. But there were 
 many, who, unable to procure for themselves these spiritual 
 treasure's by voyages and prayers, had recourse to violence and 
 theft ; for all sorts of means, and all sorts of attempts, in a cause 
 of this nature were considered, when successful, as pious and 
 acceptable to the Supreme Being." Mosheim's Ecclesiastical 
 History, Cent. IX. Part ii. chap. 3, § 3, 4, 5, 6. 
 
298 
 
 cular electors, or princes of the empire. A very 
 great part of Germany is thus in the hands of eccle- 
 siastical persons, with temporal jurisdiction. It 
 has been observed, that in about seventy years, 
 from A. D. 936 to 1002, the three Othos, who suc- 
 ceeded each other in the empire, gave two-thirds of 
 the estates of Germany to ecclesiastics, as Heiss, a 
 Roman Catholic historian, informs us."* Extra- 
 ordinary as the power of the secular clergy has 
 been in all parts of the Latin empire, it was but 
 feeble when compared with that of the monastic or- 
 ders, especially the Mendicant Friars, who first 
 made their appearance in the early part of the thir- 
 teenth century. These friars were divided by Gre- 
 gory X. in a general council which he assembled 
 at Lyons in 1272, into the four following societies 
 or denominations, viz. the Dominicans, the Fran- 
 ciscans, the Carmelites, and the Hermits of St. Au- 
 gustine. All these orders were very highly vene- 
 rated by all orders and degrees of people. Mos- 
 heim's account of them is as follows : " As the pon- 
 tiffs allowed these four Mendicant orders the liberty 
 of travelling wherever they thought proper, of con- 
 versing with persons of all ranks, of instructing' 
 the youth and the multitude wherever they went; 
 and as these monks exhibited, in their outward ap- 
 pearance and manner of life, more striking marks 
 of gravity and holiness, tlian were observable in 
 
 * See his Paraphrase and Notes on the Revelation of St. 
 John, in loc 
 
299 
 
 the other monastic societies^ they arose all at once 
 to the very summit of fame^ and were reg-arded 
 with the utmost esteem and veneration throughout 
 all the countries of Europe. The enthusiastic at- 
 tachment to these sanctimonious heg-gars went so 
 far^ that, as we learn from the most authentic re- 
 cords, several cities were divided, or cantoned out, 
 into four parts, with a view to these four orders ; 
 the first part was assigned to the Dominicans, the 
 second to the Franciscans, the third to the Carme- 
 lites, and the fourth to the Augustinians. The peo- 
 ple were unwilling to receive the sacraments from 
 any other hands than those of the Mendicants, to 
 whose churches they crowded to perform their de- 
 votions, while living; and were extremely desirous 
 to deposit there also their remains after death ; all 
 which, occasioned grievous complaints among the 
 ordinary priests, to whom the cure of souls was 
 committed, and who considered themselves as the 
 spiritual guides of the multitude. Nor did the in- 
 lluence and credit of the Mendicants end here ; 
 for we find, in the history of this and the suc- 
 ceeding ages, that they were employed not only in 
 spiritual matters, but also in temporal and political 
 affairs of the greatest consequence, in composing* 
 the differences of princes, concluding treaties of 
 peace, concerting alliances, presiding in cabinet- 
 councils, governing courts, levying taxes, and other 
 occupations, not only remote from, but absolutely 
 inconsistent with, the monastic character and pro- 
 fession. We must not, however, imagine that all 
 
300 
 
 the Mendicant friars attained to the same decree of 
 reputation and authority; for the power of the Do- 
 minicans and Franciscans surpassed greatly that of 
 the other two orders^ and rendered them singularly 
 conspicuous in the eyes of the world. During 
 three centuries these two fraternities governed^ 
 with an almost universal and absolute sway^ both 
 state and church, filled the most eminent posts ec- 
 clesiastical and civil ; taught in the universities and 
 churches with an authority, before which all oppo- 
 sition was silent, and maintained the pretended ma- 
 jesty and prerogatives of the Roman pontiffs against 
 kings, princes, bishops, and heretics, with incredi- 
 ble ardour and equal success. The Dominicans 
 and Franciscans were, before the Reformation, 
 "what the Jesuits have been since that happy and 
 glorious period, the very soul of the hierarchy, the 
 engines of state, the secret springs of all the mo- 
 tions of the one and the other, and the authors or 
 directors of every great and important event both 
 in the religious and political world." * Hence it is 
 evident that the false-prophet has exercised " all 
 the poAver of the first beast in his sight," both tem- 
 poral and spiritual ; and therefore, with such asto- 
 nishing influence as this, over secular princes, it 
 was no difficult matter for him to cause '^ the earth, 
 and them which dwell therein, to worship the first 
 beast whose deadly wound was healed." That is, 
 he causes the whole Latin world to submit to the 
 
 * Cent. XIII. Part ii. chap. 2. § 23, 24. 
 
301 
 
 authority of the Latin empire, with the revived 
 western empire at its head; persuading* them that 
 such submission is beneficial to their spiritual inte- 
 rests, and absolutely necessary for their salvation. 
 Here it is observable, that both Beasts have domi- 
 nion over the same earth, for it is expressly said, that 
 the second Beast '' causeth the earth and them that 
 dwell therein to worship the first beast;" therefore 
 it is, as Bishop Newton and others have judiciously 
 observed, imperium in imperio, '" an empire with- 
 in an empire:" we have, consequently, the greatest 
 reason to assert, without running any risk of being 
 successfully contradicted, that the two Beasts con- 
 sist in the division of the great Latin empire, by the 
 usurpation of the Latin clergy, into two distinct 
 empires, the one secular, the other spiritual ; and 
 both united in one grand Antichristian design, viz. 
 to diffuse their most abominable system of idolatry 
 over the whole earth, and to extend the sphere of 
 their domination. 
 
 *' And he doeth great wonders, so that he maketh 
 fire come down from heaven upon the earth in the 
 sight of men, and deceiveth them that dwell on the 
 earth by the means of those miracles which he had 
 power to do in the sight of the beast ; saying to 
 them that dwell on the earth, that they should make 
 an image to the beast which had the wound by a 
 sword, and did live." In order to establish the 
 Latin church upon a foundation that can never fail, 
 the false-prophet '' doeth great wonders;" he at- 
 tempts the most wonderful and prodigious exploits. 
 
302 
 
 and is crowned with incredible success. He has 
 the art to persuade his deluded followers that the 
 clergy of the church of Rome are the only true mi- 
 nisters of Christ; that they have such great influ- 
 ence in the court of heaven, as to be able not only 
 to forgive sins, but also to grant indulgences in sin, 
 by paying certain stipulated sums. * He persuades 
 them too, that they can do works of supererogation, 
 that is, more than are absolutely necessary to sal- 
 
 * Mosheim in his Ecclesiastical History, Cent. XII. Part ii. 
 chap. 3, § 3, gives the following account of the doctrine of In- 
 dulgences : " The bishops, when they wanted money for their 
 private pleasures, or for the exigencies of the church, granted to 
 their flock the power of purchasing the remission of the penal- 
 ties imposed upon transgressors, by a sum of money, Avhich was 
 to be applied to certain religious purposes ; or, in other words, 
 they published indulgences ; which became an inexhaustible source 
 of opulence to the episcopal orders, and enabled them, as is well 
 known, to form and execute the most difficult schemes for the 
 enlargement of their authority, and to erect a multitude of sa- 
 cred edifices, which augmented considerably the external pomp 
 and splendor of the church. — When the Roman pontiffs cast an 
 eye upon the immense treasures that the inferior rulers of the 
 church were accumulating by the sale of indulgences, they 
 thought proper to limit the power of the bishops in remitting the 
 penalties imposed upon transgressors, and assumed almost en- 
 tirely, this profitable traffic to themselves. In consequence of 
 this new measure, the court of Rome became the general maga- 
 zine of indulgences ; and the pontiflFs, when either the wants of 
 the church, the emptiness of their coflFers, or the daemon of ava- 
 rice, prompted them to look out for new subsidies, published not 
 only an universal, but also a complete, or what they called a 
 plenary remission of all the temporal pains and penalties whick 
 the church had annexed to certain transgressions." 
 
303 
 
 vation.* He protends that an incredible number 
 of miracles have been wrought, and are still work- 
 ing, by the Almighty as so many evidences of the 
 great sanctity of the Latin church ; and the false- 
 prophet has such an astonishing influence over his 
 flock, as to cause them to believe all his fabulous 
 legends and lying wonders. He pretends, also, 
 (and is believed !) that his power is not confined to 
 this world ; that he is able by his prayers, to deliver 
 the souls of the deceased from what he calls purga- 
 tory, a place which he has fabled to exist for the 
 purification of sinful souls after their departure from 
 this world. His wonderful exploits in being- able to 
 induce men, possessed of reasonable faculties, to be- 
 lieve his monstrous absurdities, do not end here ; he 
 even " maketh fire come down from heaven in the 
 sight of men." This passage, with its context, 
 has been very generally understood of the pre- 
 
 * This monstrous doctrine is thus stated by Mosheim : " That 
 there actually existed an immense treasure of merit, composed of 
 the pious deeds, and virtuous actions, which the saints had per- 
 formed beyond what was necessary for their own salvation, and 
 which were therefore applicable to the benefit of others; that 
 the guardian and dispenser of this precious treasure, was the Ro- 
 man pontiff; and that of consequence he was empowered to as- 
 sign to such as he thought proper, a portion of this inexhaustible 
 source of merit, suitable to their respective guilt, and sufficient 
 to deliver them from the punishment due to their crimes. It is 
 a most deplorable mark of the power of superstition, that a doc- 
 trine, so absurd in its nature, and so pernicious in its effects, 
 should yet be retained and defended in the church of Rome," 
 Mosheim's Eccles. Hist. Cent XII. Part n. chap. 3, § 4. 
 
304 
 
 tended miracles of the Roinish church, as appears 
 in the foliovving- comment upon it by Bishop New- 
 ton : " He pretends, like other false-prophets, to 
 shew great signs and wonders, and even to call for 
 fire from heaven, as Elias did. His impostures too 
 are so successful, that he deceiveth them that dwell 
 on the earth by the means of those miracles which 
 he hath power to do. — Now miracles, visions, and 
 revelations, are the miglity boast of the church of 
 Rome ; the contrivances of an artful cunning- cler- 
 gy to impose upon an ignorant credulous laity. 
 Even fire is pretended to come down from heaven, 
 as in the case of St. Anthony's fire, and other in- 
 stances cited by Brightman and other writers on 
 the Revelation; and in solemn excommunications, 
 which are called the thunders of the church, and 
 are performed with the ceremony of casting down 
 burning torches from on high, as symbols and em- 
 blems of fire from heaven. Miracles are thought 
 so necessary and essential, that they are reckoned 
 among the notes of the catholic church ; and they 
 are alleged principally in support of purgatory, 
 prayers for the dead, the worship of saints, images, 
 and relics, and the like (as they are called) catholic 
 doctrines." But all this is insufficient to explain the 
 words of the text in a satisfactory manner : the 
 wonders which the false-prophet performs are real, 
 not pretended ; for it is said ^"^he doeth great won- 
 ders;" and that the fire which he is said to bring 
 down from heaven on the earth cannot be any de- 
 ception, it is added that he does it '' in the sight of 
 
305 
 
 men." Therefore, the Rev. G. S. Faber gives a 
 somewhat more probable interpretation, in the fol- 
 lowing words : '' Heaven is a §3 mbol of the church ; 
 the earth of the Roman empire ; and fire of divine 
 wrath. The darting, therefore, of fire out of the 
 church upon the secular empire seems to relate to 
 those solemn denunciations of the Divine wrath^ 
 which, under the name of interdicts and excommu- 
 nications, were hurled against those who dared to 
 oppose the authority of the beast." * The grand 
 defect in Mr. Faber's sclieme is, his misappre- 
 hension of the symbolical language ; for heaven 
 does not mean the church, neither the earth, the 
 Roman empire ; nor can j^/t be here an emblem of 
 Divine wrath, as it cannot for a moment be supposed 
 that the false-prophet could bring down the Divine 
 wrath upon those that opposed his doctrines. But 
 of all interpretations which I have seen of this pas- 
 sage that of Mr. Cunningham is by far the most 
 probable ; and is, as far as it goes, I believe, per- 
 fectly correct. " Fire in this passage," he observes, 
 *' may denote the fire of persecution, w hich the Pope 
 and his clergy caused to come down from the sym- 
 bolical heaven, or the civil government, to destroy 
 their enemies, all who disputed their authority." f 
 To have a perfect understanding of this passage 
 
 * Dissertation on the Prophecies, Vol. II. p. 317. Edit. Lond, 
 1810. 
 
 + See his Dissertation on the Seals and Trumpets, Londoiij 
 1813, 8vo, 
 
 X 
 
306 
 
 the meaning of the symbols contained in it must he 
 accurately determined. Fire, in Scripture, when 
 it signifies wrath, represents that species of indig- 
 nation which is attended with the destruction of 
 whatever is the cause of it. Thus the wrath of 
 God is likened in Psalm xviii. 1, 8. to fire: 
 " Then the earth shook and trembled ; the founda- 
 tions also of the hills moved and were shaken,, be- 
 cause he was wroth. There went up a smoke out 
 of his nostrils, and fire out of his mouth devoured." 
 In Jer. iv. 4, we have the following words : "" Cir- 
 cumcise yourselves to the Lord, and take away the 
 foreskins of your heart, ye men of Judah and inha- 
 bitants of Jerusalem ; lest my fury come forth like 
 fire, and burn that none can quench it, because of 
 the evil of your doings." But what fixes the mean- 
 ing of fire in Rev. xiii. 13. is the parallel passage in 
 Rev. xiv. 5. concerning the two witnesses, called in 
 verse 10 of the same chapter '' two prophets :" '^'^ If 
 any man will hurt them, fire proceedeth out of their 
 mouth, and devoureth their enemies ; and if any 
 man will hurt them he must in this manner be 
 killed." Therefore, the ftre which the false-pro- 
 phet bringeth down from heaxien upon the earth, is 
 the fiery indignation which he causes to come down 
 from the heaven or throne of the Latin empire upon 
 all those of the earth or Latin world that rebel 
 against his authority. All this has been fulfilled 
 in the Romish hierarchy: the Latin clergy have 
 denominated all those that oppose their authority 
 heretics; they have instituted tribunals to try the 
 
307 
 
 cause of heresy ; and all those that would not submit 
 to their idolatry^ they have condemned to various 
 kinds of tortures and deaths. It is very remarkable 
 that it is not said of tlie false-prophet^ as it is of the 
 two witnesses, that '' fire cometh out of his mouth" 
 upon the earth ; but that " he bringeth fire from 
 heaven on the earth ;" that is to say, the false-pro- 
 phet will only try the cause of heresy, and pass the 
 sentence of condemnation ; he will not suffer an 
 ecclesiastic to execute the sentence of the court ; 
 the destroying fire he causeth to come down from 
 the heaven or throne of the Latin empire ; secular 
 princes and maj^istrates must execute the sentence 
 of death upon all that are capitally condemned by 
 the spiritual power. " He maketh fire come down 
 from heaven ;" Jie compels secular princes to assist 
 him against heretics ; and if any rebel against his 
 authority, he immediately puts them under the bond 
 of the anathema, so that they are deprived of their 
 offices, and exposed to the insults and persecution 
 of their brethren. How the false-prophet has com- 
 pelled secular magistrates to destroy heretics will 
 be seen in the following Inquisitorial decree : " We 
 ordain, moreover, that the earls, barons, governors, 
 and consuls of cities and other places, shall take 
 their corporal oath at the admonition of the bishop, 
 and swear that they will faithfully, effectually, and 
 sincerely, assist the church, according to their office 
 and utmost power, against heretics and their ac- 
 complices, when required by the bishops : and if 
 they refuse to do this, let them be deprived of that 
 
 X 2 
 
308 
 
 Jionoiir which they possess, and never be raised to 
 any other. Let them further be excommunicated, 
 and their countries put under the interdict of the 
 church." * Thus the false-prophet deceives the 
 Latin world '" by the means of those miracles which 
 he had power to do in the sight of the beast." Un- 
 der the appearance of great sanctity (for he had 
 '" two horns like a lamb/' though '' he spake as a 
 dragon,") he persuades men to believe all his lying 
 doctrines ; and '" enforces his canons and decretals 
 with the sword of the civil magistrate ;" " saying to 
 them that dwell on the earth that they should make 
 an image to the beast which had the wound by a 
 sword, and did live." There have been various 
 opinions respecting what is meant by the image of 
 the Beast. Lord Napeir and Whiston suppose the 
 empire of Germany to be the image, because it is 
 an image of the old Roman empire : but this is the 
 revived head of the Beast, and the image is made 
 " to the beast which had the wound by a sword and 
 did live ;" therefore the revival of the head was pre- 
 vious to the making of the image ; and, conse- 
 quently, the German empire is not the same with 
 the image of the Beast. Vitringa supposes the Tri- 
 bunal of the Inquisition to be the image; but this, 
 I think, more unlikely than the former. Others 
 again think, that the image refers to the worship- 
 ping of images so prevalent in the Latin church. 
 But how can it be said of the image, in this sense, 
 
 * Limborch's History of the Inquisitiorij Book ii. chap. 15. 
 
309 
 
 that the false-prophet caused it not only to " speak/' 
 but also gave life to the image of the Beast, that it 
 " should cause that as many as would not worship 
 the image of the beast should be killed." The 
 truth is, the image of the Beast must designate 
 a person who represents in himself the whole 
 power of the Latin empire : therefore it cannot be 
 the emperor ; for though he was, according to his 
 own account, supremum Caput Christianitatis, 
 *" the supiTme head of Christendom ;" * yet he was 
 only the chief of the Germanic aristocracy ; and, 
 consequently, was only governor of the principal 
 power of the Latin empire. The image of the Beast 
 must be the supreme ruler of the Latin empire ; 
 and as it is through the influence of the false-pro- 
 phet that this image is made for the first Beast, it 
 necessarily follows, that this great chief mu.st be an 
 ecclesiastic. Who this is, has been ably shewn by 
 Bishop Newton in his comment on the following 
 verse : 
 
 " And he had power to give life unto the image 
 of the beast, that the image of the beast should 
 both speak, and cause that as many as would not 
 worship the image of the beast should be killed." 
 " The influence of the two-horned Beast, or corrupt- 
 ed clergy, is farther seen in persuading and inducing 
 mankind to make an image to the Beast which had 
 the wound by a sword and did live. — This image 
 
 * See Mandate of Maximilian I. in Dumont's Corps Diplo- 
 matique, Tom. IV. p. 46, dated Not. 12, 1503. 
 
510 
 
 and representative of the Beast is the Pope. He is 
 properly the idol of the church. He represents in 
 himself the whole power of the Beast^ and is the 
 head of all authority temporal as well as spiritual. 
 He is nothing' more than a private person, without 
 power, and without authority, till the two-horned 
 Beast, or corrupted clergy, by choosing; him Pope, 
 give life unto him, and enable him to speak and ut- 
 ter his decrees, and to persecute even to death as 
 many as refuse to submit to him and to worship 
 him. As soon as he is chosen Pope, he is cloathed 
 with the pontifical robes, and crowned and placed 
 upon the altar, and the cardinals come and kiss his 
 feet^ which ceremony is called adoration. They 
 first elect, and then they worship him ; as in the 
 medals of Martin V, where two are represented 
 crowning the Pope, and two kneeling before him^ 
 with this inscription^ Quem creant adorant, ' Whom 
 they create they adore.' He is the principle of unity 
 to the ten kingdoms of the Beast; and causeth^ as 
 far as he is able, all who will not acknowledge his 
 supremacy to be put to death." The great as- 
 cendency which the Popes have obtained over the 
 kings of the Latin world by means of the Romish 
 hierarchy is sufficiently marked in the history of 
 Europe. As long as the great body of the people 
 were devoted to the Roman Catholic idolatry it was 
 in vain for the kings of the different Roman Catho- 
 lic countries to oppose the increasing usurpations 
 of the Popes. They ascended, in spite of all oppo- 
 sition, to the highest ..pinnacle of human greatness; 
 
311 
 
 and even the authority of the emperors themselves 
 was estabhshed or annulled at their pleasure. The 
 high sounding- tone of the Popes commenced in 
 Pope Gregory VII. commonly known by the name 
 of Hildebrand, who aimed at nothing less than uni- 
 versal empire. The plans of this ambitious pon- 
 tiff were contrived for the purpose of raising the 
 church above all human authority, to a state of per- 
 fect supremacy and independence. One of his 
 boldest strokes, was the publishing " an anathema 
 against whoever received the investiture of a bi- 
 shopric or abbacy from the hands of a layman ; as 
 also against those by whom the investiture should 
 be performed." * This measure was the occasion 
 of a speedy quarrel between the Pope and the em- 
 peror Henry IV. which issued in the excommuni- 
 cation of the latter, and his deposition from all 
 power and dignity, regal or imperial, f '' By this 
 
 * Mosheim's Eccl. Hist. Cent. XI. Part n. chap. 2. § 14. 
 
 + The following is the form of excommuiiication issued by the 
 Pope against this emperor : " Beate Petre Apostolorum Prin- 
 ceps, inclina, quajsumus, aures tuas nobis ; et audi me servum 
 tuum, quem ab Infantia nutristi, et usque ad hunc diem de ma- 
 nu iniquorum liberasti, qui me pro tua fidelitate oderunt et odi- 
 unt. Tu mihi testis es, et Domina mea Mater Dei, et beatus 
 Paulus frater tuus, et omnes Saiicti, quod tua Sancta Romana 
 Ecclesia me invitum, ad sua gubernacula traxit ; et ego non ra- 
 pinam arbitratus sum ad Sedem tuam ascendere ; potiusque volui 
 vitam meam in peregrinatione finire, quam locum tuum pro glo- 
 ria mundi saeculari ingenio arripere ; Et ideo, ex tua gratii, non 
 ex meis operibus credo quod tibi placuit et placet, ut populus 
 Christianus tibi specialiter commissus mihi obediat, specialiter 
 
312 
 
 severe sentence, which filled a great part of Chris- 
 tendom with troubles and divisions^ and involved 
 
 .ii 
 
 pro vita tui mihi commissa ; et mihi tua gratia est potestas a. Deo 
 data ligandi atque solvendi in ccclo et In terra. Hac itaque fidu- 
 cia fretus pro Ecclesiae tuaj honore et dcfensione, ex parte omni" 
 potentis Dei Patris et Filii et Spiritils Sancti, per tuam potesta- 
 tera et auctoritateui, Henrico Regi Filio Henrici Imperatoris, 
 qui contra tuam Ecclesiara inaudita superbiii insurrexit, totius 
 Regui Teutonicorum, et Italiae gubernacula contradico ; et omnes 
 Christianos a vinculo juramsuti quod sibi fccere, vel facient, ab- 
 solve ; ut nullus ei sicut Regi serviat, interdico. Dignum est 
 enim, ut qui studet honorem Ecclesiae tua; imminuere, ipse ho- 
 norem amittat quern videtur habere. Et quia sicut Christianus 
 contemsit obedire, nee ad Dominura rediit quem dimisit, partici- 
 pando excommunicatis, meaque monita, quae pro sua salute sibi 
 misij te teste, spernendo seque ab Ecclesia tua, tentans earn scin- 
 dere, separando, vinculo eum anathematis vice tua alligo, et sic 
 eum ex fiducia tua alligo, ut sciant gentes, et comprobent quia 
 tu es Petrus, et super tuam Petram Filius Dei Vivi aidificavit Ec- 
 clesiam suam, et portae inferi non prevalebunt adversus earn." 
 '^ Blessed Peter, Prince of the Apostles, incline thine ears, we be- 
 seech thee, to us, and hear me, thy servant, whom thou hast nou- 
 rished from mine infancy, and to the present day hast liberated 
 from the hand of the unjust, who have hated and do hate me for 
 my fidelity to thee. Thou art my witness, and so is my lady the 
 mother of God, and blessed Paul thy brother, and all the saints, 
 that thy Holy Roman church has advanced me against my will to 
 the head of its government ; and I have not thought it robbery 
 to ascend to thy seat ; and I would rather end my life in pilgri- 
 mage than take possession of thy place for the secular glory of 
 the world. And, therefore, from thy favour, not of my works, 
 I believe that it hath pleased, and doth please thee, that the 
 Christian people specially committed to thee should obey me^ 
 specially for thy life committed to me ; and thy favour to me is 
 the power given by God of binding and loosing in heaven and in 
 
313 
 
 Germany in long and bloody wars, the emperor 
 was reduced to such extremity, that he set out for 
 Italy in the middle of winter, with his wife and son 
 Conrad, an infant, in order to humble himself be- 
 fore the pope, who was then at Canosa, a place be- 
 longing to Godfrey and Mathilda. — After a jour- 
 ney attended with great fatigue and inconvenience, 
 Henry alone was admitted ^v'ithin the outer gate^ 
 and given to understand that he had no favour to 
 expect, until he should have fasted three days^ 
 standing from morning to evening barefooted 
 
 earth. Relying, therefore, on thy faithfulness for the honour 
 and defence of thy church, on the part of Almighty God the 
 Father, Son,^ and Holy Ghost, by thy jjower and authority I 
 forbid the goTernment of the whole kingdom of the Germans and 
 of Italy to king Henry, the son of Henry the emperor, who hath 
 riseu tip with unexampled pride against thy church ; and I ab- 
 solve all Christians from the oath of allegiance which they have 
 made or shall make to him, that none may obey him as king. 
 For it is proper that he who studies to lessen the honour of thy 
 church should himself lose the honour which he appeareth to 
 have. And because as a Christian, he hath despised obedience ; 
 neither hath returned to the Lord whom he hath forsaken in hav- 
 ing fellowship with excommunicated persons, and in spurning 
 my admonitions, which, thou being my witness, I sent him for his 
 salvation, and also in separating himself from thy church, there- 
 by endeavouring to make a schism ; I, in thy stead, bind him 
 with the bond of the anathema, and thus I bind him in fidelity to 
 thee, that all the nations may know and acknowledge, that 
 thou art Peter, and upon thy rock the Son of the living 
 God hath built his church, and the gates of hell shall not prevail 
 against it." Dumont's Corps Diplomatique, Tom. I. p. 53. The 
 date of the instrument is A. D. 1076. 
 
314 
 
 among the snow, and then asked pardon of the 
 Pope for the offences he had committed : This pe- 
 nance was hterally performed ; and on the fourth 
 day, being the twenty-fifth day of January, (1077,) 
 he was forgiven, and received absolution." * Here 
 we have an evident instance of the power and great 
 influence of the Popes in the eleventh century : 
 but it was still further increased in the following 
 century ; for on the 28d of September 1122, the em- 
 peror Henry V. gave up all right of conferring the 
 regalia by the ceremony of the ring and crosier, 
 and that the chapters and communities should be at 
 liberty to fill up their own vacancies, f ^'he con- 
 test between the Pope and the emperors, which was 
 terminated in 1122, was renewed by Frederic L 
 
 * See Modern Universal History, Vol. XXIX. p. 85. 
 
 + That part of the instrument which contains this concession 
 is couched in the following words : " Ego Heinricus Dei gratia 
 llomanorum Imperator Augustus, pro amore Dei, et Sanctce Ro- 
 manae Ecclesia?, et Domini Papa; Callixti, et pro remedio animas 
 meae, dimitto Deo et Sanctis ejus Apostolis Petroet Paulo, sanc- 
 taeque Catholicce Ecclesiae, omnem investituram per annulura et 
 baculum, et concede in omnibus Ecclesiis, qua3 in Regno vel 
 Iraperio meo sunt, canonicam fieri clectionem et liberam conse- 
 crationem." I Henry, by the grace of God, emperor and Au- 
 gustus, for the love of God, and the Holy Roman church, and 
 our Lord Callixtus the Pope, and for the salvation of my soul, 1 
 give up to God and his holy apostles Peter and Paul, and to the 
 Holy catholic church, all right of investiture by the ring and 
 crosier; and I grant a canonical election and free consecra- 
 tion to be made in all churches which are in the kingdom or 
 my empire. Dumont, Tom. I. p. 66. 
 
315 
 
 surnamed Barbarossa ; but after a long warfare, 
 witJi various success^ the emperor was obliged to 
 sue for peace from the Pope ; in consequence of 
 which there was an interview between them at 
 Venice in 1176^ the account of which is as follows: 
 " The emperor's arrival in that city being notified^ 
 he was waited upon by the doge, the patriarch, 
 the bishop, the clergy, and the senate, who con- 
 ducted him in their barge to St. Mark's, where the 
 Pope and cardinals waited his coming. Frederic, 
 when he approached" the Pope, '' who was seated, 
 bowed down with profound reverence, and kissed 
 his feet ; a condescension which brought tears into 
 the eyes of the Pope, who clasped him in his arms, 
 and gave him the kiss of peace ; then, the emperor 
 taking him by the hand, they entered the church 
 together, where, mass being celebrated by the Pope 
 himself, Frederic reconducted him to the door, 
 still walking on his left hand, and held the stirrup 
 while he mounted his mule." * The custom which 
 the Popes adopted of dating their acts according to 
 the years of the emperor's reign, and impressing 
 the imperial image on their coins, had disappeared 
 in the time of Gregory VII. The domain of the 
 church was subsequently augmented by the famous 
 donation of the countess Matilda, who died in 1115, 
 and had invested the Pope with the province known 
 under the name of the patrimony of St. Peter, as 
 well as the Marc of Ancona, the duchy of Spoleto, 
 
 * See Modern Universal History, Vol. XXIX, p. 134. 
 
316 
 
 the Fcrrarcsc, and the Bolo^nese. Now the prse- 
 fecture of the city of Rome was given up to Pope 
 Alexander 111. by the peace concluded at Venice, 
 in 1177; and the emperor Frederic I. and several 
 emperors hesitated not to acknowledge the entire 
 independence of the Popes, in renouncing' formally 
 every right of sovereignty which their predecessors 
 had enjoyed over Rome and the ecclesiastical state. * 
 " The emperor Henry VI. son of Frederic Barba- 
 rossa, submitted to be crowned kneeling by the 
 Pope ; who, being seated in a magnificent chair, 
 as soon as he had crowned him kicked the crown 
 from his head again, to shew his right of taking 
 away as well as conferring- empire." f From this 
 time till the commencement of the fourteenth cen- 
 tury the power of the Popes was considerably in- 
 creased. The exorbitant power of the Popes was, 
 at last, so confirmed by length of time that it seemed 
 immoveable. The principal thing which contri- 
 buted to thie Pope's temporal grandeur was the 
 " excessive superstition that enslaved the minds of 
 the generality, together with the wretched igno- 
 rance and barbarity of the age, by which every 
 spark of truth was stifled, ^s it were, in its very 
 birth." In the thirteenth century the Popes " in- 
 culcated that pernicious maxim. That the bishop of 
 
 * See Koch's Tableau des Revolutions, Tom. I. pp. 139, 140, 
 and other historians. 
 
 + Puffendorf s Introduction to the History of the Principal 
 States of Europe, Vol. I. p. 331, Edit. Lond. 1764. 
 
^17 
 
 Rome is the supreme lord of the universe, and that 
 neither princes nor bishops, civil governors nor ec- 
 clesiastical rulers, have any lawful power in church 
 or state but what they derive from him. — In order 
 to establish their authority, both in civil and eccle- 
 siastical matters^ upon the firmest foundation, they 
 assumed to themselves the power of disposing' of 
 the various offices of the church, whether of a 
 higher or of a more subordinate nature, and of 
 creating bishops, abbots, and canons, according to 
 their fancy. — The first of the pontiffs, who usurped' 
 such an extravagant extent of authority was Inno- 
 cent III. whose example was followed by Honoring 
 III. Gregory IX. and several of their successors. 
 — In Asia and Europe Innocent III. disposed of 
 crowns and sceptres with the most wanton ambi- 
 tion. In Asia he gave a king to the Armenians; 
 in Europe he usurped the same extravagant privi- 
 lege in the year 1204; and conferred the regal dig- 
 nity upon Primislaus, duke of Bohemia. The same 
 year he sent to Johannicius, duke of Bulgaria and 
 Wallachia, an extraordinary legate, who, in the 
 name of the pontiff, invested that prince with the 
 ensigns and honours of royalty ; while, with his own 
 hand, he crowned Peter II. of Arragon, who had 
 rendered his dominions subject and tributary to the 
 church, and saluted him publicly at Rome with the 
 title of king. — The ambition of this Pope — extend- 
 ed his views farther, and resolved to render the 
 power and majesty of the Roman see formidable to 
 the greatest European monarchs, and even to the 
 
318 
 
 emperors themselves. When the empire of Ger- 
 many was disputed, towards the commencement of 
 this century, between Phihp duke of Suabia, and 
 Otho IV. third son of Henry Lion, he espoused, at 
 first, the cause of Otho, thundered out his excom- 
 munications ag'ainst Phihp ; and upon the death of 
 the latter^ which happened in the year 1209, he 
 placed the imperial diadem upon the head of his 
 adversary. But as Otho was, by no means^ disposed 
 to submit to this pontiff's nod, or to satisfy to the 
 full his ambitious desires, he incurred^ of conse- 
 quence, his lordly indignation ; and Innocent de- 
 claring' him, by a solemn excommunication, un- 
 worthy of the empire, raised in his place Frederic 
 II. his pupil, the son of Henry VI. and king of the 
 Two Sicilies, to the imperial throne in the year 
 1212. The same pontiff excommunicated Philip 
 Augustus, king of France, for having dissolved his 
 marriage with Ingerburg, a princess of Denmark, 
 and espoused another in her place ; nor did he 
 cease to pursue this monarch with his anathemas, 
 until he engaged him to receive the divorced queen, 
 and to restore her to her lost dignity. — But of all 
 the European princes none felt, in so dishonourable 
 and «evere a manner, the despotic fury of this in- 
 solent pontiff as John, sirnamed Sans Terre, king 
 of England. This prince opposed vigorously the 
 measures of Innocent, who had ordered the monks 
 of Canterbury to choose Stephen Langton, a Ro- 
 fnan cardinal of English descent, archbishop of that 
 
 see, notwithstanding the election of .Tdiiii de Grey 
 
 1 
 
319 
 
 to that hi^li dignity^ which had been reg-ularly 
 made by the convent ; and had been confirmed by 
 royal authority. The Pope, after havin<^ conse- 
 crated Langton at Viterbo, wrote a soothing' let- 
 ter in his favour, to the king", accompanied with 
 four rings, and a mystical comment upon the pre- 
 cious stones with which they were enriched. But 
 this present was not sufficient to avert the just in- 
 dignation of the offended monarch, who sent a body 
 of troops to drive out of the kingdom the monks of 
 Canterbury, who had been engaged by the Pope's 
 menaces to receive Langton as their archbishop. 
 The king also declared to the pontiff, that, if he 
 persisted in imposing a prelate upon the see of Can- 
 terbury, in opposition to a regular election already 
 made, the consequences of such presumptuous ob- 
 stinacy would, in the issue, prove fatal to the Pa- 
 pal authority in England. Innocent was so far 
 from being terrified by this menacing remonstrance, 
 that, in the year 1200, he sent orders to the bishops 
 of London, Worcester, and Ely, to lay the king- 
 dom under an interdict, in case the monarch re- 
 fused to yield and to receive Langton. John, 
 alarmed at this terrible menace, and unwilling to 
 break entirely with the Pope, declared his readiness 
 to confirm the election made at Rome ; but, in the 
 act that was drawn up for this purpose, he wisely 
 threw in a clause to prevent any interpretation of 
 this compliance, that might be prejudicial to his 
 rights, dignity, and prerogative. This exception 
 was rejected^ and the interdict was proclaimed. A 
 
320 
 
 stop was immediately put to Divine service ; the 
 churches were shut; the administration of all the 
 sacraments was suspended, except that of baptism ; 
 the dead were buried in the highways without the 
 usual rites, or any funeral solemnity. But, not- 
 withstanding; this interdict, the Cistertian order 
 continued to perform Divine service ; and several 
 learned and respectable divines, among* which were 
 the bishops of Winchester and Norwich, protested 
 against the injustice of the Pope's proceedings. 
 The interdict not producing the effects that were 
 expected from it, the pontiff proceeded to a still 
 farther deg"ree of severity and presumption ; and 
 denounced a sentence of excommunication against 
 the person of the English monarch. This sentence, 
 which was issued out in the year 1208, was followed 
 about three years after by a bull, absolving all his 
 subjects from their oath of allegiance, and ordering 
 all persons to avoid him, on pain of excommunica- 
 tion. But it was in the year 1212, that Innocent 
 carried his impious tyranny to the most enormous 
 length, when assembling a council of cardinals and 
 prelates, he deposed John, declared the throne of 
 England vacant, and wrote to Philip Augustus, 
 king of France, to execute this sentence, to under- 
 take the conquest of England, and to unite that 
 kingdom to his dominions for ever. He, at the 
 same time, published another bull, exhorting all 
 Christian princes to contribute, whatever was in 
 their power, to the success of this expedition, pro- 
 mising such as seconded Philip in this grand enter- 
 
321 
 
 prised the same indulgences that were g^ranted to 
 those who carried arms against the infidels in Pales- 
 tine. The French monarch entered into the views 
 of the Roman pontiff, and made immense prepa- 
 rations for the invasion of England. The king of 
 England^ on the other hand, assembled his forces, 
 and was putting himself in a posture of defence, 
 when Pandulf, the Pope's legate, arrived at Dover, 
 and proposed a conference in order to prevent the 
 approaching rupture, and to conjure the storm. 
 This artful legate terrified the king, who met him 
 at that place, with an exaggerated account of the 
 armament of Philip on the one hand, and of the dis- 
 affection of the English on the other; and per- 
 suaded him that there was no possible way left of 
 saving his dominions from the formidable arms of 
 the French king, but that of putting them under 
 the protection of the Roman see. John, finding 
 himself in such a perplexing situation, and full of 
 diffidence both in the nobles of his court and in the 
 officers of his army, complied with this dishonour- 
 able proposal, did homage to Innocent, resigned 
 his crown to the legate, and received it again as a 
 present from the see of Rome, to which he rendered 
 his kingdom tributary, and swore fealty as a vassal 
 and feudatory. In the act by which he resigned, 
 thus scandalously, his kingdom to the Papal juris- 
 diction, he declared that he had neither been com- 
 pelled to this measure by fear nor by force ; but 
 that it was his own voluntary deed, performed by 
 the advice, and with the consent, of the barons of 
 
 Y 
 
322 
 
 his kingdom. He obliged himself and his heirs to 
 pay an annual sum of seven hundred marks for 
 England^ and three hundred for Ireland, in ac- 
 knowledgment of the Pope's supremacy and juris- 
 diction ; and consented that he or such of his suc- 
 cessors as should refuse to pay the submission now 
 stipulated, to the see of Rome, should forfeit all 
 their right to the British crown." * — "" Martin IV. 
 who was advanced to the Papal chair in 1281, ex- 
 communicated Michael Palaeologus, the Greek em- 
 peror under the pretext of his having broken the 
 peace that had been concluded between the Greek 
 
 * Cent. XIII. Part ii. chap. 2, § 8. The following is an ex- 
 tract from one of the letters of Innocent III. to king John, 
 dated Nov. 4, 1213, when this monarch had yielded his king- 
 dom as a fief to the Roman church : '' Rex regum, et Dominus 
 dominantium Jesus Christus, Sacerdos in jeternum secundum or- 
 dinem Melchisedech, ita Regnum et sacerdotium in ecclesia sta- 
 bilivit, ut sacerdotale sit regnum, et sacerdotium sit regale, sicut 
 in epistola Petrus et Moyses in Lege testantur, Unum PR^EFieiENS 
 UNiVERSis, quem suum in terris Vicarium ordinavit, ut sicut ei 
 flectitur omne genu ccelestium, terrestrium, et etiam infernorum, 
 
 ITA illi OMNES OBEDIANT ET INTENDANT, ut sit unum oyile Ct 
 
 unus pastor." Jesus Christ, King of kings and Lord of lords, a 
 priest for ever after the order of Melchisedech, hath so estab- 
 lished a kingdom and priesthood in the church, that there may 
 be a sacerdotal kingdom and a royal priesthood, (as Peter in his 
 epistle and Moses in the Law testify,) one ruling over all, 
 whom he hath ordained his vicar in the earth, that as every 
 knee in heaven, earth, and under the earth, bows to the former, 
 so all should obey and be ruled by the latter, that there may be 
 one fold and one shepherd; See Vitringa on the Apocalypse, 
 p. 807, Franequerae, 1705. 
 
3^23 
 
 and Latin churches at the council of Lions. The 
 same insult v^as committed against Peter, king; of 
 Arragon, whom Martin not only excluded from the 
 bosom of the church, but also deposed from his 
 throne, on account of his attempt upon Sicily, and 
 made a grant of his kingdom, fiefs, and possessions, 
 to Charles, son of PhiHp the Bold, king of France. 
 It was during the execution of such daring enter- 
 prises as these, and while he was meditating still 
 greater things for the glory of the Roman hie- 
 rarchy, that a sudden death, in the year 1285, ob- 
 lisred him to leave his schemes unfinished." * The 
 point of time in Avhich the Romish bishops attained 
 their highest elevation of authority was, undoubt- 
 edly, about the commencement of the fourteenth 
 century. " Boniface VIIL who was Pope at this 
 time, outstripped all his predecessors in the high- 
 sounding tone of his public decrees. According to 
 him the secular power is but a simple emanation 
 from the ecclesiasiical ; and the double power of 
 the Pope, founded upon Holy Scripture, is even an. 
 article of faith. God, said he, has confided to 
 Saint Peter and to his successors two swords, the 
 one spiritual, the other temporal. The first ought 
 to be exercised by the church itself, and the other 
 by secular princes for the service of the church, 
 and according to the will of the Pope. The latter, 
 that is to say, the temporal sword, is in subjection to 
 the former ; and the temporal authority depends in- 
 
 * Cent. XITI. Part ii. chap. 2. § 16. 
 
 Y2 
 
324 
 
 dispensably on the spiritual power which judg-es it, 
 while God alone can judge the spiritual power. 
 Finally, he adds, it is necessary to salvation for 
 every human creature to be in subjection to the 
 Roman pontiflf."* Thus it plainly appears from 
 the preceding historical extracts that the two- 
 horned Beast, or Romish hierarchy, has given '' life 
 unto the image of the beast, that the image of the 
 beast should both speak, and cause that as many 
 as would not worship f the image of the beast 
 
 * ** Selon lul la puissance seculiere n'est qu'une simple ema- 
 nation de la puissance ecclesiastique, et le double pouToir du 
 pape, fonde sur I'Ecriture sainte, est meme un article de foi. 
 * Dieu,' disoit-il, ' a confie a S. Pierre et a ses successeurs deux 
 glaives, I'un spirituel et I'autre temporel. Le premier doit etre 
 exerce par I'eglise meme, et I'autre par les princes seculiers, pour 
 le service de I'eglise, et suivant la volonte du pape. Ce dernier, 
 c'est a dire le glaive temporel, est subordonne au premier, et 
 I'autorite temporelle depend indispensablement de la puissance 
 spirituelle qui la juge, pendant que Dieu seul peut juger la puis- 
 sance spirituelle. Enfin,' ajoutoit-il, ' il 6st de la necessite du 
 salut, pour tout creature humain d'etre soumis au pontife Ro- 
 main." See M. Koch's Tableau des Revolutions de I'Europe, 
 Vol. II. au commencement, Paris, 1807. 
 
 + That the Bishop of Rome has required universal homage, 
 and insisted upon implicit obedience to his authority from every 
 creature, is evident from passages already quoted in the preceding 
 part of this chapter, and is still further manifest from the follow- 
 ing collection of passages made out of the Canon Law by Arch- 
 bishop Cranmer : " He that knowledgeth not himself to be 
 under the Bishop of Rome, and that the Bishop of Rome is or- 
 dained by God to have primacy over all the world, is an heretick, 
 and cannot be saved. — Princes Laws, if they be against the ca- 
 
325 
 
 should be killed." Here it is very remarkable that 
 the false-prophet is not said to make an image for 
 
 nons and decrees of the Bishop of Rome, be of no force nor 
 strength.— All the decrees of the Bishop of Rome ought to be 
 kept perpetually of every man, withput any repugnancy, as God'9 
 word spoken by the mouth of Peter ; and whosoever doth not 
 receive them, neither availeth them the Catholick faith, nor the 
 four Evangelists, but they blaspheme the Holy Ghost, and shall 
 have no forgiveness. — All kings, bishops, and noblemen, that 
 believe or suffer the Bishop of Rome's decrees in any thing to be 
 violate, be accursed, and for ever culpable before God, as trans- 
 gressors of the Catholick faith. — The Bishop of Rome is not 
 bound to any decrees, but he may compel, as well the clergy as 
 laymen, to receive his decrees and canon law. — The Bishop of 
 Rome hath authority to judg all men, and specially to discern 
 the articles of the faith, and that without any counsel, and may 
 assoil them that the counsel hath damned ; but no man hath au« 
 thority to judg him, nor to meddle with any thing that he hath 
 judged, neither emperor, king, people, nor the clergy : and it is 
 not lawful for any man to dispute of his power. — The Bishop of 
 Rome may excommunicate emperors and princes, depose them 
 from their states, and assoil their subjects from their oath and 
 obedience to them, and so constrain them to rebellion. — The 
 emperor is the Bishop of Rome's subject, and the Bishop of 
 Rome may revoke the emperor's sentence in temporal causes. — 
 It belongeth to the Bishop of Rome to allow or disalloM' the em- 
 peror after he is elected ; and he may translate the empire from 
 one region to another. — 'The Bishop of Rome may appoint coad- 
 jutors to princes. — The Bishop of Rome may open and shut hea- 
 ven unto men. — ^The see of Rome receiveth holy men, or else 
 maketh them holy. — He that maketh a lye to the Bishop of Rome 
 coramitteth sacriledg. — To be senator, capitane, patrician, go- 
 vernour, or officer of Rome, none shall be elected or pointed, 
 Avithout the express license and special consent of the see of 
 Rome. — It appertaiueth to the Bishop of Rome to judg which 
 
himself, but to the seven-headed Beast. For It 
 was Phocas, the Greek emperor, who declared the 
 Pope universal Bishop, and thereby put him at the 
 head of the hierarchy ; but it was the false-prophet 
 that said " to them that dwell upon the earth that 
 they should make an imag'e to the beast that had 
 the wound by a sword, and did live." That is, they 
 preached up the Pope's supremacy over temporal 
 princes ; and, through the astonishing influence of 
 the Latin clergy on the minds of the people, the 
 Pope, at last, became the supreme sovereign of the 
 secular Latin empire ; and thus was at the head of 
 all authority temporal and spiritual. 
 
 *' And he caused all, both small and great, rich 
 and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their 
 right hand, or in their foreheads." As the Romish 
 hierarchy had the most powerful ascendancy over 
 the minds of all ranks and degrees of men in the 
 empire, it was no difficult matter for this great 
 body to cause " all, both small and great^ rich and 
 
 oaths ought to be kept, and which not. — ^The Bishop of Rome is 
 judg in temporal things, and hath two swords, spiritual and tem- 
 poral. — The Bishop of Rome may give authority to arrest men, 
 and imprison them in mannacles and fetters. — The Bishop of 
 Rome may compel princes to receire his legate. — It belongeth 
 also to him to appoint and command peace, and truce to be ob- 
 served and kept, or not. — The collation of all spiritual promo- 
 tions appertain to the Bishop of Rome.— The Bishop of Rome 
 may unite Bishopricks together, and put one under another at 
 his pleasure." See Burnet's History of the Reformation, Vol, 
 I. pp. 198—200, Dublin, 1730. 
 
327 
 
 poor, free and bond^ to receive a mark in their 
 right hand, or in their foreheads." The sig-nifica- 
 tion of this mark has been a httle contested. Lord 
 Napeir supposes the mark to consist in the different 
 crosses which the Papists marked themselves with : 
 his paraphrase is as follows : " The Pope caused 
 all his subjects of Christendom, to receiue and bear 
 in their hands and foreheads markes and tokens, 
 representing the name of the Latin empire; such 
 as the marks of -^^^ and crosses of sundry sorts." * 
 
 * Sir Isaac Newton's opinion of the mark is similar to that of 
 Lord Napeir ; and is thus expressed by Faber ; " As for the 
 mark of the Beast, which I conceive to be the cross, this mark, 
 no less than the name Latinus, is peculiar to the Beast that is, or 
 the Papal Roman empire, as contradistinguished from the Beast 
 that was, or the Pagan Roman empire. The ancient Roman 
 Beast despised the cross : but the revived Roman or Latin Beast 
 made it his peculiar badge not only in religious but civil mat- 
 ters, introducing it into his standards, blazoning it in the armo- 
 rial bearings of many of his great men, and displaying it upon 
 the crowns of all his ten horns ; insomuch that the crescent is 
 not more the mark of Turkey, or the dragon of China, than the 
 much abused symbol of the cross is of the Papal Latin empire. — 
 The name then of the Beast is Latinus ; the number of his name is 
 666 ; and his mark, — the cross." This interpretation of the mark 
 is certainly very ingenious, and Faber's quotation of tlw Rubric 
 of the Roman Missal appears to stamp it with great authority. It 
 is as follows : " In consecrating the baptismal water, the priest 
 is directed to divide it, in the form of a cross, with his extended 
 hand, which he is immediately to wipe with a cloth. Afterwards 
 he is again to touch the water with his hand ; next he is to 
 make three crosses upon the font : and then he is to divide the 
 water with his hand, pouring it out, crosswise^ to the four parts 
 
32S 
 
 Bishop Newton and many others consider that the 
 mark of the Beast is here spoken of in reference to 
 the "ancient custom of servants receiving the mark 
 of their master^ and soldiers of their general,, and 
 those who were devoted to any particular deity^ of 
 the particular deity to whom they were devoted. 
 These marks/' he adds, '' were usually impressed 
 on their right hand or on their foreheads ; and con- 
 sisted of some hieroglyphic characters, or of the 
 
 of the world. Having duly gone through this process, mutter- 
 ing all the while in such a manner as not to be heard by the bye- 
 standerSj he is to change his voice, and recite a short prayer in 
 the tone of reading. The prayer being ended, he breathes three 
 times upon the water in the form of a cross ; and then, resuming 
 the low muttering of his former incantation, he drops a little wax 
 into the water. Thrice he drops this wax into the water, and 
 thrice he takes it out ; blowing, at its last immersion, three 
 times upon the water in the cruciform figure of the Greek letter 
 ^^ Psi. Lastly, he mixes oil and cream with the water, moving 
 his hand to and fro in the shape of a cross; and the consecrated 
 coinmixtio, as it is termed, is thought to be then duly prepared 
 for the administration of the sacrament of baptism. Nor is the 
 cross used in this absurdly superstitious manner throughout the 
 initiatory rite of Christianity alone. Holt/ eggs and holj/ can- 
 dles, holi/ salt and holi/ water, go through a somewhat similar 
 ceremony ; and are marked in a similar manner, with the sign of 
 the cross. Nay, even when not immediately engaged in per- 
 forming the rites of his multifarious adoration, let a Papist be as- 
 sailed either by natural or supernatural terrors, and he will forth- 
 with almost mechanically commence the operation of crossing 
 himself in various parts of his body." Notwithstanding the very 
 great plausibility of this interpretation of the niark, it will be 
 found on more minute examination, that the cross is not the 
 mark of the Jieasfs name. 
 
329 
 
 name expressed in vulgar letters, or of the name 
 disguised in numerical letters according- to the 
 fancy of the imposer." But Dr. Mitchell, with his 
 feeble light of Aarslvog, appears to me to have as- 
 certained the meaning- of this passage with singular 
 precision : he observes that " the mark is the num- 
 ber of a name, and not of any time. So extensive 
 was this mark/' he continues, '' that not only the 
 people must be of the Latin church, but things al- 
 so must have it ; the scriptures, the laws of the em- 
 pire, the mass and offices of the church, must be in 
 Latin, and no other language," All that I can say 
 here is simply by way of comment upon the Doc- 
 tor's words. That the signification of the mark is 
 to be ascertained by means of the name is abun- 
 dantly evident from Rev. xiv. n. where it is said 
 that '' they have no rest day nor night, who wor- 
 ship the beast and his image, and whosoever re- 
 ceiveth the mark of his name." The name of the 
 Beast is the Latin empire ; the mark of his name 
 must, therefore, be his Latin worship. That this 
 is the meaning of the mark is demonstrable from 
 the circumstance that the two-horned Beast, or 
 false-prophet,, causes all descriptions of persons to 
 receive it ; and it is well known that the continual 
 employment of the Latin clergy is to enforce the 
 Latin idolatry upon their flocks. The mass and 
 offices of the church, which are in Latin, and con- 
 tain the sum and substance of their idolatrous wor- 
 ship, are of different kinds, and abound in impious 
 prayers to the Virgin Mary, and the saints and an- 
 
330 
 
 gels. They even assert that the mass is one of the 
 seven sacraments ; and preach that no creature can 
 be saved unless he implicitly receive it as such. In 
 fact the Latin worship is the universal badge of dis- 
 tinction of the Latin church from all other churches 
 on the face of the earth ; and is^ therefore, the only 
 infallible mark by which a genuine Papist can be 
 distinsruished from the rest of mankind. But the 
 two-horned Beast causes all to receive this '' mark 
 in their right hand, or on their foreheads." Right 
 hand, in Scripture language, is the symbol of the 
 main strength of the person of whom it is spoken. 
 Thus, in Ps. xvii. 7. God is said to save by his right 
 hand them which put their trust in him. In Ps. xx. 
 6. we read of the ""^ saving strength of God's right 
 hand." Ps. xxi. 8. it is said that " God's right hand 
 shall find out those that hate him." The meaning 
 of right hand is sufficiently obvious in the following 
 words in Ps. xlv. 3, 4. '' Gird thy sword upon 
 thy thigh, O most Mighty, with thy glory and thy 
 majesty. And in thy majesty ride prosperously, 
 because of truth, and meekness, and righteousness ; 
 and thy right hand shall teach thee terrible things." 
 The reception of the mark in the right hand must, 
 therefore, mean that all so receiving it, devote the 
 whole powers of their mind and body for the propa- 
 gation of the Latin worship, and in the eradication 
 of all they denominate heresies out of their church. 
 But some receive the mark on their foreheads. By 
 any thing being impressed upon the forehead is 
 meant, as has been observed upon a former occa- 
 1 
 
SSI 
 
 sion^ the public profession of whatever is inscribed 
 or marked upon it. Thus in Rev. ix. 4. it is said 
 of the locusts, that ^' it was commanded them that 
 they should not hurt the grass of the earth, neither 
 any green things neither any tree ; but only those 
 men which have not the seal of God on their fore- 
 heads." Here it is evident that the men who are 
 under the Divine displeasure are those who do not 
 make a public pr6fession of the unadulterated truths 
 of the Gospel. In Rev. xiv. 1. mention is made of 
 '' an hundred forty and four thousand, having his 
 Father's name, written on their foreheads." In 
 Rev. xxii. 4. of the servants of God it is said, '' And 
 they shall see his face ; and his name shall be in 
 their foreheads." In these texts the meaning of 
 God's name being written upon the forehead must 
 be, that it is evident to all that these men are the 
 children of God. In Ezek. iii. 7. the children of 
 Israel are called '' stiff of forehead and hard of 
 heart," that is to say, they are not ashamed of their 
 impieties, but make a public profession of them. 
 The mark of the Beast being received on the fore- 
 head must, consequently, mean that all those so 
 marked make a public profession of the Latin wor- 
 ship ; whereby it is evident to all that they form a 
 part of the Latin church. Many may be marked 
 in the right hand, which are also marked on their 
 foreheads ; but it does not follow that those marked 
 on their foreheads are also marked in their right 
 hand ; that is to say, it is not every individual that 
 complies with the Latin worship, who, to the utmost 
 
332 
 
 of his power, endeavours to propagate his religious 
 system. Therefore the propriety of the words, 
 " He causeth all, both small and great, rich and 
 poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their 
 right hand, or in their foreheads/' The Romish 
 clergy would have all their flocks zealous advocates 
 of their unholy doctrines ; but a passive obedience 
 to his Latin idolatry, will frequently exempt from 
 the displeasure of the hierarchy. 
 
 " And that no man might buy or sell, save he 
 that had the mark, or the name of the beast, or the 
 number of his name." Bishop Newton's comment 
 upon the first part of this verse is as follows : " If 
 any dissent from the stated and authorized forms, 
 they are condemned and excommunicated as here- 
 tics ; and in consequence of that they are no longer 
 suffered to buy or sell ; they are interdicted from 
 traffic and commerce, and all the benefits of civil 
 society. So Roger Hoveden relates of William the 
 Conqueror, that he was so dutiful to the Pope, that 
 he would not permit any one in his power to buy 
 or sell any thing, whom he found disobedient to the 
 apostolic see. So the canon of the council of La- 
 teran under Pope Alexander the third, made against 
 the Waldenses and Albigenses, enjoins upon pain 
 of anathema, that no man presume to entertain or 
 cherish them in his house or land, or exercise traf- 
 fic with them. The synod of Tours in France un- 
 der the same Pope orders, under the like intermi- 
 nation, that no man should presume to receive or 
 assist them, no not so much as to hold any commu- 
 
333 
 
 nion with them in selling" or buying, that being de- 
 prived of the comfort of humanity, they may be 
 compelled to repent of the error of their way. 
 Pope Martin V. in his bull, set out after the council 
 of Constance, commands in like manner, that they 
 permit not the heretics to have houses in their dis- 
 tricts, or enter into contracts, or carry on com- 
 merce, or enjoy the comforts of humanity with 
 Christians." *' In the ninth century the ecclesias- 
 tics were continually making use of this spiritual 
 weapon (excommunication) to repel any violence 
 or affronts offered them ; and time and familiarity 
 rendering offenders more and more obdurate, they 
 proceeded, by degrees, to rigours unknown to an- 
 tiquity ; as the excommunicating of whole families, 
 or provinces ; prohibiting the exercise of all reli- 
 gion therein ; and even accompanying the excom- 
 munications with horrible ceremonies, and direful 
 imprecations. In the tenth and eleventh centuries, 
 the severity against the excommunicated was car- 
 ried to its highest pitch : nobody might come near 
 them, not even their own wives, children, or ser- 
 vants ; they forfeited all their natural legal rights 
 and privileges, and were excluded from all kinds of 
 offices. Thus was an excommunicated king re- 
 duced to the condition of a private man. To ren- 
 der the excommunicated still more odious, the priest 
 was obliged to stop, and break off Divine service, 
 if an excommunicated person entered the church. 
 The form of excommunication in the Romish 
 church, as related by Feoret, i^ to take lighted 
 
334^ 
 
 torches, throw them upon tlie ground with curses 
 and anathemas, and trample them out under foot to 
 the rhiging of the bells,". The following is the 
 form of the excommunication : " By the authority 
 of x\lmig;hty God The Father, The Son, and The 
 Jloly Ghost, and of the blessed Mary, mother of 
 God, and of all the saints, we excommunicate, ana- 
 thematize, and put out of the pale of holy mother 
 church, those malefactors N. — leagued together, 
 and their accomplices ; and unless they repent, and 
 make satisfaction, thus let their light be extin- 
 guished before the living for ever and ever. So be 
 it. Amen, Amen, Amen," * The following is the 
 form of an interdict extant in a MS. of the church 
 of Beauvois, amongst the laws of Charles the Great. 
 ^' In the name of Christ, I Hildegarius, Bishop of' 
 Beauvois, by the authority of the Father, the Son, 
 and the Holy Ghost, and by the authority of St. 
 Peter, prince of the apostles, and by our own au- 
 thority, do excommunicate and interdict this churchy 
 and all the chapels belonging to it, that no one may 
 have power from Almighty God, or from St. Peter, 
 the prince of the apostles, from this day to sing or 
 
 * " Auctorltate Dei Patris omnipotentis, et Filii, et Spiritus 
 Sancti, et beatas Dei genetricis Maria?, omniumque sanctorum, 
 excommunicamus, anathematizamus, et a limitibus sanctas matris 
 ecclesiae sequestramus illosmalefactores, N. consentaneos, quoque 
 et participes ; et nisi resipuerint, et ad satisfaction em venerint, 
 sic extinguetur lucerna eorum ante viventem in SKCula saeculo- 
 rura. Fiat: Amen: Amen: Amen." See Rees' Cyclopaedia 
 on Excommunication. 
 
3S5 
 
 hear mass^ or perform any Divine office^ or receive 
 the tythe of Almighty God, without our special 
 leave. And w^hoever shall presume^ contrary to 
 these interdicts^ either to sing or hear mass, or to 
 perform Divine service in any place, or to receive 
 the tythe of Almighty God, let him be excommu- 
 nicated and accursed by the authority of the omni- 
 potent God, the Father, the Son, and the Holy 
 Ghost, and of St. Peter, and all the saints, and se- 
 parated from the society of Christians, and from the 
 doors of our holy mother church, where there is re- 
 mission of sins, and let him be anathema marana- 
 tha, to the end of the world, with the devils in hell. 
 So let it be, once, twice, thrice. Amen.'' * It is in 
 
 * In Christi nomine ego Hildegarius episcopus (Bellovacensis) 
 ex parte Patris, et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti, et ex parte sancti Pe- 
 tri Apostolorum principisj et ex nostra parte, excommunicamus 
 et interdicimus hanc ecclesiam, et oranes capellas ad illam ad- 
 spicientes, ut nullus habeat licentiam Dei omnipotentis, et sancti 
 Petri Apostolorum principis, ab hac die in antea missam cantare, 
 nee audire, nee ullo modo divinum officium ministrare, nee de- 
 cimam Dei omnipotentis accipere, nisi per nostram licentiam : et 
 quicunque contra haec interdicta aut missam cantare, vel audire, 
 Tel in aliquo loco divinum officium ministrare, aut decimam Dei 
 omnipotentis accipere prcesumserit, ex parte Dei Patris omnipo- 
 tentis, et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti, et ex parte sancti Petri atque 
 sanctorum omnium sit excommunicatus, et maledictus, et a con- 
 sortio Christianorum segregatus, et a limitibus sanctae matris ec- 
 clesiae, ubi fit remissio peccatorum, separatus; et sit anathema 
 maranatha usque in finem saeculi cum diabolis in inferno. Fiat, 
 fiat, fiat. Amen. Chandler's Edition of Limborch's History of 
 the Inquisition, Vol. II. Bookiii. chap. 1. 
 
336 
 
 this and similar ways that the false-prophet has ter- 
 rified the Latin world, and kept it in subjection to 
 the secular and spiritual powers. Those inter- 
 dicted by the two-horned Beast from all offices of 
 civil life, are such as have not " the mark, or the 
 name of the beast, or the number of his name," * 
 Bishop Newton supposes that, the name of the 
 Beast, and the number of his name, mean the same 
 thing ; but this opinion is totally irreconcileable 
 with Rev. xv. 2. where St. John informs us that he 
 *' saw as it were a sea of glass mingled with fire, and 
 them that had gotten the victory over the beast, 
 and over his image, and over the number of his 
 name, stand upon the sea of glass, having the harps 
 of God." f In this passage it is evident that the 
 
 * The disjunctive particle ^, " or," between ro yafa.y\La,^ 
 " the mark," and tl lyt>^a. rou ^rjcls, " the name of the beast," 
 is omitted in many excellent manuscripts, which has induced 
 some to suppose that the meaning of the passage is, that the 
 mark consists in the name of the Beast, or the number of his 
 name. *' And that no man might buy or sell save he that had 
 the mark, [to wit,] the name of the beast, or the number of his 
 name." But that this cannot be the meaning is evident from 
 the context; for the name of the Beast is the Latin empire; 
 therefore, if the mark be the same with the name of the Beast, 
 the mark must be the I^atin empire, a supposition which the 
 whole tenor of the prophecy shews to be absurd. Therefore the 
 mark is not the same with the name of the Beast ; though it re- 
 fers to the name, as is evident from Rev. xiv. 11. where we read 
 of ro ^a,pciy[/.x rou oVo'ju-aro; aurovj " the mark of his name," as 
 has been already shewn. 
 
 + The common reading of the passage is as follows : -fous n- 
 v.mta,s Ix TOO ^ij^/a xa« la rrj; shovo; av'fouy xa) U rou %apay/xa- 
 
337 
 
 Beast, his image, and the number of his name, are 
 perfectly distinct ; and, therefore, no two of them 
 can mean the same thing-. Hence what is meant 
 by the name of the Beast is entirely different from 
 that intended by the number of his name. But how 
 can this be, when it is expressly declared in the fol- 
 lowing- verse that the number of the Beast is QQ6 ; 
 which number is declared to be that of his name ? 
 
 tos aijrouy Ik rov a.piSf[ji,ou row ovdt^ccTos aurov ; *' them that had 
 gotten the victory over the beast, and over his image, and over 
 his mark, [and] over the number of his name." In the above 
 passage ek rou ^ocpdyiMaros ajrou, " over his mark," is certainly 
 an interpolation ; for it does not exist in many of the best Greek 
 manuscripts, among which are the Codex Alexandrinus, the Co- 
 dex Monachorum Sancti Basil!!, and the Codex Ephrem. The 
 reading of the Codex Alexandrinus, and nearly thirty others,, 
 is tovs yiKujvras sx rov ^^p/s xa» bk tyjI ukovos avroV) no.) ly. row 
 upiSfj^ov Tou oVo'aarof avrov^ " them that had gotten the victory 
 over the beast, and over his image, and over the number of his 
 name." A great number of the ancient versions also omit the 
 clause respecting the mark; among which are the Syriac, the 
 ^lilthiopic, the Coptic, all the Arabic, and the Vulgate : the read- 
 ing of the last of which is, eos qui vicerunt bestiam, et imaginem 
 ejus, et numerum nominis ejus; " them that had conquered the 
 beast, and his image, and the number of his name." It is from 
 the foregoing among other reasons tliat Beiigel, Wetstein, and 
 Griesbach, consider bk rov ^occdyfjia.ros ccvrou, a reading of very 
 little authority, all of whom have marked it out of the text 
 in their editions of the Greek Testament. It is very likely that 
 £X rou ^apdy^aros avrou was originally a marginal reference 
 made by some person who, from a mistaken view of Rev. xiii. 
 17. took the mark of the Beast to be the same with the number 
 of his name ; and that in process of time it crept into the text 
 through the carelessness of transcribers. 
 
 z 
 
338 
 
 The solution of the whole mystery is as follows : 
 Both Beasts have the same appellation ; that is to 
 say, the name of the first and second Beast is 
 equally "H AutIvyj Baa-iXsla., The Latin kingdom ; 
 therefore, by the '' name of the Beast" is meant 
 The Latin kingdom; and by the " number of his 
 name" is also meant The Latin kingdom. And as 
 it has been already proved that the name of the 
 Beast is perfectly distirct from the number of his 
 name, it necessarily follows that one of the Beasts 
 is designated by the name of the Beast, and that the 
 other is distinguished from it by the number of his 
 na7ne; hence only one of the Beasts is numbered; 
 that which is not numbered is termed '' the name 
 of the beast," and the numbered Latin empire is 
 denominated '" the number of his name;" i. e. as 
 both Beasts have the same name, 666, the number 
 contained in the name of the Beast not counted, 
 stands for the Latin kingdom which is numbered, 
 exactly agreeable to an ancient practice of repre- 
 senting names by the numbers contained in them, 
 many examples of which have been already given 
 in the second chapter of this work. Therefore, the 
 meaning of the whole passage is, that those whom 
 the false-prophet does not excommunicate, or put 
 out of the pale of his church, have "^the mark" of 
 the Beast, that is, are genuine Papists, or such as 
 are actively or passively obedient to his Latin ido- 
 latry. Those also escape his ecclesiastical interdicts 
 which have " the name of the beast, or the number 
 of his name." By a person having the name of the 
 
339 
 
 Beast is evidently mean,t, his being- in subjection to 
 the Latin empire, and^ consequently, an individual 
 of the Latin world; therefore tliose tha,t have the 
 name of the Beast, or the number of his name, are 
 those that are subjects of the Latin empire, or of 
 the numbered Latin empire, that is to say, who are 
 in subjec-tion to the Latin empire secular or spiri- 
 tual. All that were in subjection to the secular or 
 spiritual power were not Papists in heart ; henc^ 
 the propriety of distinguishing* those which have 
 the mark, from those which have the^name of the 
 Beast, or the number of his name. But which of 
 the two Beasts it is which God has numbered has 
 been not a little contested. That it is the first 
 Beast which is numbered has, I believe, been the 
 prevailing' opinion. On this side are Lord Napeir, 
 Whiston, Bishop Newton, Faber, * and others. 
 Among- those that have supposed the second Beast 
 to be the one which is numbered are Dr. Henry 
 More, Pyle, Kershaw, Ga!lv)way, Bicheno, &c. Dr. 
 Gill and Reader assert, that both Beasts have the 
 same num.ber, and that the name is AareTvo^, The 
 reason of these different opinions arises from its 
 not being- directly expressed in the. following" words^ 
 which is the numbered l^Qixst,:. "Here is wisdom.: 
 
 * It is rather singular that Mr., Faber should assert so posi- 
 lively that the nuraber is that of the uame pf the iirst Beast, 
 when he himself says in his coufoiits to the secovid volume of his 
 Dissertations on the Prophecies, p. 17/ that " the two apocalyp- 
 tic Beasts — are the two contemporary Latin empires secular and 
 spiritual." 
 
 Z 2 
 
340 
 
 let him that hath a mind count the number of the 
 beast:" for if these words be taken by themselves 
 without any reference to other passages in the 
 Apocalypse, they may allude to either of the two 
 Beasts ; and, at the same time, it is evident that 
 only one can be numbered, though both equally 
 contain 666, because both are called by precisely 
 the same name ; for it is said " Let him that hath a 
 mind count the number of the beast," not of the 
 Beasts; consequently, though it is certain that the 
 numbered Beast is the Latin empire ; it is impos- 
 sible from the mere name to say whether it is the 
 Latin empire secular or spiritual. Hence the ne^ 
 cessity of determining which of the two Beasts God 
 has computed. That it is the second Beast which 
 is numbered is evident from three different passages 
 in the Apocalypse. The first is in Rev. xiii. 17. 
 where it is said " that no man might buy or sell 
 save he that had the mark, or the name of the beast^ 
 or the number of his name." Here the name of the 
 Beast is mentioned before the number of his name, 
 which is a presumptive evidence that the name of 
 the Beast refers to the first Beast, and the number 
 of his name to the second. The second passage is 
 in Rev. xv. 2. where mention is made of "^ them 
 that had g^otten the victory over the beast, and over 
 his image, and over the number of his name." 
 That, here styled The Beast, is evidently the secular 
 Latin empire : for it was to this that the two-horned 
 Beast made an image; consequently, there can be 
 no doubt that '* the number of his name," or the 
 
341 
 
 numbered Latin empire^ is the two-horned Beast^ 
 or false-prophet. Besides, the saints of God are 
 represented as g-etting the victory over the Beast 
 as well as over the number of his name, which is a 
 demonstration that two distinct Antichristian em- 
 pires are here spoken of, for otherwise it would be 
 tautology. It is also well known that there are only 
 two Beasts mentioned in the Revelation; conse- 
 quently, as it has been already shewn that the one 
 here styled The Beast, is the secular Latin empire, 
 it is impossible that " the number of his name" can 
 be any other than the false-prophet. Again, the 
 saints of God are said to be victorious over '" the 
 number of his name," or &^&; that is, over the 
 empire represented by this number; which number 
 is declared to be contained in the name of the 
 Beast for which an image was made. Conse- 
 quently both Beasts have the same name, the num- 
 ber is found by summing up the values of the let- 
 ters of this name ; and 666 distinguishes one Beast 
 from the other. We have, therefore, the fullest 
 evidence, that the numbered Beast is the spiritual 
 Latin empire. That the two-horned Beast is the 
 one which is numbered, is farther evident from a 
 comparison of this passage with Rev. xix. 20. In 
 the latter passage the words are '' And the beast 
 was taken, and with him the false-prophet that 
 wrought miracles before him, with which he de- 
 ceived them that had received the mark of the beast, 
 and them that worshipped his image. These both 
 were cast alive into a lake of fire burning with 
 
342 
 
 brimstone." Here nothin^i;- is said of the "" number 
 of his name/' which is so particularly mentioned 
 in Rev. xv. 2. And in Rev. xv. 2. nothing is men- 
 tioned of the false-prophet ; the reason of -which 
 can only be that wliat is termed in one passage 
 ^' the number of his name" is in its parallel one 
 called " the faiee-prophet." Hence the iwo- horned 
 Beast or false-prophet is also designated by the 
 phrase " the number of his name," and, conse- 
 quently, it is this Beast which is numbered. But 
 what adds the last deg'ree of certainty to this ques- 
 tion is the passage in Rev. xiii. 18. which immedi- 
 ately follows the one which is now under conside- 
 ration. " Here is wisdom : let him that hath a mind 
 count the number of the Beast; for^it is the num- 
 ber of a man : and his number is Six hundred three- 
 score and six." Here is a key by which the sacred 
 mystery can alone be unlocked; wherefore '^Met 
 him that hath a mind count the number of the 
 beast ;" let a kingdom be found out which contains 
 the precise number of 666 ; for this must be infal- 
 libly the name of the Beast. ''H Aarlvr) Bota-iXsloi, 
 The Latin kingdom, has this number. But both 
 Beasts are called by this name : which is, therefore, 
 the one that is numbered? The text says, "the 
 number of the beast — is the number of a man ;" 
 Consequently; the numbered Beast must be a man; 
 that is to say, it must be represented elsewhere 
 in the Revelation under this emblem, for in no 
 Other sense can an empire be denominated a 
 man; therefore it is not the ten-horned Beast, for 
 
343 
 
 this is uniformly styled The Beast in every part of 
 the Apocalypse where there has been occasion to 
 mention this power. It can, therefore, be no 
 other than the two-horned Beast, or Romish hie- 
 rarchy, which is likewise named The False-pro- 
 phet. * 
 
 * See Rev. xvi. 13. xix. 20. and xx. 10. 
 
344 
 
 CHAP VIII 
 
 Explanation of Daniel's vision of the Ram and 
 He-goat. 
 
 AS in the preceding part of this work the twelfth, 
 seventeenth, and thirteenth chapters of the Reve- 
 lation have been considered at full length, and 
 shewn to contain a prophecy of the various events 
 that would take place in the Latin world, or west- 
 ern wing of the great Roman empire, it will be 
 highly proper in this place to consider the predic- 
 tions concerning the remaining part of the Roman 
 world. That the eighth chapter of Daniel is a pro- 
 phetic account of the Greek empire and Greek 
 church will fully appear in the sequel. 
 
 *' In the third year of the reign of king Belshazzar 
 a vision appeared unto me, even unto me Daniel, af- 
 ter that which appeared unto me at the first. And I 
 saw in a vision ; (and it came to pass, when I saw, that 
 I was at Shushan in the palace, which is in the pro- 
 vince of Elam ;) and I saw in a vision, and I was by 
 the river of Ulai. Then I lifted up mine eyes, 
 and saw, and, behold, there stood before the river 
 a ram which had two horns : and the two horns 
 
345 
 
 were high ; but one was higher than the other,, 
 and the higher came up last. I saw the ram push- 
 ing westward, and northward, and southward ; so 
 that no beasts might stand before him, neither was 
 there any that could dehver out of his hand ; but 
 he did according to his will, and became great. 
 And as I was considering, behold an he-goat came 
 from the west, on the face of the whole earth, and 
 touched not the ground; and the goat had a notable 
 horn between his eyes. And he came to the ram 
 that had two horns, which I had seen standing be- 
 fore the river, and ran unto him in the fury of his 
 power. And I saw him come close unto the ram, 
 and he was moved with choler against him, and 
 smote the ram, and brake his two horns ; and there 
 was no power in the ram to stand before him, but 
 he cast him down to the ground, and stamped upon 
 him : and there was none that could deliver the 
 ram out of his hand. Therefore the he-goat waxed 
 very great: and when he was strong, the great 
 horn was broken ; and for it came up four notable 
 ones toward the four winds of heaven." These 
 first eight verses, together with the angel's expla- 
 nation of thetn contained in the 20th, 21st, and 
 22d verses of the same chapter, are all that have 
 been properly understood by commentators, of 
 Daniel's vision of the ram and he-goat. And as 
 these have been so ably explained by Mr. Mede, 
 Bishop Newton, and others, it is unnecessary to 
 enter here into any great detail, as the celebrated 
 works of these great men are already before the 
 
346 
 
 public. It is, nevertheless, absolutely requisite 
 that a few jvencral observations should be here made 
 upon them in order that the remaining part of the 
 prophecy may be appropriately and perspicuously 
 introduced. That the ram with two horns repre- 
 sents the Medo- Persian empire no person will at-, 
 tempt to call in question, as the angel himself, 
 verse 20, says expressly to Daniel, " The ram 
 which thou sawest having two horns are the kings 
 of Media and Persia." The question is. Why 
 should this empire have been called a ram. The 
 answer which Bishop Newton and others have 
 given appears to me sufficiently decisive, " that it 
 was usual for the king of Persia to wear a ram's 
 head made of gold, and adorned with precious 
 stones, instead of a diadem ; for so Ammianus Mar- 
 cellinus describes him. Bishop Chandler and others 
 farther observe, that rams' heads with horns, one 
 higher and the other lower, are still to be seen on 
 the pillars of Persepolis." * That the Medo-Per- 
 sian empire is called a ram on account of its appro- 
 priating this animal to itself in the manner already 
 described is not without precedent in Scripture ; 
 for the Roman empire is evidently designated by an 
 eagle in the Apocalypse; and even Christ's words, 
 " Wheresoever the carcase is thither will the eagles 
 be gathered together," must be understood of the 
 Romans who were the executioners of God's ven- 
 geance upon the Jewish nation. Of the ram it is; 
 
 * See Bishop Newton on Dan. viii. and Wetstein on Rev. 
 xiii. 11. 
 
347 
 
 said that it had two horns_, that is^ the empire re- 
 presented by it was composed of the two monarchies 
 of Media and Persia. One horn was higher than 
 the other to shew that the kingdom of the Medes 
 and that of the Persians were not equally powerful. 
 The higher came up last, that is to say, the empire 
 of the Persians, which was after that of the Medes, 
 was the most powerful of the two. Cyrus, the 
 founder of the Medo- Persian empire, " was son of 
 Cambyses, king of Persia, and by his mother Man- 
 dane was grandson of Astyages king of Media ; 
 and afterwards marrying the daughter and only 
 child of his uncle Cyaxares king of Media, he suc- 
 ceeded to both crowns, and united the kingdoms of 
 Media and Persia." * The ram, or Medo-Persian 
 empire, was seen " pushing westward, and north- 
 ward, and southward," that is, this dominion was 
 rapidly increased in these three directions. First 
 towards the west by the conquest of the kingdom of 
 Lydia by Cyrus B.C. 548, and of that of Babylon, 
 B. C. 538; secondly towards the north, by subju- 
 gating the Armenians, Cappadocians, and various 
 other nations ; lastly, towards the south by the con- 
 quest of Egypt by Cambyses, B. C. 525. It is true 
 that the Persians conquered India, in the time of 
 Darius, which lay to the east of them; but this is 
 not mentioned in the prophecy. Bishop Newton 
 supposes, " because those c';untries lay very re- 
 mote from the Jews, and were of little concern or 
 
 * Bishop Newton on Dan. viii. 
 
348 
 
 consequence to them ; but this reason does not ap- 
 pear sufficient. The reason seems to be in the 
 words " pushing", so that no beasts might stand be- 
 fore him." The Persians pushed^ thatis^ obtained 
 immense power with great rapidity towards the 
 west, north, and south ; but their conquests in the 
 east were not executed with that rapidity which 
 marked the commencement of their empire ; and 
 consequently they could not be said, in this sense, 
 to push eastward. As no beasts, or dominions, 
 could stand before the ram, he consequently did ac- 
 cording to his will, and became great ; the Medo- 
 Persian empire was, in its time, the most mighty 
 empire in the world. 
 
 As Daniel was considering the exploits of the 
 ram, he saw an he-goat come from the west, on 
 the face of the whole earth. This the angel says, 
 verse 26, '^'^is the king of Grecia;" so that there 
 can be no difficulty in the application. The king- 
 dom of the Greeks is called a he-goat, evidently 
 from the circumstance of the goat being its ensign 
 or standard. Bishop Newton says, " A goat is very. 
 properly made the type of the Grecian or Macedo- 
 nian empire, because the Macedonians at first, 
 about two hundred years before Daniel, were de- 
 nominated iEgeadae, or the goat's people; and 
 upon this occasion, as heathen authors report. 
 Caranus, their first king, going with a great mul- 
 titude of Greeks to seek new habitations in Mace- 
 donia, was commanded by the oracle to take the 
 goats for his guides to empire : and afterwards see- 
 
349 
 
 itig a herd of goats flying from a violent storm^ he 
 followed them to Edessa, and there fixed the seat of 
 his empire, made the goats his ensigns or standards, 
 and called the city iEgese, or the goat's town, and 
 the people iEge^dae, or the goat's people." This 
 he-goat came from the Avest ; and it is well known 
 that the kingdom of the Greeks was situated to the 
 west of the Persian empire. He came upon " the 
 face of the whole earth." The earth here means 
 the Persian world ; therefore the goat came into 
 the Persian dominions. He is represented as not 
 touching the ground, to denote, as Bishop Newton 
 observes, the great rapidity of his marches and 
 conquests. The goat had, also, '' a notable horn 
 between his eyes." This the angel explains to be 
 the first king ; consequently the kingdom of Alex- 
 ander is intended ; as Alexander was not only the 
 first king of the Greek or Macedonian empire pro- 
 perly so called; but the regal power was also the 
 first form of government among the Greeks. The 
 goat '' came to the ram that had two horns — and 
 ran unto him in the fury of his power." This is a 
 striking figure of the rapidity with which the 
 Greeks under Alexander came upon the Persians. 
 The goat also '' came close unto the ram, and he 
 was moved with choler against him, and smote the 
 ram, and brake his two horns ; and there was no 
 power in the ram to stand before him, but he cast 
 him down to the ground, and stamped upon him ; 
 and there was none that could deliver the ram out 
 of his hand." The complete conquest of the two- 
 
350 
 
 horned ram by the he-i^oat^ or, in other vvords^ the 
 destruction of the Persian empire by the Greeks, 
 was accomplished by Alexander in three great bat- 
 tles ; the first fought at the river Granicus, B. C 
 334, the second at Issus, B. C. 332, and the last at 
 the village of Guagamela near Arbela, B. C. 331. 
 Thus the ram was stamped upon by the goat ; and 
 there was none that couUl deliver the ram out of his 
 hand ; for the Macedonian empire '' waxed very 
 great/' was established upon the ruins of the Per- 
 sian, and became in its stead the most powerful 
 monarchy in the world. When the he-goat, or 
 Greek empire, " was strong," that is, attained to 
 its highest summit of power, '" the great horn," or 
 dynasty of Alexander, '' was broken, and for it 
 came up four notable horns towards the four winds 
 of heaven," that is to say, the Greek empire was 
 divided into four notable kingdoms. That this is 
 the meaning of this passage is plain from the an- 
 gel's words, verse 22, " Now tliat being broken, 
 whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall 
 stand up out of the nation, but not in his power." 
 How tliis was accomplished may be seen IVom the 
 following brief sketch of history given by Bishop 
 Newton : '" The empire of the goat was in its full 
 strength when Alexander died of a fever at Baby- 
 lon. He was succeeded in the throne by his natu- 
 ral brother Phiiip Aridasus, andr)5y his own two 
 sons Alexander ^Egus, and Hercules : but in the 
 space of about fifteen years they were all murdered, 
 and then tlie first horn, or kingdom, was entirely 
 
351 
 
 broken. The royal family being- thus extinct, Ih-e 
 governors of provinces, who had usurped the 
 power^, assumed the title of kings : and by the de- 
 feat and death of Antigonus in the battle of Ipsus, 
 they were reduced to four, Cassander^ Lysimachus, 
 Ptolemy, and Seleucus, who parted Alexander's do- 
 minions between them, and divided and settled them 
 into four kingdoms." It is said that these four 
 kingdoms are not in the power of the goat, that is, 
 they are not united together in one common inte- 
 rest, as the different independent states of Greece 
 used to be, that sent members to the Amphictyonic 
 council. These four kingdoms are totally inde- 
 pendent of each other in every sense of the word. 
 
 The following part of the vision relates to the 
 rising up of a little' horn out of one of the four 
 kingdoms of the Greeks : '' And out of one of them 
 came forth a little horn, which waxed exceeding 
 great toward the south, and toward the east, and 
 toward the pleasant land. And it waxed great, 
 even to the host of heaven ; and it cast down some 
 ;of the host and of the stars to the ground, and 
 stamped upon them. Yea, he magnified himself 
 jeven to the prince of the host, and by him the daily 
 sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his sanc- 
 tuary was cast down. And an host was given him 
 against the daily sacrifice by reason of transgres- 
 sion, and it cast down the truth to the ground ; and 
 it practised, and prospered." These verses are 
 thus explained by the angel : '' And in the latter 
 iime of their kingdom, when the transgressors are 
 
352 
 
 come to the full^ a king" of fierce countenance, and 
 understanding dark sentences, shall stand up. 
 And his power shall be mighty, but not by his own 
 power : and he shall destroy wonderfully, and shall 
 prosper, and practise, and shall destroy the mighty 
 and the holy people. And through his policy also 
 he shall cause craft to prosper in his hand ; and he 
 shall magnify himself in his heart, and by peace 
 shall destroy many : he shall also stand up against 
 the Prince of princes ; but he shall be broken with- 
 out hand." In order to understand either Daniel's 
 vision of the little horn, or the angel's interpreta- 
 tion of it, it is necessary to ascertain what is meant 
 by the indignation spoken of in the following 
 words : " And it came to pass, when I, even I Da- 
 niel, had seen the vision, and sought for the mean- 
 ing, then, behold, there stood before me as the ap- 
 pearance of a man. And I heard a man's voice be- 
 tween the banks of Ulai, which called and said, 
 Gabriel, make this man to understand the vision. 
 So he came near where I stood ; and when he came, 
 I was afraid, and fell upon my face : but he said 
 unto me. Understand, O son of man ; for at the 
 time of the end shall be the vision. Now as he 
 was speaking with me, I was in a deep sleep on 
 my face toward the ground: but he touched me, 
 and set me upright. And he said. Behold, I will 
 make thee know what shall be in the last end of the 
 indignation : for at the time appointed the end 
 shall be." In these words there is a general ac- 
 count of the time when the calamitous part of the 
 
 J 
 
353 
 
 vision shall be fulfilled : it is to '' be in the last end 
 of the indig-nation ;" or^ as the Hebrew words 
 D>'Tn n^nrii^^ may be more literally rendered, '' in 
 the last part of the indignation." By indignation 
 must be meant some signal act of God's displea- 
 sure upon the Jewish nation. That it cannot refer 
 to the Babylonish captivity, which was in the time 
 that Daniel had the vision, is evident from the very 
 words " it shall be in the last part of the indigna- 
 tion ;" for the captivity was considerably more 
 than half over at the date of the vision, and conse- 
 quently the future verl), in this sense, would be to- 
 tally absurd. The commencement of the captivity 
 was B. C. 606, the date of the vision B. C. 553, or 
 the 53d year of the captivity ; w hat remained, there- 
 fore, of the captivity was only about 17 years. 
 That the distress of the Jewish nation under An- 
 tiochus Epiphanes cannot be intended, is proved at 
 large by Bishop Newton. In fact the 2300 days 
 mentioned by the angel cannot be accommodate^ to 
 Antiochus Epiphanes in any proper sense. Ther,e 
 remains then the last awful dispensation of the 
 Lord against the Jews, viz. their final destruction 
 as a nation by tlie Romans, and their dispersipn 
 over the whole habitable globe. This indignatipji 
 is in force to the present hour, and has coixtiiiued 
 now upwards of 1700 years ; the exploits, there- 
 fore, of the little ho,rn itnust be performed some time 
 in the course of t;he long captivity which now af- 
 ''flirts the Jewish people. 
 
 The angel begins Iiis description of the little horn 
 
 2 A 
 
354 
 
 by sayin<^, '' And out of one of them came forth a 
 little horn." This the angel explains in the follow- 
 ing' words : '' And in the latter time of their king- 
 dom, when the transgressors are come to the full, 
 a king of fierce countenance, and understanding 
 dark sentences, shall stand up." This the genera- 
 lity of interpreters, before the time of Sir Isaac 
 Newton, have understood of Antiochus Epiphanes, 
 who, on account of his cruelties to the Jews, was 
 nicknamed by them Epimanes, or Furious. But 
 Sir Isaac N«wton and Bishop Newton have demon- 
 strated that the words of the prophecy are not at 
 all designed to represent this king. The most com- 
 plete refutation of the opinion that Antiochus Epi- 
 phanes is the little horn is given by Bishop Newton, 
 when he says that horns signify kingdoms, as the 
 angel expressly declares, '' Now that being broken, 
 whereas four stood up for it, four kingdoms shall 
 stand up out of the nation." Consequently, the 
 little horn must be a fifth kingdom. But Antio- 
 chus Epiphanes was only monarch of one of the 
 four Grecian kingdoms, and is not, therefore, the 
 little horn alluded to. Though the two Newtons 
 have wisely rejected the common interpretation of 
 the little horn ; yet their application of the pro- 
 phecy to the monarchy of the Romans appears to 
 me highly absurd. For the angel says that the 
 little horn should arise out of one of the four horns 
 of the goat ; but the Romans are well known to 
 have arisen out of Latium, no part of which was ever 
 subdued by the ancient Greeks. The greatest ar- 
 
 \ 
 
355 
 
 gument which the Bishop advances in favour of his 
 interpretation is, that the power of the Romans was. 
 the only one of any note, which rose up in the lat- 
 ter time of the four king'doms of the Greeks, and 
 that it was by this the four horns were entirely sub- 
 verted, and the Jewish nation destroyed. But 
 upon a close examination of the words of the an- 
 gel, it will be clearly seen that the Bishop has built 
 his foundation upon an entirely. false view of the 
 passage. He considers '" the latter time of their 
 kingdom" to refer to the last period of the four 
 Grecian monarchies previously to their subjugation 
 by the Romans. But that this is not the meaning is 
 evident from the word kingdom being in the singular 
 connected with the plural pronoun their. The angel 
 evidently designs to shew that the four divisions of 
 the Greek empire are not meant by saying, "^ four 
 kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation, but not 
 in his power," that is, as has been before observed, 
 they shall be four independent monarchies. Hence, 
 if the latter time of these monarchies had been in- 
 tended, the expression would have been, '' the lat- 
 ter time of these kingdoms." As the kingdom here 
 alluded to is that of the Greeks according to the in- 
 terpretation of the angel, their kingdom must mean 
 the Greek empire ; and, therefore, alludes to a time 
 when the dominions of the four horns should b/e 
 again re-nnited into one great empire, as in the 
 time of Alexander. This did not take place till the 
 fourth century of the Christian aera, when the 
 great Roman empire was divided into two incle- 
 2 A2 
 
356 
 
 pendent monarchies, called the eastern and west- 
 ern empires ; and after the fall of the western em- 
 pire in the fifth century, and especialiy after its re- 
 vival in 800, the eastern monarchy was denomi- 
 nated by the western nations the Greek empire, 
 and the Greeks in return called all the nations, who 
 obeyed the Pope, Latins. It is hence clear that 
 the little horn cannot be before the re-union of the 
 Greeks into one ^reat empire entirely independent 
 of ail others. But it is said that the little horn is 
 not to rise up till the latter time of this kingdom ; 
 and it is well known thut the Greek empire was de- 
 stroyed in 1453 ; it then necessarily follows that 
 the first appearance of the little horn is to be some- 
 time in the last half of the period comprehended 
 between A. D. 395 and A. D. 1453, that is to say, 
 it cannot be before the tenth century, nor later 
 than the fifteenth. Hill, Whitaker, and Faber 
 aim at a much more probable interpretation of the 
 little horn, in supposing" Mohammedanism, from its 
 first rise to its utter extinction, to be intended. 
 But though two or three circumstances in the pro- 
 jphecy have considerable weight when thus applied, 
 as will be seen in the sequel respecting the taking 
 away of the daily sacrifice, and the casting down of 
 the sanctuary ; yet the scope of the prophecy is to- 
 tally inapplicable to it. 1. It is absurd to translate | 
 tSmD^D nnni^::! in the futurity of(\. e. in the period 
 subsequent to,) their kingdom; as this is a sense in 
 which the words were never used, rl''■^^^^ meaning 
 Nothing more than the last part of that spoken of. 
 
S5? 
 
 2. The dark sentences understood by the horn, or 
 king- of fierce countenance^ cannot be appHed to the 
 Koran in any probable sense. 3. The phrase, 
 " his power shall be mig-htVj but not by his own 
 power," cannot be explained of Mohammedanism 
 in any way which can render it a peculiar charac- 
 teristic of this religion. And Mr. Faber's explica- 
 tion will equally apply to any false worship which 
 has had an extensive sway in the earth. 4. It is 
 not a religion, but a kingdom or empire, which 
 must be designated by the little horn. * This horn 
 is not to stand up till " the transgTCssors are come 
 to the fnll." By transgressors Bishop Newton un- 
 derstands the wicked Jews ; and therefore explains 
 the passage of the time when the Romans destroyed 
 the Jewish nation. But it is evident this cannot 
 be the meaning; for God's present indignation 
 against the Jewish nation, was only then first mani- 
 fested ; but this horn was not to rise up till the af- 
 terpart of this indig'nation. Secondly^ the trans- 
 gressors spoken of are the Greeks and not the 
 Jews, a circumstance which is demonstrable from 
 the very words: 'And in the latter time of their 
 kini^dom, when the transgressors are come to the 
 full ;" that is, in the latter time of the Greek em- 
 pire, when the Greeks have filled up the measure 
 of their iniquity. The g-reat idolatry of the Greeks 
 in the middle centuries was truly deplorable; it was 
 a growing evil ; every day they added to the great 
 
 * See Faber's Dinseitatioa on the Prophecies, Vol. I. p. 26.55 
 kc. E<Iit. liOiid. 1810. 
 
558 
 
 and tremendous mass of their iniquity. They were 
 inferior to the Latins in hardly any kind of super- 
 stition ; both churches abounded in idolatrous wor- 
 ship of every sort ; and it was no wonder tl'at the 
 an^er of the Lord finally destroyed the Greeks as a 
 nation. The Greeks^ like the Latins, were wor- 
 shippers of the saints and an.^els^ and the adorers 
 of relics of every description ; and the gTeat profli- 
 gacy of their clergy, especially in the llth^ 12th, 
 and LSth centuries, was a certain presage of the 
 speedy perdition of their empire. Of the corrup- 
 tion of the Greek clergy in the 13th century, Mos- 
 heim thus speaks : '' Both the Greek and Latin 
 writers, provoked, beyond measure, by the flagi- 
 tious lives of their spiritual rulers and instructors, 
 complain loudly of their licentious manners, and 
 load them with the severest reproaches ; nor will 
 these complaints and reproaches appear excessive 
 to such as are acquainted with the history of this 
 corrupt and superstitious age. Several eminent 
 men attempted to stem this torrent of hcentious- 
 ness, which from the heads of the church had car- 
 ried its pernicious streams through all the mem- 
 bers ; but their power and influence were unequal 
 to such a difficult and arduous enterprise." * In 
 this century great exertions were made by the Ro- 
 man pontiffs to unite the Greek and Latin churches, 
 which was at last effected, though it continued but 
 for a very short time. The history of it is as fol- 
 
 * Part II. chap. 2. § 1. 
 
359 
 
 lows : " Michael Palaeolog-us had no sooner driven 
 the Latins out of Constantinople^ than he sent am- 
 bassadors to Rome to declare his pacific intentions, 
 that thus he might establish his disputed dominion, 
 and g-ain over the Roman pontiff to his side. But, 
 during" the course of these negociations, Urban's 
 death left matters unfinished, and suspended once 
 more the hopes and expectations of the public. 
 Under the pontificate of Gregory X. proposals of 
 ])eace were again made by the same emperor, who, 
 after much opposition from his own clergy, sent 
 ambassadors to the council that was assembled at 
 Lions in the year 1274; and there, with the so- 
 lemn consent of John Veccus, patriarch of Constan- 
 tinople, and several Greek bishops, publicly agreed 
 to the terms of accommodation proposed by the 
 •Roman pontiff. This re-union, however, was not 
 durable; for the situation of affairs in Greece and 
 Italy being changed some years after this conven- 
 tion, and that in such a manner as to deliver the 
 former from all apprehensions of a Latin invasion, 
 Andronicus, the son of Michael, assembled a coun- 
 cil at Constantinople in the palace at Blachernae, 
 A. D. 1284, in which, by a solemn decree, this ig- 
 nominious treaty was declared entirely null, and the 
 famous Veccus, by whose persuasion and authority 
 it had been concluded, was sent into exile. This 
 resolute measure, as may well be imagined, ren- 
 dered the divisions more violent than they had been 
 before the treaty now mentioned ; and it was also- 
 followed by an open schism, and by the most un^ 
 
360 
 
 happy discords among- the Grecian derg-y." * From 
 this history it is evident, that the immorality of the 
 Greeks was at a very hig*h pitch in the thirteenth 
 centnry ; and the union of the Greek and Latin 
 churches^ though of very short continuance, is a 
 proof that the Greeks were as much addicted to 
 idolatry as the Latins, and the more especially, as 
 during' this union they acknowledged the supre- 
 macy of the Roman pontiff, f the main point of 
 
 * Mosheim, Part ii. chap. 3, § 13. 
 
 + A second union was effected between the Greek and Latin 
 churches in the early part of the fifteenth century, which, how- 
 ever, proved more transitory than the preceding. That part of 
 the Papal bull in which the Pope's supremacy over the Greek 
 church is acknowledged is as follows : Item diffinimus Sauctam 
 Apostolicam Sedem, et Romanura Pontificera in universum Or- 
 bemtenere Primatura, et ipsum Pontificem Romanum Successorem 
 esse beati Petri Principis Apoi-tolorum, et verum Chrisri Vica- 
 rium, totiusque Eccleslai Caput, et omniain Christiauorum Patrem 
 et Doctorem existere; el ipsi in beato Petro pascendi, regendi 
 ac gubernaudi univerealem Ecclesiam a Domino nostro Jesu 
 Christo plenam potestatem traditam esse ; quemadmodum etiam 
 in gestis Q^cumenicorum Conciliorum et in Sacris Cauouibus 
 continetur. Renovantes insuper ordinem tradilum in Canonibus 
 ceterorum venerabiliura Patriarcharuni ; ut Patriarcha Constan- 
 tinopolitanus secundus sit post Saiictissimum Romanum Ponti- 
 ficem, tertius vero Alexandrinus, quartus autem Antiochenus et 
 quintus Hierosolymitanus ; salvis videlicet pi iviiegiis omnibus et 
 juribus eorum. Datum Florentia; in Sessione publica Synodali 
 solenniter in Ecclesia Majori celebrata, anno Incarnationis Do- 
 minicae millesimo quadringentesimo tricesimo nono, pridie No- 
 nas Julii, Pontificatus nostri Anno nono. " Likewise we de- 
 fine the Holy Apostolic See, and the Roman Pontiff, to have 
 primacy over the whole globe, and the Roman pontiff himself to 
 
361 
 
 difference consisting in what was termed the pro- 
 cession of tht Holy Ghost. But in the time of this 
 universal corruption of the Greek church a httle 
 horn is to rise up ; and the first place of its ap- 
 pearance is to be in one of the four grand divisions 
 of the Greek empire, spoken of by the angel ; for it 
 is said that " out of one of them came forth a little 
 horn." This, then, can be no other than the Oth- 
 man, or Ottoman empire^ as this was a mortal ene- 
 my to the Greeks, and first rose up in Asia Minor, 
 a province which fell to the share of Lysimachus at 
 the time when the Greek em.pire was divided, about 
 308 years bel"ore the Incarnation. Gibbon's ac- 
 count of the rise of the Othmans is as follows : 
 '' After the retreat of Zingis (A. D. 1240,) the sul- 
 
 be the successor of the blessed Peter, prince of the apostles, and 
 to be the true vicar of Christ, and the head and pastor of the 
 whole church, and of all Christians ; and that full power has 
 been given by Our Lord Jesus Christ to him through St. Peter, 
 of feeding, ruling, and governing the universal church, as even 
 it is acknowledged in the acts of the General councils, and in 
 the sacred canons. We revive, moreover, the rank, delivered in 
 the Canons, of the other venerable patriarchs ; that the Con- 
 *;tantinopolitan patriarch be next after the most holy Roman 
 pontiff', the patriarch of Alexandria the third, the patriarch of 
 Antioch the fourth, and the patriarch of Jerusalem the fiftli; 
 with all their privileges and rights preserved to them. Given at 
 Florence in the public synodic session, solemnly celebrated in 
 the greater church, in the year of the Incarnation 1439, the day 
 before the nones of July, and in the iiiiith jear of our pontili- 
 cate." This instrument was signed by 1^8 ecclesiastical digni- 
 taries, Greek and Ijatiii, all whose names are extant in the in- 
 strument. See Corps Diplomatique, Tom. III. p. 66 — -68. 
 
^62 
 
 tan Gclaleddin of Caiizme had returned from India 
 to the possession and defence of his Persian kin^^- 
 doms. In the space of eleven years, that hero 
 foiig'ht in person fourteen battles ; and such was his 
 activity that he led his cavah'v in seventeen days 
 from Tciiis to Kerman, a march of a thousand 
 miles. Yet he was oppressed by the jealousy of 
 the Moslem princes, and the innumera.ble armies of 
 the Moguls ; and, after his last defeat, Gelaleddin 
 perished ignobly in the mountains of Curdistan 
 His death dissolved a veteran and adventurous 
 army, which included under the name of Cariz^ 
 mians, or Corasmins, many Turkman hordes, that 
 had attached themselves to the sultan's fortune. 
 The bolder and more powerful chiefs invaded Sy- 
 ria, and violated the holy sepulchre of Jerusalem : 
 the more humble engaged in the service of Aladin, 
 sultan of Iconium ; and among these were the ob- 
 scure timbers of the Ottoman line. They had for- 
 merly pitched their tents near the southern banks 
 of the OxiTS, in the plains of Mahan and Nesa ; and 
 it is somewhat remarkable that the same spot should 
 have produced the first authors of the Parthian and 
 Turkish empires. At the head, or in the rear, of 
 a Karismian army, Soiiman Shah was droAvned in 
 the passage of the Euphrates : his son OrthogTul 
 became the soldier and subject of Aladin, and es- 
 tablished at Surgut, on the banks of the Sangar, a 
 camp of four hundred families or tents, whom he 
 governed fifty-two years both in peace and war. 
 He was the father of Thaman, or Athman, whose 
 
363 
 
 Turkish name has been melted into the appellation 
 of the caliph Othman. — The Seljuklan dynasty was 
 no more ; and the distance and decline of the Mo- 
 gul khans soon enfranciiised hitn from the control 
 of a superior. He was situate on the verge of the 
 Greek empire : the Koran sanctified his gazi, or 
 holy war, against the infidels ; and their political 
 errors unlocked the passes of Mount Olympus, and 
 invited him to descend into the plains of Bithynia. 
 Till the reign of Palaeologus these passes had been 
 vigilantly guarded by the militia of the country, 
 who were repaid by their own safety and an ex- 
 emption from taxes. The emperor abolished their 
 privilege, and assumed their office ; but the tribute 
 was rigorously collected, the custody of the passes 
 was neglected, and tlie hardy mountaineers dege- 
 nerated into a trembling crowd of peasants without 
 spirit or discipline. It was on the tAventy-seventh 
 of July, in the year twelve hundred and ninety-nine 
 of the Christian sera that Othman first invaded the 
 territory of Nicomedia ; and the singular accuracy 
 of the date seems to disclose some foresight of the 
 rapid and destructive growth of the monster." * 
 The Othman empire is called a little horn from the 
 great obscurity and insignificance of its commence- 
 ment ; and the angel, in his interpretation, styles 
 the horn " a king of fierce countenance." By this 
 last expression is evidently meant that this horn 
 should be a fierce and cruel nation, and not as Bi- 
 
 * Chap. 64. 
 
364 
 
 shop Newton intimates, wlien applying* it to the Ro- 
 mans, that it should be a nation destitute of fear. 
 That the Turks have been, and still are, a cruel, in- 
 human people, is most notorious to the whole 
 world. The history of their empire is little else 
 than one continued series of blood, rapine, and de- 
 solation ; and the very name of Turk is proverbially 
 used to denote a person remarkable for acts of in- 
 humanity. The king" of fierce countenance, or the 
 Othman nation, is said to '' understand dark sen- 
 tences." This passage is variously translated : the 
 Septuag-int has it (ruvuov Tr^o^XvJjaara, understanding- 
 problems ; the English translation of the Arabic 
 is, " skilful in disputations ," that of the Syriac 
 is "^^ skilful in ruling;" and in the Vulgate it is 
 '' intelligens propositiones," understanding pro- 
 positions. The Hebrew words, riTTT! ]''3/^' cer- 
 tainly signify '' understanding enigmas, or ob- 
 scure sentences ;" and Bishop Newton and others 
 suppose the meaning to be, that he should be " a 
 politic and artful, as well as a formidable power." 
 But as it is a nation which is said to '" understand 
 hard sentences," the meaning must be, that its po- 
 licies are of such a cast as to be almost totally im- 
 penetrable. This has been a very striking cha- 
 racteristic of the Othman emperors ; for it is well 
 know n that they have studied to be as obscure as 
 possible ; and it has been almost impossible for any 
 of the nations to know the real designs of the sul- 
 tans, as it was a very frequent practice with them 
 to say one thing and mean another. They wer^ 
 
365 
 
 the greatest dissemblers in the world. Of AmuratU 
 or Murad I. KnoIIes says, that he " was one that 
 could dissemble deeply." * Of Mohammed II. he 
 also says, that " crafty covetoiisness^ and dissimula- 
 tion, were in him accounted for tolerable faults in 
 comparison of his greater vices. In his love was 
 no assurance ; and his least displeasure was death." f 
 Thus it is evident that an almost impenetrable obscu- 
 rity frequently hung over the counsels of the Grand 
 Sultan, and his real intentions were often such very 
 dark aenigmas, as to baffle the skill of the greatest 
 politicians. 
 
 Though the horn is accounted little in its com- 
 mencement, yet it is said to " wax exceeding great 
 towards the south, and towards the east, and to- 
 wards the pleasant land." As the horn, or Othm.an 
 empire, waxes exceeding great in these three direc- 
 tions, it is evident it must have previously become 
 great. This empire could not properly be said to 
 have become great till the Othmans took possession 
 of Constantinople, the metropolis of the Greek em- 
 pire. This event happened in May, 1453, under 
 the reign of the sultan Mohammed II. and it was 
 considered an event of such a calamitous nature, 
 that the western nations were terribly alarmed, and 
 endeavoured to revive the spirit of the Crusades in 
 order to drive the infidels out of Europe. It is 
 
 * See his History of the Turks at the end of Amurath's 
 reign. 
 
 f lb. at the end of this sultan's reign. 
 
36(j 
 
 lience clear that the three quarters in which the 
 Othman empire becomes vcri/ great, are in refe- 
 rence to Constantinople, the capital of their domi- 
 nions ; and it is remarkable that this power was in- 
 creased in these three directions precisely in the 
 order mentioned in the vision. For seven years 
 after tlie taking' of Constantinople Mohammed II. 
 annexed to his empire the Morea_, which was go- 
 verned by Demetrius and Thomas, the two surviv- 
 ing brothers of the name of Pulaeologus. The do- 
 minions of these two despots were situated to the 
 south of Constantinople ; so that it could be said of 
 the Othman empire, with the utmost propriety, 
 that it waxed exceeding great towards the south. 
 Demetrius and Thomas were "' joined the next 
 year (1461) by a companion in misfortune, the last 
 of the Comnenian race; who, after the taking of 
 Constantinople by the Latins, had founded a new 
 empire on the coast of the Black Sea. In the pro- 
 gress of his Anatolian conquests, Mahomet invested 
 with a fleet and army the capital of David, who 
 presumed to style himself the emperor of Trebi- 
 zond ; and the negociation was comprised in a short 
 and peremptory question, ' Will you secure your 
 life and treasures by resigning your kingdom } or 
 had you rather forfeit your kingdom, your trea- 
 sures, and your life?' The feeble Comnenus was 
 subdued by his own fears — the capitulation was 
 faithfully performed, and the emperor, with his fa- 
 mily, was transported to a castle in Romania ; but, 
 on a slight suspicion of corresponding with the 
 
367 
 
 Persian king-, David, and the wliole Comnenian 
 race, were sacrificed to the jealousy or avarice of 
 the conqueror." * As the empire of Trebizond 
 was situated exactly to the east of Constantinople, 
 the capital city being* on the southern coast of the 
 Euxine Sea, it is evident that the next quarter in 
 which the Othman empire was increased was to- 
 jvards the east, according- to the prophecy. But 
 the sultans have their dominions also mightily in- 
 creased " towards the pleasant land." By the plea- 
 sant land is evidently meant the land of the Israel- 
 ites, for it is so called in Ps. cvi. 24. " Yea, they 
 despised the pleasant land ; they ])elieved not his 
 word." And also in Zech. vii. 14. '' But I scat- 
 tered them with a whirlwind among' all the nations 
 whom they knew not : thus the land was desolate 
 after them, that no man passed through nor re- 
 turned ; for they laid the pleasant land desolate." 
 The Othman power was greatly increased in this 
 direction, (which is to the south-east of Constanti- 
 nople,) in the time of Selim I. for this sultan, in 
 1516, ad^ed Syria and Palestine to the Othman em- 
 pire, drove the king of Persia out of Armenia, and 
 seized Taliris. In the following- year he defeated 
 Gauri, sultan of Egypt, and annexed his monarchy 
 to the Othman dominions ; but the subjug-ation of 
 this kingdom by the Turks, though it was directly 
 south of Constantinople, cannot be an objection to 
 the interpretation of the prophecy here given, be- 
 
 * Gibbon's Decliue aud Fall, cliap, 68. 
 
368 
 
 cause its conquest was after that of Syria and Pales- 
 tine ; for the Othmans began to wax exceeding- o^reat 
 towards the south, before they were remarkably 
 victorious in the other quarters mentioned in the 
 prophecy, as has been already noticed in speaking- 
 of the conquest of the Morea. 
 
 After this general aiccount of the augmentation 
 of the Othman empire, we are next informed 
 against whom it has prevailed : " It waxed great 
 even to the host of heaven." By host is meant an 
 army ; thus The Lord of Hosts, is the Lord of ar- 
 mies ; the host of heaven must, consequently, mean 
 the army of heaven. It has before been shewn 
 that h.eaven signifies the ruling- part of that spoken 
 of; and the angel informs us tliat the exploits of 
 the horn are against the 'Q'^W1'\>~'0]J " people of 
 the Holy Ones," as it is properly rendered in the 
 margin of our Bible, and not hohj people, as in our 
 translation, for the reason given why the horn pre- 
 vails is, because those against whom it succeeds have 
 filled up the measure of their iniquities, and conse- 
 quently are not Ji^fpH DI^, '' holy people/' as it is 
 said of the saints of God in Isaiah, Ixii. 11, \%. " Be- 
 hold^ the Lord hath proclaimed unto the end of the 
 warld, Say ye to the daughter of Zion, Behold thy 
 salvation cometh ; behold, his reward is with him, 
 mid his work before him. And tliey shall call them. 
 The holy people. The redeemed of the Lord." 
 The people of the Holy On^s, or as it is translated 
 in another place, '' The people of the saints," must, 
 therefore^ mean those to whom God has, in the 
 
869 
 
 course of his providence, committed his Sacred 
 Oracles; and as this horn had its commencement 
 in the time of the Christian dispensation, the host of 
 heaven must mean the Christian powers. It then 
 follows that by the horn's waxing great to the host 
 of heaven is intended his power over those pro- 
 fessing the Christian rehgion. It also appears that 
 the horn succeeds in a very considerable degree, 
 for, '' it cast down some of the host, and of the 
 stars, to the gTound, and stamped upon them." As 
 the host of heaven signifies the Christian powers, the 
 stars must here denote Christian ministers ; conse- 
 quently the horn, or Othman empire, has cast down, 
 or brought into subjection, not only some of the host, 
 of heaven, or a part of the world professing Chris- 
 tianity, but also some of the stars, or religious mi- 
 nisters, have been also subjected to his authority. 
 But the dominion of the horn is of no common kind ; 
 it stamps upon those which it casts down from hea- 
 ven, to denote that it rules them with the most des- 
 potic and tyrannical government. That the Oth- 
 man empire answers this description exactly no one 
 need be informed that is at all conversant with 
 Turkish history. The established religion of the 
 Greek empire was Christianity, at least in name ; 
 and the whole of this empire has been subdued by 
 the OthmanSj whose sway is known to be one of 
 the most tyrannical and despotic in the whole 
 world ; a circumstance in their history which will 
 be considered more at large in the subseciuent part 
 of this chapter. But it is not ap-ainst the powers 
 
 2B 
 
370 
 
 professing Christianity that the malice of the horn 
 is solely directed ; he '' magnified himself even to 
 the prince of the host." As host of heaven means 
 the civil powers of the w^orld professing Christia- 
 nity, the prince of this host can be no other than 
 Jesus Christy as they are called by his name, and 
 profess to be in subjection to his authority. The 
 horn, or Othman nation, therefore, endeavours to 
 destroy the authority of Christ by diminishing the 
 number of those called Christians ; and thus mag- 
 nifies himself even to the prince of the host, lit- 
 tle imagining that he derives all his power over 
 the Greek nation from this same Christ who has 
 delivered into his hands this mighty power because 
 of its great idolatry. The success of the horn is re- 
 markably great, for "' by him the daily sacrifice 
 was taken away, and the place of his sanctuary was 
 cast down." Commentators in general have under- 
 stood daily sacrifice here to mean literally what the 
 Jews meant by it ; and therefore have applied it to 
 the suspension of the daily sacrifice in the time of 
 Antiochus Epiphanes, or to its entire abolition by 
 the Romans. But that neither of these can be the 
 meaning is evident from the angel's assertion that 
 this vision was to take place '' in the last end of the 
 indignation/' a phrase which has been already ex- 
 plained. The daily sacrifice must, therefore, be a 
 JcAvish figure to denote its Christian antitype. The 
 dail}' sacrifice was the standing and public worship 
 among the Jews ; its antitype can then be no other 
 than the public ministration of the word among th« 
 
371 
 
 Christians. That the Othmans^ wherever they 
 have had any power, have in general aboHshed the 
 public ministry of the word among the people pro- 
 fessing- Christianity^ is well known. But they have 
 also cast down the place of his (Christ's) sanctuary. 
 Among the Jews sanctuary often meant the place 
 wherein their public worship was performed. See 
 Ps. Ixxiii. 17. Therefore as Jewish things were a 
 type of Christian, sanctuary must mean the places 
 appointed for pubhc worship among those deno- 
 minated Christians ; and consequently the mean- 
 ing- of the prophecy is, that the Othmans would not 
 only suspend the public worship of Christ, but also 
 either destroy the different religious edifices, or ap- 
 propriate them to his own abominable superstition. 
 That this has been exactly the case is verified by 
 history, a great number of Christian churches hav- 
 ing" been converted into Mohammedan mosques. 
 
 " And an host was given him against the daily 
 sacrifice by reason of transgTcssion," that is, a mi- 
 litary power was given by God to tlie Othmans to 
 prevent the resumption of the daily sacrifice or pub- 
 lic worship among the Greeks ; and the reason of 
 this awful dispensation of Jehovah is immediately 
 given ; the Othmans obtained this great ascendancy 
 over the Christian worship in the east, '' by reason 
 of transgression," that is to say, on account of the 
 great idolatries which had been repeatedly, and for 
 a very long season, practised among the Greeks. 
 
 *' And it cast down the truth to the ground," 
 that iSj the Othmans, with all their might, have en- 
 2B ^ 
 
deavoured to extinguish every particle of Christian 
 worship, by rendering the civil affairs of the Greeks 
 very desperate in order to induce them to aposta- 
 tize from their relig'ion, and embrace Mohamme- 
 danism. " And it practised/' that is, the Othmans 
 practised every subtilty which was calculated to ad- 
 vance the Mohammedan superstition, and depress 
 the Christian worship ; '' and prospered" in their 
 undertakings^ because of the great transgressions 
 of God's people. 
 
 The angel, in his interpretation of the vision, 
 says, '' His power shall be mighty, but not by his 
 own power." This has been differently understood 
 by commentators in their apphcation of it to Anti- 
 ochus Epiphanes, all which Bishop Newton has 
 ably refuted. The bishop's opinion, therefore, 
 shall only be examined in this place. He remarks, 
 that " this part of the prophecy, as well as the rest, 
 can no where be so justly and properly applied, as 
 to the Romans. With them it quadrates exactly, 
 and with none of the other horns or kingdoms of 
 the goat. The strength of the other kingdoms 
 consisted in themselves, and had its foundation in 
 some part of the goat ; but the Roman empire, as 
 a horn or kingdom of the goat, was not mighty by 
 its own power, was not strong by virtue of the goat, 
 but drew its nourishment and strength from Rome 
 and Italy. There grew the trunk and body of the 
 tree, though the branches extended over Greece, 
 Asia, Syria, and Egypt." This opinion, at first 
 view, may appear very plausible to many ; but upon 
 
373 
 
 a close examination will appear not to have the 
 least weight. In the first place it would be per- 
 fectly absurd to denominate the conquering nation 
 a horn of the power which it has subdued^ unless it 
 could be proved that it originally rose up out of 
 this power. But this was not t'le case with the 
 Roman empire ; for it first sprung up in Latium^ 
 a district of Italy, and from that spot spread itself 
 over the whole known world; consequently, the 
 goat was rather a horn of the Romans, than the 
 Romans a horn of the goat. Secondly, admitting 
 that the Roman power might be called a horn of 
 the goat, it could by no means be styled a little 
 horn at the time when it conquered Greece ; as its 
 power was then far greater than any one of the four 
 kingdoms into which the empire of Alexander was 
 divided. Thirdly, the Roman empire was mighty 
 by its own power, that is to say, the Romans fought 
 their own battles with the subjects of their own na- 
 tion ; and it is absurd to say that '' his own power" 
 must mean his power as a horn or kingdom of the . 
 goat. If the little horn signifies the Roman empire. 
 his own power must mean the power of the Roman 
 empire, and, the sense of the vvhole passage will 
 be. The power of the Romans was mighty, but not 
 by means of their own power ; a conclusion which 
 is totally unsupported by history, as the contrary is 
 well known to have been the fact, for the Romans 
 are well known to have been the finest soldiers 
 and bravest men of their time, and consequently to 
 have constituted the strength of the Roman empire 
 
374 
 
 But though the Romans will not answer the pro- 
 phetic description^ " His power shall be mighty j, 
 but not by his own power/' yet it corresponds to 
 the Othmans in the most exact and singular man- 
 ner. The great body of the military forces of the 
 Turks were composed of Greek captives whom 
 they educated in the art of war from their child- 
 hood^ and thus became the main^ and in some cases 
 the only strength of the Othman empire. Knolles's 
 account of the Othman government^ and the con- 
 stitution of the Turkish mihtary force, is here 
 quoted, as it is the best comment I know upon the 
 words of the prophecy : " The Othoman govern- 
 ment in this his so great an empire is altogether 
 like the government of the master over his slave, 
 and indeed meer tyrannical; for the Great Sultan 
 is so absolute a lord of all things within the com- 
 pass of his empire, that all his subjects and people, 
 be they never so great, do call themselves his slaves 
 and not his subjects ; neither hath any man power 
 over himself, much less is he lord of the house 
 wherein he dwelleth, or of the land which he tilleth, 
 except some few families in Constantinople, to 
 whom some few such things were by way of re- 
 ward, and upon especial favour given by Mahomet 
 the Second, at such time as he won the same. 
 Neither is any man in that empire so great, or yet 
 so far in favour with the Great Sultan as that he 
 can assure himself of his life, much less of his pre- 
 sent fortune or state longer than it pleaseth the 
 sultan In which so absolute a sovereignty (by 
 
375 
 
 any freeborn people not to be endured) the tyrant 
 preserveth himself by two most especial means ; 
 first by taking off all arms from his natural sub- 
 jects ; and then by putting the same and all things 
 else concerning the state and government thereof 
 into the hands of the apostata,, or renegade Chris- 
 tians^ whom for the most part every third, fourth, 
 or fifth year, (or oftner, if his need so require) he 
 taketh in their childhood, from their miserable pa- 
 rents, as his tenths or tribute children ; whereby 
 he gaineth two great commodities : First, for that 
 in so doing he spoileth the provinces he most fear- 
 eth, of the flower, sinews, and strength of the peo- 
 ple, choice being still made of the strongest youths, 
 and fittest for war; then, for that with these, as 
 with his own creatures, he armeth himself, and by 
 them assureth his state; for they, in their childhood, 
 taken from their parents laps, and delivered in 
 charge to one or other appointed for that purpose, 
 quickly, and before they are aware, become Maho- 
 metans ; and so no more acknowledging father or 
 mother, depend wholly on the Great Sultan ; who, 
 to make use of them, both feeds them and fosters 
 them, at whose hands only they look for all things, 
 and whom alone they thank for all. Of which fry, 
 so taken from their Christian parents, (the only se- 
 minary of his wars;) some become horsemen, some 
 footmen, and so in time the greatest commanders of 
 his state and empire, next unto himself; the natu- 
 ral Turks, in the mean time, giving themselves 
 wholly unto the trade of merchandize, and other 
 
S76 
 
 their mechanical occupations; or else to the feed- 
 ing' of cattelj their most ancient and natural voca- 
 tion, not intermeddling' at all with matters of go- 
 vernment or state. So that if unto these his soul- 
 dierSj all of the Christian race,, you joyn also his 
 fleet and money, you have as it were the whole 
 strength of his empire ; for in these four, his horse- 
 men, his footmen, liis fleet and money, especially 
 consisteth his great force and poAver." * The 
 main strength of the Turkish empire consisted in 
 his horsemen and footmen, the former of which are 
 called spahis, and the latter janizaries. Of the 
 spahis the timariots were by far the most numerous, 
 and, according to Knolles, amounted in 1623 to 
 719,000 fighting men, of whom 257,000 had their 
 residence in Europe, and the remainder in Asia and 
 Africa, f Of the institution of the janizaries 
 Knolles thus speaks : '' About this time (by the 
 suggestion of Cara Rustemes a doctor of the Ma- 
 hometan law) Zinderlu Chelil, then Cadelesher or 
 chief justice among the Turks, but afterwards bet- 
 ter known by the name of Cntradin Bassa, by the 
 commandment of Amurath, took order, that every 
 fifth captive of the Christians, being above fifteen 
 years old, should be taken up for the king, as by 
 law due uoto him ; and if the number were under 
 five, then to pay to the king for every head 25 as- 
 
 *■ See his account of the Othman empire in 1623, Vol. II. p. 
 982, Rycaut's Edit. Lend. 1687. 
 t Ibid. p. 984. 
 
377 
 
 pers, by way of tribute ; appointing officers for col- 
 lecting both of such captives and tribute money, of 
 whom the aforesaid Cara Rustemes himself was 
 chief, as first deviser of the matter. By which 
 means great numbers of Christian youths were 
 brought to the court as the king's captives, which 
 by the counsel of the same Zinderlu Chelil, were 
 distributed among the Turkish husbandmen in Asia^ 
 there to learn the Turkish language, rehgion, and 
 manners ; where, after they had been brought up 
 in all painful labour and travel by the space of two 
 or three years, they were called unto the court, and 
 choice made of the better sort of them to attend 
 upon the person of the prince, or to serve him in his 
 wars ; where they dayly practising all feats of acti- 
 vity, are called by the name of Janizars (that is to 
 say, new souldiers.) This was the first beginning 
 of the Janizars under this sultan Amurath the 
 first, * but had great increase under Amurath the 
 second, insomuch that Jovius with some other his- 
 toriographers, attribute the beginning of this order 
 to him; which nevertheless (as appeareth by the 
 Turks own histories) had the beginning as is afore- 
 
 * This was in A. D. 1362, or An. Hegirae 763, according to 
 Cantemir. See his History of the Othman empire, p. 38. The 
 Turkish law which appropriated every fifth Greek captive to the 
 Sultan in order to be disposed of by him as he should think fit, 
 was afterwards mitigated to every tenth. But this decimation 
 act was itself abolished, though gradually, in the reign of Murad 
 or Amurath the fourth, in the former part of the seventeenth 
 century. See Cantemir, ibid. 
 
378 
 
 said ; and hath ever since been continued by the 
 Turkish kings and emperors by the same and some 
 other greater means^ so that in process of time they 
 be grown to tliat greatness as that they are often- 
 times right dreadful to the great Turk himself — 
 and are at this day the greatest strength of the 
 Turkish empire." * It has been disputed whether 
 the timariots or janizaries were the principal 
 strength of the Turkish empire. Knolles speaks 
 upon this point as follows : " It is commonly re- 
 ported the strength of the Turkish empire to con- 
 sist in this order of the Janizaries, which is not al- 
 together so ; for albeit that they be the Turks best 
 footmen, and surest guard of the Great Sultan's 
 person, yet undoubtedly the greatest strength of 
 his state and empire resteth nothing so much in 
 them, as in the great multitude of his horsemen, 
 especially his timariots." f From these sketches 
 of history it is evident that the power of the 0th- 
 mans was mighty, but not by their own power; 
 for instead of training up their own natural subjects 
 in the exercise of arms, they made choice of the 
 Greek captives for this purpose, thus fighting their 
 enemies with the power of their enemies. 
 
 Another property of the little horn is, that ^' he 
 shall destroy wonderfully, and shall prosper, and 
 practise." This is an exact picture of the Oth- 
 
 * Hist, of tbe Turks by Rycaut, Vol. I. pp. 132, 133. Edit. 
 Lond. 1687. 
 
 + Ibid. Vol. II. p. 985. 
 
379 
 
 mans : their mode of destroying their enemies has 
 been the most inhuman that could enter into the 
 mind of man ; they have destroyed without respect 
 to age, sex, or condition ; and the tortures invented 
 by these barbarians against such as professed the 
 Christian rehgion are too dreadful to be here de- 
 tailed. But the cruelties of the Turks have not 
 been more wonderful than the unaccountable blind- 
 ness and superstition of the Greeks and Latins ; 
 therefore have the Othmans prospered against both 
 churches as far as it was the will of God they 
 should, and have practised every policy that ap- 
 peared calculated to destroy the Christian wor- 
 ship. 
 
 They have also '' destroyed the mighty and the 
 people of the Holy Ones." They have destroyed 
 the mighty by destroying the Roman empire in the 
 f'ast, and thus putting an end to the dynasty of Ro- 
 man emperors which began in the fourth century, 
 when the Roman empire was divided into the east- 
 ern and western empires, and had continued, in an 
 uninterrupted succession, till the death of Constan- 
 tine VII. in 1453. They also destroyed the people 
 of the saints in putting an end to this empire; for 
 Christianity was the professed religion of the Greek 
 empire ; and the Turks, in the course of the Divine 
 providence, prevailed against it in the east, as has 
 been already observed. The great pieces of artil- 
 lery which the Othmans employed to destroy the 
 Greek or eastern empire were astonishing. Bishop 
 Newton, in his comment on the sixth Apocalyptic 
 
380 
 
 trumpet, gives us the following account of them : 
 " Amurath the second broke into Peloponnesus, 
 and took several strong- places by the means of his 
 artillery. But his son Mohammed at the siege of 
 Constantinople employed such great guns, as were 
 never made before. One is described to have been 
 of such a monstrous size that it was drawn by se- 
 venty yoke of oxen, and by two thousand men. 
 There were two more, each of which discharged a 
 stone of the weight of two talents. Others emitted 
 a stone of the weight of half a talent. But the 
 greatest of all discharged a ball of the weight of 
 three talents, or about three hundred pounds ; and 
 the report of this cannon is said to have been so 
 great, that all the country round about was shaken 
 to the distance of forty furlongs. For forty day« 
 the wall was battered by these great guns, and so 
 many breaches were made, that the city was taken 
 by assault, and an end put to the Grecian empire." 
 Thus history demonstrates the meaning of the pro- 
 phecy, "' He shall destroy wonderfully, and shall 
 prosper, and practise, and shall destroy the mighty, 
 and the people of the Holy Ones." 
 
 Of the horn, or Othman empire, it is also said, 
 that " through his policy he shall cause craft to 
 prosper in his hand." Craft, or deceit, (n^lD) 
 here evidently means the Mohammedan fxligion; 
 for it was this which the Othmans diffused over the 
 different countries which they subjugated. The 
 Christian world need not be told why it should be 
 here called deceit, as it is well known to be an in- 
 
381 
 
 vention of the impostor Mohammed, and is evi- 
 dently put in opposition to The truth in a preced- 
 ing" verse, which has been shewn to mean the ChriS' 
 tian religion. The Othman poHcy has been conti- 
 nually exerted in devising* the best methods of de- 
 pressing Christianity^ and disseminating their faith. 
 A master-stroke of policy among them is thus re- 
 lated by Rycaut : " It was the custom formerly 
 amongst the Turks, every five years, to take away 
 the Christians children, and educate them in the 
 Mahometan superstition ; by which means they in- 
 creased their own people, and diminished and en- 
 feebled the force of the Christians." * Another 
 piece of Turkish policy is mentioned by the same 
 author as follows : '' Such as adhere to the Chris- 
 tian faith, the Turk makes no account of, and va- 
 lues no otherwise in the place of subjects, than a 
 man doth of his ox or ass, merely to carry the bur- 
 thens, and to be useful and servile in slavish offices 
 — so that it is evident that the Turks design is no 
 other, than by impoverishment and enfeebling the 
 interest of Christianity, to draw proselytes and 
 strength to his own kingdom." f By these means, 
 and others which need not be here mentioned, have 
 the Ottomans caused the Mohammedan craft to 
 prosper in their hand, so that at this day a very con- 
 siderable portion of the habitable globe is darkened 
 by it. 
 
 * See his Present State of the Turkish Emprre, chap. 19. 
 + Ibid, 
 
382 
 
 Another circumstance mentioned in the pro- 
 phecy respecting the horn, or Othman empire, is 
 that '' he shall magnify himself in his heart." This 
 is the very character of the Othman s : they esteem 
 every nation not professing Mohammedanism as 
 tlie scum of the earth, and rank them in the class 
 of infidels. Rycaut says, " The Turks — are na- 
 turally a proud and insolent people, confident and 
 conceited of their own virtue, valour, and forces, 
 which proceeds from their ignorance of the strength 
 and constitution of other countries ; so that when 
 the danger which may arise from the conjunction 
 and union of Christian princes to the Mahometan 
 interest, is discoursed of, they compare the Grand 
 Signior to the lion, and other kings to little dogs, 
 which may serve (as they say) to rouse and discom- 
 pose the quiet and majesty of the lion, but can 
 never bite him, but with the utmost peril." * But 
 the Turks have no room for boasting ; for of all the 
 governments in the world, there perhaps could not 
 be found one more despotic ; and the policy of the 
 Sultans has always been to maintain their abso- 
 lute sway ; and to secure it they have abolished all 
 nobility, and prohibited all hereditary succession in 
 the offices of government, f Thus it is evident the 
 Othmans, a nation of slaves, (by their own confes- 
 sion to their sultan,) have magnified themselves in 
 
 * See his Present State of the Turkish Empire, chap. 21. 
 + lb. chap. 22. 
 
 %% 
 
383 
 
 their hearts, esteeming the Christians no better 
 than dogs ! 
 
 But it is also said of the horn, or Othman empire, 
 that he '' by peace shall destroy many ;" or, as it 
 may be more literally rendered, D'^^T flTlii''' T\il\2^'2 
 *' in peace he shall destroy many." All this has 
 been literally fulfilled in the Othmans. They have 
 destroyed many hy means of peace, for Rycaut in- 
 forms us that " it is an old and practised subtilty of 
 the Turks, immediately after some notable misfor- 
 tune, to entreat of peace, by which means they 
 may gain time to recollect their forces and provi- 
 sions to prosecute the war." * They have also de- 
 stroyed many in time of peace, for it is a maxim 
 with them " that they ought not to regard the 
 leagues they have with any prince, or the reasons 
 and ground of a quarrel, whilst the breach tends to 
 the enlargement of their empire, which conse- 
 quently infers the propagation of their faith." f 
 Rycaut informs us that " many and various are the 
 examples and stories in all ages, since the beginning 
 and increase of the Turkish power, of the perfidi- 
 ousness and treachery of this people ; that it may 
 be a question, whether their valour and force hath 
 prevailed more in the time of war, or the little care 
 of their faith, and maintenance in their leagues 
 hath availed them in time of peace. Thus Didy- 
 motichum, in the time of peace, under Amurath, 
 
 * See his Present State of the Turkish empire, 
 ■f Ibid. 
 
384 
 
 third king' of the Turks, whilst the walls and forti- 
 fications were building', was by the Asian labourers, 
 which were entertained in the work^ and the help 
 of other Turks which lay near in ambush^ sur- 
 prised and taken. So also Rodestum, in the time 
 of peace, by command of Amurath, was by Eure- 
 noses assaulted and taken by stratagem. So Adri- 
 anople, in the reign of the same emperor, after 
 peace made again, and assurances given of better 
 faith, was by the art and disguise of Chasis-Ilbeg", 
 pretending to be a discontented captain, and a fu- 
 gitive from the Turks, by fair speeches, and some 
 actions and skirmishes abroad, gained such confi- 
 dence amongst the credulous Greeks, as enabled 
 him afterwards to set the gates open to Amurath's 
 army, which after some conflict, was taken, and 
 never recovered again by the power of the 
 Greeks." * Gibbon's character of Mohammed II. 
 surnamed The Great, is that he '' could stoop from 
 ambition to the basest arts of dissimulation and de- 
 ceit. Peace was on his lips, while war was in his 
 heart." f The deep pohcy and dissimulation of 
 Mohammed the Great is sufficiently evident in the 
 following history : " The despots of the Morea, 
 Demetrius and Thomas — were astonished by 'tjhe 
 death of the emperor Conslantine, and the ruin of 
 the monarchy. Hopeless of defence, they prepared, 
 with the noble Greeks "who adhered to their for- 
 
 * See his Present State of the Turkish Empire, chap. 22. 
 + Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, chap. 68. 
 
tunej to seek a refuge in Italy, beyond the reach of 
 the Ottoman thunder. Their first apprehensions 
 were dispelled by the victorious sultan, who con- 
 tented himself with a tribute of twelve thousand du- 
 cats : and while his ambition explored the continent 
 and the islands in search of prey, he indulged the 
 Morea in a respite of seven years. But this res- 
 pite was a period of grief, discord, and misery. 
 The hexarmlion, the rampart of the isthmus, so 
 often raised, and so often subverted, could not long 
 be defended by three hundred Italian archers : the 
 keys of Corinth were seized by the Turks : they 
 returned from their summer excursions with a train 
 of captives and spoil; and the complaints of the in- 
 jured Greeks were heard with indifference and dis- 
 dain. The Albanians, a vagrant tribe of shepherds 
 and robbers, filled the peninsula with rapine and 
 murder; the two despots implored the dangerous 
 and humiliating aid of a neighbouring bashaw ; and 
 when he had quelled the revolt, his lessons incul- 
 cated the rule of their future conduct. Neither the 
 ties of blood, nor the oaths which they repeatedly 
 pledged in the communion and before the altar, nor 
 the stronger pressure of necessity, could reconcile, 
 or suspend, their domestic quarrels. — The distress 
 and revenge of the weaker rival invoked their su- 
 preme lord : and, in the season of maturity and re- 
 venge, Mahomet declared himself the friend of De- 
 metrius, and* marched into the Morea with an irre- 
 sistible force. When he had taken possession of 
 Sparta, ' You are too weak,* said the Sultan, ' to 
 
 2 C 
 
386 
 
 control this turbulent province : I will take your 
 daughter to iny bed ; and you shall pass the re- 
 mainder of your hfe in security and honour.' De- 
 metrius sig'hed and obeyed ; surrendered his daugh- 
 ter and his castles ; followed to Adrianople his so- 
 vereign and son ; and received for his own main- 
 tenance, and that of his followers, a city in Thrace, 
 and the adjacent isles of Lemnos and Samothrace."* 
 Hitherto the prophecy has dwelt upon the pros- 
 perous state of the horn ; what follows relates to 
 the time of his final perdition, and consequently re- 
 mains to be fulfilled, as the Othman empire is still 
 in bein^^. " He shall also stand up against the 
 Prince of princes ; but he shall be broken without 
 hand." What event is here designed it is impos- 
 sible to say with certainty ; yet there are some ex- 
 pressions in the prophecy which may lead to a pro- 
 bable conjecture. It is evident that the Othman 
 empire will continue till the time comes when 
 God's indignation against the Jewish nation will be 
 ended ; for " the after or last part of the indig- 
 nation," is the period assigned to the little horn, 
 in which he is to destroy the mighty, and the peo- 
 ple of the Holy Ones, and to prosper, and prac- 
 tise, &c. Consequently the perdition of the Turk- 
 ish empire must be contemporary with the end of 
 the indignation. The end of the Divine indigna- 
 tion against the Jewish people necessarily implies 
 their restoration to the Divine favour in conse- 
 
 * Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire, chap. 68. 
 
S87 
 
 quence of their conversion to Cllristianit3^ And 
 as the Scriptures al30und with prophecies respecting 
 the prosperity of the Jews in the latter days; and their 
 reinstatement in the land of promise^ it is very pro- 
 bable that what is meant by the Othmans standing 
 up against the Prince of princes is^ their opposition 
 to the will of God in the return of the Jews to their 
 own land. What makes this opinion extremely 
 probable is^ that the land of promise forms now an 
 integral part of the Othman empire ; and^ conse- 
 quently _, the Jews can never come again into the 
 possession of Judea till the Turks be previously 
 dispossessed of it. But all human power, however 
 well organized, must fail when it acts against the 
 "will of Christ, who is the Prince of princes ; there- 
 fore it is no wonder the horn will be broken, or the 
 Othman empire subverted. But the horn is to '' be 
 broken without hand." Tiiat is, " he shall not die 
 the common death of empires by the hands of men, 
 but shall be destroyed by a sudden stroke from hea- 
 ven." He lifts up his hand against the Prince of 
 princes ; therefore by the Prince of princes, shall 
 he be consumed, without the instrumentality of hu- 
 man power, * 
 
 * The standing up of the horn against the Prince of princes 
 may possibly be the same with the armament of Gog and Magog, 
 an account of which is given in the 38th and 39th chapters of 
 Ezekiel. That both prophecies remain yet to be accomplished 
 there can be no reasonable doubt; Bishop Newton, Dr. Gil), 
 and other eminent divines, suppose the Turks to be intended by 
 (Jog and Magog; and it is evident that tlie invasion of Gog will 
 
588 
 
 After Daniel had seen the vision of the ram^ he- 
 g:oat, and little horn, he is informed of the 2300 
 da^'s. '^ Then I heard one saint speaking:, and 
 another saint said unto that certain saint which 
 spake. How long* shall be the vision concerning the 
 daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation, 
 to give both the sanctuary and the host to be trod- 
 den under foot? And he said unto me. Unto two 
 thousand and three hundred days ; then shall the 
 sanctuary be cleansed." It has been already shewn 
 that the sanctuary was cast down by the Othmans ; 
 
 not take place till after the return of the Jews into Palestine, as 
 appears in the following verse : " After many days thou shalt be 
 visited : in the latter years thou shalt come into the land 
 that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many 
 people, against the mountains of Israel, which hare been always 
 waste : but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall 
 dwell safely all of theai." That the invasion of Gog can refer 
 to no event prior to the Christian dispensation, is manifest frotn 
 the following interrogation of Jehovah, " Art thou he of whom 
 I have spoken in old time by my servants the prophets of Is- 
 rael, which prophesied in those days many years, that I would 
 bring thee against them?" The end of Gog, as well as of the 
 horn, or Othman empire, will be by a miraculous dispensation of 
 Divine vengeance : " And I will call for a sword against him 
 throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord God : every man's 
 sword shall be against his brother. And I will plead against 
 him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, 
 and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with 
 him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire and brim- 
 stone. Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I 
 will be known in the eyes of many nations ; and they shall know 
 that I am the Lord." chap, jcxxviii. 21 — 23. 
 
S89 
 
 and as their empire still exists^ the sanctuary is not 
 yet cleansed^ that is to sa}^, the Mohammedan su- 
 perstition still pollutes the eastern world^ where 
 the religion of Christ once flourished. It necessa- 
 rily follows, from what has been said^ that the 2300 
 days are not yet terminated; for the angel ex- 
 pressly says, that at their conclusion the sanctuary 
 shall be cleansed. The great difficulty of this pass- 
 age is to determine the point of time when the 
 2300 days commenced. Bishop Newton considers 
 the common English translation erroneous. He 
 says that " in the original there is no such word as 
 concerning ; and INIr. Lowth (he adds) rightly ob- 
 serves, that the words may be rendered more agree- 
 ably to the Hebrew thus : ' For how long a time 
 shall the vision last, the daily sacrifice be taken 
 away, and the transgression of desolation continue^ 
 &c. ?' After the same manner the Cjuestion is 
 translated by the Seventy, and in the Arabic ver- 
 sion, and in the Vulgar Latin." * But I totally 
 dissent from the Bishop in this opinion, and con- 
 
 ' * The Septuagint translation is as follows : ''Em; rtots Yj Qpcicig 
 $-r^7£-.'at Yj ^'..crloL Ti dc^iltrccy kcc] -jj oii/.uprlx Ipri'j.'jjTsw; tj ^^^fi^Uy 
 xai TO oiyiw •/.x\ -fi dvvauAg crvi/^itxrr/jYjorsroii. " IIow long shall 
 the vision stand, the sacrilice be taken away, the transgression 
 of desolation continue, and the sanctuary and host be trodden 
 vnder foot." The Vulgate is " Usquequo TJsio et juge sacriii- 
 cium, et peccatum desolationis qute facta est, et sanctuarium et 
 fortitude conculcabitur ? " How long shall be the vision and 
 the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of the desolation which 
 was made, that both the sanctuary and the host shall be trodden 
 under foot ?'^ 
 
390 
 
 filder the common translation much more correct 
 than the Septuagint, or the Arabic and Vulgate 
 versions. The original words are T^QfiH n*nn 
 which must mean " the vision of the daily sa- 
 crifice;" a construction which the very words de- 
 mandj for the Septuagint^ &c. could not be correct, 
 unless there was a T placed before *I\^rin, the Eng- 
 lish of which would then be^ How long' shall be the 
 vision AND the daily sacrifice, &c. But the tautology 
 evident in the Septuag'int, Arabic, and Vulgate ver- 
 sions of this passage is a proof that they do not con- 
 tain the sense of the Hebrew text ; for the daily sacri- 
 fice, and the casting- down of the sanctuary, cer- 
 tainly formed part of Daniel's vision ; and, conse- 
 quently, in the first clause, " How long' shall the 
 vision last?" must be contained all that can be im- 
 plied in the latter part of the interrogation. In the 
 Hebrew what is translated 2300 days is literally 
 2300 evenings and mornings; * but as the evening* 
 and morning is " in Hebrew the notation of time 
 for a day," I think 2300 f days must be meant, 
 
 * So I would translate the Ilebreiv words D'i)V« npn :r\V "il? 
 nxn U^Wi : which is literally iico thousand and thee hundred 
 evening-morning.^ the Hebrew numeral words being joined with 
 nouns in the singular number. These words are also in the sin- 
 gular number in the 26th verse, where it is said by the angel, that 
 *' the vision of the evening and the morning, which was told, is 
 true." 
 
 + Several copies of the Sepluagint read 2 100 days (^a?^ai 
 ii(TyjkioCi >Lcx.\ rsrcayioa-ia.r,) but this reading is evidently spuriouSj, 
 
391 
 
 which sig-nlfy as many years,* according- to the mode 
 of interpretation already adopted in the explanation 
 of the 1260 days of tlie Woman's residence in the 
 wilderness^ and of the forty-two months of the 
 Beast's continuance. From this it follows that the 
 vision of the daily sacrifice^ and the transgression 
 of desolation to give both the sanctuary and the 
 host to be trodden under foot^ must continue 2300 
 years. If this be a correct view of the prophecy, 
 it is, hence, evident that the commencement of the 
 2300 days cannot be so early as the time of the vi- 
 sion, as more than these years have already elapsed 
 since the third year of the reign of Belshazzar. 
 There is also considerable evidence in the suppo- 
 sition that the 2300 years did not commence before 
 the time of Alexander the Great; for in the ac- 
 count of the ram with two horns there is nothing 
 
 as several of the best and oldest manuscripts of the Septuagint 
 hare rpia.xo(riai instead of rB-rcazoc-iai. One of the manuscripts 
 alluded to is the Codex Alexandrinus, supposed to have been 
 written so early as the fourth or fifth century. In the Complu- 
 tensian Polyglott printed at Alcala in 1517, and in the Antwerp 
 Polyglott printed in 1570, it is rpiay.d(riai. Theodoret, Avho 
 flourished in the fourth century, read so in his copy of the Septua- 
 gint. The various reading of 2200 days, which Jerome says ex- 
 isted in some manuscripts in his time, merits no attention as only 
 two of these manuscripts have come down to us. There is no 
 various reading of this passage in the Hebrew text, which appears 
 to me decisive in favour of the common reading. 
 
 * See Bishop Newton's Dissertation on tlie Prophecies in 
 ioc. 
 
392 
 
 spoken respecting" the daily sacrifice^ or the trans- 
 gression of desolation : but in the vision of the he- 
 goat all these things are mentioned; it \vould_, there- 
 fore^ appear that the commencement of the 2300 
 days cannot be before Alexander's reign : and as 
 the first sight Daniel had of the he-goat was in its 
 coming from the west to attack the ram with two 
 horns, it is not improbable that the year in which 
 Alexander invaded Persia was the commencement. 
 This was about B. C, 334; * and consequently the 
 2300 years will end some time in the last half of 
 the twentieth century. That the commencement 
 of the 2300 years is to be dated in the time of 
 Alexander may be gathered from the circum- 
 stance that Daniel saw the little horn springing 
 up out of one of the four horns of the goat ; from 
 which it appears that the length of the vision of 
 the daily sacrifice and the transgression of deso- 
 lation^ to give both the sanctuary and the host to be 
 trodden under foot^ will comprise at least the time 
 allotted to both the Greek and Othman empires. 
 But as the prophecy is not yet fully accomplished, 
 it would not be safe nor prudent to speak posi- 
 tively concerning the exact time of its entire fulfil- 
 ment; Ij therefore,, conclude with Bishop New- 
 ton, that " when these years shall be expired, then 
 their end will clearly shew whence their beginning- 
 is to be dated/' 
 
 * This is one of the three epochs which Bishop Newton sup. 
 posed might be the commenceinent of the days mentioned above. 
 See his Dissert, iu loc. 
 
 
S93 
 
 The angel concludes his Interpretation of the vi- 
 sion of the ram and he-goat with saying", " And 
 the vision of the evening and the morning which 
 was told is true : wherefore shut thou up the vision^ 
 for it shall be for many days." " The shutting up 
 of the vision/' as Bishop Newton very properly ob- 
 serveSj " implies that it should not be understood of 
 some time ; and we cannot say that it was suffi- 
 ciently understood so long as Antiochus Epiphanes 
 was taken for the little horn. The vision being for 
 many days must necessarily infer a longer term 
 than the calamity under Antiochus of three years 
 and a half, or even than the whole time from the 
 first beginning of the vision in Cyrus to the cleans- 
 ing of the sanctuary under Antiochus, which was 
 not above 371 years. Such a vision could not well 
 be called long to Daniel, who had seen so much 
 longer before ; * and especially as the time assigned 
 for it is two thousand and three hundred days; 
 which, since they cannot by any account be natu- 
 ral days, f must needs be prophetic days, or two 
 
 * See Dan. Tii. 
 
 + Bishop Newton has very ably refuted the general opinion 
 that the 2300 days refer to the time of Antiochus Epiphanes as 
 follows: " These two thousand and three hundred days can by 
 no computation be accommodated to the times of Antiochus 
 Epiphanes, even though the days be taken for natural days. 
 Two thousand and three hundred days are six years and some- 
 what more than a quarter : but the profanation of the altar un- 
 der Antiochus lasted but three years complete, according to the 
 author of the first book of the Maccabees j i. 59. compared with 
 iv. 52. and the desolation of the temple, and the taking away of 
 
394 
 
 thousand and three hundred years. Such a vision 
 may properly enough be said to be for manv 
 
 DAYS." 
 
 the daily sacrifice by Apollouius, continued but three years and 
 a half, according to Joscphus. Mr. Mede proposeth a method to 
 reconcile the difference, and saith that the time is ' not to be reck- 
 oned from the height of the calamity, when the daily sacrifice 
 should be taken away, (from thence it is but three years,) but 
 from the beginning of the transgression, which occasioned this 
 desolation, and is described 1 Mace. i. 11, &;c.' But Antiochus 
 began to reign, according to the author of the first book of the 
 Maccabees, i. 10. in the 1 37th year of the kingdom of the Greeks, 
 or ajra of the Seleucidae ; and in those days was the beginning of 
 the tiransgression, which is described 1 Mace, i, II, &c. that is 
 ten or eleven years before the cleansing of the sanctuary, which 
 was performed in the 148th year according to the same au- 
 thor, iv. 52. Or if we compute the time from Antiochus's first 
 going up against Jerusalem, and spoiling the city and temple, 
 these things were done, according to the same author, iv. 20. in 
 the 143d year; so that this reckoning would fall short of th^ 
 time assigned, as the other exceeds it." 
 
395 
 
 CONCLUSION. 
 
 THE prophecies in the eighth chapter of Da- 
 niel^ and in the 12th_, 13th, and 17th chapters of 
 the Revelation having now been considered at full 
 length, and with very considerable detail, it is evi- 
 ident that they embrace the main events which have 
 transpired in the Christian church from the giving 
 of the prophecy to the present time. Of the state of 
 religion in the Roman empire, that which has pre- 
 vailed in the western or Latin church forms a very 
 prominent part of the prophecies of the Apoca- 
 lypse ; and the predictions contained in the 13tli 
 and 17th chapters of this book are so clear and de- 
 finite in their application to the Papists, that no 
 person can well mistake their meaning. The very 
 name of the Roman Catholic powers is given under 
 the symbol of the number 666, Avhich, by a most 
 certain calculation, is proved to be no other than 
 ■"H Aar/vTj Bao-iXs/a, The Latin kingdom, a name 
 by which the Roman Catholic monarchies were col- 
 lectively known among the Greeks. No other 
 name, independently of its number, will answer the 
 prophetic description. The Latin kingdom is, 
 therefore, without the least shadow of uncertainty, 
 ilcnominatcd The Beast with seven heads and ten 
 
396 
 
 horns. Of this power the most awful things are 
 spoken : it is called '' the beast that ascendeth out 
 of the bottomless pit^ and goeth into perdition." 
 It is said of the Beast, that '' all that dwell upon 
 the earth shall worship him whose names are not 
 written in the book of life of the Lamb slain from 
 the foundation of the world." In Rev. xix. 20. 
 " the beast was taken^ and with him the false- 
 prophet that wrought miracles before him^ with 
 which he deceived them that had received tlie 
 mark of the beast^ and them that worshipped his 
 image. These both were cast alive into a lake of 
 fire burning with brimstone." In Rev. xx. 10. we 
 read that the devil who deceived '' the nations which 
 are in the four quarters of the earthy Gog and Ma- 
 gog/* — ""was cast into the lake of fire and brim- 
 stone^ where THE beast and the false-prophet are, 
 and shall be tormented day and night for ever and 
 ever." The Woman or Romish church is deno- 
 minated " Mystery, Babylon the Great, the Mother 
 of Harlots and Abominations of the Earth." She 
 is said to be '' drunk \rlth the blood of the saints, 
 and >vith the blood of the martyrs of Jesus." She 
 is exactly like the ancient Babylon, in her idolatry 
 and cruelty ; therefore she will resemble this city 
 in her punishment : for as Jeremiah wrote in a 
 book all the evil that should come upon Babylon, 
 he said to Seraiah, " When thou comest to Baby- 
 lon, and shalt see, and shalt read all tliese words ; 
 then thou shalt say, O Lord, thou hast spoken 
 against this place, to cut it off, that none shall re- 
 
 4 
 
S97 
 
 main in it, neither man nor beast^ but that it shall 
 be desolate for ever. And it shall be, when thou 
 hast made an end of reading- this book, that thou 
 shalt bind a stone to it, and cast it into the midst of 
 Euphrates ; And thou shalt say. Thus shall Baby- 
 lon sink, and shall not rise from the evil that I will 
 brin^ upon her." And in Rev. xviii. 21. it is said 
 of Babylon the Great its antitype, that " a mighty 
 angel took up a stone like a great millstone, and 
 cast it into the sea, saying. Thus with violence 
 shall that great city Babylon be thrown down, and 
 shall be found no more at all. And the voice of 
 harpers, and musicians, and of pipers, and trum- 
 peters, shall be heard no more at all in thee ; and 
 no craftsman, of whatever craft he be, shall be 
 found any more in thee; and the sound of a mill- 
 stone shall be heard no more at all in thee. And 
 the light of a candle shall shine no more at all in 
 thee ; and the voice of the bridegroom and of the 
 bride shall be heard no more at all in thee : for thy 
 merchants were the great men of the earth ; for by 
 thy sorceries were all nations deceived." No ade- 
 quate comparison can be made between the crimes 
 of the Heathens and Papists; for the religion of the 
 former was a system of fable ; but the latter have blas- 
 phemed the sacred system of Christianity by their 
 impious and idolatrous worship. In this respect 
 they have sinned after the similitude of Belshazzar, 
 king of Babylon, whom Daniel thus addressed : 
 " And thou his son, O Belshazzar, hast not hum- 
 
 1^ 
 
398 
 
 bled tliine hearty thoiig'h thou knevvcst all this ; but 
 hast lifted up thyself against the Lord of heaven; 
 and they have brought the vessels of his house be- 
 fore thee^ and thou and thy lords, thy wives and 
 thy concubines, have dtunk wine in them ; and 
 thou hast praised the gods of silver, and gold, of 
 brass, iron, wood, and stone, which see not, nor 
 hear, nor know ; and the God in whose hand thy 
 breath is, and Avhose are all thy ways, hast thou not 
 glorified." Therefore as God wrote upon the 
 wall of the Babylonish king's palace, the words 
 JMenCj Mene, which Daniel interpreted to Bel- 
 shazzar as follows : '' This is the interpretation of 
 the thing : Mene, God hath numbered thy king;- 
 dom, and finished it :" so likewise is the kingdom 
 of Antichrist, or Babylon the Great, numbered ; 
 and in due time it shall be finished, according to 
 tlie Scriptures. The system of numbering which 
 God has used in counting the Beast is the literal 
 valuation of the Greeks, a heathen invention ; and, 
 consequently, the very similitude of the religion of 
 the Latin kingdom, which, though professedly 
 Christian, is exactly similar to the Pagan supersti- 
 tion, ditfering from it almost solely in the objects of 
 adoration, the Latins worshipping the saints and 
 an!i:els instead of the fabulous deities of the Hea- 
 thens. The Greeks, who, like the Latins, have 
 been great idolaters, escaped not the vengeance of 
 the Lord, as has been seen in the preceding chap- 
 ter. Because of the horrid impieties which thq 
 
399 
 
 Greeks had been guilty of for a very long' period^ 
 the Othmans were permitted by God to prevail 
 against the Christian worship (so called) in the 
 east. And the Othmans have not only subdued 
 the nation of the Greeks, but have introduced into 
 the conquered countries the religion of Mohammed ; 
 and to this day the transgression of desolation,, or 
 Mohammedanism supported by the desolating sword 
 of the OthmanSj still afflicts the eastern world, where 
 the religion of Christ flourished for a considerable 
 period. Seeing then that the Greeks have so righ- 
 teously suffered such things because of their great 
 idolatry, shall the Latin world escape, which has 
 persecuted with far greater cruelty the true church 
 of Christ ? It is impossible. Therefore saith God 
 (Rev. xviii. 4, 5.) to his people who dwell in the 
 great city Babylon, "' Come out of her, my people, 
 that ye be not partakers of lier sins, and that ye 
 receive not of her plagues. For her sins have 
 reached unto heaven, and God hath remembered 
 her iniquities." This Divine admonition is of in- 
 calculable importance, for '' If any man worship 
 the beast and his image, and receive his mark in 
 his forehead, or in his hand, the same shall drink of 
 the wine of the wrath of God, which is poured out 
 without mixture into the cup of his indignation; 
 and he shall be tormented with fire and brimstone 
 in the presence of the holy angels, and in the pre- 
 sence of the Lamb : and the smoke of tlieir tor- 
 ment ascendeth up for ever and ever : and they 
 have no rest day nor night, who worship the beast 
 
400 
 
 and his image, and whosoever receiveth the mark 
 of his flame." Let the Roman Cathohc world at- 
 tend to these awful words ere iniquity prove their 
 ruin ; for it is written of Babylon the Great, that 
 " her plagues shall come in one day, death, and 
 mourning", and famine ; and she shall be utterly 
 burned with fire ; for strong is the Lord God who 
 judgeth her/* 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 J. AND T. CLARKE, 
 PRtNTFRS, 
 
 38, ST. john's-square, London. 
 
 5 1?. 9.^'^ 
 
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 TOi-i^^ 202 Main Library 
 
 h 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 HOME USE 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 
 6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation Desk 
 
 Renewals ond recharges may be made 4 doys prior to due date 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 DEC 71 98Q 1 
 
 "^ STACfC! 
 
 M_iiai 
 
 SIR. SvT, 1 'pr 
 
 a£C.ciR. juk.1 7'd 
 
 KEC C(R Jbl 1 3 '03 
 
 ^ 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 m 
 
 It" 
 
 -9=- 
 
 < 
 
 
 liJ 
 
 -'^»- 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 3/80 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
 ®$ 
 
 >^M NO. DD6A, 7„, 3/77^'"^7C^,^,^jr°^NlSl^ 
 
 ©$ 
 
-,55si» 
 
 4\o3 
 
 .;-6l 
 
 U. C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 CD^77^^DSS